Ilovepdf Merged

COCKPIT PREPARATION
➢ Master Switch…………… ON;

➢ HUD …………………………. ON;
➢ No Smoking ……………… ON;
➢ NAV Lights ……….………. ON;
➢ APU …………………………. ON; AFTER START
➢ Ground Service ………… ON;
➢ Flight Control ……… CHECK;
➢ Flight Plan ……………. FILED;
➢ Eng 2 ......... START/ Stable;
➢ Weight
➢ Eng 1 ………. START/ Stable;
and ……………………... SET;
Balance
TAXI
BEFORE START ➢ Flaps ………………….... SET;

..
➢ Trim …………………….. SET;
➢ Cockpit Prepar ……….. COMP;
➢ APU ………………….….. OFF;
➢ Weather ..…………… CHECKED;
➢ TAXI CLARENCE... RECEIVED
➢ Seat Belts ……...……...……. ON;
➢ Fuel Quant …………….…….. Kg; AFTER TAKE OFF
➢ To Data: ➢ Flight Controls .. CHECKED;
- To Rwy SID ………. CHECKED; ➢ Briefing ……. CONFIRMED;
- V-Speed …………… CHECKED; ➢ Auto Brakes …………. MAX;
➢ Windows/ Doors .… CLOSED; ➢ Flaps ……….…..… CHECKED;
➢ Ground Service …..…….. OFF; ➢ V-Speed …………. CHECKED;
➢ Beacon Lights …….………. ON; ➢ Landing Lights ……….… ON;
➢ Throttle ……………………. IDLE; ➢ Strobe Lights ……….….. ON;
➢ Table ………..…………. CLOSED; ➢ Calibration ……..………. SET;
➢ Parking Brakes …………... ON; ➢ Cabin ……………..….. Ready;
➢ Pushback ……….… RECEIVED; ➢ Take off clearence… RECEIVED
• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

• MDH (Minimum Descent Altitude_ Land);. From Briefing Flight Mobile
• MAP – Missed Approach Point;
CLIMB
➢ CLIMB Thrust …………..…….. SET;
➢ Landing Gear …………….…… UP;
➢ Flaps ………….….…… RETRATED;
➢ Landing Lights ………………. OFF;
➢ Seat Belts ....... CHECKED/ OFF; AFTER LANDING
➢ Auto Pilot/L.NAV ……..……. ON; ➢ Flaps ……………………….UP;
CRUISE ➢ Spoilers ……… RETRATED;
➢ Cruise Speed …....... CHECKED; ➢ Trim ………………...……. UP;
➢ Trim ……………………. CHECKED; ➢ Auto Brakes …………. OFF;
➢ Fuel Quantity …….. CHECKED; ➢ Landing Lights ......… OFF;
➢ Strobe Lights ….……. OFF;
APPROACH ➢ APU ……………….…….. ON;
➢ Briefing …………… CONFIRMED; PARKING
➢ Weather ………………. CHECKED;
.. ➢ Parking Brakes ……..... ON;
➢ Auto Brakes ………………….. SET; ➢ Throttle …………………. IDLE;
➢ Seat Belts …….….…..……….. ON; ➢ Eng- 1/2 ………….…… STOP;
➢ Table ……………………… CLOSED; ➢ Beacon Lighs ….…...… OFF;
➢ M.A.P ..……………..…. CHECKED; ➢ Nav. Lights .……..………. ON;
➢ MDA/MDH ………..…. CHECKED; ➢ Seat Belts……….…...…. OFF;
BEFORE LANDING ➢ Ground Service ……….. ON;
➢ Landing Lights ……..………… ON; SHUTDOWN

➢ Gear ………………..…….….. Down;
➢ Trim ……………..……. Check/ SET; ➢ Flight Plan ……..….. CLEAR;
➢ Flaps ..…………….……..…...…. Set; ➢ APU …………………..…. OFF;
➢ Spoilers ……………….…... Armed; ➢ NAV Lights ….…..…… OFF;
➢ Cabin …………………..……. Ready; ➢ No Smoking ………..…. OFF
About the A-220
FLAPS LIMITS
• The management of • 1 >>>>> 220; kts
Airbus Canada Limited
• 2 >>>>> 200 kts
Partnership, This
• 3 >>>>> 180 kts
wonderful aircraft was
born. • 4 >>>>> 160 kts
• 5 >>>>> slowing to
VREF
• The A-220 combines
aerodynamics, cutting-edge technologies and
engines
• This aircraft is powered by two engines Pratt &

Whitney GTF, designed specifically for the A-220.
• The single-aisle A220 family is designed to look

like a wide-body aircraft. The cabin offers
passengers spacious seats and generous personal
space for a super-comfortable experience.

TAXI TAKE OFF
➢ Single engine taxi whenever ➢ The first percentage is your

possible. #2 is primarily used throttle amount. The
as various systems run off of second value is the N1 read
this engine IRL. out as indicated in green
above your throttle.
CLIMB ➢ 100% throttle should
➖➖➖➖➖➖➖➖ never be used. Aircraft in
the real world very rarely
➢ Above 10,000ft, pitch for exceed 100% as this is
290kts/M.75 until reaching mainly used for
cruise. Once level in cruise emergencies only;
then speed up to cruise
Mach. ➢ “V2” indicates a minimum
speed that needs to be
maintained to acceleration
DESCENT (1000ft AGL). You will want
➖➖➖➖➖➖➖➖➖➖ to be faster than or equal
to this speed.
➢ Descent rate should not Pitch for V2+10kts up until the
exceed -1000ft/min on final acceleration altitude before
approach. (-800ft/min is speeding up further.
optimal)
➢ Add 5kts to Vref/Landing ➢ For 25-50% loads, Flaps 2
speed in gusty conditions or was used for data;
in situations where steeper
bank angles may be required. ➢ For 75-100% load, Flaps 3
was used for data;

Bombardier _A-220
SPECIFICATIONS
3600 Nm
Aircraft Range 6.667 Km
Here we have all the
9.428 kg
specifications and
Fuel Capacity 04h43
capabilities of the
A-220
Max Thrust Prod Pt
100% PW
❖ The autonomy in
41000 Ft hours was done
Operating Celing 12.5 Km with the aircraft
full of passengers
and adjust the fuel
Cruise Speed 0.78 Ma to the MTW.
Max TO Wgt 70.900 kg
Max LD Wgt 60.600 kg
Seat Capacity 160 pax

Take Off Performance A-220
Increase power to
Take Take 55% N1 prior to
Load % off Off Rotate setting takeoff
Power Flaps power
25% 77%/ 2 122 kts
=82%
50% 80%/ 2 133 kts
=84%
75% 83%/ 3 144 kts These values are not
= 87% 100% accurate as
>75% 85%/ 3 150 kts each flight is different.
=89% Weather, airport
elevation, weight,
➢ Increase power to 55% N1 runway length and
prior to setting takeoff power; other factors will
affect these values.
➢ Maximum N1 for takeoff is no
more than 93%;
Takeoffs over 75% may result in takeoff

over Maximum Takeoff Weight (MTOW).
This may also result in runway overruns.
This could lead to overweight landings
depending on your configuration and
length of flight. Consider all factors and
risks.

Static Takeoff Run
Distance to travel on the runway before taking off:
❌❌ ❌❌ Altitude Density
⬇️ ⬇️ ⬇️
Load Headwind 0 ft 2500 ft 5000 ft
0 853.44 m 914.4 m 1036.32m

25% 10 701.04 m 731.52 m 853.44 m
20 609.6 m 670.56 m 792.48 m
0 1127.76m 1342.12m 1249.68m
50% 10 1005.84m 1097.28m 1402.08m
20 914.4 m 944.88 m 1097.28m
0 1371.6 m 1584.96m 1767.84m
75% 10 1188.72m 1342.12m 1524 m
20 1097.28m 1158.24m 1342.12m
0 1645.92m 1767.84m 1950.72m
100% 10 1463.04m 1584.96m 1737.36m
20 1402.08m 1249.68m 1524 m
Takeoff run calculated with static takeoff. This is the

distance from wheels stop to main wheels leaving the
pavement.

Accelerate Stop Distance to V1
(90% Brakes)
(abortion)
(ABORTION)
accelerated stopping distance. From a static takeoff at a
speed just before V1 to a complete stop using 90% of the
brakes.
⬇️ ⬇️ ⬇️
0 1493.52m 1676.4 m 1767.84m

25% 10 1219.2 m 1341.12m 1524 m
20 1005.84m 1097.28m 1310.64m
0 1981.2 m 2072.64m 2377.44m
50% 10 1737.36m 1828.8 m 2011.68m
20 1463.04m 1524 m 1706.88m
0 2499.36m 2651.76m 2926.08m
75% 10 2103.12m 2316.48m 2560.32m
20 1828.8 m 1950.72m 2255.52m
0 2834.64m 3078.48m 3474.72m
100% 10 2499.36m 2804.16 2956.56m
20 2164.08m 2346.96m 2590.8m

Landing Performance A-220🛬
Landing Final Maximum Landing Gross
Load % Flaps Approach Flare Weight (MLGW) is
74,957lbs (33,999kgs).
25% 4 126 kts 121 kts Landing speeds 75%
weight calculated at
50% 4 137 kts 132 kts MLGW
75% Full 138 kts Depending on the

133 kts
length of runway,
>75% Full 140 kts 135 kts weight, terrain and other
considerations, a higher
flap setting may be
APPR is disabled for landings desired.
greater than the load below for
where the Maximum Landing Weight
(MLW) lies:
69%
➢ Landing flare pitch should be about 4-9˚ nose up.

•
➢ Personal recommendation… 5˚ is perfect
➢ Descent rate should not exceed -1000ft/min on final approach. (-

800ft/min is optimal)
➢ Add 5kts to Vref/Landing speed in gusty conditions or in

situations where steeper bank angles may be required.
Landing Run (75% Brakes)
Landing distances while using 75% braking power.
⬇️ ⬇️ ⬇️
0 1310.64m 1341.12m 1432.56m

25% 10 1036.32m 1158.24 1188.72m
20 822.96 m 914.4 m 1005.84m
0 1402.08m 1554.48m 1615.44m
50% 10 1219.2 m 1341.12m 1493.92m
20 1005.84m 1158.24m 1188.72m
0 1554.48m 1615.44m 1798.32m
75% 10 1310.64m 1432.56m 1554.48m
20 1158.24m 1188.72m 1310.64m
(MLW)
➢ This is the distance from touchdown to wheels

stop. Required runway distance will be 304.8
greater if touching down at the white markers.
➢ Landing distance calculated by touching down at

Vref and immediately applying 75% brakes. No
thrust reversers used.

General Note
• Climb Profile: Above 10,000ft, pitch for 280kts/or

M.74 until reaching cruise. Once level in cruise then
speed up to cruise Mach.
• For 25-100% loads, Flaps 2 was used for data.
• Takeoff Power – The first percentage is your throttle

amount. The second value is the N1 read out as
indicated in green above your throttle.
• 10% trim was used to conduct these tests.

➢ (Trim is personal preference based on how you
calibrate and hold your device. Adjust as necessary).
❖ Note: Fuel flow, thrust and other aircraft

performance factors may apply.

Below we have procedures for the A-220

Below are technical data about the aircraft in question.

Airbus A220-300 Quick Reference Guide
Taxi (Dep.) Descent
- Breakaway, use minimal thrust. No more than 40% N1 on ground - VNAV as appropriate
- Little thrust required to keep movement going
- Should roll at idle thrust but not accelerate
Arrival Planning
- 90˚ turns, no more than 10kts GS // 20-30kts normal straightaways
- 250kts below 10,000ft @ rates ≤1500fpm
- Taxi to runway on Eng. #2 (keep #1 off until departure)
- Landing lights on at 10,000ft
Takeoff
- Flaps 2 (most common for departures)
Arrival (Con gure) Suggested Extension Speeds
- Flaps 3 (heavier departures)
- Flaps 1 - 220kts
- Advance PWR to 55% N1 before applying T/O PWR
- Flaps 2 - 200kts
- If at MTOW, Rotate around 120-140kts (lighter TOW = lesser
- Flaps 3 - 180kts
speed req’d)
- Flaps 4 - 160kts or while slowing to VREF (for FLAP 4 Landing)
- Positive Rate - Gear up
- Flaps 5 - Slowing to VREF
- Initial pitch 12.5 - 15˚ nose up at a rate of 3-5˚/sec.
- No more than 30˚ bank (15˚ max single engine) above 400ft AGL Glideslope Capture
- Gusty Winds: A higher takeoff power setting than normal is - Flaps 1- During descent & arm speed brakes
recommended - Flaps 2, Prior to GS/GP intercept
——Intercept——
Acceleration Alt. (1000ft AFE)
- Flaps 3, Gear down, & start continuous deceleration to Vref
- Set Climb Thrust & adjust as necessary
- Flaps 4 (5) as required prior to Vref
- Flap Retraction (Sequential/One at a time)
- Clean (gear & aps up) while accelerating aircraft at a stable rate
- Stable prior to 1000ft AGL (2-4˚ pitch nose up on nal –> threshold)
Climb
- 250kts to 10,000ft Landing
- CLB Spd: 270-290kts/M0.73-M.75 - GPWS callouts
- Begin round out at 50ft and increase pitch to 4-9˚ up. (5˚ works best)
- Once 30ft, retard power to idle slowly
Cruise
- M0.76-M0.80
Reversers & Taxi (Arrival)
Fuel Planning - @60kts, Reduce to Idle.
- For maximum ef ciency, step climb as appropriate. Consider - Taxi to parking on Eng. #2 if aps are to be retracted after an
taking into account aircraft weight, winds and direction of travel engine shutdown (turn off #1, 2 mins after exiting runway)
- Exit high-speed taxiways at <30kts or 8-12kts any other taxiway
DO NOT exceed 91% N1 in cruise - Start APU on taxi in
- Shutdown engines, lights, turn pax signs off, and open doors.
FOR FLIGHT SIMULATION USE ONLY 11.2021

fi
fl
fi
fl
fi
GENERAL INFORMATION
Table of contents
O
Figure 01−02−33 Outboard armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−44

Figure 01−02−34 Pilot electrical foot
warmers <25150001C> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−45
Figure 01−02−35 Eye level locators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−46
Figure 01−02−36 Flight deck jump seat (observer
seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−47
Figure 01−02−37 Flight deck jump seat (observer
seat) − Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−48
Figure 01−02−38 Observer seat safety card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−49
Figure 01−02−39 Observer seat safety card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−50
Figure 01−02−40 Typical class section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−52
Figure 01−02−41 Business class section (optional). . . . . . . . . . 01−02−53
Figure 01−02−42 Typical overhead storage bins. . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−54
Figure 01−02−43 Passenger Service Unit (PSU) . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−55
Figure 01−02−44 Typical galleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−56
Figure 01−02−45 Lavatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−57
Figure 01−02−46 Flight attendant seat locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−58
FCOM Vol. 1 Page 01−00−5
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

Print Date: 2019-12-04
GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
AIRCRAFT CHARACTERISTICS
The aircraft is a single-aisle, twin-engine, medium range aircraft.
The flight compartment accommodates two pilots and one observer. The
cabin has a seating capability from 125 passengers in a standard dual-class
configuration to 150 occupants in a high density configuration, including the
five flight attendants. The aircraft also includes two pressurized cargo
compartments located under the cabin floor.
The fuselage is primarily made of aluminum-lithium alloy. The wings, center
wing box, wing-to-body fairing, empennage, aft fuselage, and engine
nacelles are made of composite materials.
Two pressurized cargo compartments are located under the cabin floor.
The aircraft has a Fly-By-Wire (FBW) control system, and is powered by two
wing−mounted, fan−drive geared, ultra-high bypass ratio PW1500G power
plants. The engines are controlled by a Full Authority Digital Electronic
Computer (FADEC).
The C Series family includes the CS100 and the CS300 models. These
models have extensive operational commonality in the following areas:
• Spare parts,
• Aircraft maintenance,
• Pilot/maintenance training, and
• Crew rating.
A. Operational weights
Refer to Airplane Flight Manual (AFM), (BD500–3AB48–32200–00),
Chapter 2 – Limitations – Structural weight – Structural weight limits.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
AIRCRAFT DIMENSIONS
A. General dimensions
For aircraft external dimensions, refer to the table that follows and to
Figure 01−02−1.
Aircraft external dimensions <Metric>

Locator Dimension Locator Dimension
A 35.1 m F 38.7 m
B 12.3 m G 13.4 m
C 6.7 m H 11.5 m
D 3.5 m J 3.4 m
E 0.51 m K 15.2 m
Page 01−02−2 FCOM Vol. 1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
F
H
J
K
Aircraft external dimensions

Figure 01−02−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
B. Fuselage dimensions
For the dimensions of the fuselage, refer to the table that follows and to
Figure 01−02−2.
Fuselage dimensions <Metric>

Locator Dimension Locator Dimension
A 38.7 m E 3.28 m
B 3.7 m F 2.1 m
C 14.8 m3 G 1.1 m
D 16.8 m3 H 2.2 m
Issue 012, Jul 26/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
B A
A D
C
CARGO BAY G
TYPICAL SECTION
A−A
Fuselage dimensions
Figure 01−02−2
GROUND HANDLING
A. Aircraft turning radius
The aircraft can perform a 180-degree turn under its own power on a
runway width of no more than 23.50 m. <Metric>
The nosewheel steering is able to deflect up to 80 degrees left or right of
the aircraft center.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 012, Jul 26/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
Refer to the table that follows and Figure 01−02−3 for the turning
radius of the aircraft.
Turning angle (in degrees) with 80 degrees

3-degree tire slip
R1: Nose gear outside face 15.94 m
R2: Main gear outside face 7.04 m
R3: Wing tip 21.74 m
Minimum pavement width for 180-degree 23.50 m
turn
R3
C
L
NOSEWHEEL
ANGLE
THEORETICAL
R1 R2 TURNING
CENTER
Aircraft turning radius

Figure 01−02−3
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
NOTE
The turning radius performance of the aircraft is based
on the conditions that follow:
• Symmetrical thrust,
• No differential braking,
• Slow continuous turning, and
• Dry surface.
B. Ground lock pins

The lock pins are used on the ground for the landing gear system and
the Ram Air Turbine (RAT).
The landing gear system has three lock pins. One lock pin is installed in
each main landing gear (refer to Figure 01−02−4) and one is
installed in the nose landing gear (refer to Figure 01−02−5).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 012, Jul 26/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
MAIN LANDING
GEAR LOCK PIN
Main landing gear lock pin

Figure 01−02−4
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
NOSE LANDING
GEAR LOCK PIN
Nose landing gear lock pin

Figure 01−02−5
The RAT has one lock pin (refer to Figure 01−02−6). When
installed by the ground personal, the red Remove Before Flight flag on
this lock pin is visible from under the wing-to-body fairing.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
RAT GROUND
SAFETY PIN
Ram Air Turbine (RAT) lock pin

Figure 01−02−6
C. Covers
Covers are available for the aircraft components that follows:
• Inlet cowl (refer to Figure 01−02−7),
• Air Data Smart Probe (ADSP) (refer to Figure 01−02−8),
• Total Air Temperature (TAT) probe (refer to Figure 01−02−8),
• Angle Of Attack (AOA) sensor (refer to Figure 01−02−8), and
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
• Antenna covers (refer to Figure 01−02−9).
INLET COWL
INLET COWL
COVER
Inlet cowl cover

Figure 01−02−7
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
ANGLE OF ATTACK
(AOA) SENSOR
AIR DATA SMART
PROBES (ADSP)
TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE
(TAT) SENSOR
AIR DATA SMART PROBE

(ADSP) COVER
ANGLE OF ATTACK
(AOA) SENSOR COVER
TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE

(TAT) PROBE COVER
Sensor covers for ADSP, TAT, and AOA

Figure 01−02−8
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
VHF DME 1 DME 2

COM2
DME ANTENNA
COVER
VHF ANTENNA
COVER
Antenna covers
Figure 01−02−9
D. Aircraft servicing points

The typical ground servicing layout for the aircraft is shown in
Figure 01−02−10.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
01 FUEL
GALLEY GALLEY
BAGGAGE BAGGAGE POTABLE
WATER
STAIRS
LAVATORY/WASTE
01 Left side optional.
Aircraft servicing arrangement

Figure 01−02−10
The servicing point locations are shown in Figure 01−02−11.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
CREW OXYGEN
SERVICING PANEL ELECTRICAL/TOWING SERVICE
PANEL
GROUND CABLE AND

POWER CABLE DOOR 1 REFUEL/DEFUEL
ADAPTOR
ENGINE OIL
FORWARD AVIONIC
BAY DOOR
LOW PRESSURE
GROUND
CONNECTION
(LPGC) MID AVIONIC
BAY DOOR
HIGH PRESSURE
GROUND
CONNECTION (HPGC) AFT EQUIPMENT APU ACCESS
BAY DOOR DOOR
FORWARD
SERVICE DOOR
REFUEL/DEFUEL
ADAPTOR REFUEL/DEFUEL
PANEL
ENGINE OIL
FORWARD
CARGO DOOR
APU OIL AFT CARGO DOOR
AFT SERVICE WASTE SERVICING

DOOR PANEL
POTABLE WATER 1 Optional.
SERVICING PANEL
Ground servicing access locations

Figure 01−02−11
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
E. Engine hazard areas

The engine hazard areas are shown in Figure 01−02−12.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
FEET
(meters)
60 50 40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40 50 60
(18) (15) (12) (9) (6) (3) 0 (3) (6) (9) (12) (15) (18)
GROUND IDLE TAKEOFF POWER

HAZARD AREA 9 ft 20 ft HAZARD AREA
(2.74 m) (6.10 m)
3 ft (0.91 m) 6 ft (1.83 m)
A A
B B
30° 30°
C C
AREA A INTAKE SUCTION DANGER AREA

AREA B ENTRY CORRIDOR
AREA C EXHAUST DANGER AREA (AFT OF EXHAUST NOZZLE):
200 ft (61 m) − GROUND IDLE (20 kt HEADWIND)
600 ft (183 m) − TAKEOFF POWER (20 kt HEADWIND)
Engine intake and exhaust hazard areas

Figure 01−02−12
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
F. Weather radar hazard area

The aircraft uses the MultiScan weather radar antenna. The radar
antenna hazard areas are shown in Figure 01−02−13.
FEET
(meters)
60 50 40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40 50 60
(18) (15) (12) (9) (6) (3) 0 (3) (6) (9) (12) (15) (18)
3 ft (0.91 m)
Weather radar hazard area

Figure 01−02−13
For more information about the weather radar, refer to Chapter 16 –
Navigation – Section 04 – Weather radar (WXR) system.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
G. Ku-band connectivity hazard area <44309210C>

The Ku-band connectivity hazard area is shown in
Figure 01−02−14.
For more information about the Ku-band connectivity system, refer to
Chapter 05 – Communication – Section 01 – Ku-band connectivity
system (Panasonic eXConnect). <44309212C>
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
FEET
(meters)
60 50 40 30 20 10 10 20 30 40 50 60
(18) (15) (12) (9) (6) (3) 0 (3) (6) (9) (12) (15) (18)
66 ft (20 m)
10 DEGREES
66 ft (20 m)
Ku−band hazard area

Figure 01−02−14
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
H. Aircraft antenna locations

The locations of antennas installed on the aircraft are shown in
Figure 01−02−15.
VOR ANTENNA
TRANSPONDER
3 HF ANTENNA
TSS/TCAS
(DIRECTIONAL) VHF VHF
GPS COM1 SATCOM COM3 ELT
VHF
LOC / GS
ANTENNA
TSS/TCAS DME 1 DME 2

(OMNIDIRECTIONAL) VHF DUAL VHF NAVIGATION
1 or (DIRECTIONAL) COM2 RAD ALT MARKER BEACON
2 ADF
TRANSPONDER
1 Option 34430001C
2 Option 34520003C
3 Option 44309210C
Aircraft antenna locations

Figure 01−02−15
I. Unpressurized areas
The areas that follow are not pressurized (refer to
Figure 01−02−16):
• The radome,
• the nose gear bay,
• the main gear bay, and
• the tailcone.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
RADOME
NOSE GEAR
BAY
MAIN GEAR
BAY
TAILCONE
Unpressurized areas
Figure 01−02−16
FLIGHT DECK
A. Flight compartment – Overview
The flight compartment provides the pilots with a modern,
ergonomically-designed working environment to reduce the flight crew
workload and optimize aircraft safety.
Figure 01−02−17 shows the flight compartment – Front view.
Figure 01−02−18 shows the flight compartment – Rear, left view.
Figure 01−02−19 shows the flight compartment – Rear, right view.
Figure 01−02−20 shows the flight deck.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
READING LIGHT CREW CREW READING LIGHT

AND GASPER HANDLE COMPASS HANDLE AND GASPER
1 HEAD−UP DISPLAY 1 HEAD−UP DISPLAY
1 EFB LOCATION 1 EFB LOCATION
HEADSET HEADSET
HOOK HOOK
CLIPBOARD CLIPBOARD
1 SIDE TRAY WITH

KEYBOARD
HEADSET JACK HEADSET JACK
STOWAGE STOWAGE
MICROPHONE
STOWAGE POWER OUTLET STOWAGE
1 Optional.
Flight compartment − Front view

Figure 01−02−17
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
OBSERVER STORAGE
OXYGEN MASK
OBSERVER
PANEL
HAT CLIPS
CREW
LIBRARY
CREW OXYGEN BOTTLE

STORAGE COMPARTMENT
FLIGHT DECK
DOOR
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
PORTABLE
BREATHING
EQUIPMENT
Flight compartment − Rear, left view

Figure 01−02−18
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
MISC. STORAGE
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL HEADSET HOOK
MAINTENANCE
FLASHLIGHT PANEL
FDRAS DOOR
OBSERVER SEAT
CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL
WARDROBE
FLASHLIGHT
AXE
Flight compartment − Rear, right view

Figure 01−02−19
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
OVERHEAD PANEL
MAIN INSTRUMENT PANEL

GLARESHIELD
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE

CONSOLE CONSOLE
CENTER PEDESTAL
Flight deck control panel overview

Figure 01−02−20
B. Overhead panel
The overhead panel (refer to Figure 01−02−21) is divided into six
modules which includes the systems control panels.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
LEFT OUTBOARD FIRE OVERHEAD RIGHT OUTBOARD

OVERHEAD MODULE OVERHEAD
MODULE MODULE
LEFT INBOARD RIGHT INBOARD

OVERHEAD OVERHEAD
MODULE EYEBROW MODULE
OVERHEAD
MODULE
Overhead panel
Figure 01−02−21
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
The fire overhead module includes the engine and APU fire panel (refer
to Figure 01−02−22).
Engine and APU fire panel

Figure 01−02−22
The left outboard overhead module (refer to Figure 01−02−23)
includes:
• The DOME and ENTRANCE light panel,
• The AURAL WARNING, PROBE HEAT and WINDOW HEAT panel,
• The PRIM FLT CTRL (primary flight control) panel,
• The CVR (cockpit voice recorder) panel,
• The miscellaneous panel,
• The SERVICE and MECH (mechanics) call panel,
• The left READING light switch, and
• The left windshield WIPER switch.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
DOME AND
ENTRANCE
LIGHT PANEL
AURAL WARNING
PROBE AND WINDOW
HEAT PANEL PRIMARY FLIGHT
CONTROL PANEL
COCKPIT VOICE
RECORDER
PANEL
MISCELLANEOUS
PANEL
SERVICE AND
MECHANICS
CALL PANEL LEFT WIPER
SWITCH
LEFT READING
LIGHT SWITCH
Left outboard overhead module

Figure 01−02−23
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
The left inboard overhead module (refer to Figure 01−02−24)

includes:
• The HYDRAULIC panel,
• The ELECTRICAL panel,
• The APU switch, and
• The TAWS panel.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
HYDRAULIC
PANEL
ELECTRICAL
PANEL
TAWS PANEL
APU PANEL
Left inboard overhead module

Figure 01−02−24
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
The right inboard overhead module (refer to Figure 01−02−25)

includes:
• The FUEL panel,
• The AIR panel, and
• The ANTI-ICE panel.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
FUEL PANEL
AIR PANEL
ANTI − ICE PANEL
Right inboard overhead module

Figure 01−02−25
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
The right outboard overhead module (refer to Figure 01−02−26)

includes:
• The ELT panel,
• The CARGO fire panel,
• The EQUIP COOLING (equipment cooling) panel,
• The PRESSURIZATION panel,
• The EVAC and EMER LTS (evacuation and emergency lights) panel,
• The right READING light switch, and
• The right windshield WIPER switch.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
ELT PANEL
CARGO FIRE EQUIPMENT

PANEL COOLING PANEL
PRESSURIZATION
PANEL
EVACUATION AND
EMERGENCY
LIGHTS PANEL
RIGHT WIPER
SWITCH
RIGHT READING
LIGHT SWITCH
Right outboard overhead module

Figure 01−02−26
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
The lights overhead module (refer to Figure 01−02−27)

includes: <31100001D>
• The EXT LTS (external lights) panel,
• The LDG LTS (landing lights) panel, and
• The PAX SIGNS (passenger signs) panel.
Eyebrow overhead module − Activate downward <31100001D>

Figure 01−02−27
C. Glareshield
The glareshield (refer to Figure 01−02−28) includes:
• The left and right glareshield panels,
• The left and right Controller Pilot Data Link Communication (CPDLC)
panels, <23249001C>
• The left and right control tuning panels (CTP), and
• The Flight Control Panel (FCP).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
1 CPDLC
COMMUNICATION
CONTROLS
FLC
NAV
APPR 1/2 VNAV

BANK
1 Optional.
Glareshield
Figure 01−02−28
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
D. Main instrument panel

The main instrument panel (refer to Figure 01−02−29) has four
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) adaptive Display Units (DUs) which provide
the flight crew with flight and navigation information. It also includes:
• The left and right DU light panels,
• The Integrated Standby Instrument System (ISIS), and
• The gear and brakes panel.
INTEGRATED STANDBY
INSTRUMENT PANEL
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
1 EFB
1 EFB
LANDING GEAR AND

BRAKES PANEL
LEFT LIGHT PANEL RIGHT LIGHT PANEL
1 Optional.
Main instrument panel

Figure 01−02−29
E. Center pedestal
The center pedestal (refer to Figure 01−02−30) includes:
• The DU 5,
• The left and right Multifunction Keyboard Panels (MKP),
• The left and right Cursor Control Panel (CCPs),
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
• Three Audio Control Panels (ACPs),

• The trim control panel,
• The Reversion Switch Panel (RSP),
• The PARK BRAKE (parking brake) panel,
• The printer, <23220001C>
• The Throttle Quadrant Assembly (TQA),
• The ENGINE panel,
• The flight spoiler lever,
• The slat/flap lever panel, and
• The lights and COCKPIT DOOR panel.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
DU 5
MULTIFUNCTION THROTTLE
KEYBOARD QUADRANT
PANEL (MKP) ASSEMBLY
CURSOR CONTROL THRUST LEVER

PANEL (CCP)
CURSOR CONTROL
PANEL (CCP)
ENGINE PANEL
ENG SWITCHES
AUDIO CONTROL
AUDIO CONTROL
PANEL (ACP)
PANEL (ACP)
TRIM CONTROL SLAT/FLAP SELECTOR

PANEL
LIGHTS AND
FLIGHT SPOILER COCKPIT
CONTROL LEVER DOOR PANEL
REVERSION AUDIO CONTROL

SWITCH PANEL PANEL (ACP)
PARKING BRAKE ALTN FLAP SWITCH

PANEL
PRINTER
Center pedestal
Figure 01−02−30
F. Side consoles
The left and the right side consoles (refer to Figure 01−02−31) are
similar, and include:
• The left and right sidesticks,
• The left tiller,
• The left and right oxygen masks,
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
• Stowage, and
• The left and right circuit breaker panels.
ND
AP/ P
TY
N
U
AL D ISC
ED
P
OXYGEN
MASK
EROS
PUSH
100%
TEST
PRES
AND
ET
S
RES
TO
ANR
MIC
HDPH
Side console
Figure 01−02−31
G. Flight deck seats

The flight deck accommodates two pilot seats (refer to
Figure 01−02−32).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
HEADREST
ADJUSTMENT
KNOB
ARMREST TILT
ADJUSTMENT
KNOB
ARMREST VERTICAL
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
LUMBAR FORE/AFT
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
FORWARD/AFT
SEAT BACK RECLINE
AND LATERAL
CONTROL HANDLE
ADJUSTMENT
HANDLE
POWER ON
TOGGLE SWITCH
SEAT PAN PITCH
ADJUSTMENT MANUAL VERTICAL
HANDLE ADJUSTMENT HANDLE
POWER VERTICAL
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Flight deck pilot seats

Figure 01−02−32
The main features of the pilot seats are:
• F-track – Mechanical adjustment forward and aft,
• Electric vertical adjustment with mechanical backup,
• Adjustable arm rests (with position scale and controls outboard) and,
• Pocket in back of seat for light stowage (walk-around vest).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
(1) Vertical adjustment movement

The seats have electrically and mechanically actuated height
adjustment. Each seat has 7 inches of vertical seat movement with
a power switch and mechanical backup adjustment system.
Electrical vertical control of the seats is accomplished by two
switches located on the inboard side of each seat bucket. The
power cut-off switch is labeled POWER and the vertical power
adjustment switch is labeled HEIGHT.
• The HEIGHT switch is a three-position switch. The positions
are up, down, and center neutral.
• Setting the HEIGHT switch up or down for brief durations
permits minor adjustments to the seat height.
• Setting the HEIGHT switch up or down for a longer duration
permits the maximum adjustment speed of 1 inch/second.
A manual override function is available so that the flight crew can
adjust the seat if power is lost. A release handle on the side of the
seat is pulled, which disengages the actuator and permits manual
adjustment.
The manual power cut-off switch is located on the inboard side of
the seat bucket side panel. This component is a mechanical switch
with two positions ON and OFF.
During normal seat operation, the power cut-off switch stays in the
ON position to supply 28 VDC to the actuator.
(2) Lateral adjustment movement
The forward, aft, and lateral adjustment handle is located on the
inboard side of the seat to operate the seat along the F-tracks.
(3) Outboard armrest
Figure 01−02−33 shows the outboard armrest.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
ARMREST TILT
ADJUSTMENT
KNOB
INDICATOR
WINDOW
ARMREST VERTICAL
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
Outboard armrest
Figure 01−02−33
A visual indicator on the top surface of the armrest permits the
occupant to rapidly adjust the armrest height and tilt to their
preferred position.
An increment scale of 1 to 4 defines the height position of the
armrest, while an increment scale of A to E defines the tilt position
of the armrest.
Rotating the knob clockwise tilts the front of the armrest down.
Rotating the knob counter-clockwise tilts the front of the armrest up.
H. Pilot electrical foot warmer <25150001C>

The electrical foot warmers create a warm surface below the pilot and
the copilot feet. The kick plates reduce the thermal losses and are
automatically controlled.
The four heated mats (refer to Figure 01−02−34) are installed
between the composite floor panel and the stainless steel kick plates at
the pilot and copilot positions in the flight compartment.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
COPILOT
HEATED MAT
PILOT HEATED MAT
Pilot electrical foot warmers <25150001C>

Figure 01−02−34
I. Flight deck vision

The alignment balls (eye level locators, refer to Figure 01−02−35)
are used to locate the ideal seat placement for all operations. The correct
seat placement (height, fore, and aft) is achieved when:
• All flight controls are unrestricted throughout full travel,
• Flight instruments and warning lights are visible and unobstructed,
• Outside visibility is unobstructed,
• Seat position is the same for VFR or IFR, and
• Seat position is comfortable.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
EYE LEVEL LOCATOR

CO IGH
NE
S
PI T L
LI
LO IN
G T
SI ILO
HT
T E
P
Eye level locators

Figure 01−02−35
The optional Head-Up Display (HUD) enhances safety by allowing the
pilot to scan flight information while viewing the approaching airport.
J. Flight deck jump seat (observer seat)

In the flight deck, the observer seat (refer to Figure 01−02−36) has
the following characteristics and features:
• Auto fold-up seat base,
• Combined shoulder harness, and
• Safety belt with a single point release.
To operate the observer seat, the observer must face the flight
compartment door, slide the observer seat to the left and clip it to the
latching mechanism located on the left side of the flight deck door. (Refer
to Figure 01−02−38 and Figure 01−02−39).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
SLIDE
ASSEMBLY
BAYONET
ASSEMBLY
LATCHING
MECHANISM
Flight deck jump seat (observer seat)

Figure 01−02−36
The observer seat includes the items (refer to Figure 01−02−37)
that follow:
• Slide assembly,
• Lock bar,
• Headrest cushion,
• Back cushion,
• Bottom cushion,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
• Bayonet assembly,
• Latching mechanism,
• Handle, and
• Release handle.
HEADREST
CUSHION
SLIDE
ASSEMBLY
LOCK
BAR
BAYONET
ASSY BACK
CUSHION
LATCHING
MECHANISM
HANDLE
RELEASE
HANDLE
BOTTOM
CUSHION
LATCHING
MECHANISM
OBSERVER SEAT STRUCTURE
Flight deck jump seat (observer seat) − Description

Figure 01−02−37
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

To extend observer seat
OBSERVER SEAT
FCOM Vol. 1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)
1. Move lock bar up 2. Grab handle and slide seat to extended
position

Aircraft general
Figure 01−02−38
2
Observer seat safety card

GENERAL INFORMATION
1 4
3 5
3. Lock seat and confirm it is secure 4. Put seat down and use seat belt.
Page 01−02−49
O
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
1. Pull down and hold release handle
3. Move lock bar down.

2. Slide seat toward fully stowed position
To stow observer seat
OBSERVER SEAT
Observer seat safety card

Figure 01−02−39
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
CABIN LAYOUT
A. Cabin layout – Overview
The cabin layout includes the main components that follow:
• Passenger seats,
• Overhead storage bins,
• Passenger Service Units (PSUs),
• Galleys,
• Lavatories, and
• Flight attendant jump seats.
B. Passenger seat – Layout

The aircraft single-aisle cabin layout can support five abreast economy
seating (3 x 2) (refer to Figure 01−02−40) or four abreast business
class seating (2 x 2) (refer to Figure 01−02−41).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
129.0 in.
(3.28 m)
18.5 in.
19.0 in. (0.47 m)
(0.48 m) TYPICAL
29.4 in. 4 PLACES
(0.75 m)
84.0 in.
(2.13 m)
59.0 in.
(1.50 m)
20.0 in.
(0.51 m)
121.9 in.
(3.10 m)
Typical class section

Figure 01−02−40
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
129.0 in.
(3.28 m)
20.0 in.
(0.51 m)
TYPICAL
4 PLACES
29.4 in.
(0.75 m)
84.0 in.
(2.13 m)
59.0 in.
(1.50 m)
22.0 in.
(0.56 m)
121.9 in.
(3.10 m)
Business class section (optional)

Figure 01−02−41
C. Overhead storage bins

Figure 01−02−42 shows the overhead storage bins.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
OVER−SIZED BAG ROLLER BAG

11 x 17 x 25 in. 9 x 14 x 22 in.
(28 x 43 x 64 cm) (23 x 36 x 56 cm)
TYPICAL OVERHEAD STORAGE BINS
Typical overhead storage bins

Figure 01−02−42
D. Passenger Service Units (PSUs)

The Passenger Service Units (PSUs) are located under the overhead
storage bins (refer to Figure 01−02−43).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
READING LIGHT
SWITCH
FLIGHT ATTENDANT
CALL LIGHT
OXYGEN PANEL
READING LIGHT
ORDINANCE SIGN
PANEL GASPER
SPEAKER
The ordinance sign panel may be different from the ones installed on your aircraft.
Passenger Service Unit (PSU)

Figure 01−02−43
E. Galleys
The galleys are available in different configurations, which include dry
and wet galleys (refer to Figure 01−02−44).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 012, Jul 26/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
Typical galleys
Figure 01−02−44
F. Lavatory
Each lavatory has a supply of water and provides waste disposal. Refer
to Figure 01−02−45.
NOTE
Optional lavatory for wheelchair access is available.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

GENERAL INFORMATION
Aircraft general
O
LIGHTED MIRROR
PSU
Lavatory
Figure 01−02−45
G. Flight attendant jump seat

The aircraft has three to five dedicated flight attendant seats.
In the flight attendant station (refer to Figure 01−02−46), each seat
has the following characteristics and features:
• Auto fold-up seat base combined with a shoulder harness,
• Safety belt with a single point release, and
• Inertia reel retractor.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

GENERAL INFORMATION
O Aircraft general
Flight attendant seat locations

Figure 01−02−46
CABIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (CMS)

A. CMS – Overview
The CMS provides an interface with the systems that follow:
• Cabin lighting,
• Passenger reading lights,
• Passenger call lights,
• Ordinance signs,
• Flight deck audio and Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR),
• Potable water system,
• Waste system,
• Electrical system,
• Galley system,
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
General
O
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (AFCS) – OVERVIEW

The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) features the integrated
functions of the:
• Flight Director (FD),
• Autopilot (AP),
• Autoland (AL), and
• Autothrottle (AT).
The AFCS computes guidance commands to follow a predetermined flight
trajectory at a given speed.
The AFCS also provides flight guidance commands for automatic landing
(autoland).
Each AFCS (AFCS 1 and AFCS 2) includes (refer to Figure 03−01−1):
• Two Flight Guidance (FG) systems,
• One Autothrottle (AT) system, and
• One AFCS monitoring function.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O General
FLC
NAV
APPR 1/2 VNAV

BANK
LEFT DMC RIGHT DMC
FLIGHT FLIGHT FLIGHT FLIGHT

GUIDANCE (FG) GUIDANCE (FG) GUIDANCE (FG) GUIDANCE (FG)
FUNCTION 1 FUNCTION 1 FUNCTION 2 FUNCTION 2
(LEFT) (RIGHT) (LEFT) (RIGHT)
AFCS AUTOTHROTTLE AFCS AUTOTHROTTLE

MONITORING (AT) FUNCTION 1 MONITORING (AT) FUNCTION 2
FUNCTION 1 FUNCTION 2
Autoflight Control System (AFCS) overview

Figure 03−01−1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
General
O
The FD provides pitch and roll commands to the AP system to control the
primary flight control surfaces, and displays information on the Primary Flight
Display (PFD) for the Flight Path Vector (FPV). Refer to
Figure 03−01−2.
ADI
ADI − Approach Status Annunciator

Figure 03−01−2
The AP system processes the FD commands within the flight envelope, and
controls the engage and disengage logic. The AT system controls the thrust
and aircraft speed by changing the position of the thrust levers.
The AFCS controls (refer to Figure 03−01−3) are located on the:
• Flight Control Panel (FCP),
• Reversion Switch Panel (RSP),
• Flight Management System (FMS),
• Thrust levers, and
• Sidesticks.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O General
FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL (FCP)
AIR DATA
INERTIAL REFERENCE FLIGHT GUIDANCE ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL
RAD ALT AUTOTHROTTLE (EEC)
NAV/DME DATA
FLIGHT FLIGHT
DIRECTOR (FD) DIRECTOR (FD)
AUTOTHROTTLE
LEFT PFD − ADI RIGHT PFD − ADI
FLIGHT
TOGA GUIDANCE
REVERSION SWITCH PANEL (RSP)
PFCC
AP DISCONNECT AUTOPILOT
AP DISCONNECT
AFCS − Controls
Figure 03−01−3
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
General
O
FD mode indications are displayed on the Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA) on

the PFD. System status and faults are reported on the EICAS page.
The FD and the AT systems are paired together. Only one FD/AT
combination is active at a time.
The FD and AP/AT controls are on the Flight Control Panel (FCP) in the
center section of the glareshield, and on the Reversion Switch Panel (RSP)
on the center pedestal.
Takeoff/Go-Around (TOGA) and AT switches are located on the thrust levers.
The AP disconnect switches are located on each sidestick.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O General
This page intentionally left blank
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Flight Guidance (FG)
O
FLIGHT DIRECTOR (FD) – OVERVIEW

The Flight Director (FD) gives Flight Guidance (FG) (refer to
Figure 03−02−1) and provides pitch and roll commands to the
Autopilot (AP) system, to the Primary Flight Control Computer (PFCC), and
to the Primary Flight Display (PFD).
FLIGHT GUIDANCE
SYSTEM
PITCH AND ROLL COMMANDS
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)

AUTOPILOT (AP) SYSTEM − FLIGHT PATH VECTOR (FPV)
DISPLAY
PRIMARY FLIGHT SURFACES
Flight Guidance (FG) system overview

Figure 03−02−1
The FD system is installed in each channel of the Data Concentrator Unit
Module Cabinets (DMCs) installed in the mid equipment bay compartment.
Refer to Figure 03−02−2.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O Flight Guidance (FG)
CHANNEL A CHANNEL B
FLIGHT GUIDANCE FLIGHT GUIDANCE
FUNCTION (LEFT) FUNCTION (RIGHT)
AUTOFLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM 1 (AFCS 1)
CHANNEL A CHANNEL B
FLIGHT GUIDANCE FLIGHT GUIDANCE
FUNCTION (LEFT) FUNCTION (RIGHT)
AUTOFLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM 2 (AFCS 2)
Flight Guidance (FG) system location

Figure 03−02−2
The controls are on the Flight Control Panel (FCP) and on the Reversion
Switch Panel (RSP). The indications are shown on the PFD (FMA and ADI).
System status and faults are displayed on the EICAS page. Refer to
Figure 03−02−3.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FLC
1/2 VNAV
BANK
Flight Guidance (FG) system controls

Figure 03−02−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FD FUNCTION – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The FD system computes pitch and roll commands according to the
guidance mode selected by the flight crew on the Flight Control Panel (FCP)
or by the Flight Management System (FMS). The guidance modes are:
• Lateral modes,
• Vertical modes, and
• Multi-axis modes.
The FCP is divided into the five sections that follow:
• Speed control,
• Lateral modes,
• Autopilot/Autothrottle (AP/AT),
• Vertical modes (FLC, ALT and VNAV), and
• Vertical modes (VS and FPA).
The FD uses data from several systems and sensors. This data includes
attitude, heading, air data, radio altimeter, navigation, and manual inputs.
Several lateral and vertical FD modes can be selected to control the aircraft
trajectory. Only one lateral mode and one vertical mode are active at a time.
However, one lateral mode and up to three vertical modes can be armed to
transition to an active status.
The FD switches at each end of the FCP (refer to Figure 03−02−4)
control the display of the FD cue on their respective PFD and use the logic
that follows:
• On the coupled PFD:
– If the AP is engaged, selection of the FD switch has no effect.
– If there is an active approach status displayed on the ASA and the
AP is disengaged (if initially engaged), either FD switch can be
selected to control the FD cue.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
NOTE
When above 200 feet AGL, selection of the TO/GA
switches can also re−enable the FCP.
– During all other phases of flight, if the AP is disengaged (if initially

engaged), only the coupled-side FD switch can be used to control
the FD cue.
• On the uncoupled PFD, regardless of AP engagement, selection of the
FD switch removes or displays the FD cue.
SPEED LATERAL FLC, ATL, VNAV VS, FPA

CONTROL MODES VERTICAL MODES VERTICAL MODES
FLC
NAV
APPR 1/2 VNAV

BANK
FLIGHT DIRECTOR AUTOPILOT/AUTOTHROTTLE FLIGHT DIRECTOR

SWITCH SWITCH
Flight Control Panel (FCP)

Figure 03−02−4
When a FD cue is removed from the PFD, a white FD OFF message is
displayed on the PFD. Refer to Figure 03−02−5.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
ADI
ADI − FD OFF Message

Figure 03−02−5
A. Data source selection

The FD uses two data sources. The data source can be selected by
pressing the XFR switch on the FCP.
Only one FD system (one channel) inside the DMC is active at a time,
while the other is on standby. In normal operation, automatic selection of
the active DMC is based on odd and even days. The XFR (transfer)
switch on the FCP determines which FG system (channel A or channel
B) will be used inside the DMC (refer to Figure 03−02−6). It also
determines which data source will feed the FD system and the AT
system. The selected data source is indicated by a white arrow on the
FMA and by a green arrow beside the XFR switch.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
1/2
BANK
FCP − XER (TRANSFER) SWITCH
EICAS CAUTION MESSAGE
ADI
Flight Director (FD) − Data source indication

Figure 03−02−6
Pressing the XFR switch resets all the FD modes to basic. A FD MODE
CHANGE caution message is displayed on the EICAS page. The FD
modes must be reselected.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 012, Jul 26/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
B. Reversion Switch Panel (RSP) – FD/AT ALTN switch

Two FD/AT computers are available for flight guidance but only one is
active at a time. They alternate automatically every day, or in case of
failure of the active dual channel.
The FD/AT can be manually changed by pressing the ALTN switch on
the Reversion Switch Panel (RSP), which is located on the center
pedestal. Refer to Figure 03−02−7.
Reversion Switch Panel (RSP) − FD/AT ALTN (alternate) switch

Figure 03−02−7
If a failure of the active DMC is detected in flight, the system
automatically selects the alternate source. The flight crew can also select
the alternate source manually with the FD/AT ALTN switch on the RSP.
C. Flight director cue

The flight director cue displays as a magenta circle with lateral bars, that
is smaller than the Flight Path Vector (FPV) symbol (refer to
Figure 03−02−8). The flight director cue moves on the Attitude
Direction Indicator (ADI) to provide steering commands.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FLIGHT DIRECTOR CUE
FLIGHT PATH
VECTOR
(FPV)
ADI
ADI − Flight director cue and Flight Path Vector (FPV)

Figure 03−02−8
To follow the FD commands, the aircraft must be maneuvered, either
manually or by the Autopilot (AP), so that the FPV is over the flight
director cue.
D. Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA)

The Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA) displays the active and armed FD
modes, Autopilot (AP), and Autothrottle (AT) status. The FMA is divided
into five sections separated by a vertical white line (refer to
Figure 03−02−9). The sections are as follows (from left to right):
• Autothrottle (AT) mode: Indicates autothrottle operating mode and
status.
• Lateral mode: Indicates the FD lateral operating mode and status.
• Autopilot, autothrottle, and data source: Indicates status and used
data source.
• Vertical mode: Indicates the FD vertical operating mode and status.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
• Alternate source selection: Used to indicate alternate data source in

use.
PFD − Flight Mode Annunciator

Figure 03−02−9
E. Approach Status Annunciator (ASA)

The ASA displays below the FMA on the right side of the PFD (refer to
Figure 03−02−10). The ASA displays the active approach status in
reference to:
• Autoland capability (LAND3 or LAND2),
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
• ILS approach capability (APPR2 or APPR1), or

• Steep approach (STEEP).
ADI
ADI − Approach Status Annunciator

Figure 03−02−10
FD – LATERAL GUIDANCE MODES

Lateral guidance includes modes related to heading, bank angle selection, or
navigation tracking. Activation of the FD lateral modes results from the flight
crew selections on the FCP. Each lateral mode is annunciated on the FMA.
The table that follows shows each lateral mode with the associated control
and FMA annunciation.
Associated
Mode FCP FMA annunciation
switch
Heading HDG HDG
• Navigation (FMS source) NAV • FMS1 (FMS2)
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Associated
Mode FCP FMA annunciation
switch
• Navigation (LOC source) • LOC1 (LOC2)
• Navigation (VOR source) • VOR1 (VOR2)
• Approach (VOR source) APPR • APPR VOR1
(VOR2)
• Approach (FMS source)
• APPR FMS1
• Back Course approach (B/C source)
(FMS2)
• APPR B/C1
(B/C2)
1/2 BANK 1/2 Green arc on the
BANK ADI roll scale
(1) FD – Heading (HDG) mode

The HDG mode (refer to Figure 03−02−11) is the basic lateral
mode and is enabled when:
• AP is engaged with no mode previously selected,
• No mode previously selected,
• Mode lost or deselected, or
• Vertical mode is selected without lateral mode selected.
If the Primary Flight Control Computer (PFCC) cannot maintain the
heading, or when below 200 feet RA, the roll mode replaces the
heading mode (HDG). The bank angle is then maintained and a green
ROLL message displays on the FMA.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
ADI − Heading Mode

Figure 03−02−11
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
To select the heading mode, the HDG switch on the FCP must be
pressed (refer to Figure 03−02−12). Once selected, a mode
selection light illuminates above the HDG switch. When the mode is
active, a green HDG message displays in the left section of the FMA.
To change the heading, rotate the HDG switch on the FCP. The
selected heading displays in the heading window, above the HDG
switch on the FCP, and the cyan heading bug is positioned to the
selected heading HSI.
Turns are started in the same direction as the HDG switch rotation.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
PFD − Heading Mode

Figure 03−02−12
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
A. FD – Heading synchronization
When the HDG switch is pressed (PUSH SYNC), the heading bug is
automatically maintained, synchronized with the actual heading. A cyan
AUTO message replaces the selected heading and the heading window
on the FCP is blank. Refer to Figure 03−02−13.
Rotating the HDG switch during AUTO cancels auto-synchronization.
Heading synchronization is automatic when either:
• In TO lateral mode and the aircraft is on the ground,
• The GA mode is active, or
• In basic mode.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FCP − Heading Synchronization

Figure 03−02−13
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
B. FD – Navigation (NAV) mode

The NAV mode tracks a predetermined course from either the:
• VOR or localizer (LOC), or
• Flight Management System (FMS).
(1) FD – NAV mode – VOR
When VOR1 or VOR2 is selected as the navigation source, the FD
provides lateral commands to track the selected VOR course.
Upon initial NAV mode selection and prior to course capture, the
heading (HDG) mode is activated. The heading is manually set by
the HDG switch to intercept the desired course. During the
intercept, HDG displays in green (as the active mode) and VOR1 or
VOR2 displays below it in white (armed mode). Refer to
Figure 03−02−14.
When capturing the desired track, HDG is removed and a green
VOR1 or VOR2 indication flashes for 5 seconds, then becomes
steady.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FMA − NAV Mode VOR

Figure 03−02−14
When the aircraft is over the VOR station, DR displays in white on
the FMA to the right of the displayed VOR1 (VOR2). Refer to
Figure 03−02−15.
FMA − NAV Mode − VOR 1 DR

Figure 03−02−15
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
(2) FD – NAV mode – Localizer (LOC)

The LOC mode is enabled by selecting the NAV or APPR switch on
the FCP when the LOC1 or LOC2 is the navigation source on the
coupled FD. The mode automatically captures and tracks a front
course localizer independently of the glide path.
After NAV mode selection and prior to course capture, the heading
(HDG) mode is activated. The heading is manually set by the HDG
switch to intercept the desired course. During interception, HDG
displays in green (as active mode) and LOC1 or LOC2 displays
below it in white (armed mode) (refer to Figure 03−02−16).
FMA − NAV Mode − LOC

Figure 03−02−16
The localizer capture point is determined by:
• Ground speed,
• Localizer deviation,
• Intercept angle, and
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
• Distance from the station.

When capturing the localizer, HDG is removed and LOC1 or LOC2
flashes green for 5 seconds then displays steady as the active
lateral mode.
(3) FD – NAV mode – FMS
The FMS navigation mode is enabled by pressing the NAV switch
on the FCP when FMS is the navigation source on the coupled FD.
NOTE
Changing from one FMS source to another does not
cause the mode to cancel.
If not already on the desired track when selected, the heading

select mode displays as the active mode, while the navigation
mode is armed (FMS1 or FMS2 displays in white) (refer to
Figure 03−02−17). The FD commands a capture heading to
the desired track. Capture also occurs if the aircraft is moving away
from, but within 2.5 nm of the desired track. If the distance is
greater than 2.5 nm from the track, an intercept heading must be
manually set.
Once captured, the navigation modes activates. FMS1 or FMS2
flashes green for 5 seconds during the transition, then becomes
steady.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FMA − NAV Mode − FMS

Figure 03−02−17
(4) FD – NAV Preview
A navigation preview feature is available when the FMS is the
navigation source. This function permits the preview of the localizer
indications on the horizontal situation indicator (HSI) before the
localizer becomes the navigation source (refer to
Figure 03−02−18).
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
LOCALIZER DATA
PREVIEW
PFD
NAV PREVIEW
INDICATION
PFD − NAV Preview

Figure 03−02−18
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
The preview function is available for localizer and ILS approaches.

When the aircraft is within a specific distance of the station and the
FMS has auto-tuned the localizer frequency, the localizer approach
course, frequency, and course pointer display in cyan on the HSI.
When the approach course is intercepted, the navigation source
automatically transfers from FMS to VHF-NAV (LOC, VOR), and
the FD automatically tracks the LOC or VOR when:
• In FMS lateral mode,
• APPR mode selected (APPR switch pressed on the FCP), or
• Approach course captured.
The lateral mode on the FMA automatically changes from APPR
FMS1 (FMS2) to APPR LOC1 (LOC2), or APPR VOR1 (VOR2).
The HSI pointer changes from magenta (FMS) to green (LOC).
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
PFD
PFD − NAV−to−NAV Transfer

Figure 03−02−19
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
C. FD – Half bank mode

The half bank mode limits the maximum bank angle used by the FD to 17
degrees (from 30 degrees). It is automatically activated in NAV and HDG
lateral modes when the aircraft climbs through 31500 feet.
When the half bank mode is active, a green arc is displayed at the top
edge of the attitude indicator on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and the
green mode selection light above the 1/2 BANK switch comes on. Refer
The half bank mode is manually activated below 31500 feet when the 1/2
BANK switch on the FCP is pushed. It is available in HDG mode only.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
1/2 Bank mode selection and indication

Figure 03−02−20
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FD – VERTICAL GUIDANCE MODES

Vertical guidance includes modes related to:
• Flight Path Angle (FPA),
• Vertical Speed (VS),
• Altitude Preselected (ALTS),
• Altitude Hold (ALT),
• Flight Level Change (FLC),
• Takeoff (TO),
• Go-Around (GA), and
• Approach (APPR).
Vertical guidance modes can be manually selected using the VS or FPA
switches on the FCP, or managed by the vertical navigation (VNAV) function
of the FMS when the VNAV switch on the FCP is pressed.
To differentiate between a selected and a VNAV vertical mode, the letter V is
added to the navigation mode message on the FMA. For example, the
altitude hold mode displays as ALT when manually selected, and displays as
VALT when managed by the VNAV.
A. FD – Flight Path Angle (FPA) mode

The FPA mode is the basic vertical mode. It is enabled when:
• Autopilot (AP) is engaged with no mode previously selected,
• A selected mode is lost or de-selected, or
• A lateral mode is selected with no vertical mode enabled.
In the FPA mode, the aircraft pitch changes to maintain the selected
flight path angle. The selected FPA value displays to the right of the FPA
message on the FMA, and is changed by rotating the VS/FPA wheel (0.1
degree for each detent) toward DN to decrease the FPA , and toward UP
to increase the FPA. The path angle selection is limited to ±9.9 degrees
and the pitch angle commands are limited to ±15 degrees.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
When the FPA mode is active, a green FPA message displays on the
FMA. Refer to Figure 03−02−21 and Figure 03−02−22.
Flight Path Angle (FPA) − Negative angle

Figure 03−02−21
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Flight Path Angle (FPA) − Positive angle

Figure 03−02−22
B. FD – Vertical Speed (VS) mode

The VS mode maintains a selected vertical speed (climbing or
descending) by changing aircraft pitch. The mode is enabled by selecting
the VS switch on the FCP. When the mode is active, VS displays in
green in the right section of the FMA. Refer to Figure 03−02−23.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Vertical Speed Mode − VS

Figure 03−02−23
The desired vertical speed is set by rotating the VS/FPA wheel. The
selected vertical speed displays:
• To the right of VS on the FMA,
• In the V/S window above the VS/FPA wheel, and
• As a cyan bug on the Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI).
The selected vertical speed range is ± 9900 fpm.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
C. FD – Altitude Preselect (ALTS) mode

The ALTS mode is used to capture and maintain (level off) a preselected
barometric altitude. The altitude reference is from the coupled side
barometric altimeter.
The preselected altitude is set with the ALT (rotary) switch on the FCP
(refer to Figure 03−02−24). Rotating the ALT switch adjusts the
altitude preselect in increments of 1000 feet. Rotating the ALT switch
while pressing on the center (PUSH FINE) adjusts the increments to 100
feet.
The preselect altitude displays on the FCP altitude window, in cyan
above the altitude tape on the ADI, and as a cyan bug on the altitude
tape.
ALTITUDE ALTITUDE
PRESELECT PRESELECT
WINDOW
FLC ALT (HOLD)
SWITCH
ALTITUDE
PRESELECT
BUG
ALT (ROTARY)
SWITCH
VNAV
FCP − ALT SWITCH ADI − ALTITUDE INDICATION
Altitude Preselect
Figure 03−02−24
The ALTS mode is automatically armed at the time of altitude selection in
any vertical mode, except Altitude Hold (ALT) and vertical approach
modes. When the altitude preselect mode is armed, a white ALTS
displays in the right section of the FMA (refer to Figure 03−02−25).
The capture point is calculated, based on the vertical speed of the
aircraft, to provide a smooth transition to level off at the selected altitude.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
NOTE
During the (V) ALTS CAP mode, the flight
guidance/autopilot may not maintain the selected
airspeed. Crew intervention may be required to
maintain the selected airspeed.
NOTE
When a Preselected Altitude (PSA) change on the
Flight Control Panel (FCP) is made within 50
milliseconds of the ATLS CAP being activated, the
vertical FMA will indicate ALTS CAP and begin tracking
the newly set PSA. To maintain the selected speed,
there may be a pitch change that will require pilot input.
The corresponding guidance pitch up or pitch down
(limited between +20/−15 degrees) will be proportional
to the altitude difference between the newly selected
PSA value and the current aircraft baro-corrected
altitude.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
ALTS FLASHES FOR 5 SECONDS

ON REACHING PRESELECT ALTITUDE
START OF LEVELING OFF
BOTTOM OF CLIMB (BOC)
PRESELECT NEW ALTITUDE
Altitude Preselect Mode

Figure 03−02−25
During the level off, a green ALTS CAP annunciation displays in the right
section of the FMA and the white ALTS is removed. When the level off is
complete, the selected altitude is maintained and a green ALTS
annunciation displays in the right section of the FMA.
NOTE
If the preselected altitude is changed during altitude
capture, ALTS CAP is replaced by ALT CAP. At level
off, ALT CAP is replaced by ALT. The AFCS continues
to capture and track the original preselected altitude
displayed while ALTS CAP is active.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
D. FD – Altitude hold (ALT) mode

The ALT mode is used to maintain a barometric altitude. It is activated by
pressing the ALT switch on the FCP. The altitude maintained is the
aircraft altitude at the time of mode selection. The mode is also
automatically activated after a captured preselect altitude change.
When the ALT mode is active, ALT displays in green in the right section
of the FMA (refer to Figure 03−02−26). ALT flashes for 5 seconds
upon altitude capture.
PRESELECT ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE OF SWITCH PRESS
Altitude Hold
Figure 03−02−26
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
E. FD – Flight Level Change (FLC) mode

The FLC mode is used to climb or descend while maintaining a selected
airspeed or Mach number. The mode is selected by pressing the FLC
switch on the FCP. The flight level change speed can be manually
selected or automatically provided by the FMS. When the mode is active,
FLC displays in green in the right section of the FMA (refer to
Figure 03−02−27). Selection of the FLC mode overrides all active
vertical modes.
ALTS FLASHES FOR 5 SECONDS

ON REACHING PRESELECT ALTITUDE
START OF LEVELING OFF
Flight Level Change (FLC) mode active

Figure 03−02−27
The speed is set manually by selecting the outer SPD switch to MAN and
selecting the desired speed using the inner SPD switch. The selected
speed displays above the SPD switch and on top of the airspeed scale. A
cyan bug also displays at the selected speed on the airspeed scale.
Pressing the center of the SPD switch alternates between indicated
airspeed in knots and Mach.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
When the SPD switch is set to FMS, the FMS provides climb or descent
speed. The speed displays in magenta on top of the airspeed tape and
the speed bug displays in magenta. The speed indicated on the FCP
(above the SPD switch) is removed and replaced by white dashes.
F. FD – Overspeed (OVSP) protection

Overspeed protection automatically activates in FBW normal or PFCC
direct modes.
When the speed trend vector extends beyond VMAX, the airspeed value
displays in amber and a single “OVERSPEED” aural warning sounds.
When the speed is greater than VMAX, the airspeed displays in red and a
continuous “OVERSPEED” aural warning sounds.
The autothrottle, if engaged, reduces thrust until the reference speed is
regained.
An additional flight guidance function activates when operating in FPA,
FLC, VS, and corresponding VNAV modes. The flight director cue
appears if previously selected off, and provides pitch guidance to
recapture the reference airspeed.
When overspeed protection activates, OSPD displays in green in the
FMA vertical mode section (refer to Figure 03−02−28). The FD
MODE CHANGE caution message displays on the EICAS page
indicating a non-pilot selected mode change. When the speed reduces
below VMAX, the OSPD is replaced by the FLC mode.
NOTE
The autopilot and autothrottle are not automatically
engaged when overspeed is active.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
"OVERSPEED"
ADI
ADI − Overspeed protection indication

Figure 03−02−28
G. FD – Underspeed (USPD) protection

Underspeed protection automatically activates in FBW normal or PFCC
direct modes.
When the speed trend vector extends into the red and black low speed
marker, or the current speed is below VMIN TRIM, the airspeed value
displays in amber and a single “SPEED” aural warning sounds.
When the current speed is in the red and black low speed marker, the
airspeed value displayed in red and a continuous “SPEED” aural
warning sounds.
Depending on the active vertical guidance mode, protection is provided
by either the autothrottle, or flight director guidance:
• In all altitude or altitude capture modes, the autothrottle, if engaged,
increases thrust to N1 reference until the reference speed is
regained. USPD displays in green in the FMA vertical mode section
while underspeed protection is active
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
• When operating in FPA, FLC, VS, and corresponding VNAV modes,

the flight guidance underspeed function activates. The flight director
cue appears if previously selected off, and provides pitch guidance to
recapture the airspeed reference. USPD displays in green in the
FMA vertical mode section. When the speed increases above VMIN
TRIM, the USPD vertical mode is replaced by the FLC mode.
The FD MODE CHANGE caution message displays on the EICAS
indicating a non-pilot selected mode change (refer to
Figure 03−02−29).
NOTE
The autopilot and autothrottle are not automatically
engaged when underspeed protection is active.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
"SPEED"
ADI − Underspeed protection indication

Figure 03−02−29
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
H. FD – Vertical Navigation (VNAV) modes

Vertical Navigation (VNAV) modes allow the FD to follow FMS-managed
vertical navigation profiles. The FMS contains programmed vertical
navigation profiles that include:
• Takeoff,
• Climb,
• Descent, and
• Approach.
VNAV mode is enabled by selecting the VNAV switch on the FCP. The
FMS-managed vertical modes are similar to the selected vertical modes
but display with the letter V. They include the modes that follow:
• VNAV Flight Path (VFPA),
• VNAV Vertical Speed (VVS),
• VNAV Flight Level Change (VFLC),
• VNAV Altitude select (VALTS),
• VNAV Altitude hold (VALT),
• VNAV FMS Altitude (VALTV),
• VNAV Path (VPATH),
• VNAV glide path (VGP),
• VNAV Takeoff (VTO), and
• VNAV Go-Around (VGA).
(1) VNAV deviation indicator
The VNAV deviation pointer (refer to Figure 03−02−30) and
the vertical deviation scale display beside the altitude tape when
VNAV is enabled. Each dot on the scale represents a 250-foot
deviation, and full scale deflection represents a 500-foot deviation
from the VNAV path. The scale changes to 75 feet of deviation for
each dot when an approach (APPR) mode is selected.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FMS
ALTITUDE
CONSTRAINT
VNAV
DEVIATION
POINTER
VERTICAL
SPEED
REQUIRED
POINTER
ALTITUDE
CONSTRAINT
BUG
VERTICAL
TRACK ALERT ADI
ADI − VNAV Indications

Figure 03−02−30
The VNAV altitude constraint displays in magenta above the
vertical deviation scale, and as a magenta bug on the altitude tape.
The required vertical speed to maintain the vertical path displays as
a magenta circle on the VSI.
Alerts for Top Of Descent (TOD) and Bottom of Climb (BOC)
display in the FMS message line on the PFD. The alerts display for
60 seconds before an altitude change, and flash for 5 seconds
before the altitude change, accompanied by double C-chord aural
tone. The alerts is removed when the altitude change begins.
(2) VNAV Flight Path (VFPA)
The Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Flight Path Angle (VFPA) mode is
the basic VNAV mode. Operation and limits are similar to the Flight
Path Angle (FPA) mode. It displays on the FMA as VFPA (refer to
Figure 03−02−31). The VFPA is also enabled if other selected
VNAV modes are lost or de-selected.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FCP − VS (VERTICAL SPEED) SWITCH
VNAV Flight Path Angle (VFPA) Mode

Figure 03−02−31
The flight path reference displayed on the FPA can be changed by
rotating the VS/FPA switch on the FCP.
NOTE
When operating in VFPA mode, an airspeed protection
function commands an aircraft pitch change if the
airspeed is approaching VMO/MMO.
(3) VNAV Vertical Speed (VVS)

Pressing the VS switch on the FCP while a VNAV is active enables
the VVS mode. A green VVS displays in the right section of the
FMA when active. Refer to .Figure 03−02−32
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FCP − VS (VERTICAL SPEED) SWITCH
VNAV Vertical Speed (VVS) mode

Figure 03−02−32
The vertical speed indications display in magenta on the VSI.
The VVS mode maintains the aircraft at a FMS-selected climb or
descent rate. The vertical speed value can be manually adjusted
using the VS/FPA switch (wheel). The manual vertical speed
adjustment overrides FMS control.
NOTE
When operating in VVS mode, an airspeed protection
function commands an aircraft pitch change if the
airspeed is approaching VMO/MMO.
(4) VNAV Flight Level Change (VFLC)

The VFLC mode is activated by the FMS as a function of the
programmed vertical navigation profile. VFLC mode can also be
manually selected by pressing the FLC switch when VNAV is
active. A green VFLC displays on the FMA when the mode is
active. Refer to Figure 03−02−33.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FCP − FLC (FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE) SWITCH
1000 FT. VERTICAL ALERT
VERTICAL TRACK ALERT (VTA)

ISSUED 60 SECONDS
BEFORE TRACK CHANGE
VNAV Flight Level Change (VFLC) Mode

Figure 03−02−33
(5) VNAV Altitude select (VALTS)
When a desired altitude is selected and a VNAV mode is engaged,
VALTS mode is armed and displays in white on the FMA (refer to
Figure 03−02−34). When the altitude is captured, a green
VALTS CAP flashed for 5 seconds, than changes to VALTS.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FCP − FLC (FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE) SWITCH
TOP OF DESCENT (TOD)
PRESELECT ALTITUDE
VNAV Altitude Select − VALTS

Figure 03−02−34
NOTE
When VALTS is active, any change in the altimeter
setting causes the aircraft to return to the selected
attitude.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
(6) VNAV Altitude hold (VALT)

In VALT mode, the FMS provides the selected altitude to maintain.
VALT mode engages automatically when the selected altitude is
reached. The mode also engages when VNAV is activated via the
VNAV switch and the aircraft is within 250 feet of the selected
altitude. Refer to Figure 03−02−35.
VNAV Altitude hold − VALT

Figure 03−02−35
(7) VNAV FMS Altitude (VALTV)
The VALTV mode activates to maintain an intermediate level off
(altitude constraint) when included in the FMS vertical profile (climb
or descent). To initiate a climb profile or descent profile, the desired
altitude must be preselected first.
The VALTV mode arms and displays in white on the FMA. When
the altitude constraint is captured, the indication changes to green
VALTV CAP then to VALTV. Refer to Figure 03−02−36.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FLIGHT PLAN ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT
VNAV FMS Altitude (VALTV)

Figure 03−02−36
NOTE
When it reaches the preselected altitude, the aircraft
levels off, and VALTS displays in green on the FMA.
The aircraft is never commanded to climb or descend
through the preselected altitude.
(8) VNAV Path (VPATH)

The VPATH mode provides guidance to fly the FMS
barometric/GNSS descent path from the TOD point to a
FMS-programmed altitude or the preselected altitude, whichever is
higher, at an angle defined in the FMS. Refer to
Figure 03−02−37.
The FMS altitude constraint is indicated in magenta above the
VNAV deviation scale, while deviation from descent path is
indicated by the VNAV deviation pointer.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
The VPATH mode activates at the TOD point in the FMS flight plan.
VALTV is armed for the altitude constraint. The FD uses pitch to
control the vertical path. The AT controls the speed via the engine
thrust setting. Path control has priority overspeed control.
If necessary, early or late descents can be done using the VFLC or
VVS mode to capture the original planned path.
If speed increases as the FD attempts to maintain the descent path,
a DECELERATE message displays on the FMS message line. If
the airspeed continues to increase, the VPATH mode is canceled,
and the overspeed protection (OVSP) mode activates.
VPATH mode is available for route descents and for VNAV
approaches where a level off is required (for example, MDA).
FLIGHT PLAN ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT
VNAV Path (VPATH) − Altitude Constraint

Figure 03−02−37
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
NOTE
When the aircraft route becomes undefined, VPATH
automatically reverts to VFPA descent (for example,
during a FMS discontinuity).
(9) VNAV Track Angle Error

During enroute, terminal, or approach operations, whenever a track
angle error exceeds 75 degrees, a NO VPATH-TKE message
displays on the HSI, and a flashing amber VPATH displays on the
FMA. Refer to Figure 03−02−38.
VPATH will re-arm when the track error is less than 75 degrees.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
VNAV Track Angle Error

Figure 03−02−38
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
(10) VNAV Cross Track Deviation

During enroute, terminal, or approach operations, whenever a cross
track error exceeds 10 nm, a NO VPATH-XKE message displays
on the HSI, and a flashing amber VPATH displays on the FMA.
VPATH will re-arm when the track error is less than 10 nm.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
VNAV Cross Track Deviation

Figure 03−02−39
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
(11) VNAV Path Deviation

During VPATH operations, when pilot-selected vertical modes such
as VVA are used, a NO VPATH-PILOT CMD message displays on
the HSI, and a flashing amber VPATH annunciation displays on the
When the aircraft recaptures the FMS flight path, the HSI message
is removed, and a white VPATH displays.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
VNAV Path Deviation

Figure 03−02−40
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FD – MULTI-AXIS MODES
Activation of the FG system multi-axis modes results from the flight crew
selections on the FCP and the TOGA switch on the thrust levers. Certain FD
mode selections exist as combined lateral and vertical modes for specific
purpose or function. The table that follows shows the multi-axis modes with
the associated controls and FMA annunciations.
FCP/Thrust Lateral FMA Vertical FMA

Mode AT mode
levers annunciation annunciation
ILS approach APPR APPR LOC... GS Speed (SPD)
(FG)
ILS approach APPR APPR LOC GS Speed (SPD)
(AL)
ILS approach None ALIGN FLARE Retard
(AL) (RETARD)
Takeoff (TO) TOGA TO TO/VTO Thrust hold
(HOLD)
Go Around TOGA GA GA/VGA Thrust
(GA) (THRUST)
Windshear TOGA GA WSHR Thrust
escape (THRUST)
guidance
A. FD – ILS Approach mode

The approach (APPR) mode provides for the automatic intercept,
capture, and tracking of the front course localizer and glideslope.
When the ILS approach is selected in the FMS and the aircraft is
approximately 30 nm from the airport, the localizer frequency is
automatically tuned, the LOC preview mode is enabled, and the course
indicator sets to the localizer course.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
When the APPR switch is selected, if the aircraft is outside of the

localizer capture range, APPR FMS1 displays in green, and APPR LOC1
(LOC2) mode is armed and displays in white on the FMA. At localizer
capture, APPR LOC1 (LOC2) flashes green for 5 seconds, then
becomes steady. Refer to Figure 03−02−41.
GS is armed and displays white on the FMA when APPR mode is
selected. At the glideslope capture, GS activates, flashes green for 5
seconds, and then becomes steady on the FMA.
After GS is captured and aircraft is descending below 1500 feet RA, the
flight guidance is transferred to the PFCC for precision ILS approach
capability. A green APPR LOC displays on the FMA.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
ILS Approach Mode

Figure 03−02−41
(1) ASA indications
When all the necessary onboard equipment is functioning correctly,
and the radio signal quality meets the ILS criteria, one of the
following messages displays on the Approach Status Annunciator
(ASA) (refer to Figure 03−02−42) on the PFD:
• APPR2: The aircraft is capable of ILS CAT II, and
• APPR1: The aircraft is capable of ILS CAT I.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
ADI
ADI − ILS CAT II

Figure 03−02−42
(2) Changes in approach capability
If the approach capability degrades during the approach, the
system displays the highest available approach capability on the
Approach Status Annunciator (ASA).
(3) APPR2 to APPR1 degradation
If the approach mode degrades from APPR2 to APPR1 and the
aircraft is above 200 ft RA, a NO APPR2 message flashes in amber
for 5 seconds, followed by a steady green APPR1 message. Refer
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
ADI
ADI − APPR2 to APPR1 Degradation − Above 200 ft RA

Figure 03−02−43
If this approach mode degradation occurs when the aircraft is at or
below 200 ft RA, the NO APPR2 message flashes red for 5
seconds, followed by a steady green APPR1 message. Refer to
Figure 03−02−44.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
ADI
ADI − APPR2 to APPR1 Degradation − Below 200 ft RA

Figure 03−02−44
(4) Loss of all approach modes
If all the approach modes are lost when the aircraft is above 200 ft
RA, a NO APPR2 message flashes amber for 5 seconds and is
removed.
If all the approach modes are lost when the aircraft is below 200 ft
RA, a NO APPR2 message flashes red for 5 seconds and is
removed.
If the APPR1 approach mode is lost, a NO APPR1 flashes in amber
for 5 seconds and is removed.
In all cases, the AL function is disabled.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
B. FD – VOR Approach (APPR VOR1 (VOR2)) mode

The VOR Approach (APPR VOR1 (VOR2)) mode is used for
non-precision approach using VOR source. The mode is enabled by
pressing the APPR switch when VOR is the navigation source.
After selecting the APPR switch, the Heading (HDG) mode is activated
and displays green, and APPR VOR1 (VOR2) mode is armed and
displays white on the FMA (refer to Figure 03−02−45). The intercept
heading is automatically set if either the DME or FMS distance from the
station is available. The intercept heading can also be manually set using
the HDG switch (rotary).
Upon interception, HDG is removed and APPR VOR1 (VOR2) activates
and displays green. When APPR VOR is active, the bank angle limit is
15 degrees.
NO ANNUNCIATOR CHANGE DURING

CAPTURE TO TRACK TRANSITION
APPR VOR FLASHES FOR 5 SECONDS AT CAPTURE
INTERCEPT WITH HEADING SELECT MODE
VOR Approach
Figure 03−02−45
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
C. FD – VNAV GLIDE PATH (VGP)

The VNAV Glide Path (VGP) mode is used during a FMS/VNAV
approach. Vertical guidance is provided with reference to satellite-based
positioning (SBAS). Without SBAS, a continuous descent is made with
reference to the barometric altimeter.
VGP provides guidance from below the preselected altitude to the
runway, unless another mode is selected.
VGP mode is armed when the APPR switch on the FCP is selected and:
• FMS is selected as the NAV source,
• A non-localizer based approach is selected,
• Predictive RAIM is available,
• The aircraft is in the terminal area (within approximately 30 nm from
destination), and
• FMS is not in Dead Reckoning (DR).
After the APPR mode is selected, if the VGP arming criteria is not met,
an invalid amber VGP message is displayed on the FMA.
The VGP mode activates when APPR FMS1 (FMS2) is active (refer to
Figure 03−02−46) and either:
• The Final Approach Fix (FAF) or MAP is the active waypoint, and
• The distance to the FAF is less than 2 nm.
A white APPR message that is associated with the selected approach
displays on the PFD when the required position accuracy is available to
continue the approach past the FAF.
The VNAV deviation pointer indicates the glide path deviation.
NOTE
The altitude alert function and automatic arming of
VALTS is inhibited when VGP mode is active.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
VNAV Vertical Glide Path (VGP)

Figure 03−02−46
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
D. FD – Takeoff (TO) mode

Takeoff (TO) mode is activated on the ground by pressing one of the
TOGA switches on the thrust lever. When TO mode is selected, a wings
level pitch target marker displays at the appropriate pitch angle based on
the selected takeoff V-speeds and aircraft weight. The pitch target
marker is automatically adjusted during One Engine Inoperative (OEI).
TO displays green on the left (lateral mode) and right (vertical mode)
sections of the FMA. When airborne, the TO mode captures and
maintains the runway heading. Refer to Figure 03−02−47 and
Figure 03−02−48.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
ADI
Takeoff Mode − On ground below 60 kt

Figure 03−02−47
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Takeoff Mode − On ground above 60 kt

Figure 03−02−48
E. FD – Go-Around (GA) mode

The Go-Around (GA) mode provides pitch and lateral commands for a
transition from an approach to climb out when a missed approach is
initiated.
The mode is activated by pressing one of the TOGA switches. When the
mode is activated, the Autopilot (AP) remains engaged and the
Autothrottle (AT) engages, if not already engaged.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
During a go-around followed by a NAV-to-NAV transfer to an ILS

approach: (refer to Figure 03−02−49).
• The navigation source automatically transfers from VHF-NAV to
FMS, and the course arrow, deviation bar, and navigation data
display in magenta.
• A green GA displays as the active lateral mode, and the heading at
the go-around is maintained. During initial climb, the lateral mode
changes from GA to FMS and the missed approach course is
tracked.
• A green VGA (VNAV Go-Around) displays as the active vertical
mode. The missed approach climb profile is tracked (speed and
altitude).
ADI − ILS Approach Go−Around After NAV−to−NAV Transfer

Figure 03−02−49
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
When go-around is activated (refer to Figure 03−02−50) after a

FMS approach:
• A green FMS displays as the active lateral mode and the heading at
go-around engagement is maintained. At 400 ft RA the missed
approach course is tracked, and
• A green VGA displays as active vertical mode. The missed approach
climb profile is tracked (speed and altitude).
ADI− FMS Approach Go−Around

Figure 03−02−50
When a go-around is activated followed by a non-FMS approach, a
green GA displays as the active lateral and vertical mode (refer to
Figure 03−02−51.
To provide a safe climb, the heading at go-around activation is
maintained, a pitch up command is generated, and a reference airspeed
is maintained.
When FMS speed is selected, the reference airspeed is VGA for an all
engine go-around.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
For a single engine go-around, the reference speed is VAC.

When MAN speed is selected, the reference speed is the selected.
TAS 140
GS 137
ADI − Non−FMS Approach Go−Around

Figure 03−02−51
When the preselected altitude is reached, the vertical mode changes to
ALTS or VALTS, and the preselected altitude is maintained.
F. FD – Windshear (WSHR) escape guidance

The windshear escape guidance mode provides vertical guidance to
escape windshear detected by the TAWS.
When a windshear warning is detected, pressing any TOGA switch on
the thrust levers activates the WSHR escape guidance mode. The mode
generates vertical guidance to provide an optimal windshear escape
maneuver using a blend of airspeed, radio altitude, and angle-of-attack
data.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
When the mode is active, a green WSHR message displays on the

vertical mode section (right side) of the FMA (refer to
Figure 03−02−52). A green TO or GA displays on the lateral mode
section (left side) of the FMA depending on whether the windshear is
encountered during takeoff (TO) or approach (GA). If the autothrottle is
engaged, a green THRUST displays on the left side of the FMA and the
aural message “WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR” sounds in
the flight deck.
ADI − Windshear escape guidance mode indications

Figure 03−02−52
NOTE
The windshear warning mode cannot be canceled
during windshear warning conditions. Once the
windshear warning condition has cleared, the mode
can be changed by selecting any vertical FD mode.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
G. FD – Emergency Descent Mode (EDM)

When activated, the EDM initiates a high speed autopilot-controlled
descent to 15000 feet using the FLC and the HDG modes.
The EDM is automatically activated if the cabin altitude exceeds 14500
feet and the aircraft is above 25000 feet. When the aircraft altitude is
above 25000 feet, the EDM can be manually activated by pressing the
guarded EDM switch on the FCP.
When the EDM is activated, the following actions occur:
• Mode selection light above the EDM guarded switch illuminates,
• “EMERGENCY DESCENT” aural alert sounds,
• AP engages (if not already engaged),
• AT engages (if not already engaged) and thrust is reduced to flight
idle,
• Altitude preselect is set to 15000 feet,
• Heading mode (HDG) is engaged and present heading is
maintained,
• Descent speed is set to VMO −10 kt, or MMO −0.02M,
• Transponder code is set to 7700 (automatic activation only), and
• Seat belt signs are turned on (automatic activation only).
EDM displays in the left and right sections of the FMA (refer to
Figure 03−02−53). The EMERGENCY DESCENT warning message
displays on the EICAS page when the EDM is automatically activated. If
it is manually activated, the EMERGENCY DESCENT caution message
displays on the EICAS page.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
PFD − Emergency Descent Mode indication

Figure 03−02−53
When the preselected altitude (15000) feet is reached, the AP and AT
remain engaged and the altitude and the heading are maintained. The
speed is automatically set to 250 knots.
Pressing the EDM guarded switch a second time the EDM guard switch
or pressing the AP or A/P DISC PTY switch on either sidestick
disengages the EDM. The FD resets to HDG and FLC (ALT) if level.
Re-engaging the AP does not re-engage the EDM.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
NOTE
Heading, airspeed, altitude preselect, and the
transponder code can be changed during EDM
descent.
H. FD – Steep approach mode

The function provides steep approach capability on glideslope beams up
to 5.5 degrees (e.g. London City). Category 1 operations are authorized.
I. FD – One Engine Inoperative (OEI) guidance mode

The One Engine Inoperative (OEI) guidance mode gives the flight crew
visual guidance that, if followed, will maximize the aircraft rate of climb
during asymmetrical thrust. This guidance is shown on the ADI by the
beta target indicator (refer to Figure 03−02−54). The OEI guidance
mode is available during the takeoff phase (weight-off-wheels) and
go-around, and it is active until the flaps and slats are fully retracted.
During OEI guidance, the beta target indicator replaces the slip indicator.
It has the same shape but the color is magenta.
With the autopilot off during OEI, the pilot uses rudder inputs to center
the beta target and maintains heading using roll commands. With the
autopilot engaged, the pilot centers the beta target with rudder inputs,
and the autopilot maintains the heading.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
BETA TARGET
INDICATOR
Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI) − Beta target indicator

Figure 03−02−54
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Autopilot (AP) system
O
AP SYSTEM – OVERVIEW
The autopilot (AP) is a function integrated within each of the three Primary
Flight Control Computers (PFCCs). The AP function on the active PFCC is
used, the others are on standby. The AP monitor function will disengage the
autopilot if the roll rate, pitch rate, or acceleration are outside limits or are
expected to exceed limits.
The AP system functions are:
• Processing the FD system commands for the primary flight control
surfaces,
• Limiting FD system commands,
• Flight envelope protection,
• Turn coordination,
• Yaw damping,
• Autotrim, and
• Engage and disengage logic control.
The AP system controls are located on the Flight Control Panel (FCP) and on
the sidesticks. Indications are displayed on the Flight Mode Annunciator
(FMA) and on the EICAS page. There is also an aural alert when the AP is
disengaged. Refer to Figure 03−03−1.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O Autopilot (AP) system
FLC
NAV
APPR 1/2 VNAV

BANK
Autopilot (AP) system controls and indications

Figure 03−03−1
NOTE
The fly-by-wire (FBW) system has envelope protection
outside the envelope of the AFCS. The FBW envelope
protection has priority over any AFCS command.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
AP SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Operation
The AP system is only available in FBW Normal Mode. The monitor
function inside the system protects it from erroneous inputs. The AP
system limiting function protects the aircraft flight envelope by limiting the
FD pitch and roll commands as follows:
• Pitch is limited to between 15 degrees nose down and 20 degrees
nose up,
• Pitch rate is limited to ±3 degrees per second,
• Roll rate is limited to 30 degrees left or right, and
• Roll rate is limited to ±5 degrees per second.
The AP system inputs are received from the:
• FG system,
• Flight Control Panel (FCP),
• Fly-By-Wire (FBW) system,
• Flight Management System (FMS),
• Air Data System (ADS),
• Navigation system, and
• Other systems.
B. AP engagement
The AP engages when the sidesticks are in the neutral position, the AP
switch on the FCP is pushed, and the aircraft attitudes that follow are
met:
• Sidestick is in the neutral position,
• Bank angle is within ±45 degrees,
• Pitch change rate is less than 10 degrees per second,
• Roll rate is less than 15 degrees per second, and
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
• Load factor is between certified limits.

The AP engagement limits are defined in the table that follows.
Aircraft Limits
attitude
Pitch angle Pitch attitude is between +25 degrees and −18 degrees,
Pitch change Pitch change rate is less than 10 degrees per second,
rate
Bank angle Bank angle is within ±45 degrees,
Roll rate Roll rate is less than 15 degrees per second, and
Acceleration Load factor is between certified limits.
The AP system is engaged when the AP switch on the FCP is selected. It

also engages when the Emergency Descent Mode (EDM) is activated
(manually or automatically). AP system status is annunciated on the
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
AUTOPILOT (AP) SWITCH
FLC
NAV
APPR 1/2 VNAV

BANK
EMERGENCY DESCENT MODE

(EDM) SWITCH
Autopilot (AP) system activation

Figure 03−03−2
The AP can be engaged regardless of the flight director status. If no
vertical or lateral FD mode is armed at AP engagement, the Flight Path
Angle (FPA) and heading (HDG) modes are activated.
C. AP disengagement
The autopilot will disengage automatically in any of the conditions that
follow:
• Reversion of the FBW system to direct mode,
• Invalid data,
• AP monitor fault detected,
• Stick shaker (except in the windshear alert mode), or
• Below 50 ft in APPR 1 or APPR 2 approach modes.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
The autopilot will disengage manually (refer to Figure 03−03−3) in

any of the conditions that follow:
• Pressing the red AP/PTY switch on the sidestick (refer to
Figure 03−03−4),
• Pressing the AP pushbutton on the FCP, except during autoland in
LAND 2 or LAND 3 are displayed,
• Operating the trim pitch switch on the sidestick,
• Moving the sidestick,
• Moving the tiller or rudder pedals (more than 0.8 inches) during
autoland ground roll, or
• Pressing the TOGA pushbutton on the ground for more than 2
seconds, except when autoland ROLLOUT is active.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FLC
NAV
APPR 1/2 VNAV

BANK
Autopilot (AP) system disengage controls

Figure 03−03−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Autopilot (AP) disengage

Figure 03−03−4
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
NOTE
AP disengagement is not available on the disabled
sidestick.
When the AP disengages (manually or automatically), AP flashes red on

the FMA and a cavalry charge aural alert sounds continuously until the
A/P DISC PTY switch on either sidestick is pressed. Refer to
Figure 03−03−5.
Autopilot (AP) system disengage indications

Figure 03−03−5
AP – EMERGENCY DESCENT MODE (EDM)

A. AP − EDM activation − Automatic
The EDM automatically engages when the cabin altitude exceeds 14500
feet and the aircraft altitude is higher than 25000 feet. When the EDM
engages:
• The red light above the EDM guarded switch on the Flight Control
Panel (FCP) illuminates,
• The Autopilot (AP) system and the Autothrottle (AT) system engage
(if not already engaged),
• The aural alert “EMERGENCY DESCENT” is heard in the flight
compartment,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
• The warning message EMERGENCY DESCENT is displayed on the

EICAS page,
• The transponder code changes to 7700 (can be modified by the flight
crew),
• The passenger oxygen masks deploy,
• The status message PAX OXY DPLY is displayed on the EICAS
page,
• The thrust levers move to the idle position,
• Aircraft descends to 15000 feet at VMO−5 knots (can be modified by
the flight crew), and
• Aircraft maintains the current heading.
Disengaging the AP will deactivate the EDM mode. Re-engagement of
the AP system does not re-engage the EDM.
NOTE
EDM activation does not automatically deploy the
spoilers.
B. AP − EDM activation − Manual

The EDM can be activated manually with the EDM switch on the FCP if
the aircraft altitude is higher than 25000 feet.
When the EDM switch is selected:
• The red light above the EDM guarded switch on the Flight Control
Panel (FCP) illuminates,
• The Autopilot (AP) system and the Autothrottle (AT) system engage
(if not already engaged),
• The aural alert “EMERGENCY DESCENT” is heard in the flight
compartment,
• The caution message EMERGENCY DESCENT is displayed on the
EICAS page,
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
• The thrust levers move to the idle position,

• Aircraft descends to 15000 feet (can be modified by the flight crew),
and
• Aircraft maintains the current heading.
NOTE
EDM activation does not automatically deploy the
spoilers.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Autoland (AL) system
O
AUTOLAND (AL) SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

After an ILS approach, the AL function supplies:
• Approach tracking,
• Runway alignment de-crab during crosswind conditions,
• Landing flare, and
• Ground steering control on the runway during the landing rollout.
The aircraft is designed to have the highest possible approach capability
(automatic up-mode capability), based on the aircraft systems status. There
is no flight crew selection for autoland.
Between 1500 ft and 800 ft Above Aerodrome Elevation (AAE) during an ILS
approach with the glideslope captured, the Fly-By-Wire (FBW) control is
changed from the DCU Module Cabinets (DMCs) to the Primary Flight
Control Computers (PFCCs) (Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA) lateral mode
changes from APPR LOC 1(2) to APPR LOC) and the autoland capability is
displayed on the Approach Status Annunciator (ASA) on the Primary Flight
Display (PFD) (and Head-Up Display (HUD), if installed).
One of the messages that follow is displayed on the ASA on the PFD and on
the HUD (if installed):
• APPR 1 − No autoland (a manual landing is required),
• APPR 2 − No autoland (a manual landing is required),
• LAND 2 − Fail passive autoland (ILS CAT III with Decision Height (DH)),
or
During an approach, the terms Above Ground Level (AGL) or Above
Aerodrome Elevation (AAE) are used, depending upon terrain on the
approach. Autothrottle (AT) items are in AGL, while AL items are in AAE.
NOTE
For non-ILS based approaches, autoland is not
available and the ASA stays blank.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O Autoland (AL) system
AL SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Fail passive autoland system (LAND 2)
Fail passive (LAND 2) is an autoland system that causes no significant
deviation of the aircraft flight path or attitude if there is a failure. The
capability to continue the operation may be lost and an alternate course
of action (i.e. a missed approach or manual landing) may be required.
B. Alert height
Alert height is the height above a runway for Category III fail operational
systems at which the approach must be discontinued if a required aircraft
system or ground system has failed at an altitude above the alert height.
The alert height has been established at 200 ft AGL.
C. Aircraft configuration for autoland and associated ASA messages

The AL configuration is FLAP 4 or 5, spoilers retracted, and autopilot
engaged. When the correct landing configuration is set and all on-board
and on-ground equipment is functioning correctly, LAND 2 or LAND 3 (if
installed) is displayed on the ASA (refer to Figure 03−04−1).
If the on-board equipment is not adequate for AL operation, APPR 2 or
APPR 1 may be displayed on the ASA. If this occurs, autoland capability
is lost and a manual landing is required (refer to Figure 03−04−2).
When there are no failures, if the slats/flaps are not in the landing
configuration, or the flight spoilers are deployed, APPR 1 is displayed on
the ASA. When the correct configuration is achieved, the ASA will display
the highest available capability (APPR 2, or LAND 2, or LAND 3).
If the correct landing configuration is not set before 800 ft AAE, the
system cannot up-mode the autoland and APPR 1 will continue to be
displayed. A manual landing is required.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Above 1500 ft AAE and in the correct landing configuration, if the flight
crew is manually flying the approach, the LAND 2 NOT AVAIL or LAND 3
NOT AVAIL advisory message is displayed. In this case, APPR 2 is the
highest lading capability until the autopilot is engaged. As soon as APPR
2 is displayed on the ASA, the Engine Indication and Crew Alerting
System (EICAS) advisory is removed. When the autopilot is engaged,
the EICAS advisory on the ASA changes to LAND 2 (or LAND 3).
LAND 2 NOT AVAIL or LAND 3 NOT AVAIL can also be shown if a
sensor failure occurs. Continued flight with one of these messages
shown is permitted if the planned approach is not predicated on that level
of autoland.
LAND 3 and LAND 2 indications

Figure 03−04−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
APPR 2 and APPR 1 indications

Figure 03−04−2
D. Autoland system logic description

There is an AL function included in each PFCC, independent from the
autopilot. The AL function on the active PFCC is used, the others are on
standby.
The DMC contains the flight guidance and autothrottle functions (refer to
Figure 03−04−3).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
The approach is engaged when the APPR switch on the Flight Control
Panel (FCP) is pushed.
Flight Flight Flight Flight

Guidance 1 L Guidance 1 R Guidance 2 L Guidance 2 R
AFCS Autothrottle 1 AFCS

Monitor 1 Autothrottle 2
Monitor 2
Channel A Channel B Channel A Channel B
LEFT DMC RIGHT DMC
Autopilot Autopilot Autopilot
Autoland Autoland Autoland
PFCC 1 PFCC 2 PFCC 3
Autoland system logic

Figure 03−04−3
E. Autoland modes and profile

The autoland function supplies approach, landing, and runway ground
steering control during the modes that follow:
• Approach mode,
• ALIGN and FLARE modes,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
• FLARE and RETARD modes, and

• ROLLOUT mode.
(1) Approach mode
When the approach mode is armed, the following occurs (refer to
Figure 03−04−4 and Figure 03−04−5):
• APPR LOC1(2) replaces APPR FMS1(2) as the active mode
and is displayed on the FMA after a NAV-to-NAV transfer (on
PFD and HUD (if installed)).
• Below 2000 ft AGL, the FBW system transfers control from the
DMCs to the PFCCs. APPR LOC1(2) changes to APPR LOC
as the active lateral mode and is displayed on the FMA (PFD
and HUD (if installed)).
• Between 1500 ft and 800 ft AAE, if the aircraft is configured for
landing, Glideslope (GS) is captured and the autopilot is
engaged, the autoland system displays the highest available
autoland capability, LAND 2 or LAND 3 (if installed).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
APPR SELECTED
BELOW 2000 FT AGL
Approach mode
Figure 03−04−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
LAND 3 and LAND 2 indications

Figure 03−04−5
F. ALIGN and FLARE modes

After the autoland capability (LAND 2 or LAND 3) is displayed on the
ASA, as the aircraft continues on the approach (refer to
Figure 03−04−6):
• Below 400 ft AAE, RETARD arm mode is displayed on the FMA
(PFD and HUD (if installed)).
• Between 350 ft and 250 ft AAE, ALIGN and FLARE arm mode are
displayed on the FMA (PFD and HUD (if installed)).
• Between 200 ft and 150 ft AAE, ALIGN active mode is displayed on
the FMA (PFD and HUD (if installed)), and the aircraft aligns toward
the runway.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
BETWEEN
1500 FT AND
800 FT AAE
BELOW 400 FT AAE
BETWEEN
350 FT AND
250 FT AAE
BETWEEN
200 FT AND
150 FT AAE
ALIGN and FLARE modes

Figure 03−04−6
G. FLARE and RETARD modes

As the aircraft continues on the approach, below 65 ft AGL (refer to
Figure 03−04−7):
• FLARE mode activates and the ROLLOUT mode is armed. The
landing flare starts.
And finally, below 20 ft AGL:
• RETARD mode activates and the throttles are reduced to flight idle.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
BELOW 60 FT AGL
FLARE and RETARD modes

Figure 03−04−7
H. ROLLOUT mode
When the main landing gear touch down (refer to Figure 03−04−8,
Figure 03−04−9):
• ROLLOUT mode starts 2 seconds after Weight-On-Wheels (WOW).
• ROLLOUT arm mode changes to ROLLOUT active lateral mode, and
the active vertical field of the FMA is removed.
• Aircraft de-crabs during crosswind conditions, and completes the
de-rotation.
• ROLLOUT mode activates and uses rudder and Nosewheel Steering
(NWS) to track the localizer beam down the runway.
• Autopilot rollout command bar is displayed on the PFD and on the
HUD (if installed).
• All other FMA indications are removed.
The autopilot ROLLOUT command bar shows directional information
toward the localizer centerline. It is used by the autoland system to track
the localizer beam during the rollout. The autopilot stays engaged until
the aircraft has come to a full stop. While the aircraft tracks the rollout
commands, the rollout command bar is removed from the PFD (and
HUD) at less than 30 kt ground speed.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Use of the NWS tiller or rudder pedal inputs will disengage the autopilot
during the rollout.
NOTE
The AP disconnect switch on the FCP is disabled
during autoland. Flight crews must use the A/P DISC
on the sidestick.
ROLLOUT COMMAND
BAR
ROLLOUT mode more than 30 kt ground speed

Figure 03−04−8
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
ROLLOUT mode less than 30 kt ground speed

Figure 03−04−9
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
I. Approach capability degradation (down-mode)

If the approach/autoland capability degrades during the approach, the
system displays the highest available approach capability on the ASA.
(1) LAND 3 to LAND 2 degradation
If the approach mode degrades (down-modes) from LAND 3 to
LAND 2 above 200 ft AGL, a NO LAND 3 message flashes in
amber for 5 seconds, followed by a green LAND 2 steady message.
HUD indications (if installed) are the same as the PFD (refer to
Figure 03−04−10).
A triple click aural alert sounds when a degradation occurs.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Degradation LAND 3 to LAND 2

Figure 03−04−10
(2) LAND 2 to APPR 2 or APPR 1 degradation
If the approach capability degrades from LAND 2 to APPR 2 or
APPR 1 above 200 ft AGL, an amber NO AUTOLAND message
flashes for 5 seconds followed by a green steady APPR 2 or APPR
1 message. HUD indications (if installed) are the same as the PFD
(refer to Figure 03−04−11).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
LAND 2 to APPR 2 or APPR 1 degradation above 200 ft AGL

Figure 03−04−11
(3) Loss of autoland capability below 200 ft AGL
If the LAND 2 approach mode degradation occurs below 200 ft
AGL, the NO AUTOLAND warning message (white text on red
background) flashes for 5 seconds, followed by a steady APPR 2 or
APPR 1 message (green text). HUD indications (if installed) are the
same as the PFD (refer to Figure 03−04−12).
In this case, the AL function is no longer available.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
LAND 2 to APPR 2 below 200 ft AGL

Figure 03−04−12
(4) APPR 2 to APPR 1 degradation
If the approach capability degrades from APPR 2 to APPR 1 above
200 ft AGL, a NO APPR 2 message (amber text) flashes for 5
seconds, followed by a steady APPR 1 message (green text). HUD
indications (if installed) are the same as the PFD (refer to
Figure 03−04−13).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
APPR 2 to APPR 1 above 200 ft AGL

Figure 03−04−13
Below 200 ft AGL, the NO APPR 2 message (white text on red
background) flashes for 5 seconds, followed by a steady APPR 1
message (green text). HUD indications (if installed) are the same as the
PFD (refer to Figure 03−04−14).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
APPR 2 to APPR 1 below 200 ft AGL

Figure 03−04−14
J. Approach status annunciation

The table that follows gives all possible ASA annunciations and their
operational descriptions (refer to Figure 03−04−15).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Approach status annunciation

Figure 03−04−15
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Autothrottle (AT) system
O
AT – OVERVIEW
The AT system automatically manages the engine thrust. During the
complete flight profile, servomotors in the Throttle Quadrant Assembly (TQA)
automatically position the thrust levers. The AT includes engine
synchronization and is available during single-engine operation.
The AT system controls are on the FCP (AT switch) and on the TQA (A/T
DISC switch) (refer to Figure 03−05−1).
A/T DISC SWITCH
Autothrottle (AT) system controls

Figure 03−05−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O Autothrottle (AT) system
The AT is normally engaged manually. IT can also be engaged automatically

in specific modes such as go-around, windshear escape modes, or EDM.
The AT can be disengaged at any time.
The AT operation is highly integrated with the AFCS and FMS.
Each AFCS has one AT system application in each Data Concentrator Unit
Module Cabinet (DMC). The AT system receives inputs from:
• The Flight Guidance (FG) system,
• The Electronic Engine Control (EEC),
• The Flight Control Panel (FCP),
• The Flight Management System (FMS), and
• Other systems. Refer to Figure 03−05−2.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FCP − AT (AUTOTHROTTLE) SWITCH
FLIGHT FLIGHT
AUTOTHROTTLE
GUIDANCE MANAGEMENT
FUNCTION
FUNCTION SYSTEM
SERVO SERVO
L EEC R EEC
A/T A/T
DISC DISC
LEFT RIGHT
ENGINE ENGINE
LEGEND
EEC Electronic Engine Control

Figure 03−05−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
The AT sets a calculated thrust setting during takeoff, go-around, and flight
level change vertical modes. In all other vertical modes it controls engine
thrust to maintain the aircraft at a selected airspeed.
The AT also provides speed and thrust envelope limiting. Thrust envelope
limiting is based on the active N1 thrust rating, while speed envelope limiting
is based on minimum speed limits as well as limitations and maximum
structural speeds.
The AT system status is displayed on the FMA and fault messages are
displayed on the EICAS page (refer to Figure 03−05−3).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Autothrottle (AT) system indications

Figure 03−05−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
(1) Autothrottle Operating Modes

The AT operating mode depends on the active FD vertical mode. The
AT modes display on the left section of the FMA. Refer to
Figure 03−05−4.
ACTIVE MODE INDICATIONS (AT MODE)

SPD Speed or Mach Control
THRUST Thrust Control
HOLD Takeoff Throttle Hold
RETARD Retard
USPD Underspeed
EDM Emergency Descent Mode
LIM Airspeed Limiting
ARMED MODE INDICATIONS (AT MODE)

THRUST Thrust Armed
SPD Speed Armed
RETARD Retard Armed
ADI − Autothrottle mode indications

Figure 03−05−4
The AT operates in the takeoff hold mode (HOLD) to maintain takeoff
thrust from 60 knots to 400 feet AGL.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
The AT operates in thrust mode (THRUST) and maintains a specific

thrust setting when the following FD vertical modes are active:
• Takeoff (TO),
• Flight level change (FLC),
• Go-Around (GA), and
• Windshear escape (WSHR).
The AT operates in speed control mode (SPD), by controlling thrust
lever movement to maintain a selected or FMS-controlled airspeed in
the following FD vertical modes:
• Altitude hold (ALTS),
• Vertical speed (VS),
• Vertical path (VPATH),
• Vertical glide path (VGP),
• Glideslope (GS), and
• Flight path angle (FPA).
NOTE
The AT mode flashes for 5 seconds on the FMA when
the AT mode changes, then becomes steady.
AT – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. AT engagement
(1) Manual engagement
On ground, pressing the AT switch on the FCP (refer to
Figure 03−05−5) arms the AT system. Thrust mode is armed
and THRUST displays in white in the autothrottle section of the
FMA (far left).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
AT (AUTOTHROTTLE)
SWITCH
EDM (EMERGENCY
DESCENT MODE)
SWITCH
FCP − AT (Autothrottle) and EDM (Emergency Descent Mode) switch

Figure 03−05−5
The AT engages when the thrust levers move past the 23-degree
Thrust Lever Angle (TLA) position. The AT modes display as active
and/or armed, according to the flight segment (takeoff, climb,
cruise, approach).
In flight, the AT system engages regardless of thrust lever position
when:
• The AT switch is pressed,
• The TOGA switch is pressed, or
• The Emergency Descent Mode (EDM) switch is pressed.
(2) Automatic engagement
The AT system will automatically engage in specific modes as:
• EDM (activated either manually or automatically),
• Go-Around (is selected), or
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
• Windshear escape guidance mode.
B. AT disengagement
The AT system is disengaged (refer to Figure 03−05−6) by the
actions that follow:
• Pressing the A/T DISC switch on the thrust levers,
• Moving the thrust levers (some force may be necessary),
• Pressing the AT switch on the FCP if engaged, or
• AT system failure detected (advisory EICAS message AT FAIL is
displayed on the EICAS page).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Autothrottle (AT) system disengagement

Figure 03−05−6
C. AT – Thrust mode
During the thrust control mode, the AT system controls engine thrust to
an N1 rating based on the current phase of flight. The thrust control
mode is associated with the FG modes that follow:
• Takeoff (TO, VTO),
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
• Emergency Descent Mode (EDM),

• Flight Level Change (FLC, VFLC), and
• Go-Around (GA, VGA).
The AT provides thrust to maintain a programmed rate of climb or
descent proportional to the magnitude of the selected altitude change.
When the selected altitude is captured, the AT thrust mode (THRUST)
changes to speed mode (SPD).
D. AT – Takeoff Mode (TO)

During the TO mode, the AT system sets the engine thrust to the takeoff
(N1) rating selected through the FMS. When the GA mode is selected,
the AT system sets the thrust to a GA thrust rating.
At takeoff, the AT operates in two modes: THRUST mode and HOLD
mode.
Before takeoff, the AT is armed by pressing the AT switch on the FCP.
The takeoff thrust mode is armed and THRUST displays white on the far
left side of the FMA (autothrottle section).
At sea level condition, when the thrust levers are advanced through the
23-degree thrust lever angle position (approximately 68% of N1), the AT
activates and takes over thrust lever control to reach and maintain the
takeoff N1 selected through the FMS. THRUST displays in green and
SPD displays white (armed).
When the airspeed increases above 60 KIAS, the HOLD mode activates
to maintain the current thrust until the aircraft reaches 400 ft AGL. HOLD
displays in green on the FMA.
Above 400 ft AGL, the THRUST mode reactivates and THRUST displays
in green on the FMA. The AT maintains the active N1 engine rating
(manually or automatically selected). Refer to Figure 03−05−7.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
ON GROUND THRUST ARMED
ON GROUND BELOW 60 KT THRUST TO TAKEOFF
ON GROUND ABOVE 60 KT
ADI − Takeoff mode

Figure 03−05−7
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
E. AT – Flight Level Change (FLC, VFLC)

When the FLC mode is selected through the FCP or by the FMS (VFLC
mode) in a VNAV mode, the AT system will set climb thrust for a climb or
flight idle for a descent. The climb thrust rating can be selected manually
by the flight crew through the FMS as CLB, CLB1 or CLB2. Refer to
Figure 03−05−8.
START OF LEVELLING OFF
THRUST mode
Figure 03−05−8
F. AT – Emergency Descent Mode (EDM)

When the EDM is activated manually (EDM guarded switch on the FCP)
or automatically, the AT system retards the thrust levers to the idle
position. Refer to Figure 03−05−9.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
PFD − Emergency Descent Mode indication

Figure 03−05−9
G. AT – Go-Around
When either TOGA switch is pressed, the AT advances the thrust lever
to go-around thrust. The AT thrust mode is activated and THRUST
displays in green on the FMA. If the aircraft is in the rollout mode during
autoland, the TOGA switch is inhibited (refer to Figure 03−05−10).
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
TOGA switches engage indications

Figure 03−05−10
H. AT – Speed (SPD) mode

The AT SPD mode maintains the indicated airspeed (or Mach number)
selected with the SPD switch on the FCP, or automatically selected from
FMS active flight plan.
The mode is active with AT engaged and with one of the active modes
that follow:
• Altitude select (ALTS, VALTS),
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
• Altitude hold (ALT, VALT),

• Vertical Speed (VS, VVS),
• Vertical Path (VPATH),
• Vertical Glide Path (VGP),
• Glideslope (GS), and
• Flight Path Angle (FPA, VFPA).
In the airspeed control mode (SPD), the AT maintains a selected IAS or
MACH when one of the following FD vertical modes is selected:
• Altitude hold (ALT and ALT CAP),
• Vertical Speed (VS),
• Flight Path Angle (FPA), or
• Vertical Navigation (VNAV–VPATH or VNAV–VGP).
The speed reference used by the AT system can be selected manually
with the SPD switch on the FCP, or through the FMS. When it is
selected, SPD (green) indication is displayed on the FMA. Refer to
Figure 03−05−11.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
ADI − Speed (SPD) mode indication

Figure 03−05−11
If a speed reference cannot be achieved by the AT, a LIM (amber)
indication is displayed on the FMA. The AT is limited to the N1 speed
limit displayed on the EICAS page (engine section). If no FG system is
active, the AT provides a basic speed hold control. Refer to
Figure 03−05−12.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Speed Mode Limits indication

Figure 03−05−12
The low speed protection mode works to maintain the airspeed within the
upper and lower speed limits. The AT reduces the engine thrust to not
exceed upper speed limits (VMO, MMO, gear, flap, or placarded speeds).
When the airspeed is below a minimum speed, the AT increases engine
thrust to increase speed.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
I. AT – Retard mode
The AT retard mode (RETARD) automatically reduces both thrust levers
to idle at a fixed rate. The mode activates when the aircraft reaches
approximately 30 ft AGL. When conducting an autoland, the T+RETARD
will reduce the throttles to idle between 20 ft and 15 ft AGL. The AT stays
engaged until touchdown to supply go-around thrust, if required. The AT
automatically disconnects 2 seconds after main wheel touchdown,
however the “AUTOTHROTTLE” aural alert will not sound.
NOTE
If the necessary conditions are not met for the retard
mode, the AT remains in speed mode until touchdown.
The AT disengages upon landing but the thrust levers
are not reduced to idle.
J. AT system – One Engine Inoperative (OEI)

The AT stays active during OEI. The AT system stops commanding the
thrust lever for the inoperative engine. Even if the flight crew moves the
thrust lever for the failed engine, it will not affect the AT and the system
will stay engaged. If the flight crew moves the thrust lever for the
operating engine, the AT system will disengage.
If a failed engine is restarted, the AT does not control the restarted
engine. The AT pushbutton must be pressed twice (OFF/ON) for the AT
to control both engines.
K. AT – Windshear (WSHR) escape mode.

When in the windshear escape mode (activated by a TAWS windshear
warning and by pressing the TO/GA switch), the AT system moves the
thrust levers to Takeoff (TO) or Go Around (GA). The AT system keeps
the thrust rating until the windshear warning is no longer present. Refer
The flight crew can override the AT system by moving the thrust levers to
a maximum rating.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
ADI − Windshear escape guidance mode indications

Figure 03−05−13
L. AT and FD modes summary

Figure 03−05−14 describes the different possible modes for various
phases of flight.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
5 6 7
4 8
9
2 13
1 10 11 12
FLIGHT PHASE FD VERTICAL MODE AUTOTHROTTLE FUNCTION
Takeoff Roll Takeoff (TO) Sets takeoff or flex thrust to the MAX or FLEX
1 N1 rating.
Throttle servos remain depowered until 400 ft.
2 Climb Out Takeoff (TO) Above 400 ft AGL A/T controls to active MAX or
FLEX T/O EPR rating.
Small Flight FLC, VLFC, FPA, VS Reduced climb thrust during FLC and VFLC.
3 Level Changes Airspeed control during FPA and VS.
Large Flight FLC, VLFC, FPA, VS Full climb thrust during FLC and VFLC.
4 Level Changes Airspeed control during FPA and VS.
5 Top of Climb ALT CAP, VALT CAP Airspeed control.
6 Cruise ALT, VALT, ALTS Airspeed control.
Top of Descent FLC, VFLC, VS Transition to idle thrust during FLC and VFLC.
7 Airspeed control for VS.
8 Descent FLC, VFLC, FPA, VS, Full idle thrust during FLC and VFLC. Airspeed
VPATH control during FPA, VS and VPATH.
9 Approach Glideslope/Glidepath Track Airspeed control.
10 Flare Glideslope/Glidepath Track Thrust retard to idle stop.
11 Landing/Roll N/A Disengaged.
12 Go−Around Go−Around Sets TO.
13 Windshear Windshear Sets TO.
Example Autothrottle (AT) profile

Figure 03−05−14
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
AFCS − Controls and indications
O

The flight crew uses the Flight Control Panel (FCP) on the glareshield to
provide data inputs to the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS).
The FCP (refer to Figure 03−06−1) has the following available
selections:
• Airspeed and vertical speed,
• Flight Director (FD),
• Lateral mode,
• Vertical mode,
• Altitude pre-selection, and
• Autopilot (AP), Autothrottle (AT), and transfer (XFR).
SPEED LATERAL FLC, ATL, VNAV VS, FPA

CONTROL MODES VERTICAL MODES VERTICAL MODES
FLC
NAV
APPR 1/2 VNAV

BANK
FLIGHT DIRECTOR AUTOPILOT/AUTOTHROTTLE FLIGHT DIRECTOR

SWITCH SWITCH
Flight Control Panel (FCP)

Figure 03−06−1
The FCP controls are:
• Two FD (Flight Director) switches,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O AFCS − Controls and indications
• SPD (Speed) rotary switch,

• HDG (Heading) rotary switch,
• HDG (Heading) switch,
• NAV (Navigation) switch,
• APPR (Approach) switch,
• 1/2 BANK switch,
• AP (Autopilot) switch,
• AT (Autothrottle) switch,
• XFR (Transfer) switch,
• EDM (Emergency Descent Mode) guarded switch,
• FLC (Flight Level Change) switch,
• ALT (Altitude) rotary switch,
• ALT (Altitude) hold switch,
• VNAV (Vertical Navigation) switch,
• V/S (Vertical Speed) switch,
• FPA (Flight Path Angle) switch,
• UP/DN wheel, and
• BRT (Brightness) switch.
A. FD switch
There are two FD switches: one for the pilot and one for the copilot (refer
to Figure 03−06−2). The FD switch displays the Flight Guidance
(FG) system pitch and roll commands on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD) and the associated mode on the Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA).
The FG commands are displayed on both PFDs regardless of which FD
switch is pressed. The FD switch selection and display follows a logic
that depends on the AP system status.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FLC
NAV
APPR 1/2 VNAV

BANK
Flight Director (FD) switch

Figure 03−06−2
If the AP is engaged:
• The FD switch selection on the coupled side is deactivated, and
• The FD switch selection on the uncoupled side toggles the FD
on or off only on the uncoupled side.
If the AP is engaged or disengaged and the APPR (Approach) mode
is active (LOC and GS are captured):
• The FD switch selections on both sides are deactivated.
NOTE
If the FD system fails, the caution message FD FAIL is
displayed on the EICAS page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
B. SPD switch (rotary)

The SPD switch lets the flight crew select the speed reference source
from either the FMS (Flight Management System) or MAN (Manual). It
also allows selection of the display format of the speed reference in the
readout window on the FCP in either Indicated Air Speed (IAS) or MACH.
With the FMS speed reference source is selected, the speed reference is
automatically computed, the speed readout window on the FCP goes
blank, and if the switch is rotated while FMS is selected, the speed value
will change on the readout window and then it will time out and go blank.
With the MAN speed reference source is selected, the speed reference
value is manually selected with the rotating SPD switch. The speed value
will be displayed on the readout window on the FCP, and the speed bug
will be displayed on the airspeed tape on the PFD.
Pushing the SPD switch selects the speed display on the readout
window between IAS and MACH. The airspeed value on the readout
window switches automatically to MACH when the aircraft altitude is
above 31500 feet. If MACH is selected, the value displayed on the PFD
(on the airspeed tape and the speed bug) stays in knots. The speed
display reverts to IAS when the aircraft altitude descends below 31500
feet.
C. HDG switch (rotary)

Turning the HDG rotary switch selects the heading value to be displayed
on the heading readout window of the FCP (refer to
Figure 03−06−3).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FCP − HDG ROTARY SWITCH
HSI
FCP − HDG rotary switch

Figure 03−06−3
It also moves the heading bug on the MAP and on the HSI. Refer to
Figure 03−06−4.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
HEADING (ROTARY) SWITCH
HDG PUSH SYNC SWITCH
1/2
BANK
HEADING BUG
MFW − MAP FORMAT − OVLY
HSI
Heading bug display

Figure 03−06−4
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
The heading bug automatically synchronizes with the actual aircraft

heading during the situations that follow:
• When the Takeoff (TO) or Go Around (GA) mode is active,
• When the AFCS fails and reverts to basic lateral mode (heading), or
• When the PUSH SYNC switch is pressed.
If the PUSH SYNC switch is pressed while the NAV or APPR mode is
active:
• The heading bug synchronizes with the actual aircraft heading,
• AUTO is displayed on the HSI, and
• The HDG readout window goes blank.
D. HDG switch
The HDG switch selection activates the heading mode to capture and
maintain the selected heading. When selected, HDG is shown on the
FMA.
E. NAV switch
The NAV switch is used to select the lateral NAV mode. The source
(FMS, LOC, or VOR) for the NAV mode is selected with the NAV SRC
switch on the Control Tuning Panel (CTP). The source selection is
indicated on the FMA (FMS, LOC, or VOR). Refer to
Figure 03−06−5.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Navigation source selection

Figure 03−06−5
F. APPR switch
The APPR switch is used to select the approach mode (VOR approach,
FMS approach, or ILS front or back course approach). Roll commands
are generated by the Flight Guidance (FG) system to capture the lateral
navigation source (FMS, VOR, or LOC). Once the lateral source is
captured, pitch commands are generated by the FG system to capture
the vertical navigation source (Glideslope (GS) or FMS). The approach
mode has an associated APPR annunciation on the FMA. Refer to
Figure 03−06−6.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Approach mode selection and indication

Figure 03−06−6
G. 1/2 BANK switch

The 1/2 BANK switch selection reduces the bank limit of the AP system.
The 1/2 BANK switch can be manually selected. The function is
automatically selected as the aircraft climbs through 31500 feet or
deactivated as the aircraft descends through 31500 feet. When the
switch is pressed, a green arc is displayed on the top of the Attitude
Direction Indicator (ADI) on the PFD. If the switch is pressed again, the
1/2 bank function deactivates. The switch can also be manually
deactivated by the pilot above 31500 feet. Refer to
Figure 03−06−7.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
1/2 Bank mode selection and indication

Figure 03−06−7
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
H. AP switch
The AP switch is used to engage and disengage the AP system. The
selection has an associated annunciation on the FMA. Refer to
Figure 03−06−8.
FLC
NAV
APPR 1/2 VNAV

BANK
Flight Control Panel (FCP) − AP (Autopilot) switch

Figure 03−06−8
When the AP switch is pressed:
• The AP system engages,
• The green light above the switch illuminates, and
• The AP indication is displayed in green on the FMA.
If the AP switch is pressed a second time:
• The AP system disengages,
• The green light above the AP switch goes out,
• The AP indication displayed on the FMA flashes red, and
• There is an aural alert in the flight compartment.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
I. AT switch
The AT switch on the FCP is used to engage and disengage the AT
function (refer to Figure 03−06−9).
Autothrottle (AT) system selection and indication

Figure 03−06−9
(1) On ground
The AT system is armed by pressing the AT switch on the FCP.
When it is armed, a white AT indication will be displayed on the
FMA. The AT engages when the thrust levers are moved past 23
degrees TQA angle. When the AT system is engaged, the green
light above the switch illuminates and a green AT indication is
displayed on the FMA.
When the AT switch is pressed a second time, the AT system
disengages and the green light above the switch goes out.
Figure 03−06−10 shows the AT system engaged.
Issue 012, Jul 26/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Autothrottle (AT) system engagement

Figure 03−06−10
(2) In flight
When the AT switch is pressed:
• The AT system engages,
• The green light above the switch illuminates, and
• A green AT indication is displayed on the FMA.
When the AT switch is pressed a second time:
• The AT system disengages,
• The green light above the switch goes out,
• A flashing amber AT indication is displayed on the FMA, and
• An "AUTOTHROTTLE" aural alert is heard in the flight
compartment and continues until it is acknowledged by the
flight crew.
Figure 03−06−11 shows the AT system disengaged.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Autothrottle (AT) system disengagement − AT switch

Figure 03−06−11
J. XFR switch
The XFR switch on the FCP is used to select which channel (A or B) in
the DCU Module Cabinet (DMC) will supply the flight guidance. It also
selects which sensors will be used by the Flight Director (FD) system.
When the XFR switch on the FCP is pushed (refer to
Figure 03−06−12):
• The FD and the AT systems revert to the other source (in either DMC
channel A or channel B),
• The direction of the coupled white arrow on the FMA changes, and
• The left or right green light beside the XFR switch on the FCP is
illuminated (based on the selected direction).
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
When the XFR switch is selected, the lateral and vertical mode will revert
to basic mode of HDG and FPA for the selected side. The autopilot will
follow the current selected heading and vertical path of the aircraft until a
different selection is made.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FLC
1/2 VNAV
BANK
Flight Control Panel (FCP) − XFR (transfer) switch

Figure 03−06−12
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
K. EDM guarded switch

The EDM guarded switch selection on the FCP activates an emergency
descent. When the EDM guarded switch is activated, the AP system and
the AT system engage (if not already engaged) and the EDM
annunciation is displayed on the FMA.
For more details, refer to the Emergency Descent Mode (EDM) section.
L. FLC switch
The FLC switch is used to select the flight level change mode. When the
FLC switch is pressed, the green light above it illuminates. The FG
system generates commands to capture the preselected altitude while
maintaining the reference speed. In FLC mode, the AT will go to either
flight idle or climb thrust, while the elevator is used to maintain speed.
The switch selection shows an FLC or a Vertical Navigation Flight Level
Change (VFLC) annunciation on the FMA.
When VNAV mode is active, the first selection of the FLC switch
engages the VFLC mode and the second selection disengages VFLC.
NOTE
The FLC mode is inhibited when GS is the active
vertical mode.
M. ALT rotary switch

The ALT rotary switch is used to set the altitude which is displayed on
the altitude tape on the PFD and in the window on the FCP (refer to
Figure 03−06−13). The outer knob of the switch is used to select the
units of altitude in feet (FT) or meters (M). The inner knob (PUSH FINE)
is used to select the desired altitude. The default altitude increments are
in 1000 feet or 100 meters. Pressing the PUSH FINE switch changes the
increments to 100 feet or 10 meters.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
ALT (ALTITUDE)
SWITCH (ROTARY)
Altitude selection and indication − ALT (altitude) switch (rotary)

Figure 03−06−13
N. ALT hold switch

When the ALT hold switch is pressed, the altitude hold mode is activated
to maintain the current aircraft altitude, and the green light above the
switch illuminates. The altitude hold mode is also engaged when the
preselected altitude is reached. An ALT annunciation is displayed on the
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
ALT (ALTITUDE)
(HOLD)
SWITCH
Altitude selection and indication − ALT (Altitude) (hold) switch

Figure 03−06−14
O. VNAV switch
When the VNAV switch is pressed, the green light above the switch
illuminates, and the FG system generates pitch commands to follow the
vertical navigation profile of the FMS flight plan. When the VNAV mode is
selected, the AT system will control either speed or thrust depending on
the vertical mode active at the time. The associated FMA annunciation is
preceded by a V.
(1) VNAV deviation indicator
When the VNAV mode is enabled, the ADI on the PFD displays the
VNAV deviation pointer and the vertical deviation scale beside the
altitude tape. Each dot on the scale represents a 250-foot deviation,
and full scale deflection represents a 500-foot deviation from the
VNAV path. The scale changes to 75 feet of deviation for each dot
when an approach mode (APPR) is selected.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
The VNAV altitude constraint displays in magenta above the

vertical deviation scale, and as a magenta bug on the altitude tape.
The required vertical speed to maintain the vertical path displays as
a magenta circle on the VSI. Refer to Figure 03−06−15.
FMS
ALTITUDE
CONSTRAINT
VNAV
DEVIATION
POINTER
VERTICAL
SPEED
REQUIRED
POINTER
ALTITUDE
CONSTRAINT
BUG
VERTICAL
TRACK ALERT ADI
ADI − VNAV Indications

Figure 03−06−15
Alerts for Top Of Descent (TOD) and Bottom Of Climb (BOC)
display in the FMS message line on the PFD. The alerts display for
60 seconds prior to an altitude change, and flash 5 seconds before
the altitude change, accompanied by a double C-chord aural tone.
The alert is removed when the altitude change begins.
P. VS switch
The VS switch activates the vertical speed mode. When the switch is
pressed and the vertical speed mode is activated, the green light above
the switch illuminates. The flight crew adjusts the vertical speed with the
UP/DN wheel on the FCP. When the VS switch is selected, the FG
system generates pitch commands to maintain the selected vertical
speed.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Q. FPA switch
The FPA switch activates the Flight Path Angle (FPA) mode. When the
switch is pressed and the FPA mode is activated, the green light above
the switch illuminates. The flight crew adjusts the FPA value with the
UP/DN wheel on the FCP. The FPA value is displayed in the window and
on the FMA next to the FPA mode annunciation. When the FPA switch is
selected, the FG system generates pitch commands to maintain the
selected reference vertical flight path angle. Refer to
Figure 03−06−16.
Flight Control Panel (FCP) − FPA (Flight Path Angle) switch

Figure 03−06−16
R. BRT switch
The BRT switch is used to adjust the brightness of the FCP readout
windows.
THROTTLE QUADRANT ASSEMBLY (TQA) LEVERS

A. AT/DISC switches
The AT/DISC switches (refer to Figure 03−06−17) are located on
the TQA.
When the AT/DISC switches are pressed, the AT system disengages
and a flashing amber AT indication is displayed on the FMA with an
"AUTOTHROTTLE" aural alert.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
"AUTOTHROTTLE"
A/T DISC
SWITCH
A/T DISC switches disconnect indication

Figure 03−06−17
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
B. TOGA switches
The TOGA switches are located on the TQA.
When the TOGA switch is pressed, the Takeoff (TO) mode or Go Around
(GA) mode engages and the corresponding mode is displayed on the
TOGA switches engage indications

Figure 03−06−18
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
C. TQA − A/T DISC switch

When the A/T DISC switch on the thrust lever is pressed:
• The AT system disengages,
• A flashing amber AT indication is displayed on the FMA, and
• An "AUTOTHROTTLE" aural alert is heard in the flight compartment.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Autothrottle (AT) system disengagement − A/T DISC switch

Figure 03−06−19
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
SIDESTICKS
A. A/P DISC PTY switch
There is an A/P DISC PTY (Autopilot Disconnect Priority) switch located
on each sidestick. This switch has a dual purpose, it disengage the
autopilot and/or disables the other sidestick.
When the red AP/DISC PTY switch (refer to Figure 03−06−20) is
pressed on either sidestick:
• The AP system disengages,
• A red AP indication flashes on the FMA, and
• There is an aural alert in the flight compartment.
DISENGAGEMENT
SIDESTICK − AP/DISC PTY

(AUTOPILOT DISCONNECT PRIORITY)
Sidestick − A/P DISC PTY (Autopilot Disconnect or autopilot priority) switch

Figure 03−06−20
If the A/P DISC PTY is pressed and held in, it will disengage the autopilot
(if engaged), and disable the other sidestick.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
If the autopilot is not engaged, pressing the A/P DISC PTY switch will
give momentary priority to that sidestick, accompanied by an associated
“PRIORITY LEFT” or “PRIORITY RIGHT” aural alert.
REVERSION SWITCH PANEL (RSP)

A. Reversion Switch Panel (RSP) – FD/AT ALTN switch
The FD/AT ALTN switch is located on the RSP (refer to
Figure 03−06−21).
When the FD/AT ALTN switch is pressed:
• AFCS (1 or 2) is selected and used for guidance, and
Reversion Switch Panel (RSP) − FD/AT ALTN (alternate) switch

Figure 03−06−21
There is one AFCS (AFCS 1 or AFCS 2) active at a time while the other
one is on standby. They automatically alternate control on a daily basis.
If the flight crew presses the FD/AT ALTN switch, it manually selects the
standby AFCS which becomes active (refer to Figure 03−06−22).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FD/AT ALTN (alternate) switch

Figure 03−06−22
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
PFD – FLIGHT MODE ANNUNCIATOR (FMA)

The FMA bar located at the top of the PFD displays all the AFCS modes
(refer to Figure 03−06−23). The FMA is divided into columns depending
on the type of mode and status (active or armed).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FMA − Autoflight Control System (AFCS) modes and indications

Figure 03−06−23
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
The FMA displays FD modes and status using the following color convention:
• Green for active mode,
• White for armed mode,
• Amber mode sustainable, and
• Red for AP disconnect only.
AFCS – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages
Message Description Aural Inhibit

CONFIG AP Autopilot (AP) engaged on "CONFIG None
takeoff. AUTO−
PILOT"
EMERGENCY Emergency Descent Mode "EMER− None
DESCENT (EDM) automatically GENCY
activated. DES−
CENT"
B. Caution messages

FD MODE CHANGE Uncommanded flight director None TO
mode changed to basic
mode.
AT RETARD INHIBIT Autothrottle (AT) system None TO
retard mode inoperative due
to radio altimeter failure.
STEEP NOT AVAIL Steep approach automatic None TO
flight mode not available and
detected while mode is
armed.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT

EMERGENCY Emergency Descent Mode "EMER− None
DESCENT (EDM) is active and it has GENCY
been manually engaged. DES−
CENT"
FD FAIL AFCS coupled left and FD None TO, LDG
channels 1A and 2A failed.
C. Advisory messages
Message Description Inhibit

APPR1 NOT AVAIL ILS CAT I not supported due to sensor TO, LDG
failure.
APPR2 NOT AVAIL ILS CAT II not supported due to sensor TO, LDG
failure.
AT FAIL Both autothrottle channels failed. TO, LDG
AUTO FLIGHT Loss of redundant or non−critical TO, LDG
FAULT function for the auto flight systems.
LAND2 NOT AVAIL LAND2 (CAT III fail passive) capability TO, LDG
not supported due to sensor failure.
LAND3 NOT AVAIL LAND3 (CAT III fail operational) TO, LDG
capability not supported due to sensor
failure.
L ENG A/T OFF Left engine AT command is off. TO, LDG
R ENG A/T OFF Right engine AT command is off. TO, LDG
D. Status messages
None
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
RESUME MODE LIST

A. FD – Lateral mode
The tables that follow (refer to Figure 03−06−24 and
Figure 03−06−25) display the FD lateral mode on the Flight Mode
Annunciator (FMA).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
Heading mode active.
Roll mode active.
Lateral takeoff mode track runway heading.
Lateral go−around mode track aircraft heading.
FMS 1 navigation active.
FMS 2 navigation active.
FMS 1 approach mode active.
FMS 2 approach mode active.
Localizer 1 approach mode active.
Localizer 2 approach mode active.
Localizer approach mode active and transferred to PFCC for autoland (ILS only).
Localizer 1 navigation mode active.
Localizer back course 1 approach mode active.
Localizer back course 2 approach mode active.
VOR 1 navigation mode active.
VOR 2 navigation mode active.
VOR 1 approach mode active.
VOR 2 approach mode active.
Align lateral mode active (autoland).
Rollout mode active (autoland).
FMS 1 navigation armed.
FMS 2 navigation armed.
FMS 1 approach mode armed.
FMS 2 approach mode armed.
Localizer 1 approach mode armed.
FD lateral mode part 1

Figure 03−06−24
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
Localizer 2 approach mode armed.
Localizer back course 1 approach mode armed.
Localizer back course 2 approach mode armed.
VOR 1 navigation mode armed.
VOR 2 navigation mode armed.
VOR 1 approach mode armed.
VOR 2 approach mode armed.
Align lateral mode armed (autoland).
Rollout mode armed (autoland).
Dead reckoning during VOR navigation.
FMS 1 approach mode cannot arm because of no FMS flight plan or discontinuity.
FMS 2 approach mode cannot arm because of no FMS flight plan or discontinuity.
Localizer 1 approach mode cannot arm.
Localizer 2 approach mode cannot arm.
VOR 1 approach mode cannot arm.
VOR 2 approach mode cannot arm.
Localizer back course 1 approach mode cannot arm.
Localizer back course 2 approach mode cannot arm.
FMS 1 NAV mode cannot arm because of no FMS flight plan or discontinuity.
FMS 2 NAV mode cannot arm because of no FMS flight plan or discontinuity.
Localizer 1 NAV mode cannot arm.
Localizer 2 NAV mode cannot arm.
VOR 1 navigation mode cannot arm.
VOR 2 navigation mode cannot arm.
FD lateral mode part 2

Figure 03−06−25
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
B. FD – Vertical mode
The tables that follow (refer to Figure 03−06−26 and
Figure 03−06−27) display the FD vertical mode on the Flight Mode
Annunciator (FMA):
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FD vertical mode part 1

Figure 03−06−26
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
FMS altitude (constraint) hold mode in VNAV.
Preselect altitude capture mode in VNAV.
Pitch mode active (below 200 ft AGL).
Underspeed protection mode active.
Preselect altitude hold mode armed.
FMS altitude (constraint) mode in VNAV command.
Path mode armed in VNAV.
Altitude hold mode active.
Flight level change mode armed.
Flight level change mode in VNAV armed.
Flight path angle mode armed in VNAV.
Vertical speed in VNAV armed.
Glideslope mode armed.
Vertical glide path armed.
Preselect altitude hold mode in VNAV armed.
VNAV not available.
FMS altitude (constraint) mode not available.
Preselect altitude hold mode not available.
Preselect altitude hold mode in VNAV not available.
VNAV path mode not available.
Flight level change mode in VNAV not available.
VNAV flight path angle mode not available.
Glideslope not available.
Vertical glide path not available.
FD vertical mode part 2

Figure 03−06−27
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
C. Approach status annunciator

The table that follows (refer to Figure 03−06−28) describes the
approach status annunciations on the Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA):
Loss of ILS CAT II approach capability at or below 200 ft AGL.
Loss of ILS approach capability.
Loss of ILS CAT II approach capability above 200 ft AGL.
Steep approach mode active.
ILS CAT I approach capable.
ILS CAT II approach capable.
Steep approach mode armed.
Approach status annunciator

Figure 03−06−28
D. AP status annunciation
The AP system has one associated indication on the FMA. The table that
follows describes the AP system status on the FMA.
Flag Status Description

AP Active AP system engaged
(green)
AP Warning AP system disengaged
(flashing red)
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
E. AP and AT mode annunciation

The table that follows gives a short description of the Autopilot (AP) and
Autothrottle (AT) mode annunciation on the FMA.
Annunciation Description Status

AP Autopilot (AP) engaged Active (green) or disengaged
(green) or disengaged (warning)
(flashing red)
AT Autothrottle (AT) engaged Active (green), armed
(green), armed (white), or (white), or disengaged
disengaged (flashing amber) (caution)
DR FG system is providing Dead Active (white)
Reckoning (DR)
←→ Indicates the direction of the Active (white)
command source used by
the FG system
F. AT mode and FMA annunciation – Vertical mode

Selections made by the flight crew on the FCP activate the FD vertical
modes. When AT is engaged, each vertical mode has an associated AT
system mode and an FMA annunciation. The table that follows shows
each vertical mode with its associated control, FMA annunciation, and
AT mode.
FCP
Mode FMA annunciation AT mode
switch
Pitch hold None PITCH Speed (SPD)
Flight Path Angle FPA FPA Speed (SPD)
(FPA) (basic mode
when AP is engaged
and no other vertical
mode is selected)
Vertical Speed (V/S) V/S VS Speed (SPD)
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT
O
FCP
Mode FMA annunciation AT mode
switch
Flight Level Change FLC FLC Thrust (THRUST)
(FLC)
Altitude hold ALT • ALT • Speed (SPD)
• ALT CAP • Speed (SPD)
Vertical navigation (as VNAV • VALTV • Speed (SPD)
requested by the
• VALTV CAP • Speed (SPD)
FMS)
• VGP • Speed (SPD)
• VPATH • Speed (SPD)
• VALT • Speed (SPD)
• VALT CAP • Speed (SPD)
• VALTS • Speed (SPD)
• VALTS CAP • Speed (SPD)
• VFLC • Thrust
(THRUST)
• VFPA
• Speed (SPD)
• VVS
• Speed (SPD)
Emergency Descent EDM EDM EDM
Mode (EDM)
NOTE
If the AT is automatically disengaged, the aural alert
“AUTOTHROTTLE” is repeated until acknowledged.
If the AT is manually disengaged, there is an aural alert
of “AUTOTHROTTLE” for 2 seconds.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

AUXILIARY POWER UNIT
General
O
APU – OVERVIEW
The Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) is a self−contained gas turbine engine
installed in a closed, fireproof titanium box in the tail section of the aircraft
(refer to Figure 04−01−1). Clamshell doors provide access from below.
APU INLET DOOR
APU EXHAUST
APU
APU ACCESS DOOR
APU compartment
Figure 04−01−1
The APU provides an alternate source of AC electrical power and bleed air
for main engine starting and air conditioning. An accessory gearbox attached
to the APU drives a 3-phase, 400 Hz, 115 VAC variable frequency generator
that can generate 75 kVA.
The APU is self-governing, with automatic start sequencing and automatic
protective shutdown on the ground and in flight. It is monitored and controlled
by an Electronic Control Unit (ECU) and certified for unattended operation on
the ground.
APU controls are located on the APU panel, and on the external service
panel (refer to Figure 04−01−2). In addition, an APU shutoff switch is
located in the APU compartment.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

O General
APU controls
Figure 04−01−2
APU indications are reported on the STATUS synoptic page and status and
fault messages are reported on the EICAS page (refer to
Figure 04−01−3 and Figure 04−01−4 for an example of EICAS
advisory message).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

General
O
APU indications
Figure 04−01−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

O General
STATUS synoptic page − EICAS advisory message

Figure 04−01−4
The AIR, Electrical (ELEC) and FUEL system synoptic pages also contain
APU indications (refer toFigure 04−01−5).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

General
O
APU indications on synoptic pages

Figure 04−01−5
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

O General
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

APU − Description and operation
O
APU – DESCRIPTION
A. APU assembly
The APU assembly includes:
• An engine,
• An Electronic Control Unit (ECU),
• An inlet door,
• An accessory gearbox,
• A fuel system, and
• A lubrication system.
B. Engine
The APU engine is a two-stage, axial flow, non-propulsion turbine engine
and incorporates:
• A power section, and
• A compressor section.
Figure 04−02−1 shows the power and compressor sections of the
APU.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

O APU − Description and operation
POWER SECTION
COMPRESSOR SECTION
Compressor and power sections

Figure 04−02−1
(1) Power section
The power section of the APU supplies the necessary horsepower
to drive the accessory gearbox and the compressor (refer to
Figure 04−02−2).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
POWER SECTION
ENGINE COMBUSTOR
COMPRESSOR AND
TURBINE
LEGEND
Air flow.
Oil cooler exhaust air.
Compressed air.
Combustion air.
APU engine
Figure 04−02−2
(2) Compressor section
The compressor section supplies bleed air to the pneumatic system
for engine start and air conditioning.
Based on aircraft pneumatic demand, the ECU adjusts the inlet
guide vanes in the APU compressor section to vary the volume of
bleed air supplied.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

C. APU – Electronic Control Unit (ECU)

The ECU is located in the mid equipment bay (refer to
Figure 04−02−3). It controls and monitors the APU from start to
shutdown, the position of the APU inlet door, and the adjustment of the
inlet guide vanes in the APU compressor section. The ECU receives its
primary power from the DC ESS 2 with the DC EMER BUS as the
secondary source.
APU ECU
Electrical Control Unit (ECU)

Figure 04−02−3
The ECU is continuously self-monitoring. It initiates an internal power-up
BITE test when either BATT 1 or BATT 2 switch on the ELECTRICAL
panel is set to AUTO. If it fails the BITE test, the FAIL light on the APU
panel illuminates and an APU FAULT advisory message is displayed on
the EICAS page (refer to Figure 04−02−4).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
APU panel − FAIL light

Figure 04−02−4
D. APU – Inlet door

The inlet door directs air into the APU and splits the air into two sections.
Some air is directed to the APU compressor and the rest cools the APU
compartment. The inlet door position is controlled by the ECU,
depending on various inputs such as weight-on-wheels signal, Mach
number, Total Air Temperature (TAT), and Air Data System (ADS). The
position of the inlet door is either fully open, intermediate, or fully closed.
The inlet door position is shown on the STATUS synoptic page, and
displays OPEN or CLOSED.
Figure 04−02−5 shows the inlet door location and its indication on
the STATUS synoptic page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

APU inlet door location and indication

Figure 04−02−5
E. APU – Accessory gearbox

The accessory gearbox contains the APU variable frequency generator,
a DC starter motor, and the APU Fuel Control Unit (FCU) (refer to
Figure 04−02−6).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
STARTER
GENERATOR
FUEL CONTROL
UNIT
Accessory Gearbox
Figure 04−02−6
The 115 VAC generator provides the aircraft with an alternate source of
AC power. When the APU has established on speed, the AC power can
be used by the electrical system of the aircraft.
The DC starter motor, and the FCU are controlled by the ECU.
The FCU controls the pressure and the quantity of fuel that goes to the
fuel nozzels.
F. APU – Fuel supply

Fuel to the APU is fed from the left engine/APU fuel line through the APU
shutoff valve.
Fuel can be supplied to the APU by:
• The left main engine fuel ejector pump if the left engine is operating,
• Either of the fuel tank AC boost pumps, or
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

• Suction-feed if AC power is not available and the left engine is not

operating.
The FCU is controlled by the ECU. During start, the FCU provides the
correct amount of fuel for start and acceleration to full rated speed. Once
rated speed is reached, fuel flow is modulated to meet the demands of
varying pneumatic and electrical loads while maintaining a constant
speed.
Figure 04−02−7 shows a simplified schematic of the APU fuel
system.
Figure 04−02−8 shows the APU fuel feed operation on the FUEL
synoptic page.
FUEL SUPPLY
APU FUEL SHUTOFF

VALVE (SOV)
FUEL INLET FILTER
FUEL CONTROL UNIT INLET GUIDE VANE

(FCU) ACTUATOR
SURGE CONTROL VALVE

FUEL NOZZLES (SCV)
APU − Fuel system

Figure 04−02−7
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
MAIN EJECTOR
APU FUEL
SHUTOFF VALVE
COLLECTOR TANK (AC BOOST PUMP)
FUEL synoptic page − APU fuel supply indication

Figure 04−02−8
G. APU – Oil supply

The APU engine and generator share the same oil for lubrication and
cooling. The oil is cooled by an air/oil heat exchanger.
Oil quantity, pressure, and temperature are monitored by the ECU and
displayed on the STATUS synoptic page.
Figure 04−02−9 shows the APU oil indications on the STATUS
synoptic page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

STATUS synoptic page − Oil indications

Figure 04−02−9
APU – OPERATION
A. Overview
The APU operation includes:
• Starting,
• Shutdown, and
• Automatic shutdown.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
B. APU starting
The aircraft battery bus supplies electrical power to start the APU. The
DC power energizes the ignition and the starter motor.
The APU requires either the Transformer Rectifier Unit 3 (TRU 3) when
external AC power is available, or both batteries for starting. The
electrical power provides mechanical energy through the starter motor to
rotate the engine and energizes the ignition unit. The ECU prevents APU
start from TRU 3 if any TRU is inoperative. When the batteries are used
for starting the APU, battery 1 powers the ECU while battery 2 turns the
APU starter.
When the APU switch is selected and held to the START position for at
least three seconds, the ECU:
• Commands an APU BITE test,
• Opens the APU inlet door,
• Opens the APU fuel shutoff valve,
• Turns on the left AC fuel boost pump (on the ground with left engine
off and AC power available), and
• Begins the APU start sequence.
With the RPM below 70% during start sequence, the APU IN START
status message appears (refer to Figure 04−02−10).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

STATUS synoptic page − APU IN START

Figure 04−02−10
When the RPM is above 70%, the status message changes to APU ON
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
STATUS synoptic page − APU ON

Figure 04−02−11
When the RPM reaches 95%, it is ready for electrical and pneumatic
loading.
The APU is limited to a maximum of three start attempts within one hour,
with two minutes between each start. The ECU prevents restart until
RPM drops below 7%.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NOTE
Use of electrical and pneumatic power produced from
the APU is described in the electrical and pneumatic
chapters of this publication.
C. APU shutdown
When the APU switch is selected OFF, the ECU starts a 60 second cool
down period. After the cool down is completed, the ECU shuts down the
APU, and closes the inlet door.
D. Automatic shutdown
The ECU will initiate an automatic shutdown under the conditions given
in the table that follows:
CONDITION AUTO AUTO

SHUTDOWN ON SHUTDOWN IN
GROUND FLIGHT
Failed/slow/hot/hung start YES YES
RPM underspeed YES NO
RPM overspeed/signal loss YES YES
Critical ECU fault (i.e. loss of DC YES YES
power)
Loss of ARINC inputs to the ECU YES YES
APU fire YES NO
EGT overtemperature/signal loss YES NO
APU door position YES NO
uncommanded/signal loss
Excessive oil temperature YES NO
Low oil pressure YES NO
Oil filter clogged YES NO
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
CONDITION AUTO AUTO

SHUTDOWN ON SHUTDOWN IN
GROUND FLIGHT
APU inlet overheat/reverse flow YES NO
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

APU − Controls and indications
O
APU – CONTROLS
A. APU panel
The APU panel includes the APU switch and the APU FAIL light. The
APU switch is a spring-loaded switch, and has three positions:
The APU switch is a spring-loaded switch, and has three positions:
• OFF: The APU shuts down.
• RUN: The APU is running.
• START: When held for three seconds, the APU initiates the start
sequence.
Figure 04−03−1 shows the APU panel.
APU panel − APU switch

Figure 04−03−1
The APU FAIL light illuminates when the conditions that follow occur:
• APU or Electronic Control Unit (ECU) fails a BITE test,
• APU fire detection fails on the ground, and
• Failed start.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

O APU − Controls and indications
NOTE
For a failed start, the APU SHUTDOWN advisory
message is displayed on the EICAS page in addition to
the FAIL light on the APU panel.
The FAIL light goes off when the APU is selected OFF.
B. External service panel – APU SHUT OFF switch

The APU can be shut down from outside the flight compartment through
the APU SHUT OFF switch on the external service panel.
Figure 04−03−2 shows the external service panel location and the
APU SHUT OFF switch.
External service panel − APU SHUTOFF switch

Figure 04−03−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
C. APU compartment – APU shutoff switch

The APU compartment has an APU shutoff switch located in the forward
firewall enclosure of the APU compartment (refer to
Figure 04−03−3). When the switch is pressed, it commands the
Electronic Control Unit (ECU) to shut down the APU.
APU EMERGENCY
STOP LIGHT
APU compartment − APU shutoff switch

Figure 04−03−3
D. AIR panel – APU BLEED switch

The APU BLEED switch controls the APU bleed valve.
For details, refer to Chapter 02 – APU bleed switch
Figure 04−03−4 shows the APU BLEED switch.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

AIR panel − APU BLEED switch

Figure 04−03−4
E. ELECTRICAL panel – APU GEN switch

The APU GEN switch on the ELECTRICAL panel controls the APU
generator.
For details, refer to Chapter 07 – APU GEN switch.
Figure 04−03−5 shows the APU GEN switch on the ELECTRICAL
panel.
ELECTRICAL panel − APU GEN switch

Figure 04−03−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
F. ENGINE AND APU FIRE panel – APU FIRE switch

The APU FIRE switch (refer to Figure 04−03−6) on the ENGINE
AND APU FIRE panel arms the APU fire-extinguishing bottle.
For details, refer to Chapter 09 – APU fire extinguishing.
FIRE panel − APU fire switch

Figure 04−03−6
APU – INDICATIONS
A. AIR, FUEL and ELEC synoptic pages
The APU indications are also provided by the AIR, FUEL, and electrical
(ELEC) synoptic pages. The FUEL synoptic page provides indications
related to the APU fuel feed (refer to Figure 04−03−7).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

MAIN EJECTOR
APU FUEL
SHUTOFF VALVE
COLLECTOR TANK (AC BOOST PUMP)
FUEL synoptic page − APU fuel supply indications

Figure 04−03−7
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
The AIR synoptic page provides indications related to the APU bleed air
APU BLEED ON APU BLEED OFF
AIR synoptic page − APU bleed air indication

Figure 04−03−8
The ELEC synoptic page provides indications on the APU generator load
and electrical distribution (refer to Figure 04−03−9).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

APU PWR ONLINE EXT PWR IN USE AND

APU PWR ONLINE
ELEC synoptic page − APU GEN online indications

Figure 04−03−9
B. STATUS synoptic page

The APU indications on the STATUS synoptic page (refer to
Figure 04−03−10) include:
• APU speed (RPM) (refer to Figure 04−03−11),
• APU Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) (refer to
Figure 04−03−11),
• APU inlet door position (DOOR) (refer to Figure 04−03−12),
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
• APU oil temperature (OIL TEMP) (refer to Figure 04−03−11),

• APU oil pressure (OIL PRESS) (refer to Figure 04−03−12), and
• APU oil quantity (OIL QTY) (refer to Figure 04−03−12).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

STATUS synoptic page − APU indications

Figure 04−03−10
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
APU RPM (RPM in grey)
WHITE .APU operating at or below red line
RED APU operating above red line (overspeed)
YELLOW APU RPM value is invalid
APU EGT (EGT in grey)
WHITE APU operating at or below red line
RED APU operating above red line (overtemperature)
YELLOW APU EGT invalid
APU OIL TEMPERATURE (OIL TEMP in grey)
WHITE APU oil temperature in normal range
Oil temperature at or above high oil temperature yellow line

YELLOW
threshold
YELLOW Invalid oil temperature
STATUS synoptic page − APU indication legend (part 1)

Figure 04−03−11
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

APU OIL PRESSURE (OIL PRESS in grey)
WHITE Oil press in normal range
YELLOW Oil press below low oil press threshold
YELLOW Oil pressure invalid
APU OIL QUANTITY (OIL QTY in grey)
WHITE Oil quantity full
YELLOW Oil quantity below low threshold
WHITE Oil quantity in normal range
YELLOW Oil quantity invalid
APU DOOR (DOOR in grey)
WHITE APU door open and not fail
WHITE APU door closed and not fail
YELLOW APU door open and fail
YELLOW APU door closed fail
YELLOW APU door invalid

Figure 04−03−12
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
APU – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages

APU fire detected. "APU
APU FIRE None
FIRE"
APU has experienced an
overspeed condition (above
APU OVERSPEED None None
106% and has not shut
down.
B. Caution messages

APU failure in flight that does not lead to
APU TO, LDG
automatic shutdown.
Failure of the APU to provide bleed air
APU BLEED FAIL when requested or bleed leak detection TO, LDG
fails.
APU inlet door failed to close when
APU DOOR OPEN TO, LDG
commanded.
APU FIRE DET FAIL Failure of the APU fire detection syste. TO, LDG

Loss of redundant or non-critical function
APU FAULT TO, LDG
for the APU.
APU low oil quantity detected on ground
APU OIL LO QTY TO, LDG
while APU is not running.
Failures detected that will cause the APU
APU SHUTDOWN TO, LDG
to shut down.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

D. Status messages

APU IN START APU is performing the startup sequence. None
APU ON APU is running. None
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

COMMUNICATION
O Table of contents
Figure 05−01−4 Communication system controls . . . . . . . . . . . 05−01−6

Figure 05−01−5 AVIONIC synoptic page − CTP tab . . . . . . . . . 05−01−7
Figure 05−01−6 Communication system displays . . . . . . . . . . . 05−01−9
Figure 05−01−7 Radio Interface Unit (RIU) locations . . . . . . . 05−01−10
Figure 05−01−8 Ku−band satellite link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−01−11
Figure 05−01−9 Ku−band connectivity antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . 05−01−12
Figure 05−01−10 EQUIP COOLING panel − INLET
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−01−12
RADIO COMMUNICATION
Figure 05−02−1 Audio Control Panel (ACP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−02−2
Figure 05−02−2 ACP − Volume and transmit switch
locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−02−3
Figure 05−02−3 PTT (Push−To−Talk) locations . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−02−5
Figure 05−02−4 VHF1, VHF2, and VHF3 transceiver
locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−02−7
Figure 05−02−5 Communication system controls . . . . . . . . . . . 05−02−9
Figure 05−02−6 ACP and SELCAL EICAS advisory
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−02−11
RADIO CONTROL AND TUNING

Figure 05−03−1 CTP pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−03−3
Figure 05−03−2 CTP − HF pages <23129001C> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−03−4
Figure 05−03−3 Control Tuning Panel (CTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−03−5
Figure 05−03−4 CTP color logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−03−6
Figure 05−03−5 Left Control Tuning Panel (CTP1) −
Cross−side view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−03−7
Figure 05−03−6 CTP − Line Select Key (LSK)
locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 05−03−8
Issue 012, Jul 26/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

COMMUNICATION
Controller−Pilot Data Link Communications O
(CPDLC) − LINK 2000+ <23240001C>
CNS − CPDLC tile − REQUEST − SPEED REQUEST <23240001C>

Figure 05−08−37
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

COMMUNICATION
O Controller−Pilot Data Link Communications
(CPDLC) − LINK 2000+ <23240001C>
O. Conditional clearances – Special considerations

Pay special attention to the meaning of uplink vertical clearance
message elements that contain the words AT or BY.
The table that follows clarifies the intended meaning of these message
elements:
Message Message intent

AT [time] CLIMB TO AND Instruction that AT or AFTER the specified
MAINTAIN [altitude] time, a climb to the specified level is to
commence, and once reached, the specified
level is to be maintained.
AT [position] CLIMB TO AND Instruction that AFTER PASSING the
MAINTAIN [altitude] specified position, a climb to the specified
level is to commence, and once reached, the
specified level is to be maintained.
AT [time] DESCEND TO Instruction that AT or AFTER the specified
AND MAINTAIN [altitude] time, a descent to the specified level is to
commence, and once reached, the specified
level is to be maintained.
AT [position] DESCEND TO Instruction that AFTER PASSING the
AND MAINTAIN [altitude] specified position, a descent to the specified
level is to commence, and once reached,
the specified level is to be maintained.
CLIMB TO REACH [altitude] Instruction that a climb is to commence at a
BY [time] rate such that the specified level is reached
AT or BEFORE the specified time.
CLIMB TO REACH [altitude] Instruction that a climb is to commence at a
BY [position] rate such that the specified level is reached
BEFORE PASSING the specified position.
DESCEND TO REACH Instruction that a descent is to commence at
[altitude] BY [time] a rate such that the specified level is
reached AT or BEFORE the specified time.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Table of contents
O
Figure 08−03−47 ADI − Altitude indications − Vertical

speed indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−03−57
Figure 08−03−48 ADI − Vertical speed fail indication . . . . . . . . 08−03−58
Figure 08−03−49 ADI − Vertical deviation indicator
legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−03−60
Figure 08−03−50 ADI − Lateral deviation indicator
legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−03−61
Figure 08−03−51 PFD − Horizontal Situation Indicator
(HSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−03−63
Figure 08−03−52 PFD − HSI overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−03−64
Figure 08−03−53 PFD − HSI mini map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−03−65
Figure 08−03−54 Chronometer controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−03−66
Figure 08−03−55 HSI − HDG miscompare indications . . . . . . . 08−03−67
Figure 08−03−56 HSI − HDG fail indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−03−68
Figure 08−03−57 Compressed PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−03−69
MULTIFUNCTION WINDOW (MFW)

Figure 08−04−1 Multifunction Window (MFW) display. . . . . . . . 08−04−1
Figure 08−04−2 Control of MFWs from CTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−04−2
Figure 08−04−3 Control of MFWs from the MKP. . . . . . . . . . . . 08−04−4
Figure 08−04−4 Control of MFWs from the CCP . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−04−5
Figure 08−04−5 Synoptic pages − Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−04−6
Figure 08−04−6 STATUS synoptic page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−04−9
Figure 08−04−7 STATUS synoptic page −
Temperature legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−04−11
Figure 08−04−8 EICAS page and STATUS synoptic
page − Engine oil indication legend . . . . . . . . 08−04−12
Figure 08−04−9 STATUS synoptic page − APU
indication legend (part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 08−04−13
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
DISPLAY SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

A. Display Unit (DU)
The display system uses five Display Units (DUs). Four DUs are located
across the flight instrument panel and one DU is on the center pedestal
CONTROL TUNING PANEL (CTP) ISI CONTROL TUNING PANEL (CTP)
DU1 DU2 DU3 DU4
DU5
MULTIFUNCTION KEYBOARD MULTIFUNCTION KEYBOARD

PANEL (MKP) PANEL (MKP)
CURSOR CONTROL CURSOR CONTROL

PANEL (CCP) PANEL (CCP)
REVERSION SWITCH
PANEL (RSP)
Display unit/control panel overview

Figure 08−02−1
They are identified as:
• DU 1 (left outboard),
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
• DU 2 (left inboard),
• DU 3 (right inboard),
• DU 4 (right outboard), and
• DU 5 (center pedestal).
The DUs are high-resolution, Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screens, with
an integrated microprocessor, and are interchangeable. They display:
• Flight parameters,
• Navigation information,
• Communication information,
• Approach and weather charts,
• System synoptic pages,
• Electronic Checklist (ECL), and
• Maintenance data.
To select and control a display, and to enter data, each pilot can use one
of the panels that follow:
• Control Tuning Panel (CTP), or
• Multifunction Keyboard Panels (MKP), or
• Cursor Control Panel (CCP).
Automatic and manual reversion capabilities ensure that critical flight
data stays in view if there is a DU failure.
The information displayed on the DUs is grouped into three specific
areas:
• Primary Flight Display (PFD),
• Engine Indication and Crew Alerting System (EICAS), and
• Multifunction Window (MFW).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
B. Primary Flight Display (PFD)

The Primary Flight Display (PFD) includes the Attitude Direction Indicator
(ADI) and the Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI). It displays the
airspeed, altitude, Flight Director (FD) commands, and the Flight Mode
Annunciator (FMA) and navigation information (refer to
Figure 08−02−2).
UPPER
PFD
LOWER
PFD
Primary Flight Display (PFD)

Figure 08−02−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
The PFDs are displayed on DU 1 and DU 4. They occupy the full surface
of the DU screen. During multiple DU failures or during reversion mode,
a compressed version of the PFDs will be displayed on a quarter of the
screen surface (refer to Figure 08−02−3).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
COMP COMP
PFD PFD
MFW FAIL FAIL MFW
COMP COMP
EICAS EICAS
MFW MFW
Compressed PFD
Figure 08−02−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
C. Engine Indication and Crew Alerting System (EICAS)

The Engine Indication and Crew Alerting System (EICAS) displays:
• All the engine indications: N1, Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT), N2,
Fuel Flow (FF), oil pressure (OIL PRESS), and oil temperature (OIL
TEMP),
• Total fuel,
• Landing gear position,
• Flap and spoiler positions,
• AIL trim, RUDDER trim, and STAB trim position,
• Flight deck, cabin, and forward cargo bay temperatures,
• Cabin altitude (CAB ALT), differential pressure (ΔP), and climb or
descent rate (RATE),
• Landing elevation (LDG ELEV),
• Crew oxygen indication (CREW OXY),
• EICAS messages (warning, caution, advisory and status), and
• Communication flags and messages.
The default position of the EICAS page display is the right half of DU 2. If
there is a malfunction of DU 2, the EICAS page is displayed on the left
half of DU 3 (refer to Figure 08−02−4).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
EICAS page
Figure 08−02−4
D. Multifunction Window (MFW)

Each Multifunction Window (MFW) occupies half a screen or the full
screen when the MFW map is displayed. There are five MFW displays.
They are displayed on DU 2, DU 3, and DU 5 (half of DU 2 or DU 3
displays the EICAS page) (refer to Figure 08−02−5). The MFWs
can display different types of aircraft system and flight information that
includes:
• MFW maps and associated overlays, including airport moving map,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
• Vertical Situation Display (VSD) can be selected on the lower

one-third of the MAP format,
• Synoptic pages,
• Electronic Checklist (ECL),
• Flight Management System (FMS) interface: Initiation, route
planning, performance, etc.,
• Radio Tuning: Communication, Navigation and Surveillance (CNS)
page,
• Controller−Pilot Data Link Communications (CPDLC), <23249001C>
• Satellite Communication (SATCOM), <23150006C>
• Data Link (DLK): AOC and ATS,
• Graphical Weather (GWX) charts: DLK or satellite,
• Approach charts (if installed),
• En route charts (if installed),
• Video (if installed),
• Document reader (if installed),
• Maintenance, and
• Database status.
NOTE
The MFWs can be displayed on DU 1 and DU 4 if
multiple DUs fail or during reversion mode.
Issue 012, Jul 26/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
Multifunction Window (MFW) − MAP

Figure 08−02−5
E. Normal display configuration

In normal configuration (refer to Figure 08−02−6):
• DU 1 and DU 4 display the Primary Flight Displays (PFDs),
• DU 2 displays a MFW on the left side, and the EICAS page on the
right side,
• DU 3 displays two MFWs, and
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
• DU 5 displays two MFWs.
PFD MFW EICAS MFW MFW PFD
MFW MFW
Normal display configuration

Figure 08−02−6
NOTE
If the copilot is the pilot flying, DU 2 will show two
MFWs and DU 3 will show the EICAS page (left half)
and a MFW (right half).
The MFWs can be configured by the flight crew to show FMS, route and
map displays, synoptic pages, tuning windows, charts, documents, video,
or Electronic Checklist (ECL).
F. Configuration on emergency or battery power

When operating on emergency power (ESS BUS powered by RAT or
batteries) or battery power only, DU 1 and DU 2 are always powered,
which allows the left side to be fully operational.
The PFD is on DU 1, and the MAP and EICAS pages are on DU 2 (refer
to Figure 08−02−7). In this case, the right side Cursor Control
Panel provides cross-side management.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
ISI
PFD MFW EICAS

(MAP)
LDG
Display configuration on essential or battery power

Figure 08−02−7
DISPLAY CONTROLS
A. Control Tuning Panel (CTP)
The left and right Control Tuning Panels (CTPs), located on the
glareshield, are used to select:
• PFD formats,
• Overlays,
• Navigation sources,
• Range (weather and radar),
• Communication (COM) tuning,
• Minimums,
• Bearing pointers,
• Transponder, and
• Navigation (NAV) tuning.
The CTP includes a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen with Line Select
Keys (LSKs) and specific switches (refer to Figure 08−02−8).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
BRT (BRIGHTNESS)/
OFF
RANGE/
STBY (STANDBY)/ INBD DSPLY
WXR ON (WEATHER (INBOARD DISPLAY) LINE SELECT
TUNE/MENU
RADAR ON) KEYS
QUICK
ACCESS
KEYS
TERR
(TERRAIN)
IDENT
TFC (IDENTI−
(TRAFFIC) FICATION)
WX
(WEATHER) 1/2
LINE SELECT (CROSS−SIDE
BARO (BAROMETRIC)/
KEYS TUNE/DATA TUNING)
NAV SRC (PUSH STANDARD)
(NAVIGATION SOURCE)
Control Tuning Panel (CTP)

Figure 08−02−8
The BRT/OFF switch adjusts the CTP display brightness when turned.
When selected OFF, it turns off the associated CTP.
The CTP display has specific switches:
• TUNE/MENU – Selects the radio tuning top level page. If the radio
tuning page is already displayed, the TUNE/MENU switch displays
the CTP main menu page.
• IDENT – Activates transponder identification transmission to Air
Traffic Control (ATC) for 18 seconds (ID annunciated in cyan on the
CTP display and ATC main page).
• 1/2 (cross−side tuning) – Allows cross−side radio tuning (cross−side
tuning is displayed in amber).
• TUNE/DATA – Controls the items on the CTP display.
For detailed information about the radio tuning functions, refer to Chapter
05 — Communication.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
The CTP MENU display has the soft switches that follow:
• <WXR (Weather Radar) – Provides control of the weather radar.
• <CLOCK – Display and entry of UTC time and date. Also displays
flight time, FMS origin airport departure time, and arrival airport time.
• <STBY NAV (Standby Navigation) – Displays the compass with
course pointer/deviation/direction, present position and source,
source block data (desired track and distance), ground speed, and
bearing pointer display.
• FPV CAGE ON/OFF – Turns the Flight Path Vector (FPV) caging
OFF or ON on the PFD.
• PFD/NAV> – Selects Barometric (BARO), radio (RADIO) minimum
altitude, or OFF.
The RANGE switch adjusts the range on the MAP page. The range steps
are: 2, 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320 and 640 nm. The STBY WXR ON inset
switch allows selection of the weather radar to on or standby.
The BARO (barometric) switch sets the barometric pressure on the
Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI) to either inches of mercury (inHg) or
Hectopascals (HPA). The inset PUSH STD (push standard) switch sets
the barometric pressure to the standard atmosphere setting.
The TERR (Terrain), TFC (Traffic), and WX (Weather) switches
respectively control the terrain, Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance
System (TCAS), and weather overlays in the target windows.
For detailed information about navigation-related functions, refer to
Chapter 16 – Navigation.
The left and right CTPs have dedicated switches to control the selection
on DU 2 and DU 3. Once selected, the L INBD DSPL and R INBD DSPL
switches allow the selection of the desired side of the target window
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
CTP DU selection
Figure 08−02−9
The CTP has the Quick Access Keys (QAKs) that follow:
• MAP,
• FMS,
• CNS,
• CHKL,
• SYN, and
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
• DATA.
They allow selection of the desired page in the target window (refer to
Figure 08−02−10).
CTP − Quick Access Keys (QAKs)

Figure 08−02−10
• MAP: Displays the last selected MAP page. Subsequent pushes of
the MAP QAK cycles through the map formats (MAP, PLAN).
• FMS: Opens the last selected FMS page displayed, or opens the
DBAS/STATUS page when first selected. Multiple pushes will cycle
through the FMS page (DBASE (Database), POS (Position), FPLN
(Flight Plan), PERF (Performance), and ROUTE).
• CNS (Communication, Navigation and Surveillance): Opens the
TUNE page. Multiple pushes will cycle through the CNS formats
(TUNE, DLK (Data Link), CPDLC, SATCOM and GWX). If there are
any CPDLC messages in the inbox, the CPDLC page will open when
the CNS switch is pushed.
• CHKL: Opens the checklist on the queue page. If there is only one
warning or caution message in the EICAS list, the associated
message checklist opens.
• SYN: Opens the synoptic page. Multiple presses cycle through the
synoptic pages and follow the synoptic page menu order (STATUS,
AIR, DOOR, ELEC, FLT CTRL, FUEL, HYD, AVIONIC, INFO and
CB).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
• DATA: Opens the last displayed application, depending on the

options installed (DBASE, CHART, VIDEO, DOC).
B. Cursor Control Panel (CCP)

Two Cursor Control Panels (CCPs) located on the center pedestal (refer
to Figure 08−02−11), below each Multifunction Keyboard Panel
(MKP), provide the control interface for the display cursor and allow item
selection from the on-screen menus. In normal mode, the left CCP
interacts with the Multifunction Windows (MFW) located on DU 2 and DU
5. The right CCP interacts with the MFWs on DU 3 and DU 5.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
TRACKBALL
MENU
SWITCH
SELECT
SELECT SWITCH
SWITCH
PTT SWITCH
PTT SWITCH
(PUSH−TO−TALK)
(PUSH−TO−TALK)
DOUBLE STACK KNOB DISPLAY SELECT SWITCHES
Cursor Control Panel (CCP)

Figure 08−02−11
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
Each CCP includes:

• Trackball to maneuver the display cursor.
• Double Stack Knob (DSK), which includes an inner and an outer
knob to navigate and a PUSH ENTER switch.
• MENU switch to display the menu list in the MFW where the cursor is
positioned.
• Display Select (DSPL SEL) – UPR/LWR switches, which are used to
assign the on-side cursor to the home position of the upper/lower
display.
• Select switches, which are used to validate data entry fields or allow
selection of interactive elements.
• Push-To-Talk (PTT) switches, which are used to open
communication on the selected transmit channels.
The outer knob of the DSK is used to position scroll list content, position
the data entry cursor, or change the value of various display items or
selection boxes. The inner knob is a rotary control used to position the
scroll list content or change the value of various display items or
selection boxes.
The DSPL SEL activates the cursor on the selected display unit. The
trackball can also be used to navigate from one DU to the next. The left
and right CCP DSPL SEL – UPR switch respectively positions the cursor
on the home position of DU 2 and DU 3. The DSPL SEL – LWR switch
positions the cursor of the selected CCP side on the DU 5 corresponding
side.
The MENU switch on the CCP opens the on-screen page menu (refer to
Figure 08−02−12). The menu list appears in the partition where the
cursor is positioned. The menu list has the same functions as the Quick
Access Keys (QAKs) on the MKP and CTP.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
MAP MAP
FMS FMS
CNS CNS
CHKL CHKL
SYN SYN
DATA DATA
MFW MFW
LEFT CURSOR CONTROL PANEL RIGHT CURSOR CONTROL PANEL

(CCP) (CCP)
Control of MFWs from the CCP

Figure 08−02−12
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
C. Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP)

The MKP provides alphanumeric keyboard entry with a readout line
(scratchpad) and FMS quick access keys to interact with the FMS
Multifunction Windows (MFWs). It is also a backup for the CCP. The left
and right MKPs are located on the center pedestal (refer to
Figure 08−02−13). In normal operation, the left MKP will be used by
the pilot to interact with DU 2 and DU 5 and the right MKP will be used by
the copilot to interact with DU 3 and DU 5.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
READOUT LINE
FMS QUICK
ACCESS
KEYS
PREVIOUS
AND NEXT
QUICK SWITCHES
ACCESS
KEYS
CAS SWITCH
Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP)

Figure 08−02−13
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
The MKP has five FMS quick access keys (refer to

Figure 08−02−14):
• MSG: Opens the FMS MSG (message) dialog box window on DU 5,
• ROUTE: Opens the FMS route window on DU 5,
• Direct to (symbol): Opens the direct to dialog box,
• DEP/ARR: Opens the DEPARTURE or ARRIVAL dialog box
(depending on the phase of flight), and
• FMS: Opens an FMS page.
FMS QUICK
ACCESS KEYS
FMS QUICK ACCESS KEYS
FMS quick access keys

Figure 08−02−14
The left MKP Quick Access Keys (QAKs) control the content that is
displayed on the left half of DU 5 (left MFW). The right MKP QAKs
control the content that is displayed on the right half of DU 5 (right MFW).
The MKP has the six QAKs that follow:
• MAP,
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
• FMS,
• CNS,
• CHKL,
• SYN, and
• DATA.
Each one opens the respective page in a MFW.
The QAKs of the MKP and the CTP allow the selection of specific MFW
formats without the requirement to use the Cursor Control Panel (CCP)
trackball.
The FMS uses two additional switches, CNCL and EXEC, to cancel or
execute a modified flight plan. For detailed information, refer to Chapter
22 – Flight Management System.
The readout line displays the text entered from the MKP keyboard. When
the ENTER switch is pushed, the text entered in the readout line is
uploaded to the selected field. If the readout line is empty and the
ENTER switch is pushed, the content of the selected field is copied to the
readout line.
Directional arrows used with the ENTER key (to confirm selection), can
manage display format and menu item selection (backup to the CCP).
The CAS switch is used to cycle through the EICAS message pages.
When the last page is reached, the next push of the CAS switch
collapses the CAS stack and hides active caution, advisory, and status
messages. In EICAS compressed mode, both EICAS stacks are
synchronized.
The PREV and NEXT switches are used to navigate to the previous or
next page of the selected page sequence. In PLAN format, NEXT or
PREV respectively position the MAP center on the next or the previous
waypoint in the waypoint list.
The MKP QAKs allow MFW selection on DU 5, without the use of the
CCP trackball. The CTP and the MKP QAKs have the same functions
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
MFW MFW
DU 5
MKP DU selection
Figure 08−02−15
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
D. Display dimming
Each DU has an associated control dimming switch, located on each
side of the glareshield (for DU 1, DU 2, DU 3 and DU 4), and on the
lights and cockpit door panel (for DU 5) (refer to Figure 08−02−16).
The left glareshield panel has two dimming control switches. The OUTBD
switch adjusts the brightness of DU 1 and the INBD switch adjusts the
brightness of DU 2. The brightness of DU 3 and DU 4 are respectively
adjusted with the INBD and OUTBD dimming switches on the right
glareshield panel.
Each switch turns from the OFF position (counterclockwise) to the BRT
(brightest) position (clockwise). If there is a switch failure, the display will
automatically adjust to 80% brightness.
The DSPL LWR/ISI switch, located on the lights and cockpit door panel,
adjusts the brightness of both the Integrated Standby Instrument (ISI)
and DU 5. The outer knob controls the brightness of DU 5 and the inner
adjusts the ISI display. The inner and outer switches rotate from the OFF
position (counterclockwise) to the BRT (brightest) position (clockwise). If
there is a switch failure, the display will automatically adjust to 80%
brightness.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
ISI
LDG
Display dimming switches

Figure 08−02−16
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
E. Reversion Switch Panel (RSP)

The Reversion Switch Panel (RSP), located on the center pedestal (refer
to Figure 08−02−17), allows:
• DISPLAY page swap (in normal conditions),
• PFD and EICAS page compressed mode selection (if there is a DU
failure),
• DU tuning and cursor inhibit,
• Flight Director and Autothrottle (FD/AT) source channel selection,
• Inertial Reference System (IRS) source selection (for PFDs) and
• Air Data System (ADS) source selection (for PFDs, and ISI)
DISPLAY
SWITCH L AND R CURSOR INHIB
SWITCHES
DSPL TUNE FD/AT ALTN

(FLIGHT DIRECTOR/ PFD (PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY)
(DISPLAY TUNE)
AUTOTHROTTLE ALTERNATE) AND ISI (INTEGRATED STANDBY
INHIB (INHIBIT)
SWITCH INSTRUMENT)
SWITCH
CHANGE SOURCE SWITCHES
Reversion Switch Panel (RSP)

Figure 08−02−17
One EICAS page can be displayed in the flight deck, in all configurations.
The default location for the EICAS page is the right side of DU 2. The
three-position DISPLAY switch (REV, NORM and SWAP), located on the
RSP, is used to change the position of the EICAS page in different DU.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
When the NORM (normal) position is selected, the EICAS page is

displayed on DU 2. The NORM position also allows automatic reversion
when one or more DU(s) fail(s). Refer to Figure 08−02−18.
REVERSION SWITCH PANEL
MFW MFW
EICAS page swap to DU 3 (left side) part 1

Figure 08−02−18
When the SWAP position is selected, DU 2 displays two MFWs, and DU
3 displays the EICAS page on the left side (refer to
Figure 08−02−19). The EICAS swapping function is available when
all DUs are functioning, or if DU 5 is failed (refer to MMEL).
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
PFD MFW MFW EICAS MFW PFD
MFW MFW
EICAS page swap to DU 3 (left side) part 2

Figure 08−02−19
When the REV position is selected, the manual reversion mode is
activated only when two or three DUs have failed.
When the DSPL TUNE — INHIB switch is selected, the bar above the
switch is illuminated green to indicate that the display tuning is disabled.
If the DSPL TUNE — INHIB switch is pushed a second time, the display
tuning function will be restored.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
NOTE
When the display tuning is inhibited and both CTPs are
inhibited from tuning, the left and right VHF COM radios
tune to 121.5 MHz for emergency communication.
The FD/AT – ALTN switch allows the transfer of the Flight Director (FD)
and the Autothrottle (AT) source to the alternate channel (the default
channel changes every day at power-up).
The L/R CURSOR INHIB switches disable the trackball of the associated
CCP. In this situation, the cursor is moved using the directional arrows
on the Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP).
The ADS and IRS switches allow manual selection of an alternate source
for the selected display. If there is a case of failure of any ADS or IRS
source, the system automatically changes the ADS or IRS source on the
affected display (L PFD, R PFD or ISI).
For detailed information about the ADS/IRS, refer to Chapter 10 – Flight
Controls and Chapter 16 – Navigation.
DISPLAY UNIT REVERSION

A. Automatic reversion
If a DU fails, the system automatically reconfigures the remaining DUs to
show the critical flight parameters. Setting the OFF/BRT switch to OFF
can also cause automatic reversion.
B. Display unit automatic reversion

When a DU failure occurs, a DU is selected OFF, or when reversion is
manually selected, the remaining DUs automatically reconfigure to show
a half PFD and the EICAS page.
The resulting DU reconfiguration is based on where the failure occurs
and how many DUs are inoperative:
• One inoperative DU,
• Two inoperative DUs,
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
• Three inoperative DUs, or

• Four inoperative DUs.
(1) Half PFD format
In a half PFD format, the ADI field of view, and the lateral and
vertical scaling remain unchanged. However, as the space between
the altitude and speed tapes is reduced, the FPV lateral travel
(conformal) boundary is reduced from ±22.5 degrees to ±13.2
degrees. This results in an increased possibility that the FPV will
become non-conformal (ghosted) in certain crosswind conditions.
In a half PFD format, the HSI displays compass and navigation
information. The information is presented differently depending on
the information displayed in the adjacent DU partition.
When a MFW (MAP) is displayed in the partition adjacent to the half
PFD on the same DU, there is no change in the compass and
navigation information displayed. Refer to Figure 08−02−20.
(2) HSI Mini-Map
In a half PFD format, when the EICAS page, synoptic page, ECL, or
FMS are displayed adjacent to the half PFD on the same DU, the
HSI compass changes to a mini-map.
The mini-map displays navigation source, FMS route and way
points, and TCAS traffic. Map range, and TERRAIN and WXR
overlays are selectable from the associated CTP, as required.
TERR is automatically displayed during a TAWS event. Cursor
control on the mini-map is not possible.
FMS/HSI messages are displayed on the HSI mini-map. However,
because of the reduced capability of the half PFD, it is not always
possible to open the dialogue box to acknowledge the messages.
To clear the messages, pilots may have to interchange the MFW
and EICAS page displays.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
(3) The EICAS display

As a result of the half PFD format, the EICAS information layout
and content is not affected by DU failures. The EICAS page will
always remain in view. Flight deck, cabin, and cargo temperatures
and pressurization continue to be displayed.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
HALF HALF
PFD EICAS MFW PFD
HSI
DU DU
HALF PFD WITH EICAS HALF PFD WITH MFW
MINI−MAP
CONTROLS
MINI−MAP WITH TERR AND WX OVERLAY
CONTROL TUNING PANEL

AMBER FMS AND HSI MESSAGES
Half PFD HSI formats

Figure 08−02−20
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
C. One display unit inoperative

When one outboard DU fails (DU 1 or DU 4), the remaining operating
PFD moves inboard in half PFD format.
When one of the inboard DU (DU 2 or DU 3) is inoperative, the full PFD
with a mini-map is shown on the outboard DU (DU 1 or DU 4). Because a
MAP is not available on the adjacent DU, the full PFD with mini-map
includes MAP overlays to improve situational awareness. Refer to
Figure 08−02−21.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
PFD
HALF PFD
FAIL PFD EICAS MFW MFW
MINI−MAP HSI
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
MFW DU5 MFW
DU 5
DU 1 FAILED
PFD PFD
FAIL EICAS MFW
MINI−MAP HSI
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
MFW MFW
DU 5
DU 2 FAILED
One DU inoperative
Figure 08−02−21
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
D. Two display units inoperative

When two inoperative DUs are not paired, the remaining DUs reconfigure
to show a half or full PFD, MFW and EICAS page (refer to
Figure 08−02−22).
If a MFW (MAP) is not available on the adjacent DU, the PFD, full or half,
is displayed with a mini-map.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
PFD
HALF
FAIL PFD EICAS MFW MFW
HSI
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
FAIL
DU 5
DU 1 AND DU 5 FAILED
PFD PFD
FAIL EICAS MFW
HSI
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
FAIL
DU 5
DU 2 AND DU 5 FAILED
Two unpaired DUs inoperative

Figure 08−02−22
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
When a pair of DUs (DU 1 and DU 2, or DU 3 and DU 4) fail (refer to

Figure 08−02−23):
• The PFD is shown on the outboard DU, and the EICAS page and
MFW are shown on the inboard DU.
• A half PFD and MFW are shown on DU 5.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
PFD
FAIL FAIL EICAS MFW
HSI
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
HALF
PFD MFW
HSI
DU 5
OR
PFD
MFW EICAS FAIL FAIL
HSI
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
HALF
MFW PFD
HSI
DU 5
Two paired DUs inoperative

Figure 08−02−23
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
E. Three display units inoperative

When the two operating DUs are not paired, a half PFD, the EICAS
page, and the MFW are shown. The location of the MFW and the EICAS
page depends on which DUs have failed.
With unpaired operating DUs, if a MFW (MAP) is not available on the
adjacent DU, the half PFD is displayed with a mini-map. Refer to
Figure 08−02−24.
HALF EICAS MFW HALF

PFD PFD
HSI
Operating display units not paired

Figure 08−02−24
When the operating DUs are on the pilot side, the full PFD is shown on
DU 1, and the EICAS page and MFW are shown on DU 2.
When the operating DUs are on the copilot side, the full PFD is shown on
DU 4, and the EICAS page and MFW are shown on DU 3. Refer to
Figure 08−02−25.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
PFD PFD
MFW EICAS OR EICAS MFW
HSI HSI
Operating display units paired

Figure 08−02−25
F. Four display units inoperative

If four DUs are inoperative, the remaining DU displays the PFD in half
format, mini-map, and the EICAS page (refer to Figure 08−02−26).
The HSI terrain is not displayed by default. Terrain can be selected using
the TERR overlay pushbutton on the CTP. TERR is automatically
displayed when a terrain warning occurs.
With four DUs inoperative, the reversion switch and menu choices (MAP,
FMS, CNS, CHKL, SYN and DATA) are all unavailable, and the
SELECTION INVALID message appears on the PFD. The TERR, TFC
and WX switches are available for display selections.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
HALF FAIL FAIL FAIL

PFD EICAS
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
FAIL
DU 5
TERRAIN
SELECTION TERRAIN
EVENT
CONTROL TUNING PANEL PFD
Four display units inoperative

Figure 08−02−26
G. Display reversion mode

The DISPLAY reversion mode causes any DU that shows a full PFD to
display a half PFD and either the EICAS page or the MFW on the other
half of the DU.
The DISPLAY manual reversion mode, selected when the DISPLAY
switch is set to REV (refer to Figure 08−02−27), is available if:
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
Reversion Switch Panel (RSP) DISPLAY switch

Figure 08−02−27
• Automatic reversion is triggered and two DUs are inoperative, or
• Only DU 1 and DU 2 are operative, and one or two PFDs display in
full.
When DU 1 and DU 4 fail, manual reversion mode is not available.
(1) Reversion mode message
When the DISPLAY switch is set to REV and the reversion function
is unavailable, the DISPLAY REV MISCONFIG status message is
shown on the EICAS page and the SELECTION INACTIVE
message on the PFD, on the top right portion of the HSI. Refer to
Figure 08−02−28.
If the DISPLAY switch is set to SWAP and the swap function is not
available (no DU 2, DU 3, DU 5 failures), the SELECTION
INACTIVE message is displayed on the PFD, on the top right of the
HSI.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
EICAS
SELECTION INACTIVE message

Figure 08−02−28
H. Two display units inoperative

When two DUs are inoperative, if the DISPLAY switch is set to the REV
position, any full PFD is replaced with a half PFD and either the EICAS
page or the MFW (refer to Figure 08−02−29).
The pilot and copilot cursors operate in the MFWs located on their
respective side (DU 1 and DU 2 for pilot, DU 3 and DU 4 for copilot).
Both cursors operate either MFW located in DU 5.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
HALF FAIL MFW HALF

PFD EICAS PFD
HSI
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
MFW MFW
DU 5
Two display units inoperative − DISPLAY reversion mode selected

Figure 08−02−29
I. Three display units inoperative

When three DUs are inoperative, if the DISPLAY switch is set to the REV
position (refer to Figure 08−02−30):
• The outboard operating DU (DU 1 or DU 4) displays a half PFD and
the MFW.
• The inboard operating DU (DU 2 or DU 3) displays the EICAS page
and the MFW.
The pilot and the copilot cursors operate the MFW located on their
respective side (DU 1 for pilot, DU 4 for copilot), and both cursors
operate in the MFWs on DU 2 or DU 3.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
FAIL FAIL EICAS MFW MFW HALF

PFD
HSI
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
FAIL
DU 5
HALF MFW MFW EICAS FAIL

PFD FAIL
HSI
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
FAIL
DU 5
Three display units inoperative − DISPLAY reversion mode selected

Figure 08−02−30
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
CURSOR CONTROL AND OPERATION

A. Cursor overview
The cursor is controlled by rotating the trackball of the CCP. Cursor
movements are horizontal, vertical, or diagonal.
The pilot-side cursor moves within DU 2 and DU 5 and the copilot cursor
moves within DU 3 and DU 5. Cursor movement is possible in the MFWs
only. The cursor cannot be moved in the EICAS page area or in the
PFDs (refer to Figure 08−02−31).
MFW MFW
COPILOT
PILOT CURSOR CONTROL
CURSOR CONTROL PANEL (CCP)
PANEL (CCP)
LEGEND
Pilot cursor only area.
Copilot cursor only area.
Common cursor area (pilot and copilot).
No cursor area (pilot and copilot).
Normal cursor operation

Figure 08−02−31
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
Cursor movement within a MFW is unrestricted once positioned in the

window. The cursor may be used to select items from the:
• MFW menus,
• Drop-down lists,
• Label keys,
• Toggle controls,
• Dialog boxes, and
• Graphic map objects in the MFW page.
B. Cursor display
The two cursors are similar in dimensions, but the left side cursor is
displayed as a white inverted Y symbol (refer to Figure 08−02−32)
while the right side cursor is displayed as a white X symbol (refer to
Figure 08−02−33).
The cursor fades after 3 minutes of inaction to prevent hiding information
and to declutter the display.
The other possible cursor statuses are:
• Loaded,
• Blooming,
• Ghosted,
• On field,
• On blank, and
• Hidden.
Figure 08−02−32 and Figure 08−02−33 show the different
types of cursor.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
ON FIELD 123 VISIBLE GHOSTED
ON BLANK 123 VISIBLE BLOOMING
4
DURING HIDDEN LOADED
EDITION
INVALID 123
HIDDEN
EDITION
CURSOR STATUS DEPENDING ON SELECTION
Pilot cursor status

Figure 08−02−32
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
123
ON FIELD VISIBLE GHOSTED
ON BLANK 123 VISIBLE BLOOMING
4
DURING HIDDEN LOADED
EDITION
INVALID 123
HIDDEN
EDITION
CURSOR STATUS DEPENDING ON SELECTION
Copilot cursor status

Figure 08−02−33
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
C. Cursor home position

The DSPL SEL switches (UPR and LWR) on each Cursor Control Panel
(CCP) are used to move the cursor to the home positions.
On the pilot side CCP, when the UPR switch is pushed the cursor moves
to the UPR home position located in the upper left corner of DU 2. And
when the LWR switch is pushed, the cursor moves to the LWR home
position located in the upper left corner of the left MFW on DU 5.
On the copilot side CCP, when the UPR switch is pushed the cursor
moves to the UPR home position located in the upper left corner of the
right Multifunction Window (MFW) of DU 3. And when the LWR switch is
pushed, the cursor moves to the LWR home position located in the upper
left corner of the right MFW on DU5.
In normal operation, cross-side cursor is not enabled on DU 2 and DU 3.
The left cursor cannot be enabled to DU 3 and the right cursor cannot be
enabled to DU 2.
Figure 08−02−34 shows the cursor home position.
MFW MFW
Cursor home positions

Figure 08−02−34
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
NOTE
When only one MFW is accessible (three or more DU
failure, or battery power only), both pilots can access
the MFW sequentially (one at a time).
D. Cursor bumping/speed bumps

The pilot and copilot cursors may simultaneously occupy DU 5, but not
on the same MFW. If a cursor enters a MFW where the other cursor is
already located, the first cursor is bumped back to its MFW home
position, giving the arriving cursor priority.
A cursor is also bumped when the MFW is changed to a page that does
not support cursor operation.
A cursor delay, referred to as a speed bump, is used to momentarily stop
the movement of the cursor when it is at the edge of a display. To cross
the speed bump, the trackball must be rolled in the intended direction of
travel. The speed bump prevents the inadvertent movement of the cursor
to the adjacent DU when working at the edge of a display.
Figure 08−02−35 shows the locations of the cursor speed bumps.
MFW MFW
Speed bump.
Speed bumps
Figure 08−02−35
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
E. Drop-down list
The cursor is used to select items listed on drop-down lists.
The movement of the cursor to individual items causes a cyan box to
highlight the associated items. When selected, by pressing the select
switch on the CCP, the listed items are displayed in cyan text (refer to
Figure 08−02−36).
CYZD ONT
TORONTO )−B
TORONTO Center
133.4
RNAV
MISSED APCN
Drop−down list
Figure 08−02−36
Several drop-down lists and menus have single and multiple selection
items. Single-selection items are indicated by a circle that becomes cyan
when selected. Single-selection items automatically disable the previous
selection.
Multiple-selection items are indicated by a check box next to each listed
item. Selected items are shown in cyan with a check-mark in the box
next to each item. Certain menu items may not always be selectable,
depending on format and display configuration.
Disabled or non-selectable items appear as shaded text.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
Figure 08−02−37 shows the single and multiple menu selection.
Single and multiple menu selection

Figure 08−02−37
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Display system
O
F. Cursor inhibit
The associated cursor is inhibited when the L or R CURSOR INHIB
switch on the Reversion Switch Panel (RSP) is pushed. When a cursor is
inhibited, the associated green light is illuminated above the switch.
When the L or R CURSOR INHIB switch is pushed again, the cursor is
enabled (and the green light above it goes off).
When a cursor is inhibited, the CURSOR INHIB status message is
displayed on the EICAS page (refer to Figure 08−02−38).
Cursor inhibit
Figure 08−02−38
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Display system
G. Alternate cursor control

The directional arrows on the MKP are an alternative way to control the
cursor. The directional arrows have control priority if they are selected
simultaneously with the trackball. On some MFW pages, directional
arrows may be used to move one menu tab to another on the selected
display (refer to Figure 08−02−39).
Alternate cursor control

Figure 08−02−39
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY – OVERVIEW

The Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) show flight and navigation data on DU 1
and DU 4 (refer to Figure 08−03−1). Each PFD includes the Flight
Mode Annunciator (FMA), the Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI), and the
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI).
UPPER
PFD
LOWER
PFD

Figure 08−03−1
The ADI supplies the information that follows:
• Attitude,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• Flight Path Vector (FPV),

• Airspeed,
• Altitude, and
• FMA.
The FMA is described in detail in the Automatic Flight chapter (refer to
Chapter 03 – AUTOMATIC FLIGHT).
The HSI includes the information that follows:
• Compass heading,
• Navigation data,
• Flight Management System (FMS) messages,
• Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS),
• Weather radar, and
• Secondary flight data.
If there is a Display Unit (DU) failure, the PFD can be compressed (automatic
or manual reversion). For detailed information about DU failure and
reversion, refer to Chapter 08 – Electronic Display – Display System –
Display Unit Reversion.
ATTITUDE DIRECTION INDICATOR (ADI) – ATTITUDE

A. ADI attitude – Overview
The Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI) is displayed on the top two-thirds of
the DU (refer to Figure 08−03−2). The sky (blue) and the ground
(brown) displays are separated by a horizon line (white). The FMA
occupies the top portion of the ADI, the airspeed indication is on the left,
and the altimeter and vertical speed indications are on the right. The
attitude indications occupy the center portion.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
UPPER
PFD
LOWER
PFD
PFD − ADI and HSI

Figure 08−03−2
The aircraft is represented by two sideways L-shaped symbols. The pitch
indications are located vertically, centered in the ADI. The roll scale and
pointer are located at the top of the attitude display. The slip/skid
indicator is below the white bank angle pointer (refer to
Figure 08−03−3).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
MFW EICAS MFW MFW
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
MFW MFW
ROLL
FMA SCALE
ROLL POINTER DU 5 ALTIMETER
SLIP/SKID
INDICATOR
AIRSPEED
AIRCRAFT
REFERENCE
ATTITUDE DIRECTION INDICATOR (ADI) VERTICAL

SPEED
PFD − Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI)

Figure 08−03−3
B. Pitch indication
The pitch scale consists of horizontal white lines every 2.5 degrees
above and below the horizon. The total pitch scale range is from
90 degrees below to 90 degrees above the horizon. When the aircraft
pitch is 25 degrees above or 24 degrees below the horizon, the PFD
horizon line has reached its travel limit and no longer conforms to the
actual horizon. In this situation, the horizon line is displayed as a white
dashed line (refer to Figure 08−03−4).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
PITCH LINES
NON−CONFORMAL
HORIZON LINE
ADI − Pitch indication

Figure 08−03−4
(1) Pitch limit indicator
Pitch limits are calculated by the Fly-By-Wire (FBW) system. Pitch
limits are indicated by a green indicator for nose up and nose down.
The pitch limits correspond to the hard stops on the sidestick (refer
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
(2) Pitch target marker

The magenta pitch target marker appears when the TOGA switch is
pushed. It indicates the required pitch angle for takeoff and
go-around (refer to Figure 08−03−5). For detailed
information, refer to Automatic Flight, Chapter 03 – AUTOMATIC
FLIGHT.
PITCH LIMIT
INDICATOR
PITCH TARGET
MARKER
(CONFORMAL)
PITCH TARGET MARKER

(NON−CONFORMAL)
ADI − Pitch limit indicator and pitch target marker

Figure 08−03−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
C. Roll indication
The bank angle is displayed as a white triangle against a white roll scale
arc. White marks on the roll scale correspond to the bank angles of 10,
20, 30 and 45 degrees on each side.
When the bank angle exceeds 40 degrees, the 60-degree bank angle
marks (left and right) will be shown. The 60-degree marks are removed
when the bank angle is less than 30 degrees (refer to
Figure 08−03−6).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ROLL LIMIT ROLL

MARKINGS SCALE ARC
ROLL
POINTER
½ BANK ARC
60 DEGREES
TICK MARK
60 DEGREES
TICK MARK
½ BANK ARC
FD OFF
ADI − Roll indications

Figure 08−03−6
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
The Fly-By-Wire (FBW) roll limit markings are displayed as inverted

green L-shaped marks on the roll scale. A green arc on the roll scale
indicates the bank angle range when half bank mode is active.
(1) Slip/skid indicator
The slip/skid indicator is displayed as a white, unfilled trapezoidal
shape below the roll indicator (white triangle) (refer to
Figure 08−03−7). A displacement the width of the trapezoid is
approximately equivalent to one ball displacement of a conventional
turn coordinator.
SLIP/SKID
INDICATOR
ADI − Slip/skid indicator in normal operation

Figure 08−03−7
The slip/skid indicator can also be displayed as a magenta-filled
trapezoid during One Engine Inoperative (OEI) conditions with
slats/flaps not retracted.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
(2) Beta index

The beta index provides guidance for roll input and yaw
compensation during single engine operation. The beta index is
displayed under the Flight Path Vector (FPV) as a green trapezoid
SLIP/SKID
INDICATOR
BETA
INDEX
ADI − Slip/skid indicator and beta index (OEI at takeoff and

weight−off−wheels)
Figure 08−03−8
The beta index computes roll offset based on aircraft configuration
and environmental conditions.
When an engine failure event occurs at takeoff, the beta index is
automatically displayed at weight-off-wheels as a green-filled
trapezoid. In this condition, the slip/skid indicator becomes a
magenta-filled trapezoid.
When the slats/flaps are retracted, the beta index remains in view
as an unfilled green trapezoid and the slip/skid indicator returns to a
white unfilled trapezoid (refer to Figure 08−03−9).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
SLIP/SKID
INDICATOR
BETA
INDEX
ADI − Slip/skid indicator and beta index (OEI with slats/flaps retracted)
Figure 08−03−9
(3) Ground roll-out guidance
Ground roll-out guidance is displayed as a vertical magenta line
used to maintain the aircraft on the center of the runway (refer to
Figure 08−03−10). The ground roll-out guidance line is
displayed when autoland roll-out mode is active (after landing). For
detailed information about the roll-out mode, refer to Chapter 03 –
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
GROUND ROLL−OUT
GUIDANCE
ADI − Ground roll−out guidance

Figure 08−03−10
(4) Unusual attitude
Pitch chevrons indicate to the flight crew an exceedance in the pitch
angle, and point towards the horizon line to assist attitude recovery
(refer to Figure 08−03−11). They display starting on the
30 degree line when the pitch angle exceeds 25 degrees nose up.
They will disappear when the pitch angle returns to less than
20 degree nose up.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
000 4200
140 6
130 4
40 40 2
120 1 500 1
108 30 30 1200
80
100
1
90 20 20 1 000 2
4
80 6
10 10
70
098
12
6
15
3
18
36
10
21
UNUSUAL ATTITUDE PFD DECLUTTERED
8 10 12
40 40 10 10
30 20 20
30
30 30
20 20
40 40
10 10
PITCH CHEVRONS DOWNWARD PITCH CHEVRONS UPWARD
ADI − Unusual attitude

Figure 08−03−11
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
The pitch chevrons are displayed, starting on the 20-degree line,

when the pitch angle exceeds 25 degrees nose down. They will
disappear when the pitch angle returns to less than 10 degrees
nose down.
If the bank angle exceeds 60 degrees or the pitch angle exceeds
30 degrees nose up or 20 degrees nose down, the data shown on
the PFD is reduced (decluttered) to increase unusual attitude
awareness.
All PFD symbols are restored when the pitch attitude is between 25
degrees nose up and 15 degrees nose down, and the bank angle is
less than 60 degrees.
D. ADI miscompare/fail flags

Miscompare fail flags will show on the PFDs when a difference of aircraft
attitude is detected between the PFDs (refer to Figure 08−03−12).
A PIT miscompare amber flag will show when a difference of more than
4 degrees (3 degrees when glideslope is captured) is detected between
the pitch angle indicated on each PFD.
A ROL miscompare amber flag will show when a difference of more than
4 degrees is detected between the bank angle indicated on each PFD.
An ATT miscompare amber flag will show when a difference of more
than 4 degrees is detected between both the pitch and the bank angle
indicated on each PFD.
NOTE
PIT, ROL and ATT miscompares are displayed in the
same position on the PFD.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ADI miscompare indications

Figure 08−03−12
If there is an invalid pitch and roll angle, the ATT red fail flag will show,
and the attitude and the flight path indications are removed from the ADI
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ADI failed indication

Figure 08−03−13
FLIGHT PATH VECTOR (FPV)

A. FPV symbol
The FPV is displayed as a green circle with marks that symbolize the
aircraft fuselage, tail, and wings (refer to Figure 08−03−14). The
FPV is laterally active at 80 knots and vertically active with the
weight-off-wheels.
Unlike the aircraft symbol that shows the aircraft attitude, the FPV shows
the projected path of the aircraft in two dimensions, within the attitude
display on the PFD.
The flight director cue is displayed as a magenta circle, smaller in size
than the green FPV symbol. It appears 3 seconds after the
weight-off-wheels signal. The Flight Director (FD) provides pitch and roll
commands on the ADI.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ADI − FPV
ADI − Flight Path Vector (FPV) legend

Figure 08−03−14
When autopilot is engaged, it maneuvers the aircraft so that the flight
director cue stays in the center of the FPV. When flying manually, the
flight crew uses the flight controls to accomplish the same task.
If the flight path (trajectory) of the aircraft is outside attitude display limits
(for example, during high crosswind conditions), the FPV stays against
the limit and no longer represent the exact flight path. In this case, the
non-conformal ghost FPV is displayed as a dotted line (refer to
Figure 08−03−15).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
GHOST FPV
FPV CAGE
GHOST FPV INDICATES AIRCRAFT FLIGHT PATH
OUTSIDE THE CAGE FPV AREA
NON−
CONFORMAL
GHOST FPV
FPV CAGE
NON−CONFORMAL GHOST FPV INDICATES AIRCRAFT FLIGHT PATH

OUTSIDE OF THE CAGE FPV AREA LIMITS
ADI − Ghost FPV indications

Figure 08−03−15
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
When the flight path of the aircraft returns within the attitude display
limits, the ghost FPV returns to the full line symbol (conformal state).
B. Cage mode
In cage mode, the FPV movement is restrained or caged, and only
displays the vertical path of the aircraft (FPV can only move vertically).
This mode is accessed from:
• The Control Tuning Panel (CTP), by pushing the TUNE/MENU
pushbutton and selecting FPV CAGE ON.
• The AVIONIC synoptic page, by selecting FPV CAGE ON from the
CTP tab.
When cage mode is engaged, the bottom of the FPV symbol is flat (refer
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
MENU
FPV CAGE
<WXR ON /OFF>
<CLOCK PFD/NAV>
<STBY NAV HUD>
RETURN CRS 126
CAGED FLIGHT PATH VECTOR (FPV)
ADI − FPV cage mode control

Figure 08−03−16
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
In the caged mode, the FPV behaves more like traditional flight director
command bars. The aircraft is maneuvered to bring the flight guidance
cue inside the caged FPV. The FPV is fixed in the middle of the ADI, and
no longer indicates the projected flight path of the aircraft. However, the
flight director steering commands are still followed.
If the projected path of the aircraft moves outside of the attitude display
limits while FPV is in caged mode, a smaller non-conformal symbol
displays.
C. Acceleration cue
An acceleration cue is displayed as a green pointer moving vertically
beside the left wing of the FPV (refer to Figure 08−03−17). The
acceleration cue indicates the aircraft acceleration or deceleration along
the flight path.
FLIGHT PATH
ACCELERATION
CUE
ADI
ADI − Acceleration cue

Figure 08−03−17
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
When the aircraft is accelerating, the acceleration cue is above the wing
of the FPV. When the aircraft is decelerating, the acceleration cue is
below the wing of the FPV. When the aircraft speed is constant, the
acceleration cue points to the FPV wing. The distance between the
acceleration cue and the FPV increase with an increase in acceleration
or deceleration.
D. Speed error tape

The speed error tape is displayed as a green scale that extends above or
below the left wing of the FPV. It shows the difference between the
actual indicated airspeed and selected airspeed. Each tick mark
represent a 5-knot difference, up to a maximum of 15 knots (three tick
marks). When the actual airspeed is higher than the selected airspeed,
the speed error goes up (above the FPV left wing) (refer to
Figure 08−03−18).
SPEED
ERROR
TAPE
ADI
ADI − Speed error tape

Figure 08−03−18
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
When the actual airspeed is less than the selected airspeed, the speed
error goes down (below the FPV left wing).
NOTE
The speed error tape scale is not associated with the
flight path acceleration symbol.
E. FPV miscompare
An FPV miscompare message (black text on amber background box)
indicates a difference between the FPVs (refer to Figure 08−03−19).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ADI − FPV miscompare indications

Figure 08−03−19
F. FPV fail indications

An FPV fail message (white text on red background box) on the PFD
indicates failure of the FPV (refer to Figure 08−03−20).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ADI − FPV fail indications

Figure 08−03−20
ADI – AIRSPEED
A. Airspeed information
Airspeed information is displayed as a moving vertical tape located on
the left side of each PFD. The airspeed information includes:
• Actual airspeed window (digital readout),
• Mach digital readout,
• Airspeed trend vector,
• Overspeed marker,
• Low speed marker,
• Selected airspeed,
• Takeoff or approach speeds,
• Flaps and gear limiting speed references,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
• Best lift/drag airspeed bug, and

• Fly-by-wire trim speed.
B. Airspeed tape
The airspeed tape is a vertical moving scale ranging from 30 to 400
knots with a visible range of ±40 knots of the Indicated Airspeed (IAS).
The tape has a scale that is marked every 10 knots with a white tick
mark, and numerically marked every 20 knots above 200 knots IAS.
Below 200 knots IAS, the tape is numerically marked at every 10 knots.
The current IAS displays in a digital readout window, at the center of the
airspeed tape (refer to Figure 08−03−21).
AIRSPEED
TAPE
AIRSPEED
DIGITAL
READOUT
ADI − Airspeed tape

Figure 08−03−21
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
During the normal airspeed range, the digital readout is displayed in

white. When the airspeed exceeds the normal range into the caution
range, the digital readout changes to amber in the digital readout box
only. If the airspeed continues into the overspeed range, the digital
readout will change to red. In all airspeed ranges, the outline of the digital
readout box remains white. Refer to Figure 08−03−22.
ADI − Airspeed tape − Airspeed digital readout

Figure 08−03−22
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
C. Mach speed, True Airspeed (TAS) and Ground Speed (GS)

indication
Mach speed (M) is displayed under the airspeed tape when the airspeed
is more than 0.45 M and removed when Mach speed is less than 0.40 M.
True Airspeed (TAS) and Ground Speed (GS) are displayed below Mach
speed (refer to Figure 08−03−23).
ADI − Airspeed tape − Mach, TAS, GS indication

Figure 08−03−23
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
D. Airspeed trend vector

A green line, starting at the airspeed digital readout and extending
upwards or downwards, represents the airspeed trend vector. Refer to
Figure 08−03−24.
AIRSPEED
TREND VECTOR
ADI − Airspeed tape − Airspeed trend indicator

Figure 08−03−24
The end of the line indicates the speed that the aircraft will achieve in
10 seconds if the current aircraft acceleration or deceleration is
maintained. The trend vector extends upwards from the digital readout
when accelerating, and downwards when decelerating. The length of the
trend vector indicates the rate of acceleration or deceleration.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
E. Displayed speed control

The selected speed is displayed as a pointer (speed bug) on the
airspeed tape.
When airspeed is set manually (using the SPD switch on the FCP), the
selected airspeed is displayed in cyan at the top of the airspeed scale
and the speed bug is displayed in cyan. When the speed is managed by
the FMS, the airspeed is displayed in magenta at the top of the airspeed
tape and the speed bug is displayed in magenta (refer to
Figure 08−03−25).
In FMS mode, the FMS speed is displayed as a magenta arrow. This is
the FMS speed bug on the airspeed tape. The speed is displayed in
magenta at the top of the airspeed tape. The manual speed is displayed
as a cyan bar, or manual preselect speed bug, on the airspeed tape only.
In FMS mode, if the speed is manually selected, the manual preselect
speed bug and the cyan speed value are displayed. After 5 seconds, the
cyan speed value is replaced by the FMS speed but the manual
preselect speed bug remains. The selected speed pointer display is
limited between VMINTRIM and VMO/MMO.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
MANUAL SPEED FMS SPEED
SPEED BUG −
MANUAL SELECTION SPEED BUG −
FMS SELECTION
SPEED BUG − SPEED BUG −

FMS PRESELECT MANUAL PRESELECT
AIRSPEED TAPE
ADI − Airspeed tape − Displayed speed bugs

Figure 08−03−25
F. Takeoff speeds
The takeoff V speeds are manually entered from the FMS, on the PERF
(performance) page DEP (departure) tab. When the SET VSPEEDS soft
switch is selected, the digital V1, VR, and V2 are automatically displayed
in white at the bottom of the airspeed scale.
The takeoff reference speeds (V1, VR, V2) are displayed during the
takeoff roll when the speed settings are within the range of the airspeed
scale, and are removed when airspeed is greater than V2 + 20 knots.
They are displayed in green, on the right side of the airspeed tape (refer
to Figure 08−03−26). They are labelled as follows:
• 1: Takeoff decision speed V1,
• R: Takeoff rotation speed VR,
• 2: Takeoff safety speed V2, and
• T: Final takeoff speed VFTO (only displays with dual FMS failure).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
A “V1” aural message is generated when the aircraft reaches V1.
TAKEOFF SAFETY SPEED
TAKEOFF ROTATION SPEED
TAKEOFF DECISION SPEED
ADI − Airspeed tape − Takeoff Speed Indications

Figure 08−03−26
G. Best lift/drag speed indications

The best lift/drag speed shows as a green dot on the airspeed tape and
is displayed only during clean configuration (no slats/no flaps). Refer to
Figure 08−03−27.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
BEST LIFT/
DRAG SPEED
ADI − Airspeed tape − Best lift/drag speed

Figure 08−03−27
H. Approach speeds
The approach speed VREF, also referred to as the landing reference
speed, is calculated and provided by the FMS. It is displayed in green on
the right side of the airspeed tape and labelled as REF (refer to
Figure 08−03−28). It is displayed as follows:
• After FMS ARR tab SET VSPEEDS soft switch has been selected,
• Removed after GA mode activation, or
• Removed when on the ground and airspeed is less than 50 knots for
more than 5 seconds.
The vertical approach climb speed VAC is calculated and supplied by the
FMS. It is displayed in green on the right side of the airspeed tape and
labelled as VAC (refer to Figure 08−03−28). It is displayed as
follows:
• Displayed when GA mode is active, or
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
• Removed when another mode is activated.
NOTE
When not supplied by the FMS, the manually entered
VREF and VAC speeds are displayed in cyan.
APPROACH GO−AROUND
VREF VAC
ADI − Airspeed tape − VREF and VAC indications

Figure 08−03−28
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
I. Flap speeds
The flap speeds are calculated by the FMS based on a 30-degree
maneuver margin at the current flap setting. There is an additional
speed allowance to permit aircraft deceleration during flap extension.
The flap speeds are displayed as a green F with a number corresponding
to the flap selection (F0 to F5). Flap speeds always indicate the
recommended speed for flap retraction or flap extension. There is only
one flap speed displayed at a time (refer to Figure 08−03−29).
The maximum speed of the current flap extension is shown as the lower
limit of the overspeed marker. The minimum speed of the current flap
extension is represented by an amber mark across the airspeed tape.
Minimum and maximum flap speeds are changed at each flap retraction
or extension, to reflect the actual flap setting.
During an approach with the flaps set at FLAP 1 (F1), the FMS speed is
reduced to F2 on the airspeed tape. The F2 on the ADI represents the
minimum speed for the FLAP 1 configuration.
FLAPS 4 VFE
FLAPS 5
EXTENSION
SPEED
ADI − Airspeed tape − Flap speeds

Figure 08−03−29
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
J. Overspeed indications
The overspeed area on the airspeed tape is displayed as a red and black
marker. The lower limit of the overspeed marker is the maximum
operation speed based on the aircraft configuration. In the clean
configuration, the speed corresponds to VMO/MMO (Knots/Mach number)
for maximum operating limits (refer to Figure 08−03−30).
When the flaps and/or the landing gear are extended, the lower limit of
the bar is automatically adjusted to the maximum speed for the actual
configuration, VFE (maximum Flap Extended speed) or VLE (maximum
Landing gear Extended speed).
If the airspeed trend vector moves into the overspeed marker, the
airspeed readout numbers become amber.
If the airspeed reaches the overspeed marker, the airspeed readout
numbers become red and flash. When the airspeed exceeds the limits by
3 kt or more, the “OVERSPEED” aural alert sounds.
OVERSPEED
MARKER
VMO
ADI − Airspeed tape − Overspeed indications

Figure 08−03−30
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
K. Minimum trim speed

Minimum trim speed is displayed as an amber inverted L above the red
and black low-speed line of the airspeed tape. The minimum trim speed
is the lowest trim speed or selectable speed from the FCP and provided
by FBW (refer to Figure 08−03−31).
VMIN TRIM
ADI − Airspeed tape − Minimum trim speed

Figure 08−03−31
L. Low speed indications

The normal mode low speed indications are displayed as a red and black
low speed marker and a red stall marker (refer to Figure 08−03−32
and Figure 08−03−33).
The top of the low speed marker (red and black line) is the minimum
speed at the sidestick soft stop, or soft stop angle of attack (VAOA soft). If
the trend vector moves into the low speed marker, the airspeed digital
readout numbers become amber and a “SPEED” aural message
sounds. If the trend vector remains in the low speed marker for more
than 1 second, the “SPEED” aural message is repeated.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
The top of the stall marker (solid red line) is the minimum speed allowed
by the FBW system when the sidestick is at the hard stop, or hard stop
angle of attack (VAOA hard).
If the airspeed moves into the low speed marker, the airspeed digital
readout numbers become red, a repeating “STALL” aural message
sounds, and a STALL message displays on the PFDs.
VAOA HARD
VAOA SOFT
LOW STALL
SPEED MARKER
MARKER
ADI − Airspeed tape − Low speed indications − Normal mode

Figure 08−03−32
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
STALL
MARKER
ADI − Airspeed tape − Low speed indications − Direct mode

Figure 08−03−33
M. Airspeed miscompare/fail indications

An IAS miscompare flag (black text on amber background) indicates a
difference of more than 10 knots between the airspeed indications on the
PFDs (refer to Figure 08−03−34).
A caution message EFIS MISCOMPARE is displayed on the EICAS
page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ADI − IAS/Mach miscompare indications

Figure 08−03−34
An IAS failed flag (white text on red background) indicates failure of the
airspeed indication. Refer to Figure 08−03−35.
If there is invalid airspeed or Mach data, an IAS or MACH fail flag is
displayed. The numbers are removed from the airspeed tape and the
airspeed digital readout.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ADI − IAS/Mach fail

Figure 08−03−35
ATTITUDE DIRECTION INDICATOR (ADI) – ALTITUDE

A. Altitude
Barometric and radar altitude information are shown on both PFDs.
B. Barometric Altitude
Barometric altitude shows as a vertical tape on the right side of the PFD
(refer to Figure 08−03−36), and includes:
• Altitude tape,
• Digital altitude readout,
• Altitude trend vector,
• Preselect altitude,
• Low altitude awareness,
• Altimeter setting, and
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
• Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) bug.

The moving vertical tape shows tick marks for every 100 feet, and larger
marks for every 500 feet. Current altitude is displayed in a digital altitude
readout window.
A green altitude trend vector, located to the right of the tape, gives a
graphical representation of the projected altitude in 10 seconds if the
current trend is maintained.
The selected altitude on the FCP is displayed on top of the altitude tape.
It is also displayed as a cyan altitude bug on the altitude tape. The FMS
planned altitude is displayed in magenta, to the left of the preselect
altitude, and also as a magenta line on the altitude tape.
Metric altitude is displayed under the altitude as a white M if selected on
the FCP.
FMS FLIGHT
PLAN ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE
PRESELECT
ALTITUDE
TAPE
ALTITUDE
DIGITAL
READOUT
METRIC
ALTITUDE
ALTITUDE
TREND VECTOR
ALTITUDE PRESELECT
BUG ALTITUDE LINE
ADI − Altitude indications

Figure 08−03−36
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
C. Altimeter setting
The altimeter setting (BARO) indication is displayed in white below the
altitude scale tape, either in inches of mercury (IN) or hectopascal (HPA).
Each of the Control Tuning Panel (CTP) BARO switches or the CTP tab
on the AVIONIC synoptic page can be used to set the altimeter setting
on its respective PFD.
During climb, the center BARO switch is used at transition level to set the
standard pressure (29.92 IN or 1013 HPA) when pressed, standard
(STD) is displayed in white.
When the left and right BARO settings do not match or during transition
level, the altimeter value becomes boxed in amber and remains amber
until both values are identical. Refer to Figure 08−03−37.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ADI − Altimeter setting

Figure 08−03−37
D. Radio altitude (RAD ALT)

Two radio altimeters are installed to provide the aircraft height Above
Ground Level (AGL). The readings of the left and the right radio
altimeters are displayed on the left and right PFDs respectively. The
radio altimeter antennas are located under the wing-to-body fairing, aft of
the wheel well (refer to Figure 08−03−38).
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
1 RAD ALT 3
RAD ALT 2 ANTENNA
ANTENNAS
1 RAD ALT 3
RAD ALT 1
ANTENNA
ANTENNAS
NOTE
1 Optional.
Radio altitude antennas

Figure 08−03−38
The Radio Altitude (RA) shows in the center of the PFD, below the ADI,
as a digital readout from 0 to 2500 feet (refer to Figure 08−03−39).
When in view, it is displayed in 50-foot increments between 1500 and
2500 feet, 10-foot increments between 200 and 1500 feet, and 5-foot
increments between −20 and 200 feet. An optional “TWENTY FIVE
HUNDRED” aural message sounds when 2500 is displayed.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ADI
ADI − Radio altitude display

Figure 08−03−39
A ground altitude awareness indication represents the ground on the
altitude tape. It shows as an amber shaded area at the bottom of the
altitude tape (refer to Figure 08−03−40). The ground altitude
awareness starts to display when the RA is at 750 feet, and rises as the
RA decreases. When the aircraft is on ground, the low altitude
awareness meets the altitude window.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ALTITUDE TAPE
GROUND AWARENESS
ALTITUDE TAPE
GROUND AWARENESS
1 ALTITUDE TAPE
GROUND AWARENESS
NOTE
1 Aircraft on ground − The ground
awareness meets the altitude
readout window.
ADI − Altitude indication − Ground awareness indications

Figure 08−03−40
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
E. Minimum setting
Barometric minimum altitude shows as a green BARO legend and digits
beside the bottom left side of the altitude tape. Minimum height above
ground (based on radar altitude) shows as a green RAD legend and
digits at the same location. A green unfilled triangle displays on the
altitude tape. Refer to Figure 08−03−41.
ADI − Altitude indications − BARO RAD minimums

Figure 08−03−41
The minimums are set using the CTP or the AVIONIC synoptic page.
On the CTP, when the PFD/NAV page is displayed, BARO, RAD or OFF
is selected by pressing the associated LSK. The minimum value for
BARO or RAD is set using the TUNE/DATA switch. When the AVIONIC
synoptic page is displayed on a MFW, the BARO or RAD MINIMUM can
also be selected and set using the cursor. Refer to
Figure 08−03−42.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ADI − Altitude indications − Minimum setting MFW

Figure 08−03−42
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
When the aircraft reaches the minimum altitude, a large amber MIN is
displayed below the BARO or RAD value, a “MINIMUM” aural message
sounds, and the unfilled green triangle becomes amber. Both flash for 5
seconds and then become steady, and are removed from the PFD at
touchdown.
F. Altitude miscompare/fail message

An ALT miscompare message (black text on amber background) is
displayed when the current altitude difference between any PFD exceeds
the altitude comparator limit. The altitude comparator limit decreases as
a function of decreasing altitude when the current altitude is less than
29000 feet or more than 41000 feet.
The altitude comparator limit equals 200 feet when the current altitude is
between 29000 feet and 41000 feet.
The altitude comparator limit is 75 feet when the Required Navigation
Performance Authorization Required (RNP AR) approach mode is active.
When ALT is displayed on the PFD, the caution message EFIS
MISCOMPARE is displayed on the EICAS page. Refer to
Figure 08−03−43.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ADI
ADI − Altitude miscompare indication

Figure 08−03−43
If Altitude or Vertical Speed data is invalid or failed, an ALT or VS fail
message (white text on red background) is displayed (refer to
Figure 08−03−44). The numbers are removed from the altitude and
vertical speed tape.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ADI
ADI − Vertical speed fail indication

Figure 08−03−44
If the radio altitude indicated on each PFD is different (a miscompare),
the readout is replaced by a RAD caution message (black text on amber
background) (refer to Figure 08−03−45). When RAD is posted on
the PFD, the caution message EFIS MISCOMPARE is displayed on the
EICAS page.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ADI
ADI − Radio altitude miscompare indications

Figure 08−03−45
If the radio altitude is not available, the readout is replaced by a RAD fail
message (white text on red background), (refer to
Figure 08−03−46).
NOTE
The allowable difference between PFDs increases with
increasing altitude.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ADI − Radio altitude fail indication

Figure 08−03−46
G. Altitude aural alert

Aural alerts sound to increase crew awareness during aircraft altitude
changes.
Refer to the table that follows for the altitude aural alerts:
ALTITUDE AURAL ALERT STANDARD OPTIONAL

“RADIO ALTIMETER” X
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O

“DECISION HEIGHT” X
“DECIDE” X
“MINIMUM” X
“MINIMUMS” X
“MINIMUMS, MINIMUMS” X
“2500” X
“1000” X
“500” X
“400” X
“300” X
“200” X
“100” X
“80” X
“60” X
“50” X
“40” X
“35” X
“30” X
“20” X
“10” X
“5” X
“APPROACHING DECISION HEIGHT” X
“APPROACHING MINIMUMS” X
“PLUS HUNDRED” X
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY

“50 ABOVE” X
H. Vertical speed indicator

A vertical speed indicator is located to the right of the altitude tape. A
white pointer and a vertical line indicate the vertical speed scale (refer to
Figure 08−03−47).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
VERTICAL SPEED
DIGITAL READOUT
CURRENT VERTICAL
SPEED POINTER
FMS VERTICAL
SPEED INDICATOR
MANUAL VERTICAL
SPEED INDICATOR
ADI − Altitude indications − Vertical speed indicator

Figure 08−03−47
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
A digital readout of the scale is displayed at the top (climb) or bottom

(descent) of the vertical speed indicator when vertical speed is greater
than 300 feet per minute. It stays in view until VS is less than 100 feet
per minute.
A cyan unfilled box is displayed to indicate a manually-selected vertical
speed. A magenta circle indicates the FMS selected vertical speed.
(1) Vertical speed fail
If the vertical speed data is invalid or failed, a red VS failed flag is
displayed and the vertical speed tape is removed (refer to
Figure 08−03−48).
ADI − Vertical speed fail indication

Figure 08−03−48
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
VERTICAL AND LATERAL DEVIATION INDICATIONS

The vertical and horizontal path deviation scales are located on the ADI
section of the PFD. The vertical deviation scale is located between the
attitude section and the altitude tape (refer to Figure 08−03−49). The
lateral deviation scale is centered below the attitude section (refer to
Figure 08−03−50).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ADI VERTICAL
DEVIATION
POINTER
VNAV
DEVIATION
VNAV POINTER
DEVIATION (EXCESSIVE
POINTER DEVIATION)
VERTICAL
DEVIATION
SCALE GS DEVIATION
POINTER
PRESELECT
NAV
DEVIATION
POINTER
VERTICAL DEVIATION
POINTER INDICATIONS
ADI − Vertical deviation indicator legend

Figure 08−03−49
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
LATERAL ADI
DEVIATION
POINTER RADIO
ADI LATERAL RADIO
TRUE AIRSPEED DEVIATION ALTITUDE ALTITUDE
READOUT SCALE READOUT BACKGROUND
RNP
READOUT
TRUE AIRSPEED
LEGEND LATERAL
DEVIATION
GROUND POINTER
SPEED (VOR/LOC)
LEGEND
EXPANDED
GROUND ADI
SPEED LATERAL
READOUT DEVIATION
SCALE
LATERAL PRESELECT LATERAL
DEVIATION NAV LATERAL ANGULAR RNP
DEVIATION
POINTER DEVIATION READOUT
POINTER
(EXCESSIVE POINTER LATERAL DEVIATION (FMS)
DEVIATION) POINTER INDICATION
ADI − Lateral deviation indicator legend

Figure 08−03−50
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
The deviation indicators are color coded:

• Magenta for the FMS,
• Green for the ILS and VOR,
• Cyan for the preview mode, and
• Amber for excessive deviation.
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)

A. HSI information
The lower section of the PFD (black background) shows a traditional
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) with compass, and bearing and
course pointers. Weather map and traffic targets can be overlaid on the
HSI. Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) and Weather
Radar (WXR) settings are displayed on the left side of the HSI, and
navigation data on the right side (refer to Figure 08−03−51).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
DU 1 DU 2 DU 3 DU 4
MFW MFW
DU 5
COURSE
TCAS TO/FROM POINTER BEARING 2
INDICATION WIND INDICATOR BEARING 1 POINTER
VECTOR POINTER
WXR WXR COURSE

BEARING 1 BEARING
STATE GAIN DEVIATION
SOURCE BEARING 2 DISTANCE
INDICATION READOUT BAR
WEATHER ANNUNCIATION SOURCE
HSI COURSE
RADAR AND ICON ANNUNCIATION
WXR DEVIATION
RANGE SCALE AND ICON
TILT
READOUT
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
PFD − Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)

Figure 08−03−51
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
TCAS alerts, weather radar, and terrain overlays are displayed only
when conditions necessitate immediate attention (auto pop-up (refer to
Figure 08−03−52).
WXR OVERLAY
WEATHER HSI
RADAR RANGE
PFD − HSI overlay

Figure 08−03−52
If there is a DU failure where the map cannot be shown on the onside
DU, the HSI can:
• Show FMS flight plan waypoints and route, and
• Show compass arc instead of compass rose (circle).
The necessary overlay can be selected with the CTP overlay switches
(refer to Figure 08−03−53), or from the drop-down menus on the
MFWs. The display options are:
• TERR to show terrain,
• TFC to show traffic targets (TCAS), and
• WX to show weather radar.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
CTP
18
THSRO
HSI
PFD − HSI mini map

Figure 08−03−53
The map range shows near the left end of the compass arc. The RANGE
switch on the CTP is used to select the desired map range.
B. Chronometers
There is a chronometer available on each PFD. The chronometers are
activated with the CHRONO switch on the glareshield panel. They are
displayed in the secondary flight data section of the HSI (refer to
Figure 08−03−54).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
MFW MFW
LEFT GLARESHIELD PANEL − RIGHT GLARESHIELD PANEL −

CHRONO SWITCH CHRONO SWITCH
HSI
Chronometer controls
Figure 08−03−54
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
The CHRONO switch controls the chronometer as follows:

• First push displays and starts the chronometer,
• Second push stops the chronometer, and
• Third push resets and hides the chronometer.
C. HDG miscompare/fail indications

A HDG miscompare message (black text on amber background) is
displayed when there is a difference of more than 6 degrees between the
heading indicated on each PFD. Refer to Figure 08−03−55.
HSI
HSI − HDG miscompare indications

Figure 08−03−55
If there is invalid heading data, the HDG fail message (white text on red
background) is displayed and the compass heading, numbers on the
horizontal line, and digital readout are removed (refer to
Figure 08−03−56).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
HSI
HSI − HDG fail indication

Figure 08−03−56
COMPRESSED PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY (PFD)

The compressed PFD occupies a quarter of the total DU surface (refer to
Figure 08−03−57). It is automatically displayed when two DUs on the
same side or a total of three or more DUs have failed. When the automatic
display reversion function has been triggered by opposite side DU failures,
the compressed PFD can be manually displayed when the DISPLAY
reversion switch is selected to REV. This will give access to additional
MFWs.
The field of view and the lateral and vertical scaling of the ADI are the same,
except that the elements are smaller to fit the size of the window. The HSI
displays a compass arc with partial bearing needles.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
COMP COMP
PFD PFD
MFW FAIL FAIL MFW
COMP COMP
EICAS EICAS
MFW MFW
Compressed PFD
Figure 08−03−57
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Multifunction Window (MFW)
O
MULTIFUNCTION WINDOW (MFW) - OVERVIEW

Multifunction Windows (MFWs) show navigation, communication, flight
planning, electronic checklist, and system data.
Each MFW is independent and can show any selected item from the MFW
top menu, the Control Tuning Panel (CTP), or the Multifunction Keyboard
Panel (MKP) menu switches.
The MFW occupies half of the Display Unit (DU) surface, so two MFWs can
show on one DU. The MFW can occupy the full DU surface when it shows
charts, maps or documents (refer to Figure 08−04−1).
MFW MFW
Multifunction Window (MFW) display

Figure 08−04−1
Depending on its location, the content of the MFW is controlled using the:
• Control Tuning Panel (CTP),
• Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP), and
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Multifunction Window (MFW)
The L and R switches on the left CTP select the left and right MFW on DU 2.
The L and R switches on the right CTP select the left and right MFW on DU 3
LEFT CTP RIGHT CTP
MFW EICAS MFW MFW
DU 2 DU 3
Control of MFWs from CTP

Figure 08−04−2
When an MFW is selected, a bar above the switch is illuminated green and
the content of the MFW is selected when one of the Quick Access Keys
(QAKs) is pushed:
• MAP to show a map or a plan,
• FMS to show the FMS,
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
• CNS to show the communication/navigation page,

• CHKL to show the electronic checklist,
• SYN to show the synoptic pages, and
• DATA to show charts, video, documents, and database information.
NOTE
When the EICAS page shows on DU 2, the R switch on
the left CTP is disabled. When the EICAS page shows
on DU 3, the L switch on the right CTP is disabled.
The content of the MFW on DU 5 is controlled by the MKP. The left MKP
controls the left MFW, and the right MKP controls the right MFW (refer to
Figure 08−04−3). Each MKP has QAKs (same as the CTPs).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
MFW MFW
LEFT MKP RIGHT MKP

CONTROLS THE LEFT CONTROLS THE RIGHT
SIDE OF DU 5 SIDE OF DU 5
Control of MFWs from the MKP

Figure 08−04−3
The CCPs control the content of the MFW using the cursors. Pushing the
MENU switch on the CCP shows a menu on the upper left corner of the
MFW. The menu items are the same as the QAKs on the CTPs and the
MKPs (refer to Figure 08−04−4).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
MAP MAP
FMS FMS
CNS CNS
CHKL CHKL
SYN SYN
DATA DATA
MFW MFW
LEFT CURSOR CONTROL PANEL RIGHT CURSOR CONTROL PANEL

(CCP) (CCP)
Control of MFWs from the CCP

Figure 08−04−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
An arrow after a menu item indicates that there is a sub-menu when the item
is selected.
MFW – SYNOPTIC PAGES

A. Synoptic pages – Overview
The synoptic pages include (refer to Figure 08−04−5):
• The STATUS page,
• The system synoptic pages:
– AIR
– DOOR
– ELEC (Electrical)
– FLT CTRL (Flight Control)
– FUEL
– HYD (Hydraulic)
– AVIONIC
• The INFO page (Info Messages), and
• The CB page (Circuit Breakers).
Synoptic pages − Header

Figure 08−04−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
Synoptic pages are selectable on any MFW. The selected synoptic page
will stay in view until another page or MFW window option is selected.
The synoptic pages include digital readouts, colored flow lines,
component outlines, and system messages. Specific colors are used to
depict normal, precautionary, and maximum or minimum system limits.
Color Usage
Red • Features/components exceeding limits to a warning
level (overheat, overspeed, etc.).
• Outlines, digital readouts, and analog pointers outside of
the safe/normal range in a warning level or associated
with a warning failure condition.
• Icons related to an emergency system status, e.g.
RUDDER FAIL.
Amber • Flow lines where flow is not working properly at a
caution level.
• Features/components/surfaces (such as pump, valves
etc.) failed, not operating, not generating normal flow
when it should be, or exceeding limits to a caution level.
• Outlines, digital readouts, and analog pointers outside of
safe/normal range or associated with a caution failure
condition.
• Icons related to a caution system status (e.g. RUDDER
DEGRADED).
Dashed Status unknown or invalid for digital readouts or component
amber outlines (valves, pumps, filters, etc.).
Amber X Status unknown for system indications, scales, surfaces,
etc.
Cyan • Pilot-selected value only (e.g. Temperature).
• Communication/Cabin flags that indicate a normal
advisory request.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Color Usage
White • Features/components selected to OFF or closed.
• Flow lines that have no flow.
• Outlines and analog pointers not within normal range
(but with no hazard/failures associated), non-operating
state.
• Digital readouts within safe/normal range.
• Icons related to system status OFF.
• Fixed features such as outlines, legends, and analog
scales.
Green • Flow lines that have normal flow (such as sufficient heat
condition, etc.) If a component is failed ON, flow should
stay depicted as normal.
• Outlines and analog pointers within safe/normal range.
Gray • Legend, units, static aircraft outlines, engine outlines
and APU outlines.
• Static data box outlines and text.
• Gradient shading.
• Engine/APU running.
B. STATUS page
The STATUS page (refer to Figure 08−04−6) can be selected with
the STATUS tile on the synoptic page menu. When it is selected, it will
be displayed on the selected MFW.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
STATUS AIR DOOR ELEC FLT CTRL
FUEL HYD AVIONIC INFO CB
TAT −15 C
SAT −15 C
ENGINE
115 OIL TEMP ( C) 115
81 OIL PRESS (PSI) 81
10.4 OIL QTY (QTS) 10.4
APU
RPM 100 % OIL TEMP 32 C
EGT 650 C OIL PRESS NORM
DOOR OPEN OIL QTY FULL
TIRE PRESSURE (PSI)
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
WEAR
STATUS synoptic page

Figure 08−04−6
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
The STATUS page includes the indications and parameters that follow:
• Temperature (refer to Figure 08−04−7):
– Static Air Temperature (SAT) , and
– Total Air Temperature (TAT),
• Engine oil indications (refer to Figure 08−04−8):
– Oil Temperature (OIL TEMP, in °C),
– Oil Pressure (OIL PRESS, in PSI), and
– Oil Quantity (OIL QTY, in QTS),
• APU indications (refer to Figure 08−04−9, and
Figure 08−04−10):
– APU speed (RPM, in %),
– Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT, in °C),
– APU door position (DOOR), and
– APU Oil Indications (OIL TEMP, OIL PRESS and OIL QTY),
• Tire Pressure indication (TIRE PRESSURE, in PSI),
• Brake Temperature (BRAKE – TEMP), and
• Brake Wear (BRAKE – WEAR).
Values for brake temperature are not the actual brake temperature. They
are units converted into a specific scale value where 30 °C equals one
unit. The units are indicated from 0 to 20, with the outline color changing
from green, to white, to red, as shown in Figure 08−04−11.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
STATIC AIR TEMPERATURE (SAT in grey)
WHITE Normal condition
YELLOW Temperature invalid
TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE (TAT in grey)
WHITE Normal condition
STATUS synoptic page − Temperature legend

Figure 08−04−7
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
OIL TEMPERATURE (OIL TEMP in grey)
WHITE Oil temperature in normal range
YELLOW Oil temperature above high oil temperature yellow line

threshold.
RED Oil temperature above high oil temperature red line threshold
YELLOW Oil temperature below oil temperature threshold

DASHED
OIL PRESSURE (OIL PRESS in grey)
WHITE Oil pressure in normal range
YELLOW Oil pressure above high threshold
RED Oil pressure below low threshold
YELLOW
Oil pressure invalid
DASHED
OIL QUANTITY (OIL QTY in grey)
WHITE Normal
YELLOW Below threshold
YELLOW Invalid
DASHED
EICAS page and STATUS synoptic page − Engine oil indication legend
Figure 08−04−8
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
APU RPM (RPM in grey)
WHITE .APU operating at or below red line
RED APU operating above red line (overspeed)
YELLOW APU RPM value is invalid
APU EGT (EGT in grey)
WHITE APU operating at or below red line
RED APU operating above red line (overtemperature)
YELLOW APU EGT invalid
APU OIL TEMPERATURE (OIL TEMP in grey)
WHITE APU oil temperature in normal range
Oil temperature at or above high oil temperature yellow line

YELLOW
threshold

Figure 08−04−9
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
APU OIL PRESSURE (OIL PRESS in grey)
WHITE Oil pressure in normal range
YELLOW Oil pressure below low oil pressure threshold
YELLOW Oil pressure invalid
APU OIL QUANTITY (OIL QTY in grey)
WHITE Oil quantity full
YELLOW Oil quantity below low threshold
WHITE Oil quantity in normal range
YELLOW Oil quantity invalid
APU DOOR (DOOR in grey)
WHITE APU door open
WHITE APU door closed
YELLOW APU door failed open
YELLOW APU door failed closed
YELLOW APU door position invalid

Figure 08−04−10
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
TIRE PRESSURE (TIRE PRESSURE in grey)
160 GREEN Pressure Nominal Pressure 90% nominal
150 WHITE 90% nominal Pressure 70% nominal Pressure < 90%
< nominal nominal
110 YELLOW Pressure < 90% nominal Pressure < 70% nominal
YELLOW No data No data
BRAKE TEMPERATURE (TEMP in grey)
03 GREEN Temperature in green range (00 TEMP 06)
09 WHITE Temperature in white range (07 TEMP 14)
16 RED (15 TEMP 20)
BRAKE WEAR (WEAR in grey)
BLACK Brakes OK (no indication)
WHITE Brakes to be replaced in less than 100 flights
YELLOW Brakes to be replaced immediately
YELLOW Brake wear indication invalid
STATUS synoptic page − Landing gear legend

Figure 08−04−11
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
NOTE
In normal operation, BRAKE WEAR is not shown on
the STATUS page (it appears only when brakes are
degraded).
C. System synoptic pages

The synoptic pages that follow are linked to a system and detailed in
their corresponding chapters:
• AIR (refer to Figure 08−04−12). For detailed information, refer
to Chapter 02 − Air-conditioning, bleed air and pressurization.
• DOOR (refer to Figure 08−04−13). For detailed information,
refer to Chapter 06 − Doors.
• ELEC (refer to Figure 08−04−14). For detailed information, refer
to Chapter 07 − Electrical.
• FLT CTL (refer to Figure 08−04−15). For detailed information,
refer to Chapter 10 − Flight controls.
• FUEL (refer to Figure 08−04−16). For detailed information, refer
to Chapter 11 − Fuel.
• HYD (refer to Figure 08−04−17). For detailed information, refer
to Chapter 12 − Hydraulics.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
AIR synoptic page

Figure 08−04−12
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
DOOR synoptic page

Figure 08−04−13
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ELEC synoptic page

Figure 08−04−14
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
FLT CTRL synoptic page

Figure 08−04−15
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
FUEL synoptic page

Figure 08−04−16
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
HYD synoptic page

Figure 08−04−17
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
D. AVIONIC page
The AVIONIC page has two tabs: the avionic tab (AVIO) tab (refer to
Figure 08−04−18) and the Control Tuning Panel (CTP) tab (refer to
Figure 08−04−19).
(1) Avionic page (AVIO tab)
The AVIO tab has:
• Aural channel inhibit functions,
• VSPEEDS values, and
• Pilot initiated test commands.
The VSPEEDS symbology contains:
• V1 – Takeoff decision speed,
• VR – Rotation speed,
• V2 – Takeoff safety speed,
• VFTO – Final Takeoff speed,
• VREF – Landing Reference speed, and
• VAC – Approach Climb speed, also known as V2GA.
The VSPEEDS appear only if both FMS are failed. In this particular
failure case, speed values can be set manually.
The AVIO tab includes the test section with two categories of
pilot-initiated tests:
• Self-running, and
• User-in-the-loop.
A test is considered to be self-running when, after the test is
initiated, there are no more inputs required from the pilot and the
test results are posted on the test page. If a self-running test
requires more than 1 second to complete from test initiation to test
result, a label IN PROG is displayed on the test page.
A test is considered to be user-in-the-loop when the test triggers
events that require pilot monitoring.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Selection of the test switch with the CCP trackball initiates the test
to verify the functionality of the system.
The status of the test is shown adjacent to corresponding test
switch:
• PASS – Self-running test successfully completed,
• FAULT/FAIL – Self-running test failure (corresponding caution
or advisory EICAS message appears on the EICAS page),
• DONE – Test sequence completed,
• PRESS TO STOP – Test has to be terminated by the user,
• IN PROG – Test in progress, and
• Amber dashes – Test is invalid (for self-running test).
The table that follows describes the test functions available from the
AVIO tab.
Test Category Comments

AURAL User-in-the-loop The test will give the aural voice
message “AURAL WARNING
TEST 1” followed by the
“AURAL WARNING TEST 2”
voice message (for test of both
channels).
LAMP User-in-the-loop This test will cause all the lamps
in the flight compartments to
come on, including the master
WARNING/ CAUTION switch
test. The duration of the test is
approximately 20 seconds.
TAWS Self-running The duration of the test is
approximately 2.5 minutes.
TCAS Self-running A successful test is indicated by
a TCAS SYSTEM TEST OK
aural alert.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
Test Category Comments

WXR Self-running User has to terminate the test.
WING A/ICE Self-running Button grayed out after a test has
been initiated and the result is
valid.
ICE DETECT Self-running The duration of the test is
NOTE
The caution message ICE
is displayed on the EICAS
page during the test.
FIRE User-in-the-loop The test illuminates the FIREX

lamps and lasts 4 seconds.
FLT CTRL Self-running The duration of the test is
SHAKER User-in-the-loop The duration of the test is
(2) AVIONIC synoptic page – CTP tab

The avionic CTP tab is a backup in case of CTP failure:
• Course (CRS),
• Navigation source (NAV SRC),
• Barometric value (BARO),
• Barometric units (UNITS),
• Heading selection (HDG),
• Magnetic HDG selection (MAG),
• True HDG selection (TRUE),
• Bearing pointers (BRG 1 and BRG 2),
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
• Flight Path Vector selection (FPV CAGE ON or OFF),

• Landing elevation source selection (FMS or MAN), and
• Landing elevation entry when manual mode is selected.
When the L or R CTP OVRD (left or right CTP override command)
control is selected, the CTP inputs are ignored, and a CTP
OVERRIDE status message appears on the EICAS page.
NOTE
If both CTPs are inhibited, the radio frequency will
automatically tune to 121.5 MHz.
For detailed information, refer to Chapter 16 – Navigation.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
AVIONIC synoptic page − AVIO tab

Figure 08−04−18
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
AVIONIC synoptic page − CTP tab

Figure 08−04−19
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
E. INFO message page

The INFO messages are non-alerting-type messages with no in-flight
associated procedures. The INFO messages are accessed on ground for
troubleshooting.
The INFO page (refer to Figure 08−04−20) is divided into two
sections. The upper section shows the non-acknowledged INFO
messages and the lower section shows the acknowledged INFO
messages. They are available in-flight for consultation.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
INFO synoptic page

Figure 08−04−20
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
F. Circuit Breaker (CB) synoptic page

The CB synoptic page allows the flight crew to monitor the status of all
the CB including the Electronic Circuit Breaker (ECB) (refer to
Figure 08−04−21). The interface is accessible through the synoptic
page tile menu and gives control and status indication for the Solid State
Power Controllers (SSPCs).
For detailed information, refer to Chapter 07 – Electrical.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
CB synoptic page
Figure 08−04−21
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
MFW – MAP
The MAP format can be displayed on one MFW (refer to
Figure 08−04−22) or on both MFW at the same time.
The MAP format is accessed from:
• The MAP quick access key on the Control Tuning Panel (CTP),
• The MAP quick access key on the Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP),
or
• The MENU switch on the Cursor Control Panel (CCP).
For detailed information, refer to Chapter 16 – Navigation.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
MFW − MAP
Figure 08−04−22
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
MFW – FMS
The main pages of the Flight Management System (FMS) can be selected
from the header by selecting the respective soft switch. The main FMS pages
are:
• DBASE (refer to Figure 08−04−23),
• POS (refer to Figure 08−04−24),
• FPLN (refer to Figure 08−04−25),
• PERF (refer to Figure 08−04−26), and
• ROUTE (refer to Figure 08−04−27).
The FMS interface is accessed from:
• The FMS quick access key on the Control Tuning Panel (CTP),
• The FMS quick access key on the Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP),
or
For detailed information, refer to Chapter 22 – Flight Management System.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
FMS − DBASE page

Figure 08−04−23
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
FMS − POS page

Figure 08−04−24
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
FMS − FPLN page

Figure 08−04−25
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
FMS − PERF page

Figure 08−04−26
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
FMS − ROUTE page

Figure 08−04−27
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
MFW – ECL
The Electronic Checklist (ECL) gives access to the normal and non-normal
procedures and checklists (refer to Figure 08−04−28).
The ECL interface is accessed from:
• The CHKL quick access key on the Control Tuning Panel (CTP),
• The CHKL quick access key on the Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP),
or
For detailed information, refer to Chapter 21 – Electronic Checklist.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
NORMAL
CHECKLIST
PRIORITY
POINTER
NON−NORMAL
CHECKLIST
ECL − SUMMARY page

Figure 08−04−28
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
MFW – CNS
The Communication, Navigation and Surveillance (CNS) main pages can be
selected from the header with the respective soft switch. The main CNS
pages are:
• TUNE (refer to Figure 08−04−29)
• DLK (refer to Figure 08−04−30)
• CPDLC (refer to Figure 08−04−31) <23249001C>
• SATCOM (refer to Figure 08−04−32) <23150006C>

The CNS interface is accessed from:
• The CNS quick access key on the Control Tuning Panel (CTP),
• The CNS quick access key on the Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP),
or
• The CNS switch on the Cursor Control Panel (CCP).
For detailed information, refer to Chapter 05 – Communication.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 012, Jul 26/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
NOTE
This view shows options that may not be installed
on your aircraft.
CNS − TUNE page

Figure 08−04−29
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
NOTE
on your aircraft.
CNS − DLK page

Figure 08−04−30
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
CNS − CPDLC page <23249001C>

Figure 08−04−31
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
CNS − SATCOM page <23150006C>

Figure 08−04−32
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 012, Jul 26/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
MFW – DATA
The VIDEO is displayed on DU 3 when the VIDEO DSPL L switch on the
COCKPIT DOOR panel is selected (refer to Figure 08−04−33).
Selection of the VIDEO DSPL R switch will display the video on DU 5. The
VIDEO page can also be selected with the DATA Quick Access Key (QAK)
on the MKP or the CTP, followed by the VIDEO soft switch on the drop-down
menu on the MFW. A third way to display the VIDEO is to select the MENU
switch on the CCP, then select the DATA QAK, followed by the VIDEO soft
switch on the drop-down menu.
Issue 012, Jul 26/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
MFW − DATA − VIDEO

Figure 08−04−33
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 012, Jul 26/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Issue 012, Jul 26/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
ENGINE INDICATION AND CREW ALERTING SYSTEM (EICAS) –

OVERVIEW
The EICAS (refer to Figure 08−05−1) is part of the avionic system and
is responsible for:
• Crew alerting,
• EICAS display page,
• Takeoff configuration warning, and
• Aural alerting.
The EICAS messages related to each system are described in specific
EICAS tables at the end of each chapter.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
AURAL WARNING PROBE AND WINDOW

HEAT PANEL − AURAL WARN SWITCH
EICAS PAGE − CAS SECTION
AURAL MESSAGE
LEFT GLARESHIELD PANEL − MASTER RIGHT GLARESHIELD PANEL − MASTER

WARNING/CAUTION SWITCH WARNING/CAUTION SWITCH
Crew Alerting System (CAS)

Figure 08−05−1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
EICAS
A. Description
The Crew Alerting System (CAS) reports system statuses, and
malfunctions or hazardous conditions by messages displayed on the
EICAS page, in the crew alerting section (refer to Figure 08−05−2).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
EICAS page − Graphical layout

Figure 08−05−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
There are four types of messages, with specific colors for easy
identification:
• Warning messages,
• Caution messages,
• Advisory messages, and
• Status messages.
The table that follows gives the definitions and related colors of the
EICAS messages, depending on their level.
LEVEL DEFINITION COLOR

WARNING Immediate awareness, immediate action or flight RED
crew decision (immediate action required to do
the checklist)
CAUTION Immediate awareness, subsequent action (crew AMBER
action required before the end of the flight)
ADVISORY Crew awareness CYAN
STATUS Central indication of selected states WHITE
Messages are displayed in groups according to their category and

prioritized within their category by order of occurrence. The most recent
message always appears on the top of the respective category list.
The maximum number of EICAS messages for the CAS stack is:
• Full usage – Cluttered: 12 total or 11 + 1 line for flags and paging,
• Full usage – Decluttered: 18 total or 17 + 1 line for flags and paging,
• Compressed – Cluttered: 7 total or 6 + 1 line for flags and paging,
and
• Compressed – Decluttered: 11 total or 10 + 1 line for flags and
paging.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
Depending on the message category, aural and visual cues can be

associated with EICAS messages:
• Master WARNING/CAUTION switch,
• Flags on PFD and EICAS page,
• Chimes,
• Bells,
• Tones, and
• Voice messages.
INFO messages are related to the EICAS messages. They are
accessible from the INFO page (synoptic menu) (refer to
Figure 08−05−3).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
INFO synoptic page

Figure 08−05−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
B. Master WARNING/CAUTION switch

Two master WARNING/CAUTION switches, located on the glareshield
(left and right side), flash when triggered by a warning or caution
message (refer to Figure 08−05−4).
The master WARNING/CAUTION switch is divided into two parts. The
upper part is labelled WARNING and flashes red when a warning
message is triggered. The lower part is labelled CAUTION and flashes
amber when a caution message is triggered.
LEFT GLARESHIELD PANEL − RIGHT GLARESHIELD PANEL −

MASTER WARNING/CAUTION SWITCH MASTER WARNING/CAUTION SWITCH
Master WARNING/CAUTION switches

Figure 08−05−4
Acknowledgement of a warning or caution message is made when either
the left or right master WARNING/CAUTION switch is pushed.
The master WARNING/CAUTION switch must be pushed to re-arm the
alerting system. If a flashing WARNING/CAUTION switch is not pushed,
the system will not be armed and ready to announce a new warning or
caution message.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
C. Definition of warning messages

Warning messages are the most urgent type of crew alerts and are
generated when immediate flight crew attention and immediate action or
decision are required. Warning messages appear in red at the top of the
message area in order of occurrence. Warning messages cannot be
removed from view unless the applicable failure has been rectified (refer
When a warning message is triggered:
• The WARNING part of both WARNING/CAUTION switches will flash
red,
• A triple chime will sound,
• An associated flashing warning message will be posted on the
EICAS display, and
• An aural alert will sound (voice advisory).
There are specific aural alerts associated with some EICAS warning
messages
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
MASTER WARNING/CAUTION
SWITCH/LIGHT
"LEFT ENGINE FIRE"
WARNING message with related alert

Figure 08−05−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
When pushed, the master WARNING/CAUTION switch will cause the

following:
• The WARNING legend will stop flashing and go off,
• Re-arms the master WARNING/CAUTION switch logic,
• Silences any associated aural alerts (voice message or triple chime
(if alert can be cancelled)), and
• The EICAS warning message stops flashing.
The warning message is displayed for as long as the associated
condition exists.
NOTE
Displayed warning messages stay in view. They cannot
be inhibited, paged, or hidden.
Each warning message has an associated procedure defined in the AFM

(refer to AFM/FCOM2/QRH).
D. Definition of caution messages

Caution messages are generated when immediate crew awareness is
required and subsequent crew actions are required (refer to
Figure 08−05−6). Caution messages are amber, and are displayed
below warnings (if any are present). They appear in order of occurrence.
When a caution message is triggered:
• The CAUTION part of both WARNING/CAUTION switches will flash
amber,
• A single chime will sound,
• An aural alert (tone, bell and/or voice message) will sound, and
• An associated flashing caution message will be posted on the EICAS
page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
MASTER WARNING/CAUTION
SWITCH/LIGHT
Caution message with related alert

Figure 08−05−6
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
When pushed, the master WARNING/CAUTION switch does the

following:
• The CAUTION legend will stop flashing and go off,
• Re-arms the Master WARNING/CAUTION switch logic,
• Silences the single chime,
• Silences any associated aural alerts (tone and voice message (if
alert can be cancelled)), and
• The EICAS caution message stops flashing (caution message stays
on steady).
The caution message is displayed for as long as the associated condition
exists.
Displayed caution messages can be inhibited, paged or hidden.
Each caution message has an associated procedure defined in the AFM
(refer to AFM/FCOM2/QRH).
E. Definition of advisory messages

Advisory messages are generated when crew awareness is required and
subsequent action may be required. Advisory messages are cyan and
are displayed below warning and caution messages (if any are present)
(refer to Figure 08−05−7). They appear in order of occurrence.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
Advisory messages with related alert

Figure 08−05−7
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
When triggered, an advisory message will flash for 5 seconds before it

becomes steady. Advisory messages have no associated master
WARNING/CAUTION lights or aural alerts.
An advisory messages does not have associated procedures or
limitations, but certain messages can have associated information (refer
to AFM/FCOM2/QRH).
F. Definition of status messages

Status messages are generated to indicate non-normal system selection
and are reminders to the flight crew. Status messages are white and are
displayed below warning, caution, and advisory messages (if any are
present) (refer to Figure 08−05−8). They appear in order of
occurrence. Status messages have no associated master
WARNING/CAUTION lights or aural messages.
Status messages do not have associated procedures or limitations.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
Status messages with related alert

Figure 08−05−8
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
G. Definition of Information (INFO) messages

INFO messages give information about the status of aircraft systems.
They are not associated with any flight procedures. They are displayed
on the INFO synoptic page, which is accessed by pushing the SYN
switch on the Control Tuning Panel (CTP) or the Multifunction Keyboard
Panel (MKP), and selecting the INFO soft tile on the synoptic page (refer
CONTROL TUNING PANEL (2X)
MULTIFUNCTION KEYBOARD
PANEL (2X)
INFO synoptic page access via CTP or MKP

Figure 08−05−9
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
The INFO synoptic page can also be accessed by pushing the MENU
switch on the Cursor Control Panel (CCP), selecting SYN on the
drop-drown menu, and then the INFO soft tile (refer to
Figure 08−05−10).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
INFO synoptic page access via CCP

Figure 08−05−10
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
The upper section of the INFO synoptic page displays new INFO
messages. The lower section displays acknowledged INFO messages.
When the ACKNOWLEDGE soft switch located at the bottom of the
INFO synoptic page is selected, all new INFO messages transfer from
the upper section to the lower section (refer to Figure 08−05−11).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
INFO synoptic page

Figure 08−05−11
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
In compressed mode, the INFO tile will be removed and replaced by an

EICAS message.
In flight, when a new INFO message is sent to the INFO synoptic page,
an INFO flag is displayed in white with a black background. It is
displayed on the right side of the EICAS communication flags section at
the bottom of the EICAS page (refer to Figure 08−05−12). After the
message has been acknowledged, the INFO flag is removed.
INFO − Communication flag − In flight

Figure 08−05−12
On the ground, when a new INFO message is sent to the INFO synoptic
page, an INFO flag is displayed in black with a white background. It is
displayed on the right side of the EICAS communication flags section at
the bottom of the EICAS page (refer to Figure 08−05−13). After the
message has been acknowledged, the INFO flag with the black
background is displayed.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
INFO − Communication flag − On ground

Figure 08−05−13
NOTE
The INFO messages and INFO flag are inhibited during
takeoff and landing.
H. EICAS message inhibit

To avoid unnecessary flight crew distraction during the takeoff and
landing phases, most caution and advisory EICAS messages are
inhibited if no immediate flight crew action is required.
Inhibited and non-inhibited messages are described in the EICAS tables
at the end of each chapter.
The inhibition on takeoff and landing occurs under specific conditions:
• Takeoff phase EICAS inhibit – Starts when airspeed increases to 80
KIAS and all MLG (Main Landing Gear) have a Weight-On-Wheels
(WOW) signal. It ends when the airplane altitude is 400 ft AGL.
• Landing phase EICAS inhibit – Starts when airplane is descending
through 400 ft AGL and ends when the airplane speed is less than
50 Kt or during go around up to 400 ft AGL.
The table that follows lists the EICAS messages considered critical.
These messages are available during takeoff and landing.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
Message Description Aural

Autopilot engaged on takeoff “CONFIG
CONFIG AP
AUTOPILOT”
Parking brake set “CONFIG
CONFIG BRAKE
BRAKE”
Slat/Flap not configured for takeoff “CONFIG
CONFIG FLAP
FLAP”
CONFIG RUDDER Rudder trim position not in T/O range “CONFIG
TRIM (out of the green arc) TRIM”
One sidestick priority latched at take- “CONFIG
CONFIG SIDESTICK
off SIDESTICK”
Spoiler not stowed “CONFIG
CONFIG SPOILER
SPOILER”
Stabilizer trim position not in T/O “CONFIG
CONFIG STAB TRIM
range (out of the green arc) TRIM”
EICAS PAGE PRESENTATION

A. Overview
The EICAS primary page is normally shown on the right side of DU 2
(refer to Figure 08−05−14). The alternate location is the right side of
DU 3 (if the copilot is the pilot flying).
The EICAS primary page includes the sections that follow:
• Engine and fuel indications,
• Crew alerting messages,
• Configuration and trim indications,
• Cabin air information, and
• Communications information.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
EICAS page − Decluttered

Figure 08−05−14
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
B. Engine and fuel indications section

Engine information for each engine is displayed on the top left of the
EICAS page. The fuel information (quantity and transfer) is displayed
below the engine information.
The ENGINE section of the EICAS page has two columns (refer to
Figure 08−05−15). The left column displays left engine data and the
right column displays the right engine data. The engine section displays
the information that follows:
• N1 gauge and dedicated flags or status,
• Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) gauge and dedicated flags or
status,
• N2,
• Fuel Flow (FF),
• Oil temperature (OIL TEMP),
• Oil pressure (OIL PRESS), and
• Fan vibration (FAN VIB), only if detected.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
EICAS page − Engine indication section

Figure 08−05−15
The N1 data includes digital and analog value representation, thrust
commands, and display of modes (selected by FMS or manual, FLEX
values). The EGT gauge has digital and analog values and includes
threshold representation.
The flags, symbols and status are important information displayed
depending on engine conditions. They include:
• VIB symbol, shown only if vibrations are detected (FAN, N1 and N2),
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
• REV, IGN, WAI, CAI, APR flags, depending on engine

configuration/mode, and
• FIRE, START, RELIGHT, ATS, WINDMILL status.
NOTE
REV flag appears only on ground, and has priority over
VIB symbol.
The ENGINE section also displays common indications and flags.

Common indications appear between the left and the right engine
indications, and include thrust modes and common engine-related flags
(SYNC appears under N1 labels when engine synchronization is active).
The thrust mode displays the selected mode (CLB, TO, MCT, GA, FLEX,
derate) and assumed temperature for FLEX. Automatic modes (FMS
selected) are displayed in magenta and manual modes in cyan.
For detailed information, refer to Chapter 18 – Power plant – Controls
and indications.
The fuel indications show the total fuel and the fuel quantities (in lbs) in
each tank (left main tank, center tank, and right main tank). A crossfeed
arrow is displayed when fuel transfer occurs automatically or is manually
selected, and indicates the direction of the flow (refer to
Figure 08−05−16).
For detailed information, refer to Chapter 11 – Fuel – Indications.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
EICAS page − Fuel indication section

Figure 08−05−16
All DUs receive, process, and compare engine data, but only one DU
displays the engine data. When engine data differs between the DUs, an
ENG message is displayed on the PRDs, an ENG message is displayed
on the PFDs, and the ENG DSPL MISCOMPARE EICAS caution
message is displayed on the EICAS page (refer to
Figure 08−05−17).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
EICAS PAGE
ADI
ENG miscompare indication

Figure 08−05−17
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
C. Crew alerting section

The crew alerting section displays up to 18 EICAS messages. When the
landing gear, flap, and spoiler indications are shown, a maximum of 12
messages will be displayed.
If there are more than 18 messages (or more than 12 if trim section is
shown), pages will be added to show the list of messages. When this
occurs, there is a PAGE indication at the bottom of the crew alerting
section to show that there are extra pages. The pages will be accessible
with the CAS switch on the MKP (refer to Figure 08−05−18).
EICAS page − Crew alerting section

Figure 08−05−18
D. Configuration and trim indication section

The configuration and trim indication section shows:
• Landing gear position and status (refer to Figure 08−05−19),
• Slat and flap position and status, and
• Aileron, rudder, and horizontal stabilizer trim positions.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
The GEAR indication gives the status and position of the landing gear.
The indications for each of the three landing gear are independent. The
gear indication will disappear when the landing gear is confirmed up and
locked for 30 seconds. It will reappear when the landing gear is selected
down or if there is a malfunction.
EICAS page − GEAR indication section

Figure 08−05−19
For detailed information, refer to Chapter 14 – Landing gear – Controls
and indications.
The slat/flap indications disappear 30 seconds after the landing gear is
up and locked and the slats are retracted.
The EICAS SLAT/FLAP indication displays the selected position (lever),
and the actual slat/flap position (refer to Figure 08−05−20).
During spoiler extension, the SLAT/FLAP indication will appear (if not
already displayed) with the SPOILER OUT or SPOILER MAX indication.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
EICAS page − SLAT / FLAP indication section

Figure 08−05−20
The TRIM section includes stabilizer trim (STAB), aileron trim (AIL), and
rudder trim (RUDDER) indications (refer to Figure 08−05−21 and
Figure 08−05−22). Stabilizer trim (STAB) and rudder trim
(RUDDER) indications are displayed only when valid data is available.
Aileron trim (AIL) data is displayed only in direct mode.
EICAS page − TRIM indication section

Figure 08−05−21
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
STAB WITHIN GREEN

BAND LOWER LIMIT
RUDDER AND STAB INDICATIONS

ARE DISPLAYED IN WHITE (NORMAL
MODE OR DIRECT MODE AND
WEIGHT−OFF−WHEELS)
STAB WITHIN GREEN

BAND UPPER LIMIT
AIL INDICATION DISPLAYS

IN WHITE (ONLY IN DIRECT MODE
AND WEIGHT−OFF−WHEEL)
ON−GROUND RUDDER TRIM,

OUT OF CENTER
TAKEOFF RANGE, STAB

AND RUDDER INDICATION
INVALID TRIM DATA ON−GROUND STAB

INDICATION OUT OF GREEN BAND
DIFFERENT CONFIGURATION INDICATIONS
EICAS page − TRIM indication section legend

Figure 08−05−22
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
For detailed information, refer to Chapter 10 - Flight controls- Primary

Flight Controls - Indications.
E. Cabin air section

The air section (refer to Figure 08−05−23) shows:
• Cabin altitude (CAB ALT), cabin climb rate (RATE), and differential
pressure (ΔP),
• Oxygen quantity,
• Landing elevation (LDG ELEV), and
• Flight compartment, cabin, and forward cargo compartment
temperatures.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
EICAS page − Cabin air indication section

Figure 08−05−23
For detailed information about cabin pressurization, refer to Chapter 02 –
Air-conditioning, bleed air and pressurization – Pressurization system –
Controls and indications.
For detailed information about the oxygen system, refer to Chapter 17 –
Oxygen and emergency equipment – Controls and indications.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
F. Communication section
The communication section (refer to Figure 08−05−24) has a
dedicated zone for communication composed of flags and, if available,
the Controller−Pilot Data Link Communications (CPDLC) zone.
The upper shaded area of the communication section displays the
communication flags that follow:
• CABIN – Cyan or amber, or READY in green,
• DOOR – Cyan with black background,
• DLK – Cyan,
• CPDLC – Cyan, <23249001C>
• SATCOM – Cyan, and <23150006C>
• INFO – Boxed white with black background.

The lower area displays CPDLC messages. <23249001C>
All communication flags (except INFO) flash for 5 seconds when initially
posted and then become steady.
NOTE
Communication flags are replaced by an EICAS
message when the EICAS page is compressed, except
for DOOR and INFO flags.
For detailed information, refer to Communication – Controls and

indications – Indications.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 012, Jul 26/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
COMMUNICATION
FLAGS
COMMUNICATION
INBOX
Communication section
Figure 08−05−24
G. Compressed EICAS page

The compressed EICAS format displays EICAS information on a quarter
of the DU screen if there are multiple DU failures (refer to
Figure 08−05−25).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
EICAS primary page (graphical layout) − Compressed (cluttered)

Figure 08−05−25
In the compressed EICAS page (refer to Figure 08−05−26), the
information is modified as follows:
• EGT shows as digital readout,
• Relocation of engine flags,
• Total fuel only shows,
• Communication flags are replaced by EICAS messages, and
• Cabin air section does not show.
The compressed EICAS format can be manually selected by turning the
DISPLAY switch to REV on the Reversion Switch Panel (RSP) (if two or
more DUs are failed).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
EICAS page − Compressed (cluttered)

Figure 08−05−26
TAKEOFF CONFIGURATION WARNING

The takeoff configuration warning system sends warning messages when
takeoff is initiated while the aircraft is not properly configured.
The system monitors for:
• Horizontal stabilizer trim position,
• Rudder trim position,
• Sidestick priority,
• Flaps settings,
• Spoiler positions,
• Autopilot setting, and
• Parking brake setting.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
The takeoff configuration warning is triggered when the Thrust Lever Angle
(TLA) is above 23 degrees and indicated N1 is above 55% on both engines.
At sea level condition, a 23-degree TLA will occur with an N1 of 68%. At that
time, an aural message sounds, accompanied by an EICAS warning
message. The warning message indicates that the item is not correctly set
for takeoff.
ITEM CONDITION EICAS AURAL

MESSAGE MESSAGE
Rudder Not in T/O range (out of CONFIG “CONFIG TRIM”
trim the green arc). RUDDER TRIM
Elevator Not in T/O range (out of CONFIG STAB “CONFIG TRIM”
trim the green arc). TRIM
Sidestick One sidestick priority CONFIG SIDE- “CONFIG SIDE-
latched at takeoff. STICK STICK”
Flaps Flaps not set for takeoff. CONFIG FLAP “CONFIG FLAP”
Spoilers Spoilers not stowed. CONFIG SPOIL- “CONFIG
ER SPOILER”
Autopilot Autopilot engaged on CONFIG AP “CONFIG
takeoff. AUTOPILOT”
Parking Not in T/O range (out of CONFIG BRAKE “CONFIG
brake the green arc). BRAKE”
AURAL ALERTS
Aural alerts include tones, chimes, and voice messages. Some aural tones
can be manually cancelled.
TONE DESCRIPTION
A-chord Overspeed.
Double beep Pitch trim reached running time limit
(3 seconds).
Triple chime Warning message.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
TONE DESCRIPTION
Single chime Caution message.
Horn Any gear not down.
Cavalry charge Autopilot disconnect.
Single C-chord Altitude alert.
Double C-chord Vertical track alert.
Voice message EICAS warning, TAWS, TCAS.
The order of priority for aural alerts is:

• “STALL” warning aural alert,
• “TAWS” aural alert,
• “TCAS” aural alert, and
• All other voice alerts.
A. Aural test
A test function is provided for aural alerts. The test is initiated by
selecting the AURAL soft switch on the AVIO tab on the AVIONIC
synoptic page. The test should sound the “AURAL WARNING TEST 1”
and “AURAL WARNING TEST 2” aural messages. At the end of the
test, DONE will be displayed next to the AURAL soft switch.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
DONE Test sequence completed.
PRESS TO STOP Test has to be terminated.
IN PROG Test in progress.
−−−− Test invalid.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
EICAS
O
B. Aural Inhibit
The aural inhibit function allows all aural alerts to be silenced if there is a
malfunction or failure of the aural system (EICAS, TAWS, Gear horn,
etc.).
When the guarded AURAL WARN switch on the overhead panel is
pushed (refer to Figure 08−05−27), all aural alerts are inhibited. A
white INHB label is illuminated, and an AURAL WARNING INHIBIT
status message is displayed on the EICAS page. Pushing the guarded
AURAL WARN switch again cancels the aural inhibit.
EICAS
Aural inhibit switch/light

Figure 08−05−27
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O EICAS
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Air Data System (ADS)
O
AIR DATA SYSTEM (ADS) − GENERAL

A. Overview
The Air Data System (ADS) supplies the flight parameters that follow to
the aircraft systems:
• Static pressure,
• Pitot pressure,
• Angle-Of-Attack (AOA), and
• Outside temperature.
The system uses:
• Four independent Air Data System Probes (ADSPs) to measure air
pressure (dynamic and static) and angle of attack,
• Two Angle-Of-Attack (AOA) sensors, and
• Two Total Air Temperature (TAT) probes.
The ADSPs, AOA sensors, and the TAT probes are symmetrically
installed on each side of the nose of the aircraft, below the flight deck
windows (refer to Figure 08−07−1).
ADS malfunction messages are displayed on the EICAS page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Air Data System (ADS)
ADSP 2 ADSP 1
LEFT AOA
RIGHT AOA SENSOR
SENSOR
ADSP 4 ADSP 3
TAT 2 TAT 1
ADSP, AOA, TAT location

Figure 08−07−1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
B. Air Data System Probes (ADSPs)

Each Air Data System Probe (ADSP) includes an air data computer that
is fixed to the base of the probe mount (pitot tube). As a result, sensed
air data is processed by each ASDP and routed to user systems as
digital data.
The pitot port, located on the forward end of the ADSP, measures total
air pressure for airspeed indications. Static air pressure is measured by
two static ports on each side of the ADSPs are installed aft of the pitot
port.
The static ports are also used to calculate Angle Of Attack (AOA). As the
AOA changes, the pressure sensed at the different static ports also
changes. The ADSP compares static port pressures and calculates the
angle of attack.
The rear pair of static ports provide static pressure for sideslip
compensation and redundant sensing. Drain holes provide drainage for
any trapped moisture.
A heater installed in each ADSP provides anti-ice protection.
Each ADSP is specific and supplies data to a specific location:
• ADSP 1 is on the top left side of the fuselage and provides data to
the left PFD.
• ADSP 2 is on the top right side and provides data to the right PFD.
• ADSP 3 is on the lower left side and provides data to the Integrated
Standby Instrument (ISI).
• ADSP 4 is on the lower right side and is used if there is an ADSP
failure.
Figure 08−07−2 shows the air data system.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
AIR DATA
COMPUTER
PROBE
DRAIN
STATIC
PORTS
PITOT
PORT
Air Data System Probes (ADSPs)

Figure 08−07−2
(1) Reversion
If an air data source fails, the affected display (left PFD, right PFD,
or the ISI) switches to an alternate air data source.
The left PFD, right PFD, or ISI air data source can be changed by
pushing the associated Air Data Source (ADS) switch on the
Reversion Switch Panel (RSP) (refer to Figure 08−07−3).
Pushing the selected ADS switch cycles through the air data
sources for the affected display.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
Affected Normal Alternate Alternate Alternate

display source source 1 source 2 source 3
Left PFD ADSP1 ADSP4 ADSP2 ADSP3
Right PFD ADSP2 ADSP4 ADSP1 ADSP3
ISI ADSP3 ADSP4 – –
Reversion switch panel

Figure 08−07−3
(2) Indications
When the PFDs and the ISI use their normal air data source, no
indication is displayed. When a PFD uses an alternate air data
source, the source is displayed in white on the PFD (refer to
Figure 08−07−4).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ADI
EICAS ADVISORY MESSAGE
Air data source reversion indication

Figure 08−07−4
When both PFDs use the same air data source, the source is
displayed amber on the PFD and the ADS SAME SOURCE caution
Figure 08−07−5).
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ADI
Reversion with same air data source

Figure 08−07−5
When the ISI uses an alternate air data source, an amber ADSREV
is displayed on the ISI (refer to Figure 08−07−6).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
ISI air data source reversion

Figure 08−07−6
The indications are the same for automatic and manual reversion.
C. Angle Of Attack (AOA) vanes

There are two Angle Of Attack (AOA) vanes installed on the aircraft, one
on each side of the nose fuselage, just behind the corresponding pair of
ADSPs (refer to Figure 08−07−7). They supply angle-of-attack
information and are a backup for the ADSPs.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
LEFT AOA
SENSOR
RIGHT AOA AOA SENSOR

SENSOR
Angle−of−Attack (AOA) sensor

Figure 08−07−7
D. Total air temperature probe

There are two Total Air Temperature (TAT) probes (TAT 1 and TAT 2)
installed on the aircraft, one on each side of the fuselage below the
ADSPs (refer to Figure 08−07−8).
These probes supply TAT and Static Air Temperature (SAT) data, which
is displayed on the PFDs and on the STATUS page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
If a single TAT probe fails, the ADS uses the same side engine TAT. If
the engine TAT probe fails, the ADS uses the opposite side engine TAT.
If both TATs fail, the ADS uses the opposite side fuselage TAT probe.
Total Air Temperature (TAT) probe

Figure 08−07−8
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Integrated standby instrument (ISI)
O
ISI − GENERAL
A. Overview
The Integrated Standby Instrument (ISI) supplies the information
necessary to fly the aircraft when there is only emergency power (battery
or RAT) available and no other display systems are available. The ISI is
located on the main instrument panel (refer to Figure 08−08−1).
The ISI displays the flight parameters that follow:
• Aircraft attitude (pitch and roll),
• Slip/skid indication,
• Air data (airspeed (Mach), altitude), and
• Navigation display (localizer/glideslope).
Integrated Standby Instrument (ISI)

Figure 08−08−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O Integrated standby instrument (ISI)
B. Attitude display
The ISI shows a sky/ground attitude display with the sky and earth
separated by a white horizon line. An aircraft symbol is superimposed
over the center of the attitude display.
Aircraft pitch is indicated by the pitch ladder (white pitch marks set above
and below the horizon line).
Aircraft bank angle is displayed as a roll scale and a roll pointer.
The slip/skid indicator is located at the base of the roll pointer and moves
laterally along the base of the triangular roll pointer. A displacement the
width of the trapezoid is equivalent to approximately one ball
displacement of a turn coordinator.
Figure 08−08−2 shows the attitude display.
SLIP/SKID INDICATOR
ROLL INDICATOR
ROLL SCALE
ATTITUDE
DISPLAY
PITCH
LADDER
Attitude display
Figure 08−08−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
(1) Unusual attitude

When the roll angle exceeds 65 degrees or the pitch exceeds 30
degrees nose-up or 20 degrees nose-down, the ISI displays a red
double-lined chevron on the pitch ladder. The pitch chevron is
positioned at the +30 degrees pitch line or the −20 degrees pitch
pointing upward or downward and towards the horizon line.
The display will be decluttered of all navigation data, air data source
reversion indicator, and barometric adjustment readout. The
barometric pressure adjustment is disabled.
Figure 08−08−3 shows the unusual attitude display.
EXTREME
ATTITUDE
AIRCRAFT CHEVRON
REFERENCE
SYMBOL
HORIZON LINE
Unusual attitude display

Figure 08−08−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
NOTE
The display is restored to normal condition when the
aircraft pitch attitude is within +25 degrees pitch up or
−15 degrees pitch down and/or the roll attitude is within
63 degrees to the left or to the right.
(2) Degraded attitude

An amber CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE message is displayed above
the aircraft reference symbol when one of the conditions that follow
occurs:
• Aircraft is operating without air data for more than 3 minutes, or
• Aircraft has exceeded 35 degrees of pitch or bank angle for
more than 3 minutes.
The message flashes for 5 seconds and is then removed from the
display.
Figure 08−08−4 shows the degraded attitude.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
Degraded attitude
Figure 08−08−4
(3) Attitude fail
When the attitude indication fails or is missing, the changes that
follow occur:
• All attitude data is removed from the display (pitch tape, roll
scale, and slip/skid indicator).
• A white ATT message on a red background flashes for 5
seconds and then is steady.
• The background color changes to solid black.
Figure 08−08−5 shows the attitude display failed.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
Attitude display failed

Figure 08−08−5
(4) SFIS reset
Some very unusual conditions can cause the ISI to reset (refer to
Figure 08−08−6).
In flight, the displays will show as follows:
• REBOOTING (for few seconds),
• Blackout (reset/reboot and in-air BIT are executed (a few
seconds)),
• Alignment mode (several minutes).
If the reset occurs on ground or the system cannot recover:
• The ALT, ATT, and IAS failed flags are displayed (ISI system
invalid).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
REBOOTING DISPLAY BLACKOUT DISPLAY
ALIGNMENT MODE DISPLAY INVALID DISPLAY
Abnormal behavior display

Figure 08−08−6
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
C. Air data
Air data includes vertical tapes for the altimeter and the airspeed
indicator.
(1) Airspeed/Mach
Airspeed is indicated by an airspeed tape and an airspeed readout.
When the Mach speed is greater than 0.40M, a Mach readout is
displayed above the airspeed tape.
A red overspeed marker is displayed on the airspeed tape, from the
appropriate limiting speed (either VFE, VLE, VMO or MMO) upward.
When the airspeed exceeds the limit speed, the overspeed marker
changes to a red and black checkerboard and the airspeed digital
readout becomes red. If the Mach readout is displayed, the readout
changes to red.
Figure 08−08−7 shows the airspeed indications.
AIRSPEED
AWARENESS
COLOR BAR
AIRSPEED
DIGITAL
READOUT
MACH SPEED
Airspeed indications
Figure 08−08−7
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
If the airspeed indication fails, the airspeed tape is removed and an

IAS white message on a red background is displayed. The
message flashes for 5 seconds and then becomes steady (refer to
Figure 08−08−8).
Airspeed failed
Figure 08−08−8
(2) Barometric altitude
Barometric altitude (refer to Figure 08−08−9) is displayed as
a moving altitude tape on the right side of the display. A readout of
the current altitude is displayed on the altitude tape. The altitude is
displayed in feet or meters.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
The altimeter setting is displayed above the altitude tape. It is

referenced in either inches of mercury (IN) or hectopascal (HPA),
as selected on the PFD altimeters. The value of the altimeter
setting is adjusted by turning the BARO switch. When the BARO
switch is pushed, the altimeter is set to standard barometric
pressure (29.92 IN or 1013.2 HPA) and the legend STD is
displayed instead of the numerical value. Subsequent use of the
BARO switch will display the actual altimeter setting.
LEADING
ZERO BOXES
BAROMETRIC
PRESSURE
ALTITUDE
DIGITAL
READOUT
ALTITUDE
Altitude display
Figure 08−08−9
If the altitude indication fails, the altitude symbology (altitude tape,
altitude readout) is removed and an ALT white message on a red
background is displayed (refer to Figure 08−08−10). The
message flashes for 5 seconds and then becomes steady.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
Altitude fail indication

Figure 08−08−10
D. Navigation display
When the NAV mode is activated, the ISI displays course guidance for
ILS/LOC approach. Based on the VHF NAV frequency selected (LOC),
the ISI displays horizontal and vertical guidance scales.
The navigation information is displayed only if the NAV mode is selected
ON.
Figure 08−08−11 shows the navigation display.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
NAVIGATION
SOURCE
GLIDE SLOPE
LATERAL
DEVIATION
Navigation display
Figure 08−08−11
If the approach aid source is lost or invalid, the lateral and vertical (if
applicable) deviation bars are removed and a LOC and/or GS white
message on a red background displays.
Figure 08−08−12 shows the Nav/Approach fail indications.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
Nav/Approach fail indication

Figure 08−08−12
E. Controls and indications

The ISI includes the controls that follow:
• M (menu) switch,
• Left (UP) and right (DN (down)) switches on each side of the M
switch, and
• BARO switch, which adjusts the parameters specific to the displayed
mode.
(1) Menu functions
When the M (menu) switch is pushed, the ISI menu is displayed.
On the ground, the menu occupies the total surface of the ISI. In
the air, the menu occupies the bottom surface of the ISI and
displays fewer items.
The left (UP) and right (DN) switches are used to select the desired
menu items.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
The main menu item is:

• ALIGN MODE – Starts manual alignment using the M switch.
Figure 08−08−13 shows the ISI menu.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ISI menu
Figure 08−08−13
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
(2) Alignment
On the ground during ISI alignment (refer to
Figure 08−08−14), an ATT ALIGNING DO NOT TAXI
message is displayed above the aircraft reference symbol and a
status bar tracks alignment progress. During alignment in flight,
only the ATT ALIGNING message is displayed (refer to
Figure 08−08−15).
During alignment, navigation data is not displayed. The menu can
be accessed while the ISI aligns.
The ISI can be manually aligned by selecting ALIGN MODE on the
menu.
ALIGNMENT
MESSAGE
PERCENTAGE
COMPLETED
STATUS BAR
Alignment on ground
Figure 08−08−14
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ELECTRONIC DISPLAY
O
ALIGNMENT
Alignment in−air
Figure 08−08−15
CAUTION
In-air alignment should only be done during straight
and level flight without acceleration.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FIRE AND OVERHEAT PROTECTION
O Cargo compartment fire protection
B. Cargo compartment fire indications

When smoke is detected in a cargo compartment:
• The Master WARNING / CAUTION lights illuminate on the
glareshield
• The “CARGO FIRE” aural alert sounds,
• A FWD CARGO FIRE or AFT CARGO FIRE warning message
appears on the EICAS page (refer to Figure 09−04−4), and
• The FWD FIRE CARGO switch or AFT FIRE CARGO switch
illuminates.
FWD cargo compartment fire indications

Figure 09−04−4
When pressed, either guarded FIRE switch sends a signal to
automatically shut off the associated cargo compartment ventilation
shut-off valves and air conditioning RECIRC fans, and activates the
appropriate squibs on the cargo compartment fire-extinguishing bottles.
The green AVAIL (available) light illuminates, indicating that the bottles
are armed and ready for discharge (refer to Figure 09−04−5).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FIRE AND OVERHEAT PROTECTION
O Controls and indications

L ENG BTL FAIL Failure (both squibs inoperative left TO, LDG
engine – bottles 1 and 2) of fire-
extinguishing bottles.
R ENG BTL FAIL Failure (both squibs inoperative right TO, LDG
engine – bottles 1 and 2) of fire-
extinguishing bottles.
L ENG FIRE DET Failure of the left engine fire detection TO, LDG
FAIL system.
R ENG FIRE DET Failure of the right engine fire detection TO, LDG
FAIL system.
MLG BAY OVHT Failure of the main landing gear bay TO, LDG
DET FAIL overheat detection system.

APU BTL LO Low pressure condition found on APU TO, LDG
fire-extinguishing bottle (normal or
abnormal).
CARGO BTL LO Low pressure condition found on either TO, LDG
cargo compartment fire-extinguishing
bottles – HRD or LRD (normal).
ENG BTL 1 LO Low pressure condition found on engine TO, LDG
BTL 1 (normal or abnormal).
ENG BTL 2 LO Low pressure condition found on engine TO, LDG
BTL 2 (normal or abnormal).
FIRE SYSTEM Loss of redundant or non-critical function TO, LDG
FAULT for the FIDEX system.
L ENG BTL FAULT Loss of left squib on BTL 1 or BTL 2. TO, LDG
R ENG BTL FAULT Loss of right squib on BTL 1 or BTL 2. TO, LDG
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
General
O
FLIGHT CONTROLS – OVERVIEW

The Primary Flight Control System (PFCS) consists of:
• Two ailerons,
• Two elevators, and
• A rudder.
The secondary flight controls include:
• Multifunction Spoilers (MFS) (four per wing),
• Ground Spoilers (GS) (one per wing), and
• Horizontal Stabilizer (HSTAB).
The high−lift flight system consists of leading edge slats and trailing edge
flaps.
The primary and secondary control surfaces are hydraulically actuated. An
electrically actuated horizontal stabilizer provides longitudinal (pitch) trim
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O General
LEGEND
Ailerons. Multifunction Spoilers.
Elevators. Ground Spoilers.
Rudder. Flaps.
Horizontal Stabilizer. Slats.
Flight control surfaces

Figure 10−01−1
An integrated Fly-By-Wire (FBW) system controls and monitors all primary
and secondary flight controls, except high lift devices (leading edge slats and
flaps).
The FBW system provides the following advantages:
Improved control and envelope protection,
Increased safety,
Increased fuel economy, and
Less weight, resulting in more efficient structural design.
Two sidesticks located outboard of each pilot station are used to control
pitch, roll, and horizontal stabilizer trim. Conventional rudder pedals, which
use the FBW system, control yaw. A spoiler control lever and a slat/flap
selection lever are located on the center pedestal. A pitch trim switch is
installed on top of each sidestick. Aileron and rudder trim switches are
located on the center pedestal. Refer to Figure 10−01−2.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
General
O
AFT FORE
Flight deck controls

Figure 10−01−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O General
The FLT CTRL synoptic page displays (refer to Figure 10−01−3) the
layout and major elements of the primary and secondary flight control system
that follow:
• Slats,
• Flaps,
• Aileron position (AIL),
• Elevator position (ELEVATOR),
• Rudder position (RUDDER),
• Ground spoilers, and
• Multifunction Spoilers (MFSs).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
General
O
SLATS
GROUND
SLATS SPOILERS
GROUND MULTIFUNCTION
SPOILERS SPOILERS
MULTIFUNCTION
SPOILERS
AILERON
AILERON POSITION
POSITION
FLAPS
FLAPS
ELEVATOR ELEVATOR
POSITION POSITION
RUDDER
POSITION
FLT CTRL synoptic page

Figure 10−01−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O General
The Engine Indication and Crew Alerting System (EICAS) page (refer to
Figure 10−01−4) indicates the position of the following:
• Slats/flaps (SLAT/FLAP),
• Horizontal stabilizer trim (STAB), and
• Aileron (AIL) and rudder trim (RUDDER).
Aileron trim does not display under normal conditions, as it is automatically
controlled by the FBW system. Failures that result in a degradation of the
flight control modes allow pilot control of the aileron trim. In these cases,
aileron trim position is displayed on the EICAS page.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
General
O
RUDDER
TRIM
HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
TRIM
EICAS page − Flight controls

Figure 10−01−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O General
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Fly−By−Wire (FBW) system
O
FBW SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The Fly-By-Wire (FBW) system controls and monitors all primary and
secondary flight controls (except the slats and flaps). The FBW system
receives input commands electronically from the flight deck controls (initiated
by the pilot) or directly from the autopilot. It converts them into output
commands to move the aircraft control surfaces. Figure 10−02−1
shows a simplified schematic of FBW versus conventional flight controls.
AFT FORE
Fly−By−Wire (FBW) versus conventional flight controls

Figure 10−02−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O Fly−By−Wire (FBW) system
There is no mechanical connection between the flight deck flight controls

(sidestick controllers (SSC) and rudder pedals) and the aircraft control
surfaces (ailerons, elevators and rudder). The FBW system transmits
commands to the hydraulic actuators to move their associated flight control
surfaces.
The FBW system operates in two distinct modes:
• Normal mode, and
• Direct mode.
In normal mode, the FBW provides full flight envelope protection for all
phases of flight.
If the normal mode is not available, the FBW system switches to direct mode,
to enable continued safe flight and landing only.
The three Fly−By−Wire (FBW) system control channels are powered by
independent power sources.
FBW system control channels 1 and 2 receive DC power through two
Fly−By−Wire Power Converters (FBWPCs). The primary source of power is
from the DC busses. FBW channel 3 receives DC power from DC essential
bus 3.
If there is a DC bus power loss, the secondary power sources are from the
permanent magnet alternator/generator located on the N2 gearbox of each
engine.
Any of the three FBW channels can allow safe flight and landing.
The FBW system includes:
• Flight deck controls,
• Inceptor Interface Modules (IIMs),
• Primary Flight Control Computers (PFCCs),
• Remote Electronic Units (REUs),
• Alternate Flight Control Unit (AFCU), and
• Horizontal stabilizer Motor Control Electronics (MCE) unit.
Figure 10−02−2 shows the simplified FBW system schematic.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
LEGEND AFCU Alternate Flight Control Unit

Pitch. GS Ground Spoilers
Roll. IIM Inceptor Interface Module
Yaw. MFS Multifunction Spoilers
Trim. PFCC Primary Flight Control Computer
Flight spoiler lever. REU Remote Electronic Unit
Fly−By−Wire (FBW) system schematic

Figure 10−02−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
FBW SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Flight deck control inputs
The FBW system receives input signals from the flight deck controls. The
control inputs include:
• Left and right sidestick,
• Left and right sidestick pitch trim switches,
• Sidestick priority switches,
• Aileron trim switch,
• Rudder trim switch,
• Left and right rudder pedal assemblies,
• Flight SPOILER lever, and
• TO/GA switches.
B. Inceptor Interface Modules (IIMs)

The FBW system includes three IIMs. The IIMs receive data from the
flight deck controls and transmit it to the PFCCs. Each IIM is connected
to the three PFCCs.
C. Primary Flight Control Computers (PFCCs)

There are three identical Primary Flight Control Computers (PFCCs) in
the aircraft. Two are located in the forward equipment bay and one in the
mid equipment bay (refer to Figure 10−02−3). The PFCCs are
responsible for the operation of the FBW system and its associated
functions. The PFCCs receive commands from the flight deck controls
through the IIMs, or from the autopilot/flight director systems. They issue
appropriate commands to move the flight control surfaces and provide
flight envelope and structural protection of the aircraft.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
PRIM FLT CTRL

PFCC 1 PFCC 2 PFCC 3
OFF OFF OFF
PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROL PANEL
Primary Flight Control Computer (PFCC) switches

Figure 10−02−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Each PFCC receives data from three Inertial Reference Units (IRUs) and
four Air Data Smart Probes (ADSPs). Only one PFCC is in control of the
FBW system at a time. The PFCC in control is automatically selected at
power-up.
The PFCCs can be manually disabled by selecting the appropriate PFCC
guarded switches, located on the overhead panel (refer to
Figure 10−02−4). When a PFCC is selected to OFF, a white OFF
light illuminates on the guarded switch, a PFCC 1 OFF, PFCC 2 OFF, or
PFCC 3 OFF status message displays on the EICAS page and a
message displays on the FLT CTRL synoptic page. When a PFCC has
failed, a PFCC 1 FAIL, PFCC 2 FAIL, or PFCC 3 FAIL advisory
message displays on the EICAS page.
Primary Flight Control Computer (PFCC) switches

Figure 10−02−4
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
D. Remote Electronic Units (REUs)

There are 10 Remote Electronic Units (REUs) in the aircraft. The REUs
transmit commands from the PFCCs to the hydraulic Power Control Units
(PCUs) of the control surfaces. Two REUs are also used to transmit
commands to the electric trim motor of the horizontal stabilizer.
If all the PFCCs fail, the REUs would then receive their inputs directly
from the cockpit controls through the IIMs. The REUs then command the
hydraulic actuators and the electric trim motor. In this situation the FBW
system operates in the REU direct mode (refer to FLY-BY-WIRE (FBW)
SYSTEM OPERATION – DIRECT MODE, REU direct mode).
The REUs are monitored and self-tested but there is no direct indication
or EICAS message on their condition.
E. Alternate Flight Control Unit (AFCU)

The Alternate Flight Control Unit (AFCU) bypasses the REUs in the
event of a severe FBW system degradation (refer to
Figure 10−02−5). It provides a direct interface between the flight
deck controls, the HSTAB MCE, and a single PCU at each aileron,
elevator, and rudder. In this situation, the FBW system operates in AFCU
direct mode (refer to AFCU direct mode).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Alternate Flight Control Unit (AFCU) logic

Figure 10−02−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
FBW SYSTEM OPERATION – NORMAL MODE

A. Normal mode − Introduction
The FBW system normal mode is the operating mode used during all
normal flight operations. It provides full authority and augmentation in all
three axes with envelope protection functions, structural envelope
protection and ground mode (refer to Figure 10−02−6).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Fly−By−Wire (FBW) normal mode

Figure 10−02−6
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
The following table shows the control functions and protections provided
by the FBW system in the normal mode. The functions and protections
are briefly described after the table.
PITCH ROLL YAW SPEED

BRAKES/
LIFT
DUMPING
Control – Pitch – Roll – Rudder – Proportional
functions command with rate/attitude command Lift
speed stability command – Yaw damp- Dump/speed
– Manual speed – Neutral spiral ing brakes and
trim stability, – Turn Ground Lift
– Auto stabilizer positive spiral coordination Dump
trim stability – Manual yaw (PLD/GLD)
– Pitch beyond 30- trim (includes 10-
compensation degree bank – Backdriven degree aileron
in turns – Conventional rudder pedals TEU)
– Nose landing lateral/direc- with trim
gear loading tional coupling
Limiting/ – Normal load – Bank angle – Partial in-
Warning factor – Roll rate flight thrust
Functions – High angle of – Wing asymmetry
attack maneuver load compensation
– High speed alleviation – Rudder
– Elevator command
command
– Asymmetric
(split) elevator
– Tail strike
reduction on
takeoff
– Tailplane
angle-of-attack
– Sidestick
shaker
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
B. Pitch control functions

The pitch control functions of the FBW system are:
• Pitch command with speed stability,
• Manual speed trim,
• Auto stabilizer trim,
• Pitch compensation in turns, and
• Nose landing gear loading.
(1) Pitch command with speed stability
In normal mode, the movement of the sidestick on the pitch axis
commands a combination of pitch change rate and maneuver load
factor. The neutral stick position corresponds to a demand of 1 g
flight with zero pitch rate.
As the sidestick is moved forward or aft, the aircraft pitch is
changed proportional to the sidestick position. When the sidestick is
released, the pitch rate is zero and the pitch attitude is maintained.
The normal mode includes a speed stability function that uses pitch
to automatically maintain a selected trim speed. If the aircraft speed
moves away from the trim speed, the aircraft pitch changes to
return to the trim speed.
(2) Manual speed trim
When the autopilot is disengaged, the trim speed is set manually
using the pitch trim switch on the sidestick. The trim speed displays
as a bug on the Primary Flight Display (PFD) airspeed tape. Brief
activation of the trim switch will enable fine-tuning of the trim speed.
Maximum trim speed VMAX, is restricted to VMO/ MMO, VLE or VFE,
depending on the aircraft configuration. It displays at the top of the
speed tape as an alternating red and black tape.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
The minimum trim speed is scheduled depending on the aircraft

configuration and Mach speed. It is set to ensure that an
appropriate margin related to the aircraft operational speed is
respected. The minimum trim speed increases as load factor
increases (during turns) and decreases when the load factors
decrease (return to straight flight).
Figure 10−02−7 shows the speed trim indication.
V
MAX
TRIM SPEED BUG
V
MIN TRIM
Speed trim indication

Figure 10−02−7
(3) Auto stabilizer trim
The horizontal stabilizer is controlled by the FBW system normal
laws and automatically moves to decrease the load on the
elevators.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Under certain conditions, to ensure that adequate pitch authority is

available for recovery, the FBW system inhibits stabilizer movement
or allows trim in only one direction. For example, during a high
angle-of-attack condition, the stabilizer is only allowed to trim
nose-down. Also, during an overspeed condition, the stabilizer is
only allowed to trim nose up. The nose-up autotrim is disabled
below 50 feet AGL.
(4) Pitch compensation in turns
Automatic nose-up pitch compensation is provided in a turn for
bank angles up to 33 degrees. Beyond this bank angle, aft sidestick
must be applied to maintain flight path.
(5) Nose landing gear loading
On the ground, when both thrust levers are advanced to more than
24 degrees, a nose-down elevator is applied to increase the load on
the nose gear. With sidestick at neutral position (no pilot input), the
elevator is automatically set to 12 degrees nose down up to 80 kt
and decreases to 0 degrees by 90 kt.
C. Pitch protection functions

The normal mode provides flight envelope protection to help maintain the
flight within the operational flight envelope. It also helps to recover the
aircraft should there be excursions beyond the operational limits.
The soft limit (soft stop) is used to provide a tactile cue at the edge of the
operational envelope. When a soft stop is exceeded, a tactile cue (and in
most cases visual or aural cues) indicates that the aircraft is at or has
exceeded the soft limit. The principal tactile cues are:
• Soft stop,
• Progressive increase in sidestick deflection force, and
• Sidestick shaker.
The hard limit (hard stop) allows limited safe excursion outside the
operational envelope.
Figure 10−02−8 shows the pitch protection functions.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
Pitch protection
Figure 10−02−8
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
(1) Normal load factor protection

The normal load factor protection limits the load factor, based on
aircraft configuration and sidestick position (soft or hard stops).
The following table gives the maximum load factor at the soft stop
and at full sidestick displacement (hard stop).
Description SLATS/FLAPS SLATS/FLAPS

retracted deployed
Full aft sidestick hard 2.75 g 2.2 g
stop
Aft sidestick soft stop 2.5 g 2.0 g
Forward sidestick soft 0.15 g 0.15 g
stop
Full forward sidestick −1 g −0.25 g
hard stop
(2) Pitch attitude protection

The nose-up pitch attitude limit is set to 30 degrees and is
sufficiently above the pitch attitudes required for normal operation.
At less than 140 kt, the pitch attitude limit is reduced from 30
degrees to 26 degrees at 130 kt. The pitch attitude limit stays
constant between 130 kt and 115 kt, and is then further reduced to
18 degrees at 95 kt. It stays constant below 95 kt.
The nose-down pitch attitude is limited to −20 degrees. This limit is
sufficiently low so that it does not interfere with nose-down
maneuvers such as emergency descent or low speed recovery.
On the ground, the nose-up pitch attitude limit is set to 17 degrees.
It is changed to the flight value after transition from ground to air.
Figure 10−02−9 summarizes the pitch attitude limits.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
40
30
20
10
0
90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
−10
−20
−30
Pitch attitude limits

Figure 10−02−9
The pitch attitude limits are indicated by green bars with ends on
the pitch ladder of the PFD, as shown in Figure 10−02−10.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Pitch limit indication

Figure 10−02−10
(3) High angle-of-attack protection
The High Angle-of-Attack Protection (HAP) ensures that the aircraft
does not exceed the operational Angle-Of-Attack (AOA) envelope
at the sidestick soft stop (VAOA SOFT), and that it does not exceed
its maximum AOA at full aft sidestick hard stop (VAOA HARD).
Between VMIN TRIM and VAOA SOFT:
• HSTAB noseup trim is disabled,
• Multifunction Spoilers (MFSs) automatically retract:
• The spoiler lever must be reset to the RET position in order
to redeploy the MFSs, and
• Spoilers do not retract at speeds above Mach 0.65 to allow
for emergency descent configuration.
• Maximum roll rate is reduced,
• The airspeed readout turns amber, and
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
• A single "SPEED" aural alert sounds.

Between VAOA SOFT and VAOA HARD:
• The airspeed readout turns red,
• A repetitive "SPEED, SPEED, SPEED" aural alert sounds, and
• The stick shaker activates.
At VAOA HARD:
• The red airspeed readout flashes,
• A red STALL warning flag is dispayed on the PFD, and
• A repetitive "STALL, STALL, STALL" aural alert sounds.
A system failure displays the ALPHA LIMIT EICAS caution
message.
The HAP function adjusts the protection settings:
• When in icing conditions and the wing anti-ice system is not
activated or has failed,
• During abnormal slat/flap configurations,
• When sideslip angles are greater than 5 degrees, and
• At high speed conditions (Mach > 0.65) to allow spoiler
deployment during emergency without shaker activation.
NOTE
The sidestick shaker is inhibited below 60 kt.
Figure 10−02−11 illustrates the high angle-of-attack protection

in normal mode.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

FLIGHT CONTROLS
VMIN TRIM
VAOA SOFT
"STALL, STALL, STALL"
Soft
Hard Stop
Stop Neutral
Soft
Stop
VAOA HARD
Hard
Stop
FLASHING RED IAS

PFD STALL WARNING
VAOA HARD
RED IAS
"SPEED, SPEED, SPEED"
STICK SHAKER ACTIVATES
VAOA SOFT
HSTAB NOSEUP DISABLED
MFS AUTO RETRACT
MAX ROLL RATE REDUCED
AMBER IAS
"SPEED"
VMIN TRIM
High Angle−of−Attack protection normal mode

Figure 10−02−11
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
(4) High speed protection

The high speed protection limits the aircraft speed if it exceeds
VMO/MMO due to pilot inputs or upsets, by applying an HSTAB
nose−up bias and deploying the MFS under high g loads. It
automatically recovers the aircraft to the trim speed if the sidestick
is released to its neutral position during an overspeed condition.
The high speed protection is only active when the slats and flaps
are retracted. When the landing gear is down, the maximum trim
speed is reduced to maximum landing gear operating speed (VLO),
but other speed limits remain unchanged.
(5) Tail strike protection
To reduce the possibility of tail strike during takeoff, the FBW
system reduces the aircraft pitch rate during aggressive rotations,
and compensates for forward and aft Center of Gravity (CG)
conditions. However, the combined effect of theses functions is
insufficient to guarantee tail strike protection in all conditions.
(6) Tailplane angle-of-attack protection
The elevator command is limited as a function of airspeed to
provide structural protection and to prevent a negative tailplane stall
condition.
(7) Elevator command
The elevator command is limited as a function of airspeed, to
provide structural protection.
(8) Elevator surface split limiting
The elevator split is limited as a function of airspeed and is disabled
if reliable elevator position data is not available.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
D. Ground/Air/Ground transition
(1) On ground (Normal mode – Ground)
On ground is defined as both main gear on the ground (typically
indicated by a combination of radio altitude, wheel speed and
weight on wheels). When the aircraft is on the ground, the normal
mode provides:
• Direct, full travel authority of the elevator,
• Pitch rate damping,
• Direct control of the horizontal stabilizer trim,
• Automatic setting of the trim speed bug to V2+ 10 kt (if an
engine failure is detected, the trim speed bug is set
automatically to V2),
• Nose-up pitch attitude limit set to 17 degrees,
• Sidestick shaker function above 60 kt, and
• Yaw damper function enabled at 70 kt.
Figure 10−02−12 shows the normal ground mode.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
PITCH LIMIT
140 16
180
170 12
160 10 10
8
150 4
F2 36
140
0
60 70 80 90 100
130 2 10 10
120 1R
20 20
110
70 kt
Normal ground mode

Figure 10−02−12
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
(2) Takeoff
The transition and envelope protection is designed to prevent
exceedance of AOA limits during takeoff and to ensure a rapid and
smooth transition from ground to air.
During the transition:
• Minimum speed markings on the PFD become active 1 second
after liftoff.
• The transition is completed within 3 seconds after the aircraft
leaves the ground.
• The nose-up pitch attitude limit is changed to the airborne
setting after liftoff, as indicated by the limit marking on the PFD
pitch ladder.
• Speed trimming and autotrim are enabled one second after
ground-to-air transition. The nose-up autotrim is activated
above 50 ft AGL.
Figure 10−02−13 shows the ground-to-air transition.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
140
30 30
180
20 20
170
160
150
143
2 F2
10 10 PITCH LIMIT
130 2
INDICATOR
1R MINIMUM
120 SPEEDS
10 10
110
30 36 30
10 10
MAIN
WHEELS
LIFTOFF
20 20
NOSE GEAR
WHEELS
LIFTOFF
AIRBORNE
NORMAL
NORMAL MODE−GROUND
MODE−AIR
Ground−to−air transition
Figure 10−02−13
(3) Landing
The air-to-ground transition is designed to provide smooth,
predictable handling during the transition.
• Speed trimming and the autotrim functions are disabled, and
manual stab trim enabled. The nose-up autotrim is disabled
below 50 ft AGL,
• Direct, full travel authority of the elevator following the
weight-on-wheels signal.
• Nose-up pitch attitude limit is set to 17 degrees.
• The pitch nose-down command is set when the spoilers deploy
after touchdown.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
• Yaw damping is disabled at 70 kt.

Figure 10−02−14 shows the air-to-ground transition.
PITCH LIMIT 10 10
INDICATOR
2
10 10
20 20
MAIN WHEELS
TOUCHDOWN
70 kt
AIRBORNE
ON RUNWAY
AIR TO
NORMAL GROUND NORMAL MODE−GROUND
MODE−AIR TRANSITION
Air−to−ground transition
Figure 10−02−14
E. Roll/yaw control functions

(1) Roll control functions
When the sidestick is moved laterally, a roll rate is commanded and
the aircraft banks. When the sidestick is released and the bank
angle is less than 30 degrees, the roll stops and the aircraft
maintains the bank angle.
When the sidestick is released and the bank angle is more than 30
degrees, the aircraft automatically rolls back to 30 degrees of bank.
The sidestick must be held deflected in order to maintain a bank
angle of more than 30 degrees.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
The normal mode automatically provides turn coordination. Rudder

pedal inputs are usually not required during normal coordinated
turns.
(2) Aileron lift augmentation
The ailerons deploy symmetrically (trailing edge down) for lift
augmentation. The ailerons deploy from 0 degrees to 10 degrees
as the flaps deploy, and retract on flap retraction.
Lever 0 1 2 3 4 5
detent
Flap 0 0 10 15 25 37
position
(degrees)
Aileron 0 0 10 10 10 5
droop
(degrees)
NOTE
Roll assist has priority over the aileron lift augmentation
function.
Figure 10−02−15 illustrates the aileron lift augmentation.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Aileron lift augmentation

Figure 10−02−15
(3) Yaw control functions
The rudder pedals control yaw. The FBW system sends calculated
yaw commands to the rudder, based on air data and aircraft
configuration.
The rudder travel is limited for structural loads and handling
requirements. The rudder travel limits change with airspeed and
flap position (refer to Figure 10−02−16).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
35
30
25
20
15
10
(flaps 0/slats out)

5
0
100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Rudder command limits

Figure 10−02−16
Directional trim is available through a trim switch located on the
center pedestal. It provides compensation for excessive rudder
pedal sensor bias and system failures not fully compensated by the
FBW system.
F. Roll/yaw protection function

(1) Bank angle limiting
The bank angle is limited to 80 degrees on each side (refer to
Figure 10−02−17).
During overspeed, or when more than 10 degrees pitch nose down,
the bank angle limits are reduced for high speed protection and/or
pitch limiting.
Hard bank angle limits are indicated by green bars with ends on the
roll attitude markings on the PFD (refer to Figure 10−02−18).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Above 31500 ft, the half bank angle limit (1/2 bank) is indicated by a
green arc on the roll scale.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
Bank angle/Roll rate

Figure 10−02−17
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
HARD BANK ANGLE LIMITS
BANK ANGLE LIMITS (1/2 BANK)
Bank angle limits

Figure 10−02−18
(2) Roll rate limiting
The maximum roll rate at full sidestick deflection is 20 degrees per
second. At extreme pitch attitudes, maximum roll rate is reduced
linearly to 10 degrees per second at the maximum angle of attack
(VAOA HARD).
(3) Wing maneuver load alleviation
To reduce wing root bending moment and for structural weight
saving, the wing maneuver load alleviation function deflects the
ailerons up (trailing edge up) during positive load factor maneuvers.
The function is activated at a load factor greater than 1.55 g.
Between 1.55 g and 2.1 g, the ailerons are linearly commanded to
10 degrees trailing edge up (TEU). Above 2.1 g, the 10 degree TEU
deflection is maintained.
When coupled with roll assist commands, the ailerons increase the
up deflection, but not below the deflection required to provide wing
maneuver load alleviation.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
(4) In-flight engine out compensation

The engine out compensation provides partial automatic yaw
compensation with an engine out condition (in the air). This
compensation is equally applicable to most failures that cause
significant yaw.
The aircraft typically rolls into the failed engine with a maximum
bank angle of 20 degrees or less, and a sideslip angle of 5 degrees
or less.
The intent of the engine out compensation is not to mask the
engine failure, but to provide assistance in controlling the aircraft
during and after the failure.
FBW SYSTEM OPERATION – DIRECT MODE

A. Direct mode – Introduction
The direct mode is automatically selected by the FBW system when the
normal mode cannot be maintained. It is intended for continued safe
flight and landing only.
The direct mode is a command-by-wire system. The positions of the flight
control surfaces are calculated based on direct mode control laws,
allowing sidestick surface control with limited augmentation. The direct
mode provides limited pitch augmentation while the aileron and rudder
surface deflections are proportional to the lateral sidestick and rudder
pedal inputs.
DIRECT MODE displays in amber on the FLT CTRL synoptic page (refer
The following table shows the control functions and protections still
provided by the FBW system in direct mode.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
PITCH ROLL YAW SPEED

BRAKES/
LIFT
DUMPING
Control – Surface – Surface – Surface – Proportional
functions command command command lift
– Pitch rate – Manual – Yaw damp- dump/speed
damping lateral trim ing brakes
– Manual – Manual
stabilizer trim rudder trim
– Back−driven
rudder pedals
with trim
Limiting/ – Elevator – Rudder
Warning command command
Functions – High angle of
attack
– Sidestick
shaker
Depending on the type of failure, the system reverts to one of three types
of direct mode:
• PFCC direct,
• REU direct, or
• AFCU direct.
Since direct mode is axis specific, it is possible to have different direct
mode laws acting in unison.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
Direct mode
Figure 10−02−19
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
B. PFCC direct mode

The PFCC direct mode is used when the information required for normal
mode is degraded or not received by the PFCCs. In this mode, the
Multifunction Spoilers (MFSs) and the ground spoilers are available. The
sidestick pitch trim switches control the horizontal stabilizer position
directly as a function of the slat/flap position.
When the PFCC direct mode is activated, an amber DIRECT message
displays on the upper left corner of the Primary Flight Display (PFD) and
the FLT CTRL DIRECT caution message displays on the EICAS page.
The speed tape VAOA HARD indication is removed, and the low speed
indication consists of a red and black tape below the VMIN TRIM amber
marker.
There are two PFCC direct sub-modes:
• PFCC direct mode due to all Air Data Smart Probes (ADSP) data
input failure — the FLT CTRL DIRECT ADS caution message
• PFCC direct mode due to all inertial data input failure — the FLT
CTRL DIRECT IRS caution message displays on the EICAS page.
Figure 10−02−20 shows the PFCC direct mode indications and the
Figure 10−02−21 shows the PFCC direct mode logic diagram.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
20 20
10 10
10 10
Low speed indication

Figure 10−02−20
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
FLT CTRL DIRECT

FLIGHT DECK CONTROLS FLT CTRL DIRECT ADS
Sidestick Rudder Trim
Controllers Pedals Switches FLT CTRL DIRECT IRS
EICAS CAUTION MESSAGES
AFCU
PCU
REUs
RUDDER
PCU
Air Data
REUs
PFCC 1
IRS System AILERONS
PCU
Surface Position PFCC 2 REUs
ELEVATORS
Flight Envelope PCU
PFCC3
Structural Limits
REUs
PCU MFSs
Autopilot
GS
MCE
HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
PFCC direct mode

Figure 10−02−21
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
C. REU direct mode

The REU direct mode is used when all the PFCCs have failed or all
signals to the REUs are lost. This mode has the same functionality as
PFCC direct mode, with the following exceptions:
• No selection of sidestick priority,
• Ground spoilers not available,
• No automatic ground lift dumping, the MFSs must be manually
deployed, and
• The pitch trim rate is a function of the slat/flap position, but is slower
than PFCC direct mode.
When the REU direct mode is activated, an amber DIRECT message is
displayed in the upper left corner of the Primary Flight Display (PFD),
and the FLT CTRL DIRECT caution message is shown on the EICAS
page. Figure 10−02−22 shows the indications in REU direct mode.
Additional advisory or status messages are also shown, depending on
the cause of the reversion to the REU direct mode.
If a PFCC is recovered, the computer must be reset with its guarded
switchlight on the overhead panel to revert to PFCC direct mode.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
DIRECT
10 10
34 36 2
10 10
20 20
FLIGHT DECK CONTROLS

Controllers Pedals Switches
AFCU
PCU
REUs
RUDDER
PCU
REUs
AILERONS
PCU
REUs
ELEVATORS
PCU
REUs
PCU MFSs
GS
MCE
REU direct mode

Figure 10−02−22
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
D. AFCU direct mode

The AFCU direct mode is automatically selected when control
requirement is lost due to failure of multiple REUs. In this mode, the
AFCU interfaces directly with the flight deck controls and actuators, using
dedicated sensors and channels with no reliance on the REUs. The
AFCU direct mode provides an independent control path from the flight
deck controls directly to all primary surfaces.
The AFCU direct mode has the same functionality as the REU direct
mode, with the following exceptions:
• MFSs are not available,
• The rudder authority is set to single engine operation settings, and
• The pitch trim is like PFCC direct mode regardless of slat/flap
configuration.
When the AFCU direct mode is activated, a red DIRECT message is
displayed in the upper left corner of the PFD, and the FLT CTRL
DIRECT warning message is shown on the EICAS page.
The FBW system automatically reverts back to REU direct mode on a
given axis if any of the REUs are recovered.
Figure 10−02−23 shows the indications in AFCU direct mode.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
DIRECT
10 10
34 36 2
10 10
20 20
FLIGHT DECK CONTROLS

Controllers Pedals Switches
AFCU
PCU
RUDDER
PCU
PFCC 1
AILERONS
PCU
PFCC 2
ELEVATORS
PCU
PFCC3
PCU MFSs
GS
MCE
AFCU direct mode

Figure 10−02−23
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
E. FBW control modes
Functional Allocation Normal PFCC REU AFCU

Direct Direct Direct
Autopilot
Envelope Protection
Spoiler Control
Roll Assist
Ground Spoilers (Auto Deploy)
Manual HSTAB Trim
Rudder Trim
Manual Aileron Trim
Sidestick Priority
FBW control modes

Figure 10−02−24
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
F. High Angle-Of-Attack (AOA) protection direct mode

In direct mode, the FBW system does not provide low-speed information.
Values for VMIN TRIM and the red stall marker tape are received from the
air data system. As VAOA SOFT is calculated by the FBW system, it does
not display.
When speed is between VMIN TRIM and the stall marker tape:
• The airspeed readout turns amber, and
• A single "SPEED" aural alert sounds.
When speed is at or below the red stall marker tape:
• The airspeed readout turns red and flashes,
• The stick shaker activates,
• A red STALL warning flag displays on the PFD, and
• A repetitive "STALL, STALL, STALL" aural alert sounds.
NOTE
Multifunction spoilers, if extended, do not automatically
retract in direct mode.
Figure 10−02−25 illustrates the high AOA protection in direct mode.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
STALL MARKER
VMIN TRIM
30
20
FLASHING
AIRSPEED 10 "STALL, STALL, STALL"
34 36
FLASHING RED IAS

STICK SHAKER ACTIVATES
PFD STALL WARNING
STALL MARKER
AMBER IAS
"SPEED"
High Angle−of−Attack protection direct mode

Figure 10−02−25
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
SYSTEM TEST
The FLT CTRL TEST REQ EICAS advisory message indicates that a FLT
CTRL test has not been recently performed.
The FBW system test and the sidestick shaker test are accomplished by
selecting the FLT CTRL and SHAKER soft switches respectively on the
AVIONIC synoptic page (AVIO tab). The test results are shown as messages
on the side of each soft switch, as shown in Figure 10−02−26. IN PROG
displays during either test.
During the SHAKER test, both sidesticks vibrate.
(1) FLT CTRL test
During this test, the EICAS displays the FLT CTRL IN TEST EICAS
advisory message.
Possible test results are:
• FAULT - failure due to component fault,
• FAIL - test failure, and
• PASS - test successfully completed.
(2) SHAKER test
The test displays DONE when completed.
NOTE
Both FLT CTRL and SHAKER tests are inhibited when
airborne.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
AVIONIC synoptic page (AVIO tab)

Figure 10−02−26
The table that follows lists the test result messages.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
TEST MESSAGE DESCRIPTION

IN PROG (cyan) Test in progress.
PASS (green) Test successfully completed.
FAULT (cyan) Test failure.
DONE (white) Test sequence completed.
PRESS TO STOP Test has to be terminated manually.
(white)
FAIL (amber) Test failed.
– – – – – (amber) Test invalid.
FLY−BY−WIRE SYSTEM – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION AURAL INHIBIT

FLT CTRL DIRECT Aircraft in AFCU direct mode. None TO
B. Caution messages
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION INHIBIT

ADS DEGRADED PFCC is reporting errors from the air TO, LDG
data system that could impact the input
to the CLAWS.
ALPHA LIMIT Reduction of upper aircraft pitch angle TO
limit (stall protection limit) due to failures.
FLT CTRL DIRECT Aircraft in direct mode. TO, LDG
FLT CTRL DIRECT Aircraft in direct mode due to air data TO, LDG
ADS input failure.
FLT CTRL DIRECT Aircraft in direct mode due to inertial data TO, LDG
IRS input failure.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O

FLT CTRL FAULT Loss of redundant or non-critical function TO, LDG
for the Primary Flight Control Systems
(PFCCs).
FLT CTRL IN TEST Flight control FBW system in automated TO, LDG
test.
FLT CTRL TEST Power-up Built-In Test (PBIT) test TO, LDG
REQ interval exceeded.
PFCC 1 FAIL Loss of PFCC 1 (loss of redundancy). TO, LDG
D. Status messages

PFCC 1 OFF PFCC 1 selected OFF. None
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Primary flight controls
O
PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROLS – OVERVIEW

The Primary Flight Control System (PFCS) consists of:
• Two ailerons,
• Two elevators, and
• A rudder.
All the primary flight controls are hydraulically powered and controlled by the
FBW system.
Figure 10−03−1 shows the primary flight control surfaces.
RUDDER
ELEVATOR
AILERON
Primary flight control surfaces

Figure 10−03−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O Primary flight controls
PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROLS – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Ailerons
There are two PCUs on each aileron. The inboard PCUs are powered by
hydraulic system No. 3 and controlled by the inboard aileron Remote
Electronic Unit (REU) (IB AIL REU). The outboard PCUs on each aileron
are powered by hydraulic system No. 2 and controlled by the outboard
aileron REU (OB AIL REU). The left and right ailerons are moved by
Power Control Units (PCUs), which consist of electrically-controlled
hydraulic actuators. Figure 10−03−2 shows the aileron architecture
and Figure 10−03−3 the general schematic.
AILERON
PCUs
AFCU AFCU
AILERON
OB AIL IB AIL IB AIL OB AIL
PCUs REU REU REU REU
Hydraulic system No. 2
Aileron system
Figure 10−03−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
Hydraulic System no. 2.
AILERON
PCUs
Aileron system schematic

Figure 10−03−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
In normal mode, the sidestick lateral movement, along with the Air Data
System (ADS), Inertial Reference Units (IRUs), and configuration data
are used to compute the aircraft roll commands. The commands are sent
to the REUs to move the ailerons through the PCUs.
In REU direct mode, the sidestick lateral movement is sent directly to the
REU for an aileron deflection.
In AFCU direct mode, the sidestick lateral movement is sent directly to
the AFCU to move the ailerons, using hydraulic system No. 3 only.
B. Elevators
The left and right elevators are moved by Power Control Units (PCUs),
which consist of electrically-controlled hydraulic actuators. There are two
PCUs on each elevator.
The left elevator outboard PCU is powered by Hydraulic system No. 1,
and the right outboard PCU is powered by the hydraulic system No. 2.
Hydraulic system No. 3 powers the inboard elevator PCUs on both sides.
On the left elevator, the AFT 1 REU controls the outboard PCU, and the
AFT 2 REU controls the inboard PCU. On the right elevator, the AFT 3
REU controls the inboard PCU, and the AFT 4 REU the outboard PCU.
Maximum elevator travel varies as a function of airspeed and
configuration changes. Available deflection is indicated by a rectangle on
the gray scale that varies in length. Lower airspeeds, and extension of
flaps, increases the available elevator deflection. As airspeed increases,
available deflection decreases.
Figure 10−03−4 shows the elevator architecture and
Figure 10−03−5 the general schematic.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
ELEVATOR
PCUs
AFCU AFCU
ELEVATOR
PCUs AFT 1 AFT 2 AFT 3 AFT 4
REU REU REU REU
Elevator system
Figure 10−03−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
ELEVATOR
PCUs
Hydraulic System no. 1. Hydraulic System no. 3.
ELEVATOR
PCUs
Elevator system schematic

Figure 10−03−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
The elevators operate symmetrically and are controlled by the sidestick

pitch command.
In normal mode, the sidestick pitch movement, along with the Air Data
System (ADS), Inertial Reference Units (IRUs), and configuration data, is
used to compute the aircraft pitch commands and move the elevators.
In REU direct mode, the sidestick pitch information is provided directly to
the REUs to move the elevators.
In AFCU direct mode, the sidestick pitch movement is sent directly to the
AFCU to move the elevators, using hydraulic system No. 3 only.
C. Rudder
The rudder is moved by Power Control Units (PCUs), which consist of
electrically-controlled hydraulic actuators. There are three PCUs on the
rudder.
Hydraulic system No. 1 powers the upper PCU, which is by controlled by
the AFT 1 REU. The middle PCU is powered by hydraulic system No. 2
and controlled by the AFT 4 REU. The lower PCU is powered by
hydraulic system No. 3 and controlled by AFT 2 REU.
Maximum rudder travel varies as a function of airspeed and configuration
changes. Available deflection is indicated by an arc on the gray scale
that varies in length. Lower airspeeds, and extension of flaps, increases
the available rudder deflection. As airspeed increases, available
deflection decreases.
Figure 10−03−6 shows the rudder architecture and
Figure 10−03−7 the general schematic
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
RUDDER
PCUS
AFT 1
REU
Hydraulic system No. 1 AFT 4
REU
Hydraulic system No. 2 AFCU
AFT 2
REU
Rudder system
Figure 10−03−6
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
RUDDER
Hydraulic System no. 1. Hydraulic System no. 3. PCUs
Rudder system schematic

Figure 10−03−7
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
In normal mode, the rudder pedal position, along with the Air Data
System (ADS), Inertial Reference Units (IRUs), and configuration data, is
used to compute the aircraft yaw commands. The commands are sent to
the REUs to move the rudder through the PCUs.
In PFCC direct mode and REU direct mode, the rudder command is
computed and modulated by the flap position.
In AFCU direct mode, the rudder pedal position is provided directly to the
AFCU to move the rudder, using hydraulic system No. 3 only. The rudder
has no travel restriction (full travel).
NOTE
The rudder trim pointer is referred to as a triangle in the
aircraft Electronic checklist (ECL).
PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROLS

A. Sidestick Controllers (SSCs)
Two uncoupled sidesticks, one on each side console, are used for
aircraft manual pitch and roll control (refer to Figure 10−03−8). The
SSCs provide pitch and roll input proportional to sidestick positions in the
pitch and roll axes. Each sidestick has:
• A dual pitch trim switch,
• An autopilot disconnect/priority switch (AP/PTY), and
• An intercom/Push-To-Talk (INT/PTT) switch.
Sidestick position is measured by four independent position sensors for
pitch and roll axis. If there are fewer than two valid sensors per axis, the
sidestick is declared faulty. In this case, the priority must be switched to
the other sidestick (see sidestick priority). When all sensors are lost, the
sidestick is failed. Failure of a sidestick displays the L SIDESTICK or the
R SIDESTICK caution message on the EICAS.
When the sidesticks are moved simultaneously in the same or opposite
direction, the system adds the signals of both algebraically. A red DUAL
message displays on both PFDs (refer to Figure 10−03−9) with a
“DUAL INPUT” aural message.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
PITCH TRIM SWITCH PITCH TRIM SWITCH
AP DISCONNECT/
PRIORITY
AP DISCONNECT/
PRIORITY
INTERCOM/
PUSH−TO−TALK
SWITCH
PILOT SIDESTICK COPILOT SIDESTICK
Sidestick
Figure 10−03−8
NOTE
When both sidesticks are moved in the same direction,
the total signal cannot exceed the signal from the
maximum deflection of a single sidestick.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
DUAL message
Figure 10−03−9
B. Sidestick priority
Normally, both sidesticks are active and can be used at any time.
However, a priority can be assigned to either sidestick. The assigned
priority can be a momentary priority (for a short time) or a latched priority
(continuous).
(1) Momentary priority
The momentary priority is activated by pressing the AP/PTY switch
on top of the sidestick.
When the switch is pressed and held:
• The sidestick has full authority,
• The opposite sidestick is deactivated,
• The PTY green legend on the onside glareshield SIDESTICK
switch flashes,
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
• A red arrow illuminates on the opposite SIDESTICK switch, and

• The autopilot disengages.
A “PRIORITY LEFT” or “PRIORITY RIGHT” aural message
sounds once each time the corresponding priority is selected. If
both AP/PTY switches are pressed, the last one pressed has
priority.
Figure 10−03−10 shows indications for a momentary priority
activated from the left sidestick AP/PTY switch.
The indications are reversed for momentary priority activated from
the right sidestick.
AP DISCONNECT/
PRIORITY PUSHBUTTON
Left sidestick momentary priority

Figure 10−03−10
(2) Latched priority
The latched priority is activated by lifting the guard and pressing the
SIDESTICK switch on the glareshield corresponding to the side to
be prioritized.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
When the SIDESTICK switch is pressed:

• The sidestick has full authority,
• The opposite sidestick is deactivated,
• The PTY green legend on the onside glareshield SIDESTICK
switch illuminates,
• A red arrow illuminates on the opposite SIDESTICK switch, and
• The autopilot disengages.
A “PRIORITY LEFT” or “PRIORITY RIGHT” aural message
sounds once each time the corresponding priority is selected.
Figure 10−03−11 shows indications for a latched priority
activated from the left SIDESTICK switch. The indications are
reversed for latched priority activated from the right SIDESTICK
switch.
Left sidestick latched priority

Figure 10−03−11
If both SIDESTICK switches are pressed, the last one pressed has
priority.
If the priority is latched, the disabled sidestick cannot obtain priority
when the AP/PTY switch is pressed. The only way to disengage the
latched priority is to press the SIDESTICK switch on the side of the
selected priority.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
If sidestick priority is latched on takeoff, the CONFIG SIDESTICK

warning displays on the EICAS page, and the “CONFIG
SIDESTICK” aural message sounds.
Figure 10−03−12 shows the priority switch indications
associated with dual and priority conditions.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
NORMAL
DUAL INPUT
MOMENTARY "PRIORITY LEFT"

PRIORITY LEFT AURAL MESSAGE
LATCHED "PRIORITY LEFT"

PRIORITY LEFT AURAL MESSAGE
MOMENTARY "PRIORITY RIGHT"

PRIORITY RIGHT AURAL MESSAGE
LATCHED "PRIORITY RIGHT"

PRIORITY RIGHT AURAL MESSAGE
Priority switch
Figure 10−03−12
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
C. Sidestick feel force

As the sidestick is moved from neutral position, the sidestick controller
provides feel forces (resistance to displacement). When the sidestick is
released, the centering function brings it to the neutral position.
When the autopilot is engaged, the forces maintaining the sidesticks at
their neutral positions are increased. If sufficient force is applied to either
sidestick, the autopilot will disengage and the other sidestick will become
free.
Soft stops and hard stops limit the travel of the sidestick on the pitch axis
only. The soft stops correspond to the limits of the normal flight envelope.
Increasing pressure at the soft stops moves the sidestick to the hard stop
(mechanical stops), for temporary excursion outside of the normal flight
envelope.
Figure 10−03−13 shows the sidestick envelope.
NEUTRAL
SOFT STOP SOFT STOP
HARD STOP HARD STOP
Sidestick feel force

Figure 10−03−13
A sidestick shaker function provides a tactile cue for stall awareness.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
D. Sidestick test
A sidestick cross test pattern is displayed on the FLT CTRL synoptic
page when the aircraft is on ground, no engine running, and no hydraulic
power is applied to the flight controls.
When the sidestick is moved, the blue dot should move in the same
direction as the sidestick until the sidestick reaches the pitch (soft stops)
and roll axis limits.
Figure 10−03−14 shows the sidestick test pattern.
SIDESTICK
Sidestick test
Figure 10−03−14
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
E. Rudder pedals
A rudder pedal assembly is installed at each pilot station. Each assembly
has 2 interconnected rudder pedals. The rudder pedal position is
electrically transmitted to the FBW system for yaw control. The rudder
pedals also include conventional wheel braking and limited nosewheel
steering for ground operation. Feedback from the rudder trim is
mechanically provided to the rudder pedals by a trim actuator.
Each rudder pedal assembly includes a rudder pedal adjust crank to
adjust distance from the rudder pedals, as shown in
Figure 10−03−15.
RUDDER PEDAL
ADJUST CRANK
AFT FORE
RUDDER PEDAL RUDDER PEDAL
Rudder pedals
Figure 10−03−15
F. Trim panel
The trim panel, located on the center pedestal, includes the aileron trim
switches (AILERON switch) and the rudder trim switch (RUDDER switch)
Figure 10−03−16 shows the trim panel.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Trim panel
Figure 10−03−16
The AILERON trim switch is a split-switch design that is spring-loaded to
the center position.
Aileron trim is achieved by moving both aileron trim switches. The aileron
trim function is available on the ground, or during flight in direct mode
only.
The aileron trim indication displays on the EICAS page as a white pointer
against a graduated scale. The aileron trim only displays in direct mode.
The RUDDER trim switch is a rotary switch that is spring-loaded to the
center position.
Rudder trim is achieved by moving the rudder trim switch.
As rudder trim is applied, the rudder pedals reposition from neutral in the
direction of the trim.
The rudder trim indication displays on the EICAS page as a pointer
against a graduated scale. The pointer is green when the aircraft is on
the ground and the rudder centered. The pointer is white when the
aircraft is in flight or not centered when on ground.
When the rudder pointer is not within the green band at takeoff, a
CONFIG RUDDER TRIM warning message displays on the EICAS page
with the associated “CONFIG TRIM” aural message.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROLS – INDICATIONS

A. Synoptic page
The FLT CTRL synoptic page includes the primary flight controls
indications for the:
• Ailerons (Refer to Figure 10−03−17),
• Elevators (Refer to Figure 10−03−18), and
• Rudder (Refer to Figure 10−03−19).
Aileron, elevator, and rudder status is indicated by the symbol color, and
displays:
• Normal,
• Fail, and
• Invalid.
(1) Ailerons indications
A green triangle moving against a grey scale shows the deflection
(up or down) of the aileron.
The AILERON FAIL EICAS caution message displays if both
ailerons fail.
The ROLL AUTHORITY EICAS caution message displays if either
aileron deflection command approaches its maximum operational
authority.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Normal
Fail
Invalid
Normal
Fail
Invalid
AILERON
POSITION
Aileron indications
Figure 10−03−17
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
(2) Elevator indications

A green triangle moving against a grey scale shows the deflection
(up or down) of the elevator.
Maximum elevator travel varies as a function of airspeed and
configuration changes. Available deflection is indicated by a
rectangle on the gray scale that varies in length.
The L ELEVATOR FAIL or R ELEVATOR FAIL EICAS caution
messages displays if either elevator fails.
The message becomes a warning during the takeoff phase flight.
The PITCH AUTHORITY EICAS caution message displays if either
elevator deflection command approaches its maximum operational
authority.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Normal
Fail
Invalid
Normal
Fail
Invalid
ELEVATOR
POSITION
Elevator indications
Figure 10−03−18
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
(3) Rudder indications

The rudder symbol moving against a grey scale shows the
deflection (left or right) of the rudder.
Maximum rudder travel varies as a function of airspeed and
configuration changes. Available deflection is indicated by an arc on
the gray scale that varies in length.
Failure of two PCUs displays the DEGRADED amber annunciation
below the rudder symbol, and the RUDDER DEGRADED EICAS
caution message.
AFCU direct mode engages in yaw axis or under dual hydraulic
failure scenarios.
Failure of all three PCUs displays an amber rudder symbol, and the
RUDDER FAIL EICAS warning message.
The YAW AUTHORITY EICAS caution message displays if the
rudder deflection command approaches its maximum operational
authority.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Normal
Fail
Invalid
Normal
Fail
Invalid
RUDDER
POSITION
Rudder indications
Figure 10−03−19
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
B. EICAS page
Figure 10−03−20 shows the primary flight control EICAS
indications.
73.3 73.3
73.3 73.3
N1
655 655
EGT
TRIM
AIL
93.4 N2 93.4 LWD RWD
2950 FF (PPH) 2950 NU
120 OIL TEMP 115
81 OIL PRESS 81
TOTAL FUEL (LB) 33800

SLAT / FLAP 3 STAB 8.7
6400 21000 6400
5500 100 ND
CAB ALT
P 1.2
RATE
CREW OXY 2000

TRIM
LWD
AIL
RWD
NL RUDDER NR
NU
LDG ELEV 560 STAB 8.7
TEMP
23 22 22
(°C) LO ND
NL RUDDER NR
INFO
Primary flight control EICAS indications

Figure 10−03−20
PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROLS – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages

CONFIG RUDDER Rudder trim position out of “CONFIG LDG
TRIM range for takeoff. TRIM”
CONFIG SIDESTICK Left or right sidestick priority “CONFIG LDG
latched at takeoff. SIDE-
STICK”
L ELEVATOR FAIL Left elevator failed during None None
takeoff phase.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS

R ELEVATOR FAIL Right elevator failed during None None
takeoff phase.
RUDDER FAIL All three rudder PCUs failed. None None
B. Caution messages

AILERON FAIL Either left or right aileron failed. TO, LDG
L ELEVATOR FAIL Left elevator failed during non−takeoff TO
phase.
R ELEVATOR FAIL Right elevator failed during non−takeoff TO,
phase.
L SIDESTICK Left sidestick failed. None
R SIDESTICK Right sidestick failed. None
RUDDER Two of the three rudder PCUs failed. TO, LDG
DEGRADED
PITCH AUTHORITY Left or right elevator command near TO, LDG
maximum operational authority.
ROLL AUTHORITY Left or right aileron command near TO, LDG
maximum operational authority.
YAW AUTHORITY Rudder command near maximum opera- TO, LDG
tional authority.

L PITCH TRIM SW Pilot pitch trim switch has failed. TO, LDG
FAIL
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O

R PITCH TRIM SW Copilot pitch trim switch has failed. TO, LDG
FAIL
D. Status messages
None.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Secondary flight controls
O
SECONDARY FLIGHT CONTROLS – OVERVIEW

The secondary flight controls consist of:
• Multifunction Spoilers (MFSs),
• Ground Spoilers (GSs), and
• Horizontal Stabilizer (HSTAB).
Spoilers (MFS and GS) are electrically controlled and hydraulically actuated.
The HSTAB is electrically controlled and actuated.
The FBW system controls the secondary flight controls, identified in
Figure 10−04−1.
NOTE
ROLL assist is not provided in AFCU direct mode.
LEGEND
Multifunction Spoilers.
Ground spoilers.
Horizontal stabilizer.

Figure 10−04−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O Secondary flight controls
SECONDARY FLIGHT CONTROLS − DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Multifunction Spoilers (MFS)
There are four multifunction spoilers on each wing. Each spoiler is
operated by one hydraulic Power Control Unit (PCU), and is electrically
controlled through a dedicated Remote Electronic Unit (REU). The MFSs
are powered by hydraulic system No. 1, system No. 2, and system No. 3.
Figure 10−04−2 shows the MFSs.
MULTIFUNCTION
SPOILER
MULTIFUNCTION
SPOILER PCU
MFS 4 MFS 3 MFS 2 MFS 1 MFS 1 MFS 2 MFS 3 MFS 4

REU REU REU REU REU REU REU REU
MFS L4 MFS L3 MFS L2 MFS L1 L GS R GS MFS R1 MFS R2 MFS R3 MFS R4
Multifunction spoilers
Figure 10−04−2
The following table gives the interaction between the MFSs, REUs and
the hydraulic systems.
MFS Hydraulic system REU

MFS L4 System No. 2 MFS 4 REU
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
MFS Hydraulic system REU

MFS R1 System No. 1 MFS 1 REU
The flight SPOILER lever, located on the center pedestal, controls the
deployment of the MFS. The MFS status and position are shown on the
FLT CTRL synoptic page and the EICAS page.
The MFS functions are:
• Roll assist,
• Speed braking (proportional lift dumping), and
• Ground lift dumping.
B. MFS – Roll assist

When necessary, the MFSs deploy automatically on one wing at a time
to assist roll control. The MFSs also provide roll control in case of aileron
failure. Roll assist function is available in normal and direct mode.
NOTE
Roll assist is not provided in AFCU direct mode.
Figure 10−04−3 illustrates the MFS roll assist.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Roll assist
Figure 10−04−3
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
C. MFS – Speed braking (proportional lift dumping)

The speed brakes/lift dump functions use the Multifunction Spoilers
(MFSs) for speed braking in flight and MFS and Ground Spoilers (GS) for
lift dumping on touchdown (refer to Figure 10−04−4).
When used as speed brakes, the MFSs are manually deployed
(symmetrically on both wings) by moving the flight SPOILER lever. There
are six lever positions, from RET (retracted) position, to FULL, and then
to MAX position.
In the normal mode, depending on the aircraft configuration, the MFS
can be deployed up to a maximum of 50 degrees, as shown in the
following table.
MODE HIGH SPOILER MFS 1 MFS 2 MFS 3 MFS 4

LIFT POSITION (degrees) (degrees) (degrees) (degrees)
LEVER
Normal Retracted RET 0 0 0 0
FULL 15 15 15 15
MAX 30 30 30 30
Extended RET 0 0 0 0
FULL 0 30 30 0
MAX 0 50 50 0
Steep Extended RET 0 18 18 0
approach
FULL 0 34 34 0
MAX 0 34 34 0
In the direct mode, depending on the aircraft configuration, the MFS can
be deployed up to a maximum of 30 degrees, as shown in the following
table:
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
Mode HIGH SPOILER MFS 1 MFS 2 MFS 3 MFS 4

LIFT POSITION (degrees) (degrees) (degrees) (degrees)
LEVER
Direct Retracted RET 0 0 0 0
FULL 8 8 8 8
MAX 8 8 8 8
Extended RET 0 0 0 0
FULL 15 15 15 15
MAX 30 30 30 30
In normal mode only, when the left or right thrust lever is set at a lever
angle greater than 24 degrees or during high angle-of-attack conditions,
the MFSs retract automatically to the stowed position and the SPOILER
MISMATCH advisory message displays on the EICAS page. The
SPOILER DPLY advisory message displays in flight, at FLAP 4 or 5,
when gear is down.
To redeploy the MFS, the SPOILER lever must be placed to the RET
position, then back to the desired setting.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
RET
1/4
R
E
1/2
T
3/4 R
A
FULL C
T
MAX
SPOILER
SPOILER PANEL
Proportional lift dumping

Figure 10−04−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
D. MFS – Ground lift dumping

In the normal mode, when the aircraft lands, all the MFSs are
automatically extended to full deflection to provide ground lift dumping.
This function is automatic and requires no pilot input.
In the PFCC direct mode, the ground lift dumping function deploys the
MFSs to 5 degrees to prevent excessive nose pitch up after landing. The
flight SPOILER lever must be manually moved to the FULL or MAX
position for additional MFS deployment.
In REU direct mode, there is no automatic ground lift dumping function.
The flight SPOILER lever must be manually moved to the FULL or MAX
position for MFS deployment.
MFSs will not automatically retract in direct mode.
In AFCU direct mode, MFSs are not available.
Figure 10−04−5 illustrates the MFS ground lift dumping.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
NORMAL MODE
PFCC DIRECT MODE
REU AND AFCU DIRECT MODES
Ground lift dumping

Figure 10−04−5
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
E. Ground Spoilers (GS)

There is one ground spoiler on each wing (refer to
Figure 10−04−6). Each spoiler is operated by one hydraulic Power
Control Unit (PCU) and is electrically controlled through the MFS 3
Remote Electronic Unit (REU). The ground spoilers are powered by
hydraulic system No. 1.
GROUND SPOILER
GROUND SPOILER PCU Hydraulic system No. 3
MFS 3
REU
MFS L4 MFS L3 MFS L2 MFS L1 L GS R GS MFS R1 MFS R2 MFS R3 MFS R4
Ground spoilers
Figure 10−04−6
The ground spoilers operate symmetrically to provide lift dumping at
touchdown. Automatic deployment of the ground spoilers is computed
through the PFCCs. Deployment logic is based on air data, IRS,
weight-on-wheels, wheel speed, and radio altitude data. The lift dump
function is automatic and does not need to be armed.
Ground spoilers operate automatically in normal and PFCC direct modes
only.
The position and status of the ground spoilers is shown on the FLT CTRL
synoptic page.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
F. Spoiler operation on landing

The ground spoilers only deploy on touchdown. Each ground spoiler
surface extends to 50 degrees for lift dumping during the landing rollout.
Activation is automatic in normal and Primary Flight Control Computer
(PFCC) direct modes. Deployment of the ground spoilers is not available
in Remote Electronic Unit (REU) direct or Alternate Flight Control Unit
(AFCU) modes.
The Multifunction Spoilers (MFSs) automatically extend to 50 degrees for
lift dumping during the landing rollout in normal mode, and to 5 degrees
in PFCC direct mode. In PFCC direct mode, the MFS can be extended
more with the Flight Spoiler Control Lever (FSCL).
The inputs that follow are necessary for the PFCC to deploy the ground
spoilers:
• Both Main Landing Gear (MLG) are WOW,
• Radio altimeter,
• Thrust lever position,
• Engine running signal,
• Wheel speed,
• Pitch attitude (GS only), and
• Airspeed.
The spoilers are armed for deployment on the ground when wheel speed
is greater than 60 kt.
Deployment occurs when the WOW condition is sensed, radio altitude is
less than 7 feet, and the wheel speed is greater than 16 kt. The GSs also
require the pitch attitude to be less than 2.5 degrees.
The spoilers stow automatically if the thrust levers are advanced to more
than forward idle thrust, or when any of the arming conditions are no
longer valid.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
G. Horizontal stabilizer
The horizontal stabilizer achieves the pitch trim function by varying its
angle of incidence. A dual-channel Horizontal Stabilizer Trim Actuator
(HSTA) moves the horizontal stabilizer. The HSTA includes two electrical
motors, each controlled by a Motor Control Electronics (MCE) unit. The
MCE receives commands from two REUs (AFT 1 REU and AFT 4 REU).
HORIZONTAL
STABILIZER
TRIM ACTUATOR
MOTOR CONTROL
ELECTRONICS (MCE) UNIT AFT 1
REU
AFT 4
REU
Horizontal stabilizer
Figure 10−04−7
The pitch trim is controlled by two pitch trim switches, one on each
sidestick.
The pitch trim indication displays on the EICAS page as a graduated
scale from 0 to 17. The pitch trim takeoff range is indicated by a green
rectangle. The trim pointer becomes green when within this range.
When thrust is set for takeoff with the horizontal stabilizer outside of the
takeoff range, the CONFIG STAB TRIM EICAS warning message is
displayed, and the “CONFIG TRIM” aural alert sounds repeatedly (refer
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
CONFIG STAB TRIM EICAS warning and aural messages

Figure 10−04−8
In normal mode, the stabilizer position is determined by the FBW Control
Laws (CLAWS). The autotrim function automatically off-loads the
stabilizer, independent of the sidestick trim switches. During manual
flight, the trim speed is set by the pitch trim switches.
In direct mode, the pitch trim switches move the horizontal stabilizer
directly. Refer to FBW system operation – Direct mode for more
information.
SECONDARY FLIGHT CONTROLS – CONTROLS

A. SPOILER lever
The SPOILER lever is located on the center pedestal (refer to
Figure 10−04−9). The MFSs are manually deployed by moving this
lever to the required setting. There are six lever positions, from RET
(retracted) position, to FULL and then to MAX position.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
EICAS
EICAS
Flight SPOILER lever

Figure 10−04−9
B. Sidestick pitch trim switch

The pitch trim is controlled by two pitch trim switches, one located on
each sidestick (refer to Figure 10−04−10).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
PITCH TRIM
SWITCH
Sidestick pitch trim switch

Figure 10−04−10
In normal mode, the horizontal stabilizer position is determined by the
FBW Control Laws (CLAWS). The autotrim function automatically
off-loads the stabilizer, independent of the sidestick trim switches.
In direct mode, the pitch trim switches move the horizontal stabilizer
directly. Refer to FBW system operation – Normal mode for more
information.
The PFCC will disable trimming in the air if a trim switch is actuated
continuously for more than 3 seconds. Pilots are alerted with a double
beep sound. Releasing the trim switch resets the trim function.
Trim system failures generate related EICAS caution or advisory
messages:
• STAB TRIM FAIL,
• STAB DEGRADED,
• L PITCH TRIM SW FAIL, and
• R PITCH TRIM SW FAIL.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
SECONDARY FLIGHT CONTROLS – INDICATIONS

A. Synoptic page – Spoiler indications
The FLT CTRL synoptic page (refer to Figure 10−04−11) includes
the spoiler indications that follow:
• MFS indications, and
• GS indications.
The MFS deployment indication and status is a T−symbol moving
against two grey indicators, which shows the deployment (up or down) of
the MFS.
The GS deployment indication and status is a green arrow moving
against a single grey indicator, which shows the deployment (up or
down) of the GS.
For both MFS and GS deployments:
• The spoiler status is indicated by the color: green for normal, and
amber for failure.
• An invalid signal displays an amber X in place of the surface. If an
invalid signal occurs after spoiler extention, the symbol is replaced
with an amber X.
When thrust is set for takeoff with any spoiler not stowed, the CONFIG
SPOILER EICAS warning message displays and the "CONFIG
SPOILER" aural alert sounds repeatedly.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
Normal Normal
Fail
Fail
Invalid
Invalid
Normal
Fail
Invalid
Spoiler (MFS and GS) indications on synoptic page

Figure 10−04−11
B. EICAS page
The EICAS page includes the secondary flight control indications that
follow:
• Stab trim indications,
• Spoiler indications, and
• Slat and flap indications.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
The stab trim displays on the EICAS page as a white pointer, containing
the trim value from 0 to 17 against a graduated scale. On the ground, a
green rectangle on the scale indicates the takeoff trim range. The trim
pointer also becomes green when within this range.
The EICAS page displays SPOILER OUT for selections up to FULL.
SPOILER MAX is displayed when the flight SPOILER lever is in the MAX
detent position.
Refer to Figure 10−04−12 for secondary flight control EICAS
indications.
Secondary flight control EICAS indications

Figure 10−04−12
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O
SECONDARY FLIGHT CONTROLS – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages

CONFIG SPOILER Spoiler (MFS or GS) out at “CONFIG LDG
takeoff. SPOIL-
ER”
CONFIG STAB TRIM Stab trim position out of “CONFIG LDG
range for takeoff. TRIM”
B. Caution messages

GND LIFT DUMP Automatic ground lift dump function TO
FAIL failed.
GND SPOILER FAIL Ground spoilers failed retracted (Panel). TO
SPOILER 2 pairs of MFS failed. TO
DEGRADED
SPOILER DPLY Flight spoiler deployed below 300ft. TO
SPOILER FAIL Three or more MFS failed. TO
SPOILER LEVER Spoiler lever manual control failed. TO, LDG
FAIL
STAB DEGRADED Selected stab position is invalid. TO, LDG
STAB TRIM FAIL Stab trim function failed. TO, LDG

SPOILER Spoiler autoretract function engaged. TO
MISMATCH
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS

SPOILER DPLY Flight spoiler deployed with either gear Power-
deployed or flaps. up, TO
D. Status messages
None.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
High lift system
O
HIGH LIFT SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The high lift system consists of leading edge slats and trailing edge flaps.
The slats and flaps are commanded by the Slat/Flap Electronic Control Units
(SFECUs).
HIGH LIFT SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. High lift system (slats/flaps)
The high lift system includes:
• Four leading edge slat panels on each wing, and
• Two Fowler-type flaps on each wing.
The slats and flaps are hydraulically actuated and electrically controlled.
The slat/flaps are controlled by two Slat/Flap Electronic Control Units
(SFECUs) located in the mid equipment bay. Refer to
Figure 10−05−1.
LEGEND
Slats.
Flaps.
Slats and flaps

Figure 10−05−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O High lift system
A single SLAT/FLAP lever controls both systems. An ALTN FLAP

guarded switch enables the pilots to deploy the slats and flaps to position
3, if required.
NOTE
The high lift system is not part of the FBW system, but
provides input to it.
B. Slat system
There are four slat panels on each wing. Slat panel 1 is located between
the fuselage and the engine. Slat panels 2, 3, and 4 are located from
outboard of the engine to the wing tip.
The slats are driven by two hydraulic motors in the Power Drive Units
(PDUs) through a system of rigid torque tubes and rotary geared
actuators. The system uses pressure from hydraulic system No. 2 and
system No. 3.
The slat system can be operated with one motor and/or one hydraulic
system inoperative. In this case, the slats will reach the full deployment
position, but at half the speed.
One outboard hydraulic brake at each wing tip holds the slats in position
between selections. It can also stop the motion of the slats if an
abnormal condition is detected. The position sensing and skew detection
systems provide slat position and monitor the condition of the slat
system.
C. Flap system
There are two Fowler-type flaps on each wing. The flaps are driven by
two hydraulic motors in the Power Drive Units (PDUs) through a system
of rigid torque tubes and rotary geared actuators. The system uses
pressure from hydraulic system No. 1 and system No. 3.
The flap system can be operated with one motor and/or one hydraulic
system inoperative. In this case, the slats will reach the full deployment
position, but at half the speed.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
High lift system
O
Like the slat system, the flap system includes:

• Outboard hydraulic brakes, and
• Position sensing and skew detection system.
HIGH LIFT SYSTEM – CONTROLS

A. Slat/flap panel
The slat/flap panel is located on the center pedestal. It includes the
SLAT/FLAP lever and the ALTN FLAP switch. Refer to
Figure 10−05−2.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O High lift system
SLAT
BRAKE
FLAP
BRAKE
GATED
SLAT/FLAP panel
Figure 10−05−2
The SLAT/FLAP lever allows the deployment and retraction of the slats
and flaps. It has six positions, numbered from 0 to 5. Position 2 and
position 4 are gated, and the SLAT/FLAP lever release handle must be
used to go through these positions.
Each lever position represents a specific setting of the slats and flaps
according to the operational mode of the aircraft (takeoff, approach,
steep approach, etc.). The following table shows the settings of the slats
and flaps for each lever position.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
High lift system
O
LEVER FLIGHT PHASE SLAT ANGLE FLAP POSITION

POSITION (degree) (degree)
0 Cruise 0 0
1 Slats only 21 0
2 Takeoff 21 10
(gated) (best climb)
3 Takeoff 21 15
4 Takeoff 24 25
(gated) (short field)
Landing
5 Landing 27 37
When the guarded ALTN FLAP switch is at NORM, the slats and flaps
are controlled by the SLAT/FLAP lever. When the switch is set to DPLY
(deploy), the SLAT/FLAP lever is overridden and the slats and flaps are
deployed to position 3. The ALTN FLAP DPLY status message is
displayed on the EICAS page.
HIGH LIFT SYSTEM – INDICATIONS

A. Synoptic page – High lift normal indications
The FLT CTRL synoptic page includes the slats and flaps indications
(refer to Figure 10−05−3). The indications are displayed when
either:
• The slat/flap selection is made, or
• The landing gear is extended.
A combined SLAT/FLAP position indicator displays the actual position of
the slats and flaps with a green number in a square. The number
corresponds to the SLAT/FLAP lever position. When the surfaces are in
transit, the number will be white showing the positions achieved as the
slats/flaps extend/retract, then green when the selected setting is
reached.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O High lift system
The slat and flap symbols increase in size when the slats or flaps are
extended (OUT).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
High lift system
O
Normal − In
Normal − Out
0
4
1
In
2 commanded
position
3
4
5
0
1
2 In
transit
3
4
5
Slat and flap normal indications on synoptic page

Figure 10−05−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O High lift system
B. Synoptic page – High lift non-normal indications

If a malfunction occurs, the combined SLAT/FLAP indicator is replaced
by separate SLAT and FLAP indicators on the EICAS page and on the
FLT CTRL synoptic page. Refer to Figure 10−05−4.
The malfunctioning system(s) display the indication in amber.
The slat position indicator displays the slat positions with the words IN,
OUT, MID and FULL. If the slats are failed or malfunctioning, the word
displays in amber and corresponds to the last achieved position.
The flap position indicator displays the flap position with a number from 0
to 5. If the flaps are failed or malfunctioning, the number is amber and
corresponds to the last achieved position.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
High lift system
O
ATE
Failed − In
Invalid − In
Failed − Out
Invalid − Out
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
Slat and flap non−normal indications on synoptic page

Figure 10−05−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O High lift system
C. EICAS page - Slat/Flap indications

The slats and flaps position displays on the EICAS whenever it is
displayed on the FLT CTRL synoptic page (refer to
Figure 10−05−5).
The right horizontal portion of the position indicator displays flaps
position, and has five marks representing flaps up to fully extended.
The left downward pointing portion of the position indicator displays slats
position. The four marks represent slats retracted to fully extended.
When a selection is made with the SLAT/FLAP lever:
• Cyan markers identifying the selected surface positions display on
the EICAS indicator,
• Surfaces in transit display an animated white line moving along the
indicator to the cyan markers, and
• A white number in a box above the position indicator displays the last
achieved extension during surface movement.
When the slats and flaps reach their selected positions:
• The cyan markers are removed from the indicator,
• The white lines on the indicator turn green, and
• The white boxed number turns green.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
High lift system
O
Flap/Slat deployed
at commanded position
Flap/Slat in transit
Flap/Slat failed deployed
Flap/Slat failed retracted
Flap/Slat invalid
Abnormal indication on EICAS

Figure 10−05−5
When thrust is set for takeoff with the slats and flaps outside of the
takeoff range, the CONFIG FLAP EICAS warning message displays and
the "CONFIG FLAPS" aural alert sounds repeatedly (refer to
Figure 10−05−6).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O High lift system
CONFIG FLAP EICAS warning and aural messages

Figure 10−05−6
HIGH LIFT SYSTEM – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages

CONFIG FLAP Slat/Flap not configured for “CONFIG None
takeoff. FLAP”
B. Caution messages

FLAP FAIL Any failure that results in the flap system TO, LDG
being inoperable. Both flap channels
unavailable due to monitor failure.
FLAP SLOW Flap speed less than 30% of dual TO, LDG
channel nominal speed.
SLAT FAIL Any failure that results in the slat system TO, LDG
being inoperable. Both slat channels
unavailable due to monitor failure.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FLIGHT CONTROLS
High lift system
O

SLAT SLOW Slat speed less than 30% of dual TO, LDG
channel nominal speed.
SLAT SKEW Slat skew condition detected or slat TO, LDG
asymmetry.
SLAT-FLAP FAIL Any failure that results in the slat and TO, LDG
flap systems being inoperable. All
channels unavailable due to monitor fail-
ure.
SLAT-FLAP LEVER Failure to command flaps through the TO, LDG
FAIL flap lever.

FLAP FAULT Loss of redundancy or loss of non-critical TO, LDG
functions within the flap system.
FLAP SLOW Only one flap channel available to drive TO, LDG
system at approximately half speed
(30% − 60%).
SLAT FAULT Loss of redundancy or loss of non-critical TO, LDG
functions within the slat system.
SLAT SLOW Only one slat channel available to drive TO, LDG
system at approximately half speed
(30% − 60%).
SLAT-FLAP SLOW One flap and one slat channel available TO, LDG
to drive system at slow speed (RAT
deployment) (30% − 60%).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT CONTROLS
O High lift system
D. Status messages

ALTN FLAP DPLY Alternate flap setting deployed selected None
(setting 3).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
General
O
FUEL SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The fuel system consists of three fuel tanks (left and right main tanks, and
center tank) and a distribution system to feed the engines and the Auxiliary
Power Unit (APU). The fuel distribution system is capable of powered
(automatic or manual) and gravity fuel transfers, as well as cross-feed
operations. A fuel inerting system uses Nitrogen-Enriched Air (NEA) to
reduce the risk of fuel fumes igniting in the fuel tanks. The pressurized
refuel/defuel system operates in automatic or manual mode. A dual−channel
Fuel Quantity Computer (FQC) monitors fuel quantity and temperature, and
controls refuel/defuel operations.
System controls are located on the FUEL panel (refer to
Figure 11−01−1) and on the REFUEL / DEFUEL panel (refer to
Figure 11−01−2). System indications are provided by the FUEL
synoptic page (refer to Figure 11−01−3) and the fuel section of the
EICAS synoptic page (refer to Figure 11−01−4). Status and fault
messages are reported on the EICAS synoptic page.
Fuel panel
Figure 11−01−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O General
REFUEL / DEFUEL panel

Figure 11−01−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
General
O
Fuel synoptic page

Figure 11−01−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O General
EICAS page − Fuel indications

Figure 11−01−4
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
Fuel storage system
O
FUEL STORAGE SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

A. Fuel tanks
Fuel is stored in the left main, right main, and center fuel tanks (refer to
Figure 11−02−1). These tanks are integral with the wing structure
and separated by structural ribs. A collector tank in each main tank
ensures a positive supply of fuel to each engine and APU in all aircraft
attitudes. Fuel is fed from the collector tanks to the engines. Flapper
check valves installed in the ribs of the main tanks allow fuel to flow
inboard to the collector tanks, but prevent outboard flow. The left and
right surge tanks serve as ventilation space, they do not store fuel but
they collect excess fuel from the vent system and return it to the
respective main tank through a flapper check valve.
The table that follows shows the maximum usable fuel load distribution in
each tank.
Maximum usable fuel load

Tank Tank volume Fuel mass [1]
L US gal kg lb
Left main tank 3770 996 3050 6725
Right main tank 3770 996 3050 6725
Center tank 13968 3689 11300 24900
Total 21508 5681 17400 38350
[1] Based on a fuel density of 0.809 kg/L (6.75 lb/US gal), rounded to the
nearest 10 kg or 25 lb. Fuel mass is provided for reference only and
should not be considered limiting.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O Fuel storage system
Fuel storage system

Figure 11−02−1
B. Fuel tank ventilation

The fuel vent system (refer to Figure 11−02−2) maintains the air
pressure inside the fuel tanks within the structural design requirements
by providing an airflow path between the fuel tanks and the atmosphere
in all operating conditions. Each fuel tank is vented to a wing surge tank
through a dedicated tank vent system.
The center tank and left main tank are vented into the left surge tank.
The right main tank is vented into the right surge tank. The float vent
valves close the vent lines when the tanks are near full or when the
aircraft is in an attitude that would cause fuel to enter the vent tank lines.
Each main tank has a pressure relief valve. The center tank has two
alternate vent tank lines, both with a pressure relief valve attached.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
Fuel storage system
O
In flight, NACA scoops located in each surge tank provide ram air
pressure to maintain a positive pressure on the fuel in the tanks. During
ground operations, NACA scoops provide static ventilation of the tanks
and relieve the buildup of air pressure during refueling or thermal
expansion of the fuel.
Fuel tank venting system

Figure 11−02−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O Fuel storage system
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
Fuel distribution system
O
FUEL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

The fuel distribution system controls the movement of fuel as follows:
• Supply of fuel to the engines,
• Supply of fuel to the APU,
• Automatic center tank to main tank transfer,
• Manual fuel transfer, which can move fuel from:
• The main tanks to the center tank,
• One main tank to the opposite main tank,
• Automatic fuel balancing, and
• Gravity crossflow.
The major components of the fuel distribution system are:
• Two AC boost pumps,
• Two AC boost pump pressure switches,
• Two engine main fuel ejector pumps,
• Two scavenge ejectors pumps,
• Two transfer ejectors pumps,
• Two transfer float valves,
• One gravity crossflow shutoff valve,
• Two engine fuel shutoff valves,
• Two engine feed pressure switches, and
• One APU fuel shutoff valve.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O Fuel distribution system
A. Motive flow
Motive flow is the primary means to move fuel throughout the fuel
distribution system. When the high pressure fuel from the Engine Driven
Pump (EDP) passes through a venturi-shaped fuel ejector, a low
pressure is created (refer to Figure 11−03−1). The suction caused
by the low pressure moves the fuel out of the tank.
The fuel distribution system uses motive flow to:
• Transfer fuel from the center tank into the main tanks,
• Transfer fuel from the main tanks to the collector tanks, and
• Supply fuel to the engines and APU.
Motive flow ejector pump

Figure 11−03−1
B. AC boost pumps
An AC boost pump in each collector tank is the backup for the main fuel
ejector pump. The AC boost pumps are AC electrical pumps that provide
the functions that follow:
• Engine fuel feed backup,
• APU fuel feed backup,
• Fuel crossfeed,
• Fuel transfer, and
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
• Support engine start in flight.

The AC boost pumps are controlled by the L BOOST PUMP switch and
R BOOST PUMP switch on the FUEL panel (refer to
Figure 11−03−2). They are normally selected to AUTO but can be
manually selected to ON or OFF.
L BOOST PUMP and R BOOST PUMP switches

Figure 11−03−2
C. Engine fuel feed

The engine fuel feed system uses the main fuel ejector pumps as the
primary means to pump fuel from the collector tanks to the engines (refer
to Figure 11−03−3). One-way check valves prevent the ejector
pumps from cross feeding. The ejector pumps require high pressure
motive fuel flow from the EDP to operate.
If one or both main ejector pumps fail, both AC boost pumps will
automatically come on (if set to AUTO) and supply fuel to the engines
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
MAIN EJECTOR MAIN EJECTOR

PUMP PUMP
Normal engine fuel feed

Figure 11−03−3
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
AC BOOST PUMPS
Engine fuel feed by the AC boost pumps

Figure 11−03−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
D. Engine fuel shutoff valves

A motor-operated shutoff valve is installed in each of the engine feed
lines to isolate the fuel flow. The valves are controlled by the L ENG and
R ENG run switches on the Throttle Quadrant Assembly (TQA) (refer to
Figure 11−03−5).
The L ENG FIRE and R ENG FIRE switches close the fuel shutoff valve
when pressed.
LEFT ENGINE RIGHT ENGINE

FIRE SWITCH FIRE SWITCH
LEFT ENGINE
FUEL SHUTOFF
VALVE
23 °C
6000 LB
0 LB
Engine fuel shutoff valve controls

Figure 11−03−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
E. APU fuel feed

The APU receives fuel through the left engine feed line from either:
• The left engine main fuel ejector pump, or
• The left or right AC boost pump, or
• Suction-feed if AC power is not available and the left engine is not in
operation.
When the left engine is in operation, the left main ejector pump supplies
fuel directly to the APU.
When the left engine is not in operation, both AC boost pump switches
are at AUTO and the external AC is available, the APU Electronic Control
Unit (ECU) activates the left AC boost pump. If the left AC boost pump is
not available, the ECU will activate the right AC boost pump. The
respective BOOST PUMP switch must be set to AUTO.
If the AUTO logic is not available, the flight crew can manually activate
either AC boost pump to supply fuel to the APU.
Figure 11−03−6 shows the APU fuel feed operation.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
APU fuel feed

Figure 11−03−6
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
F. APU fuel shutoff valve

Fuel for the APU goes through the APU fuel shutoff valve. The APU
Electronic Control Unit (ECU) opens the valve during the APU start
sequence.
The APU fuel shutoff valve can be closed by:
• Turning off the APU switch (refer to Figure 11−03−7),
• Pressing the guarded APU FIRE switch (refer to
Figure 11−03−7), or
• Automatically by the ECU, when serious faults occur on the ground
or in flight.
For additional information refer to Chapter 04 – Auxiliary Power Unit
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
MAIN
EJECTOR
PUMP
AC BOOST
PUMP
APU
FUEL
SHUTOFF
APU FIRE VALVE
SWITCH
APU fuel feed shutoff valve controls

Figure 11−03−7
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
G. Scavenge System
A scavenge ejector pump, located in each main tank, continuously
moves fuel from the main tank to the collector tank. The scavenge
ejector pumps require motive flow from the engine EDP to function (refer
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
Scavenge System
Figure 11−03−8
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
H. Center tank to main tank transfer

Fuel from the center tank is automatically transferred to the main tanks
by transfer ejector pumps. When the fuel quantity of a main tank drops to
85.6% of its maximum usable fuel volume, a float valve opens to allow
the center tank transfer ejector to move fuel from the center tank into the
main tanks. Fuel pressure from the main fuel ejector pumps allows the
transfer ejector pump to function. The AC boost pumps can also provide
motive fuel flow to the transfer ejector pumps. The flight crew has no
control over this transfer process. The FUEL synoptic page shows the
center tank transfer by displaying two green arrows pointing outward
from the center tank (refer to Figure 11−03−9).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
Fuel synoptic page − Normal fuel feed

Figure 11−03−9
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
Figure 11−03−10 shows the center tank to main tank automatic fuel
transfer operation.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
Center to main tank auto fuel transfer

Figure 11−03−10
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
Fuel management system
O
FUEL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The fuel management system consists of:
• Manual (powered) fuel transfer,
• Gravity transfer, and
• Automatic fuel imbalance correction (auto-crossfeed).
Manual fuel transfer is done with the MAN XFR (manual transfer) switch on
the FUEL panel.
FUEL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Manual transfer system
Fuel can be manually transferred between main tanks or from a main
tank to the center tank. The Fuel Quantity Computer (FQC) allows only
180 kg (400 lb) of fuel to be transferred from main tank to main tank, or
360 kg (800 lb) from a main tank to the center tank at any time.
Manual fuel transfer is done with the L BOOST PUMP switch or R
BOOST PUMP switch, and the MAN XFR (manual transfer) switch on the
FUEL panel. The MAN XFR switch opens the transfer/defuel valve and
the destination tank refuel valve. This connects the engine fuel feed
manifold and the refuel manifold, making it possible to transfer fuel by
turning on the appropriate AC boost pump.
NOTE
With both boost pumps operating, fuel transfer still
occurs but performance of the manual transfer is
significantly decreased.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O Fuel management system
Manual (powered) fuel transfer

Figure 11−04−1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
B. Main tank to main tank manual transfer

When the L or R position is selected on the MAN XFR switch, the FQC
opens the transfer/defuel valve and the refuel shutoff valve of the
selected tank. With the L BOOST PUMP or R BOOST PUMP switch
selected to AUTO or ON, 180 kg (400 lb) of fuel will transfer to the
selected main tank. When the transfer operation is completed, the FQC
closes the transfer/defuel valve and the refuel shutoff valve and turns off
the AC boost pump (left or right if in AUTO). The advisory message,
FUEL MAN XFR COMPLETE appears on the EICAS page. The transfer
operation is shown on the FUEL synoptic page and on the fuel section of
the EICAS page.
Figure 11−04−2 shows a manual transfer from the left main tank to
the right main tank.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
1
2
1
− TRANSFER/DEFUEL VALVE
− RIGHT MAIN TANK REFUEL SOV
2 L BOOST PUMP ON AUTOMATICALLY
Main tank to main tank manual fuel transfer

Figure 11−04−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
C. Main tank to center tank manual transfer

In flight, when a manual fuel transfer is required from wing tank to center
tank, the MAN XFR switch is set to CTR. Both the fuel transfer shutoff
valve and the center tank refuel valve open.
The left or right AC boost pump must be selected to ON and the status
messages L BOOST PUMP ON or R BOOST PUMP ON and FUEL
MAN XFR TO CTR show on the EICAS synoptic page. A maximum of
360 kg (800 lb) of fuel can be transferred to the center tank before the
valves will close. The AC boost pump will continue to operate and must
be selected back to AUTO manually.
The status message FUEL XFR CTR READY only shows on the EICAS
synoptic page if the boost pumps are not turned on.
During ground operation, when a manual fuel transfer is required from a
wing tank to center tank, both AC boost pumps are selected to AUTO.
The selection of the MAN XFR switch to CTR will automatically activate
both AC boost pumps to transfer fuel to the center tank. When the
system has transferred a maximum of 360 kg (800 lb) of fuel, the fuel
transfer shutoff valves will close and the fuel transfer ends.
The advisory message FUEL MAN XFR COMPLETE shows on the
EICAS synoptic page (refer to Figure 11−04−3) when the manual
fuel transfer is completed.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
2 1
1
− TRANSFER/DEFUEL VALVE
− CENTER TANK REFUEL SOV
2 L BOOST PUMP MUST BE ON
TO TRANSFER FUEL TO CENTER TANK
Main tank to center manual fuel transfer

Figure 11−04−3
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
D. Gravity transfer system

A gravity transfer manifold connects the left and right main tanks. The
manifold is separated by the gravity crossflow valve, which is normally
closed. The GRAV XFR switch on the FUEL panel opens the gravity
transfer valve and allows the main tanks to equalize. If the gravity
crossflow switch is inoperative, the gravity crossflow valve can be
manually overridden on the ground only.
The indications that follow confirm that the GRAV XFR switch is in
operation:
• The label ON illuminates in the GRAV XFR switch,
• The status message FUEL GRAV XFR ON displays on the EICAS
synoptic page, and
• The gravity transfer flow bar illuminates green on the FUEL synoptic
page (refer to Figure 11−04−4).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
Gravity fuel transfer

Figure 11−04−4
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
E. Automatic fuel balancing (automatic crossfeed)

With AC boost pumps set to AUTO on the FUEL panel, if the FQC
senses an imbalance of more than 180 kg (400 lb) between the main
tanks, the AC boost pump of the heavier tank turns on automatically.
Both engines are fed directly from the heavier tank until the tanks are
within 45 kg (100 lb) of each other. The FUEL synoptic page displays the
operating AC boost pump in green and a white arrow shows the direction
of crossfeed (refer to Figure 11−04−5).
Automatic correction of fuel imbalance is only activated when the center
tank is empty. Additionally, if the fuel pressure drops in the engine fuel
feed line, both AC boost pumps will be automatically activated to supply
engine feed fuel. With both boost pumps operating, automatic fuel
balancing is no longer available.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
L AC BOOST
PUMP ON
Auto fuel imbalance correction (auto crossfeed)

Figure 11−04−5
When the left or right AC boost pump is manually selected ON, fuel is
transferred to the opposite engine. The related L BOOST PUMP ON or R
BOOST PUMP ON status message is displayed on the EICAS page, and
a white arrow, pointing to the direction of flow, is displayed on the FUEL
synoptic page and EICAS page.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
F. Automatic fuel balancing with one engine inoperative

The automatic fuel balancing function (automatic crossfeed) stays active
during an engine inoperative scenario when both AC boost pumps are in
AUTO. The crossfeed function display logic (white arrow) is based on the
condition of the AC boost pumps (on or off).
(1) Left engine inoperative − APU ON − Both AC boost pumps set to
AUTO
With the left engine inoperative and the APU ON, the L BOOST
PUMP operates automatically for APU fuel feed (switch is set to
AUTO). As a result, fuel from the left wing tank is fed to the right
engine while the R BOOST PUMP stays off (switch is set to AUTO)
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

FUEL
Automatic fuel balancing − Left engine INOP

Figure 11−04−6
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
When the center tank is empty, and as the crossfeed from the left
wing tank to the right engine continues, a fuel imbalance between
the left and right tanks will occur. At the imbalance threshold,
180 kg (400 lb), the Fuel Quantity Computer (FQC) turns on the
right boost pump (for automatic fuel imbalance correction). As a
result, the right wing tank sends fuel to the right engine until the
imbalance is corrected. During this automatic imbalance correction,
the white arrow is not displayed because both AC boost pumps are
on. This process will be repeated periodically to correct the
imbalance.
(2) Right engine inoperative − APU ON − Both AC boost pumps set to
AUTO
With the right engine inoperative and the APU ON, fuel from the left
wing tank is used to feed both the APU and the left engine (refer to
Figure 11−04−7).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
Automatic fuel balancing − Right engine INOP

Figure 11−04−7
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
When the center tank is empty, an imbalance between the left and
right wing tanks will occur. At the imbalance threshold,
180 kg (400 lb), the FQC turns on the right boost pump (for
automatic fuel imbalance correction). The left AC boost pump will
be in AUTO (pump is off) and the white arrow on the fuel synoptic
page may incorrectly show fuel transferring to the left engine. The
synoptic page inconsistency is due to the fact that the right AC
pump is powered by the APU generator and cannot supply
sufficient pressure to overcome the pressure of the left main fuel
ejector pump when the left engine is above 85% N2. Even though
the white arrow indicates that fuel from the right tank is being fed to
the left engine, while the left engine is above 85% N2 the only fuel
source to the left engine is the left wing tank (refer to
Figure 11−04−8).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
Automatic fuel balancing − Right engine INOP

Figure 11−04−8
The fuel imbalance will continue to occur and the FUEL
IMBALANCE caution message will be displayed on the EICAS
page. After the FUEL IMBALANCE non-normal procedure is done
and the imbalance is corrected, and depending on the left engine
N2, the fuel imbalance condition may occur again approximately
every 15 minutes.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
When the right engine is inoperative and the center tank is empty,
the flight crew can make pre-emptive manual transfers (or make
two manual transfers) (refer to AFM, Chapter 4 − Non-normal
procedures, Fuel, FUEL IMBALANCE (Caution).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
Fuel quantity and temperature system
O
FUEL QUANTITY AND TEMPERATURE SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

Each fuel tank contains two separate and independent sets of
capacitance-type fuel quantity probes. Each set includes high and low level
sensors. Data from the sensors are sent to the Fuel Quantity Computer
(FQC).
The FQC has two channels. Channel 1 is the primary and Channel 2 serves
as a backup. Each channel receives independent data from all three tanks.
Primary Backup
Fuel Quantity Interprocessor Fuel Quantity

Computer Channel 1 Computer Channel 2
Temperature Temperature
Sensor Sensor
Set 1
Set 2
Set 1
Set 2
Set 1
Set 2
Channel 1
Channel 2
Fuel Quantity and Temperature

Figure 11−05−1
If an individual fuel quantity probe failure occurs, the FQC will calculate the
quantity based on the inputs of the functional probes.
The flight management system (FMS) monitors calculated fuel quantity and
the FQC monitors measured fuel quantity. A L FUEL LO QTY or R FUEL LO
QTY caution message is displayed on the EICAS page when the fuel
quantity is less than 442.2 kg (975 lb). A FUEL LEAK SUSPECT caution
message is displayed on the EICAS page if the FQC detects a mismatch
between the measured fuel quantity and the calculated fuel quantity.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O Fuel quantity and temperature system
Each channel receives fuel temperature from a temperature probe installed

in each main tank.
The TOTAL FUEL quantity and the quantity in each tank are displayed on the
FUEL synoptic page and on the EICAS page. Only the FUEL USED quantity
is displayed on the FUEL synoptic page. All fuel quantity indications are
displayed in pounds (LB) or kilograms (KG) (refer to Figure 11−05−2).
Fuel used quantity indicates the amount of fuel used since the last flight. Fuel
used quantity is reset to zero when either engine is started or when AC and
DC power are removed from the aircraft.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
Fuel quantity and temperature system
O
EICAS page and FUEL synoptic page

Figure 11−05−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O Fuel quantity and temperature system
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
Refueling/defueling system
O
REFUELING/DEFUELING SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

To refuel or defuel the aircraft, a standard adapter is connected to the
refuel/defuel point. It is located at the right wing leading edge. The
appropriate switch selections are made on the REFUEL/DEFUEL panel
REFUEL ADAPTER
REFUEL / DEFUEL panel location

Figure 11−06−1
Refueling can be done in AUTO mode or MANUAL mode. Defueling can only
be carried out in the MANUAL setting on the REFUEL / DEFUEL panel.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O Refueling/defueling system
Refueling can be accomplished with battery power only, however, for

defueling, AC power is required.
For refueling, the refuel shutoff valves open to allow fuel to be supplied to
each tank. For defueling, the transfer/defuel valve connects the engine
crossfeed manifold to the refuel manifold, allowing fuel to be pumped out of
the collector tanks. Refer to Figure 11−06−2.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
Refuel/defuel system schematic

Figure 11−06−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
A. Auto Refueling
In the AUTO setting, the Fuel Quantity Computer (FQC) controls the
refuel shutoff valve in each tank. The total quantity of fuel required
onboard is entered using the PRESEL switch on the REFUEL / DEFUEL
panel (refer to Figure 11−06−3). The FQC controls the refueling of
each tank so that the fuel is appropriately loaded and distributed.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
LEFT RIGHT
ENG ENG
Auto refueling controls

Figure 11−06−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
B. Manual refueling
In manual refueling mode, the refuel shutoff valves for each tank must be
operated and closed individually at the REFUEL / DEFUEL panel (refer
In MANUAL mode or AUTO, the refuel shutoff valves close when the fuel
tanks are full.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
LEFT RIGHT
ENG ENG
Manual refueling controls

Figure 11−06−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
C. Manual Defueling
To defuel, MANUAL and DEFUEL must be selected on the REFUEL /
DEFUEL panel. A green DEFUEL label will be displayed on the PRESEL
screen of the REFUEL / DEFUEL panel when the DEFUEL switch is
selected (refer to Figure 11−06−5). The FQC opens the
transfer/defuel shutoff valve that connects the engine crossfeed manifold
to the refuel manifold. When the manifolds are connected, the AC boost
pumps are energized to pump the fuel out of the collector tank (refer to
Figure 11−06−6). To defuel the center tank, the fuel must be
transferred to the main tanks first.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
Defueling controls − External

Figure 11−06−5
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
Defueling controls − Internal

Figure 11−06−6
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
Fuel inerting system
O
FUEL TANK INERTING SYSTEM (FTIS) – OVERVIEW

The Fuel Tank Inerting System (FTIS) generates nitrogen-enriched air and
distributes it into the air space in the fuel tanks to provide non-flammable air
in the tanks.
The bleed air, cooled by a ram air heat exchanger, passes through an air
separation module that removes oxygen to create the nitrogen-enriched air.
The oxygen is expelled overboard and the nitrogen-enriched air is directed
into the fuel tanks.
An inerting control unit varies the flow of Nitrogen-Enriched Air (NEA)
entering the fuel tanks, based on the aircraft flight of phase. In climb and
cruise, the flow is low. During descent and approach, the flow is medium or
high depending on the aircraft vertical speed.
The flight crew has no control or indications of the system except the
advisory message FUEL INERTING FAULT if the system fails.
Figure 11−07−1 shows an overview of the fuel inerting system.
Ram Air
Cooled Nitrogen−
Bleed Air Bleed Air Enriched Air
Overboard Oxygen
Overboard
Fuel inerting system schematic

Figure 11−07−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O Fuel inerting system
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
Fuel − Controls and indications
O
FUEL – CONTROLS
A. FUEL panel
The fuel system controls are located on the FUEL panel (refer to
Figure 11−08−1) and consist of the switches that follow:
• L BOOST PUMP switch and R BOOST PUMP switch,
• MAN XFR (manual transfer) switch, and
• GRAVITY XFR (gravity transfer) switch.
FUEL panel
Figure 11−08−1
B. FUEL PANEL – L BOOST PUMP switch and R BOOST PUMP switch

The AC boost pumps are controlled by the L BOOST PUMP switch and
R BOOST PUMP switch (refer to Figure 11−08−2).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
O Fuel − Controls and indications
L BOOST PUMP and R BOOST PUMP switches

Figure 11−08−2
The switches have three positions:
• AUTO: AC boost pumps start automatically when either:
– Low fuel pressure is sensed
– Fuel imbalance is sensed
– APU is configured for start
• ON: The respective boost pump is turned on.
• OFF: The respective boost pump is turned off.
C. FUEL PANEL – MAN XFR (manual transfer) switch

Automatic and manual (powered) fuel transfer is controlled by the MAN
XFR (manual transfer) switch (refer to Figure 11−08−3).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
MAN XFR switch

Figure 11−08−3
The switch has four positions:
• OFF: The fuel imbalance correction is in automatic mode.
• R: The fuel flow is initiated from the left wing to the right wing:
• Right main tank refuel valve opens,
• Transfer/defuel valve opens,
• Left AC boost pump comes on, if set to AUTO
• 180 kg (400 lb) of fuel transfers from left main to right main tank,
then the valves close and the left boost pump turns off.
• L: The fuel flow is initiated from the right wing to the left wing:
• Left main tank refuel valve opens
• Transfer/defuel valve opens
• Right AC boost pump comes on, if set to AUTO
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
• 180 kg (400 lb) of fuel transfers from right main to left main tank,
then the valves close and the right AC boost pump turns off
• CTR: The fuel flow is initiated from the left or the right wing to the
center tank:
• Centre tank refuel valve opens
• Transfer/defuel valve opens
• Left or right AC boost pump must be set to ON to transfer fuel to
centre tank. A maximum of 360 kg (800 lb) of fuel will transfer
before the valves close. The respective AC boost pump will not
turn off automatically, the respective AC boost pump switch must
be set to AUTO or OFF.
• OFF:
• Refuel valves close
• Transfer/defuel valve closes
• Left and/or right AC boost pumps turn off (if selected to AUTO)
D. FUEL PANEL – GRAV XFR switch

The GRAV XFR switch controls the gravity transfer operation (refer to
Figure 11−08−4).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
GRAV XFR switch

Figure 11−08−4
When the switch is pressed, the ON label illuminates white, the gravity
transfer valve opens, and the status message FUEL GRAV XFR ON
displays on the EICAS synoptic page.
When the switch is pressed again, the ON label goes out and the transfer
valve closes.
FUEL – INDICATIONS
A. FUEL synoptic page
The FUEL synoptic page shows the current status of the fuel system
components, fuel quantity and temperature, as well as fuel transfer (refer
Figure 11−08−6 shows the FUEL synoptic page display when
engines are fed by the engine main fuel ejector pumps and fuel is being
transferred from the center tank to the main tanks.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
Figure 11−08−7 shows the FUEL synoptic page display during a

crossfeed operation from the left main tank to the right main tank.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
APU−Engine OFF−Normal
APU−Engine ON−Normal
APU−Engine−Degraded
Invalid
Engine ON
− Bypass
Off
Active
Failed
Invalid
Normal Failed
Open
Closed
In Transition
Invalid
Active
Failed/low
No transfer
Invalid
Running Not Running Invalid

o
Normal 44 C
Low
o
44 C To R Wing
o To L Wing
Invalid −− C
Normal 8200 LB Running Not Running Invalid No Fuel Flow

Low/Overfilled/
APU APU APU
Imbalance/Trapped 1600 LB Fuel Flow
Invalid −− LB Invalid Fuel Flow
Fuel synoptic page description

Figure 11−08−5
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
Fuel synoptic page − Normal fuel feed

Figure 11−08−6
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
L AC BOOST
PUMP ON
Fuel synoptic page − Left main tank to right main tank crossfeed
Figure 11−08−7
B. EICAS synoptic page – Fuel indications

The fuel indication section on the EICAS page (refer to
Figure 11−08−8) shows the information that follows:
• Total fuel quantity,
• Left wing tank fuel quantity,
• Center tank fuel quantity,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
• Right wing tank fuel quantity, and

• Crossfeed flow direction arrow.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O
EICAS page − Fuel indications

Figure 11−08−8
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL
FUEL – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages
None
B. Caution messages

APU FUEL SOV APU fuel SOV failed to close/open TO, LDG
FAIL properly.
FUEL COLLECTOR Fuel in the collector is low. The None
LO LVL respective transfer ejector pump may be
inoperative for the left tank or right wing
tank.
FUEL CTR XFR Fuel transfer out of center tank has TO, LDG
FAIL failed, center tank fuel may become
unusable.
FUEL IMBALANCE Fuel imbalance between left and right TO, LDG
wing tank is greater than 360 kg (800 lb).
FUEL LEAK Potential fuel leak suspected. None
SUSPECT
FUEL MAN XFR Manual transfer failed to perform the TO, LDG
FAIL commanded operation or to stop the
transfer.
FUEL TANK HI Fuel temperature above the operating TO, LDG
TEMP limit.
FUEL TANK LO Fuel temperature is near Jet A fuel TO, LDG
TEMP freezing point of −37 °C (−35 °F).
L ENG FUEL LO Left engine fuel feed pressure is low. TO, LDG
PRESS
R ENG FUEL LO Right engine fuel feed pressure is low. TO, LDG
PRESS
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O

L ENG FUEL SOV Left fuel Shutoff Valve (SOV) failed to TO, LDG
FAIL close/open properly.
R ENG FUEL SOV Right fuel SOV failed to close/open TO, LDG
FAIL properly.
L FUEL LO QTY Low fuel level detected in left wing tank. TO, LDG
R FUEL LO QTY Low fuel level detected in right wing tank. TO, LDG

APU FUEL SOV APU fuel SOV is closed after the APU TO, LDG
CLSD FIRE switch is pressed.
FUEL COMPUTER Fuel Quantity Computer (FQC) has failed TO, LDG
FAIL or loss of both ARINC 429 channels from
FQC to DMC.
FUEL CTR XFR Fuel transfer from center tank to the left TO, LDG
FAULT or right wing tank has failed.
FUEL FAULT Loss of redundant or non-critical function TO, LDG
of the fuel system.
FUEL GRAV XFR Fuel gravity SOV failed to open or close. TO, LDG
FAIL
FUEL INERTING Fault detected in the Fuel Tank Inerting TO, LDG
FAULT System (FTIS).
FUEL MAN XFR Wing tank to wing tank target fuel trans- TO, LDG
COMPLETE fer of 180 kg (400 lb) or wing tank to
center tank target fuel transfer of 360 kg
(800 lb) has been completed.
L BOOST PUMP Left AC boost pump has failed to indicate TO, LDG
FAIL pressure when it is turned on manually
or automatically.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FUEL

R BOOST PUMP Right AC boost pump has failed to TO, LDG
FAIL indicate pressure when it is turned on
manually or automatically.
L ENG FUEL SOV Left fuel SOV is closed after the L ENG TO, LDG
R ENG FUEL SOV Right fuel SOV is closed after R ENG TO, LDG
L FUEL EJECTOR Left engine motive flow is faulty. TO, LDG
FAIL
R FUEL EJECTOR Right engine motive flow is faulty. TO, LDG
FAIL
D. Status messages

FUEL GRAV XFR Gravity SOV has been commanded open None
ON on the FUEL panel.
FUEL MAN XFR TO MAN XFR switch selected to CTR None
CTR (center tank) and either L or R BOOST
PUMP switch has been selected ON.
FUEL MAN XFR TO MAN XFR switch selected to L (left wing None
L tank) on the FUEL panel.
FUEL MAN XFR TO MAN XFR switch selected to R (right None
R wing tank) on the FUEL panel.
FUEL XFR CTR MAN XFR switch selected to CTR None
READY (center tank) but no AC boost pump has
been selected ON on the FUEL panel.
L BOOST PUMP Left AC boost pump is turned off through None
OFF the FUEL panel.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FUEL
O

R BOOST PUMP Right AC boost pump is turned off None
OFF through the FUEL panel.
L BOOST PUMP ON Left AC boost pump is turned on through None
the FUEL panel.
R BOOST PUMP ON Right AC boost pump is turned on None
through the FUEL panel.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

HYDRAULICS
O Hydraulic system No. 3
Hydraulic system No. 3 − Main pump

Figure 12−03−5
C. Hydraulic system No. 3 backup pump

ACMP 3B is used as a backup pump for system No. 3 if there is an
ACMP 3A failure or when high flow is required (refer to
Figure 12−03−6). The electrical pump is driven by a 115 VAC
motor and powered by AC BUS 2. ACMP 3B has the same design as
ACMP 2B and ACMP 3A.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

HYDRAULICS
O Hydraulic system No. 3
Hydraulic system No. 3 − Ram Air Turbine (RAT) pump

Figure 12−03−9
The RAT pump is operational when the RAT is fully extended
(automatically or manually). During the deployment period, system No. 3
accumulators deliver the hydraulic pressure. When the RAT is deployed,
the hydraulic pump operates at a nominal hydraulic pressure of 2850 psi
and supplies hydraulic pressure to the primary flight controls for all
phases of flight. The RAT pump is stowed in the RAT compartment
between the main landing gear (as shown in Figure 12−03−10).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
General
O
ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

Ice and rain protection (refer to Figure 13−01−1) is provided for the:
• Wing leading edges (slats 2, 3, and 4),
• Engine cowls,
• Flight deck windshields/side windows, and
• Air Data System (ADS) probes and sensors.
ICE DETECTION ICE DETECTORS x 2

WING ANTI−ICE SYSTEM
(WAIS)
SLATS 2, 3 AND 4
ENGINE BLEED AIR
COWL ANTI−ICE SYSTEM

(CAIS)
ICE AND RAIN
PROTECTION ICE PROTECTION
SYSTEM
WINDSHIELD/SIDE
WINDOW HEAT
ELECTRICAL
AIR DATA SMART PROBES
x 4 (ADSP)
RAIN/SNOW WINDSHIELD WIPERS TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE

REMOVAL PROBES x 2 (TAT)
ANGLE OF ATTACK SENSORS

x 2 (AOA)
Ice and rain protection system (schematic)

Figure 13−01−1
Bleed air from the 4th and 6th stage compressor provides anti-icing for the
wing leading edges and engine cowls. Electrical power is used for anti-icing
of the flight deck windshield and side windows, and ADS probes and
sensors. The flight deck windshields are equipped with wipers for rain or
snow removal (refer to Figure 13−01−2)
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ICE AND RAIN PROTECTION
O General
SLAT 4
SLAT 3
SLAT 2
COWL
SLAT 2
ANTI−ICE
SLAT 3
SLAT 4
WINDOW
HEAT
ICE
WINDSHIELD
DETECTION
WIPERS
COWL PROBE
ANTI−ICE
HEAT PROBE
Ice and rain protection

Figure 13−01−2
An automatic ice detection system provides icing condition status to the
Integrated Air System Controllers (IASCs), and the Full Authority Digital
Engine Control (FADEC).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
General
O
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The landing gear system is installed in a tricycle configuration (refer to
Figure 14−01−1). It has two main landing gear (MLG) assemblies,
mounted on the wing roots, and one nose landing gear (NLG) assembly
mounted on the forward fuselage.
MAIN LANDING GEAR

NOSE LANDING GEAR
Landing gear system

Figure 14−01−1
Each assembly is a hydraulically−actuated, dual−wheel, telescopic type. The
assembly is also equipped with an alternate extension system. Associated
subsystems include electrically−controlled, hydromechanical nosewheel
steering, electric brakes, and proximity sensors.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
O General
Two Landing Gear and Steering Control Units (LGSCUs) control the gear
extension/retraction system and nosewheel steering. Two Brake Data
Concentrator Units (BDCUs) control the brakes. The LGSCUs and the
BDCUs provide operational monitoring, protection, and control functions.
They send the related respective information to the EICAS synoptic page
(refer to Figure 14−01−2) and STATUS synoptic page (refer to
Figure 14−01−3). System controls are provided by the landing gear
panel, rudder pedals, and tiller.
EICAS page − Landing gear position indications

Figure 14−01−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
General
O
TAT −8 C
SAT −32 C
ENGINE
115 OIL TEMP ( C) 115
10.4 OIL QTY (QTS) 10.4
APU
DOOR CLOSED OIL QTY FULL
TIRE PRESSURE (PSI)
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
TIRE PRESSURE (PSI) WEAR
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
WEAR
STATUS synoptic page − Indications

Figure 14−01−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
O General
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Landing gear system
O
LANDING GEAR SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The landing gear system consists of two main landing gear assemblies and
one nose landing gear assembly. Each assembly is equipped with two tires.
The landing gear is extended and retracted by hydraulic actuators and
pressure from hydraulic system No. 1.
The normal extension and retraction of the landing gear is controlled by the
Landing Gear Steering and Control Units (LGSCUs). The alternate extension
allows free-fall extension of the landing gear if normal extension fails.
LANDING GEAR SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Main Landing Gear (MLG)
Each main landing gear assembly (refer to Figure 14−02−1) has
the components that follow:
• Twin wheel assembly,
• Single-stage shock strut,
• Main landing gear retraction actuator,
• Foldable side brace,
• Over-center locking mechanism,
• Unlock actuator,
• Uplock,
• Door mechanism, and
• Brake system.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
O Landing gear system
MAIN LANDING GEAR

LOCKING STAY RETRACTION ACTUATOR
UNLOCK Left MLG shown,

ACTUATOR right MLG similar.
MAIN LANDING
GEAR DOOR
UPLOCK
MAIN LANDING GEAR

DOOR LINKAGE DOWNLOCK
ASSEMBLY SPRINGS (2X)
SIDE BRACE
SHOCK STRUT
MAIN WHEELS
GEAR SAFETY
PIN
ELECTRIC BRAKE
Main landing gear

Figure 14−02−1
The shock strut is filled with a conventional single−stage mixed
nitrogen/oil oleo pneumatic shock absorber damped by an internal
metering pin. The normal extension and retraction of the main landing
gear is done by a retraction actuator. Hydraulic system No. 1 (HYD 1)
supplies the hydraulic pressure required to extend and retract the landing
gear. In the extended position, the retraction actuator stays pressurized.
In the retracted position, the retraction actuator is not pressurized.
The foldable side brace holds the strut in the extended position and folds
for retraction (refer to Figure 14−02−2). The over-center locking
mechanism keeps the side brace in the extended position. The unlock
actuator overpowers the over-center locking mechanism and allows the
side brace to fold so that the gear can retract. The uplock holds the strut
in the retracted position.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Landing gear system
O
DOWN AND LOCKED
TRANSITION
UP AND LOCKED
Main Landing Gear − Retraction/Extension

Figure 14−02−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
The door mechanism is hinged to the aircraft structure and attached to

the main landing gear. The wheels are not covered when retracted.
On the ground, a safety pin is inserted into each MLG locking stay to
mechanically lock the MLGs to prevent accidental retraction.
B. Nose Landing Gear (NLG)

The nose landing gear assembly (refer to Figure 14−02−3) has the
components that follow:
• Twin wheel assembly,
• Single-stage shock strut,
• Landing gear retraction actuator,
• Foldable drag brace,
• Over-center locking mechanism,
• Unlock actuator,
• Uplock,
• Downlock spring,
• Door mechanism, and
• Steering system.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Landing gear system
O
DRAG
BRACE LEFT AFT
UNLOCK DOOR
ACTUATOR
LEFT FORWARD
DOOR
DOWNLOCK UPLOCK GEAR SAFETY

SPRINGS (2X) PIN
NOSEWHEEL
Nose landing gear

Figure 14−02−3
The shock strut is filled with a conventional single-stage mixed
nitrogen/oil oleo pneumatic shock absorber damped by an internal
metering pin. The normal extension and retraction of the nose landing
gear is done by a retraction actuator. Hydraulic system No. 1 (HYD 1)
supplies the hydraulic pressure required extend and retract the landing
gear. In the extended position, the actuator remains pressurized. When
retracted, the actuator is not pressurized.
The foldable drag brace holds the strut in the extended position and folds
for retraction (refer to Figure 14−02−4). The over-center locking
mechanism keeps the drag brace in the extended position. The unlock
actuator overpowers the over-center locking mechanism and allows the
drag brace to fold so that the gear can retract.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
DOWN AND LOCKED
TRANSITION
NOTE
NLG retracts forward.
UP AND LOCKED
Nose Landing Gear − Retraction/Extension

Figure 14−02−4
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Landing gear system
O
The nose landing gear door is hinged to the aircraft structure and linked
to the nose landing gear. When retracted, the nose landing gear is
entirely covered by the nose landing gear doors.
On the ground, a safety pin is inserted into the NLG locking stay to
mechanically lock the NLG to prevent accidental retraction.
C. Landing Gear and Steering Control Unit (LGSCU)

Extension/retraction is controlled by two redundant Landing Gear and
Steering Control Units (LGSCUs). The two LGSCUs operate in an
active/active configuration so that both controllers operate at the same
time for the landing gear control function (extension/retraction).
The two LGSCUs operate in an active/stand−by configuration so that
only the active steering controller operates the steering system based on
the commanded cockpit control. The two LGSCUs change
active/stand−by roles at each flight. If there is a detected failure, the
stand−by LGSCU will become active.
Four proximity sensors (two for up detection and two for down detection)
are installed on each landing gear (Main Landing Gear (MLG) and Nose
Landing Gear (NLG)) to provide landing gear position information to the
LGSCU and for display on the EICAS page.
D. Landing gear retraction

When the landing gear lever on the landing gear panel is selected to UP,
the LGSCU is activated. Hydraulic system No. 1 (HYD 1) pressurizes the
unlock actuators and retract actuators. At the beginning of the retraction
cycle, the unlock actuators lift the locking stay out of the over-center
locking mechanism, overpowering the downlock spring mechanism. Then
the landing gear retraction actuator retracts the landing gear. Once
retracted, cams and locks of the uplock actuator hold the landing gear in
the up position and the retraction actuators are de-pressurized.
The main landing gear retracts inboard. In the fully retracted position, the
main wheel tires remain partially exposed at the tire circumference.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
The Nose Landing Gear (NLG) retracts forward. It is connected to the

door linkage assembly that drives the four NLG doors to close when the
NLG is fully retracted. The nosewheel tires are completely protected by
four NLG doors.
When the landing gear is fully retracted, three black boxes labeled UP
will display on the EICAS page (refer to Figure 14−02−5). Thirty
seconds after the LGSCU has confirmed that the landing gear is up and
locked, the landing gear indications on the EICAS page will be removed
(de-cluttered). The indications will reappear when the landing gear lever
is selected or if there is a landing gear malfunction.
Retraction operation
Figure 14−02−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Landing gear system
O
E. Landing gear extension

When the landing gear lever on the landing gear panel is selected to DN
(down), the LGSCU is activated. Hydraulic System No. 1 (HYD 1)
pressurizes the UP lines of the landing gear to lift them from their resting
position. This is done to unload the uplock mechanisms during gear
release. Once the LGSCU senses the uplock is unloaded, the landing
gear actuator is pressurized to extend the gear. The over-center locking
mechanisms lock the landing gear in the extended position with the aid of
the downlock spring. When the nose landing gear is fully extended, the
forward doors are closed while the aft doors remain open.
When the landing gear is fully extended, three green tire symbols,
labeled DN, display on the EICAS page (refer to Figure 14−02−6).
Extension operation
Figure 14−02−6
F. Alternate extension
The alternate extension is a backup for normal extension. When the
ALTN GEAR guarded switch on the landing gear panel is selected to DN,
DC essential bus 3 (DC ESS 3) powers the Electro-Mechanical Actuators
(EMAs) to release the uplock hooks and to allow free-fall landing gear
extension.
When selected to DN, the status message ALTN GEAR DN displays on
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
ALTN GEAR DN
CAS MORE PAGE 1/1
Alternate extension operation

Figure 14−02−7
G. Alternate extension dormancy check

At the next extension after each 550 flight hours, the LGSCU performs
an alternate extension instead of a normal extension. This is to test the
alternate extension circuitry to detect abnormal conditions. While the test
is in progress, an ALTN GEAR DN advisory message displays on the
EICAS synoptic page. When the landing gear is down and locked, the
LGSCU reverts to normal operation by pressurizing the landing gear
extension actuators, and the advisory message is removed.
LANDING GEAR – CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

A. Landing gear lever
The landing gear lever, located on the landing gear panel, is used to
extend and retract the landing gear (refer to Figure 14−02−8). The
lever has an up (UP) and a down (DN) position. This lever must be pulled
out before it can be moved up or down.
• UP: The landing gear retract.
• DN: The landing gear extend.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Landing gear system
O
NOTE
When the aircraft is on the ground the LGSCU inhibits
gear retraction.
LANDING
GEAR
LEVER
Landing gear lever

Figure 14−02−8
B. EICAS page
The landing gear position indication is displayed on the GEAR section of
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
EICAS page − Landing gear position indications

Figure 14−02−9
Figure 14−02−10 describes the landing gear position indications on
the EICAS page.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Landing gear system
O
Green Landing gear down and locked.
White Landing gear up and locked.
White Landing gear in transit.
Amber
Data not available or invalid.
Dashed
GEAR DISAGREE caution message on the

Amber EICAS. After a confirmation delay, gear
position (up and locked) not consistent with
commanded position (extended) on the lever.
GEAR DISAGREE caution message on the
Amber EICAS. After a confirmation delay, gear position
(in transit) not consistent with commanded
position (extended or retracted) on the lever.
GEAR warning message on the EICAS.
During approach or landing, 30 seconds after
Red command, gear position (up and locked) not
consistent with commanded position
(extended) on the lever.
GEAR warning message on the EICAS.
During approach or landing, 30 seconds after
Red command, gear position (in transit) not
consistent with commanded position
(extended) on the lever.
EICAS WARNING MESSAGE
EICAS PAGE
EICAS page − Landing gear position legend

Figure 14−02−10
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
C. ALTN GEAR switch

The ALTN GEAR (alternate gear) switch, located on the landing gear
panel (refer to Figure 14−02−11), is used to electrically release the
landing gear uplocks which allow the gear to free-fall.
• NORM: The alternate extension is off.
• DN: The landing gear free-falls to the down and locked position and
the status message ALTN GEAR DN displays on the EICAS page.
ALTN GEAR Switch

Figure 14−02−11
D. GEAR AURAL switch

The guarded GEAR AURAL switch (refer to Figure 14−02−12)
allows the crew to mute the “GEAR” aural warning. When selected, the
white CNCL legend is illuminated and the GEAR AURAL CNCL status
message is displayed on the EICAS page.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Landing gear system
O
GEAR AURAL switch

Figure 14−02−12
If the landing gear is not down and locked during approach, the “GEAR”
aural warning sounds continuously.
The “GEAR” aural warning cannot be muted if:
• The landing gear is not down and locked, and,
• RAD ALT is less than 1000 ft AGL, with both thrust levers set to
approach idle, or
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
• The SLAT/FLAP lever is set to a landing position and the aircraft is in

a descent.
The “GEAR” aural warning can be muted if all the conditions that follow
are met:
• The landing gear is not down and locked,
• All radio-altimeters have failed and pressure altitude is below
15000 ft,
• Both thrust levers are at idle, and
• The SLAT/FLAP lever is in the landing position.
LANDING GEAR – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages

GEAR Attempt to land is detected GEAR TO
and one (or more) of the
landing gear is not down and
locked.
B. Caution messages

GEAR DISAGREE Discrepancy in landing gear position and None
commanded position of the landing gear
lever after time delay.
GEAR FAIL Landing gear normal extension/retraction TO
system failed or no communication is
available.
WOW FAIL Weight-On-Wheels (WOW) functionality TO, LDG
system failed or no communication is
available.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Landing gear system
O

ALTN GEAR DN Alternate extension dormancy check is TO, LDG
performed on the uplocks.
GEAR FAULT Landing gear extension/retraction TO, LDG
system redundancy is lost or dormancy
test has detected a failure of the
alternate extension.
WOW FAULT Weight-On-Wheels (WOW) functionality TO, LDG
system redundancy is lost.
D. Status messages

ALTN GEAR DN Alternate extension switch is detected in None
down position.
GEAR AURAL Gear aural warning inhibited. None
CNCL
PEDAL STEER DISC Pedal steering has been disconnected. None
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Nosewheel steering system
O
NOSEWHEEL STEERING SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The Landing Gear and Steering Control Unit (LGSCU) commands and
monitors the steer-by-wire steering system (refer to Figure 14−03−1). It
receives the input from the rudder pedals or tiller to command the steering
control valve. The steering control valve supplies hydraulic pressure from
hydraulic system No. 2 to the steering motor, which drives a rack and pinion
gear to turn the nose landing gear.
Position sensors, installed on the nose landing gear main fitting, supply
steering angle feedback to the LGSCUs.
AFT FORE

Figure 14−03−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
O Nosewheel steering system
NOSEWHEEL STEERING SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Operation
The Landing Gear and Steering Control Unit (LGSCU) controls the
nosewheel position based on the inputs from the steering tiller on the
pilot side console, or the rudder pedals. <32510001D>
The steering tiller turns the nosewheel up to 80 degrees either side of
center, and is intended for low speed taxi and maneuvering in the ramp
area. The steering tiller is automatically centered by a spring and it’s
movement is damped to avoid overtravel and to be more representative
of nose wheel motion.
The steering angle limitations are automatically a function of the aircraft
speeds that follow:
(1) Turning with one steering tiller only
Ground speed below 30 kt: There is no reduction. The steering tiller
controls the nosewheel up to 80 degrees either side of center, and
is intended for low speed taxi.
Ground speed between 30 kt and 100 kt: There is a proportional
reduction. As the ground speed increases, steering tiller control of
the nosewheel decreases automatically from 80 to 9 degrees either
side of center.
Ground speed above 100 kt: There is maximum reduction. The
steering tiller control of the nosewheel is limited to 9 degrees either
side of center.
The rudder pedals turn the nosewheel to 9 degrees either side of the
center and are intended for high speed taxi, take-off, and landing rollouts.
When a turn is executed with the steering tiller and rudder pedals at the
same time in the same direction, the LGSCU algebraically adds the two
commands. This results in an increased angle for the turn up to the
maximum of 80 degrees.
When a turn is executed with the steering tiller and rudder pedals in the
opposite directions and at the same time, the LGSCU algebraically adds
the two commands. This results in a decreased angle for the turn.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
NOTE
In the event of a nosewheel steering system failure, the
nosewheel is capable of castering.
B. Towbarless towing
Towbarless towing permits ground crew to configure and tow the aircraft
without having to access the flight compartment. When the TOW PWR
switch (refer to Figure 14−03−2 <23410001D> or <23411001C>), located
on the electrical/towing service panel, is selected ON, electrical power
from the DC EMER BUS is used to apply or release the parking brake by
selecting the PARK BRK switch to the required position.
The TOW/NO TOW lights (refer to Figure 14−03−2 <23410001D> or
<23411001C>), also powered by the TOW PWR switch, indicate to the
ground crew if the aircraft can be safely towed. The red NO TOW light
illuminates if the nosewheel steering system is active and/or if any
braking force is applied to the brakes. The green TOW light illuminates to
indicate that the aircraft can be safely towed when both the nosewheel
steering system and the brake system are disengaged.
TOWING/NO TOWING indicator lights (refer to
Figure 14−03−2 <23410001D> or <23411001C>) are installed on the
nose landing gear, between the taxi light and landing light, to provide the
same indications as described above.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

LANDING GEAR
ELECTRICAL/TOWING SERVICE PANEL
NO TOWING
TOWING
Towbarless towing indications <23410001D> or <23411001C>

Figure 14−03−2
C. Nosewheel steering system disconnect

The NOSE STEER switch on the landing gear panel disengages the
nosewheel steering system for towing and ground safety. This allows a
larger towing turn radius of up to 130 degrees either side of center,
without disconnecting the torque links. When selected, the OFF label
illuminates white and the status message NOSE STEER OFF displays
on the EICAS synoptic page (refer to Figure 14−03−3).
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
NOSE STEER switch

Figure 14−03−3
D. Rudder pedal disconnect

The PEDAL DISC (Disconnect) switch (refer to Figure 14−03−4),
located on the steering tiller, disconnects the rudder pedals from the
steering system to allow for ground rudder checks without steering the
nosewheel. A PEDAL STEER DISC status message is displayed on the
EICAS page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
PEDAL DISC
SWITCH
Rudder pedal disconnect

Figure 14−03−4
NOSEWHEEL STEERING SYSTEM – CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

A. Steering tiller
The steering tiller commands up to ±80 degrees of the nosewheel
steering deflection. The PEDAL DISC (Pedal disconnect) switch (refer to
Figure 14−03−5), is integrated in the center of the tiller. When
pushed, it disconnects the rudder pedals from the steering system to
facilitate rudder control checks.
Steering tiller
Figure 14−03−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
B. NOSE STEER switch

The NOSE STEER switch on the landing gear panel is used to turn the
nosewheel steering system on and off.
• OFF: When the NOSE STEER switch (refer to
Figure 14−03−6) is pushed, it disables the nosewheel steering
system. The OFF label illuminates white on the switch and the NOSE
STEER OFF status message displays on the EICAS page.
NOSE STEER switch

Figure 14−03−6
C. Rudder pedals
The rudder pedals (refer to Figure 14−03−7) provide fine-angle
inputs for the nosewheel steering control system. The rudder pedals
command a deflection up to 9 degrees either side of the center of the
nosewheel steering.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
AFT FORE
RUDDER PEDAL RUDDER PEDAL
Rudder pedals
Figure 14−03−7
NOSEWHEEL STEERING – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages
None
B. Caution messages

NOSE STEER FAIL Nosewheel steering system failed OR no TO
communication is available from both
LGSCUs.
NOSE STEER Nosewheel angle is beyond active steer- TO, LDG
MISALIGN ing range.

NOSE STEER Loss of redundancy of nosewheel steer- TO, LDG
FAULT ing system, or reduced functionality.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
D. Status messages

NOSE STEER OFF Steering disabled (castor mode) through None
the NOSE STEER switch.
PEDAL STEER DISC Rudder pedal steering off is evaluated, None
and reported by one of the Landing Gear
Steering Control Units (LGSCUs).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
Wheels, tires, and brake system
O
WHEELS, TIRES, AND BRAKES – OVERVIEW

There are two wheel and tire assemblies on each landing gear (refer to
Figure 14−04−1). All landing gear wheels have a tire pressure
monitoring system. The main landing gear wheel wells also have a brake
temperature monitoring system and a landing gear bay overheat detection
system. The main landing gear are equipped with brakes on each wheel. The
electric brakes are activated by the brake function (toe) of the rudder pedals
or by the AUTOBRAKE switch. The brakes also include a parking brake
function. The brake assemblies incorporate an anti-skid system, Brake
Temperature Monitoring System (BTMS), and wear sensors.
Tire pressure, brake temperatures, and wear data are transmitted to the
STATUS synoptic page (refer to Figure 14−04−2).
NOTE
Wear data is only shown when there is less than 5% of
brake life remaining (equivalent to less than 100
landings).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
O Wheels, tires, and brake system
NOSEWHEEL AND TIRE

ASSEMBLY
BRAKE
ASSEMBLY
MAIN WHEEL
AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY WHEEL SPEED
TRANSDUCER BRAKE WEAR
PIN
Wheel and tire assembly

Figure 14−04−1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
TAT −8 C
SAT −32 C
ENGINE
115 OIL TEMP ( C) 115
10.4 OIL QTY (QTS) 10.4
APU
TIRE PRESSURE (PSI)
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
WEAR

Figure 14−04−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
WHEELS, TIRES, AND BRAKES – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Wheels, tires, and brakes
(1) Wheels and tires
There are two conventional split-hub wheel assemblies on each
landing gear strut (refer to Figure 14−04−3). The main
landing gear wheel assemblies have a wheel speed transducer to
transmit wheel speed information for the operation of the anti-skid
system and spoiler actuation. All wheels have an over-inflation
protection plug to protect against overpressure (approximately 400
psi).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
NOSEWHEEL AND TIRE

ASSEMBLY
BRAKE
ASSEMBLY
MAIN WHEEL
AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY WHEEL SPEED
TRANSDUCER BRAKE WEAR
PIN
Wheel and tire assembly

Figure 14−04−3
A tire pressure indicating system is installed to monitor and transmit
tire pressure information to the STATUS synoptic page (refer to
Figure 14−04−4). There are three fusible plugs installed on
the brake side of each main wheel to release tire pressure when the
wheel temperature exceeds approximately 200°C.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
TAT −8 C
SAT −32 C
ENGINE
115 OIL TEMP ( C) 115
10.4 OIL QTY (QTS) 10.4
APU
TIRE PRESSURE (PSI)
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
WEAR

Figure 14−04−4
(1) Electric brakes
There is one brake assembly installed on each wheel of the main
landing gear (refer to Figure 14−04−5).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
BRAKE ASSEMBLY
Brake assembly
Figure 14−04−5
Each brake assembly is fitted with one carbon brake stack and four
Electric Motor Actuators (EMAs) housed in a carrier plate (refer to
Figure 14−04−6).
A brake temperature sensor is installed on each brake unit. Brake
wear is computed by the EMAC controllers in relation to EMA
travel. A brake wear pin is installed on each brake assembly for
visual inspection.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
BRAKE STACK
MAIN WHEEL
ASSEMBLY ELECTRO−MECHANICAL
ACTUATORS (EMAs) BRAKE
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
BRAKE WEAR PIN
Main wheel − Brake assembly and tire assembly

Figure 14−04−6
When commanded, the brake system uses 28 VDC from the DC
ESS 1 and DC ESS 2 busses to energize the EMAs, thereby
compressing the brake stacks and decelerating the aircraft. Brake
temperature and wear are monitored and transmitted to the
STATUS synoptic page by the Brake Data Concentrator Units
(BDCUs) (refer to Figure 14−04−4).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
B. Brake Data Concentrator Units (BDCUs)

Two Brake Data Concentrator Units (BDCUs) control and monitor the
EMAs, brake temperature, wheel speed, and tire pressure. Internally,
each BDCU has a NORMAL and an ALTERNATE module. Both BDCUs
work simultaneously in tandem with no priority set-up. The BDCUs send
command signals to each of the four Electric Motor Control Unit (EMCU).
Each EMCU consists of two Electric Motor Actuator Controllers
(EMACs). Each EMAC then sends signals to two of the four EMAs on
one brake assembly, and to two other EMAs on a different brake
assembly. Each brake assembly has four EMAs (two pairs). To provide
safety and redundancy, each pair of EMAs receives command signals
from a different EMAC, which is in turn controlled by a different EMCU.
The BDCUs detect faults in the brake system and provide braking
protection. They are bypassed if the parking brake or alternate braking is
selected. The BDCUs send tire pressure and brake data to the STATUS
synoptic page for display. The brake wear data displays on the STATUS
synoptic page only when there is less than 5% of brake life remaining. If
one BDCU fails, the other can take over and control the entire brake
system.
C. Normal braking
The brake system permits controlled speeds while taxiing, differential
braking, and optimum deceleration rates during landing or rejected
takeoff. The controls of the brake system are:
• The toe brakes (refer to Figure 14−04−7),
• The PARK BRAKE (refer to Figure 14−04−8), and
• The AUTOBRAKE switch (refer to Figure 14−04−9).
The BDCUs receive the command inputs, calculate the required pressure
using the respective sensors, and transmit the appropriate braking signal
to the brakes. The EMAC also protect the aircraft from wheel skidding or
locking during normal braking.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

LANDING GEAR
AFT FORE
TOE BRAKES TOE BRAKES
Toe Brakes
Figure 14−04−7
Parking brake switch

Figure 14−04−8
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
AUTOBRAKE switch
Figure 14−04−9
D. Braking system protection

During normal braking mode, the EMAC provide the braking protection
functions that follow:
• Anti-skid protection,
• Landing gear retraction braking
• Touchdown protection,
• Locked wheel protection, and
• De-rotation.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
(1) Anti-skid protection

The anti-skid protection provides variable wheel speed control to
eliminate deep skid at each individual brake to minimize stopping
distance. Anti-skid is available at more than 204 knots. If the wheel
speed is higher than 204 knots, the BCS will consider the wheel
speed at 204 knots. It is deactivated below wheel speeds of 10
knots.
(2) Retraction braking
Landing gear retraction braking is activated when the landing gear
control lever is selected up. The BDCUs transmit a braking signal to
all brakes for 5 seconds, stopping the main wheels from rotating
during landing gear retraction.
(3) Touchdown protection
The touchdown protection prevents brake actuation while the
aircraft is in flight. This is to prevent any main wheel tire from
bursting on landing due to a locked wheel (brakes applied).
(4) Lock wheel protection
The locked wheel protection releases the respective brake of a
locked wheel when detected. When taxiing, to avoid braking
command release during turning maneuvers, the locked wheel
protection is inhibited with wheel speeds below 30 knots.
(5) De-rotation
The de-rotation function of the BDCUs is activated after main wheel
touchdown with the nose landing gear still in the air. This limits the
braking force which prevents abrupt nosewheel impact and
improves stopping distances. It is disabled when any of the
following conditions occur:
• Nose landing gear confirmed on ground (nose WOW),
• Nose pitch angle is less than 1.5 degrees, or
• Time delay of 5 seconds after main gear wheels spin up.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
E. Alternate brake mode

In the event of a normal braking system malfunction, an alternate brake
mode is available via the ALTN BRAKE guarded switch on the landing
gear panel. This mode provides direct, proportional control from the
rudder pedals’ toe brakes to the EMAs on the wheels. There are no
braking system protections available when the alternate brake mode is
activated. When the alternate brake mode is selected, the ON light on
the switch illuminates and the status message ALTN BRAKE ON is
displayed on the EICAS synoptic page (refer to Figure 14−04−10).
ALTN BRAKE switch

Figure 14−04−10
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
F. Parking brake
When the PARK BRAKE switch (refer to Figure 14−04−11) is
selected ON (pulled and turned), the aircraft electric brakes lock in the
braked position. An internal mechanism in the actuator will keep the
brakes in the locked position without electrical power. The parking brake
can be applied and removed when the aircraft is powered by 28 VDC
power from the DC essential busses 1 and 2 (DC ESS 1 and DC ESS 2).
When the parking brake is applied, each Electromechanical Actuator
(EMA) provides a variable parking brake force between 3000 and 11500
lb per EMA, depending on the position of the thrust levers. The status
message PARK BRAKE ON is displayed on the EICAS page.
The parking brake system can be used to stop the aircraft when the
normal and alternate braking systems have failed on ground. If parking
brake is activated in air mode, the park brake is failed until system
repowered on ground. There are no braking system protections available
when using the parking brake for decelerating.
The caution message PARKING BRAKE FAIL is displayed on the
EICAS page if the parking brake force is insufficient or the park brake
has been selected in air mode. If an uncommanded parking force greater
than 200 lb is detected, the caution message BRAKE ON is displayed on
the EICAS page.
Parking brake operation

Figure 14−04−11
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
The parking brakes can also be applied by the ground crew from the
electrical/towing service panel with the PARK BRK guarded switch,
powered by the DC EMER BUS (refer to Figure 14−04−12). When
the TOW PWR switch is selected ON, the PARK BRK guarded switch
can be used to apply (ON) or remove (OFF) the parking brakes.
The flight deck PARK BRAKE switch has priority over the
electrical/towing service panel PARK BRK switch. If any of the battery
switches (BATT 1 or BATT 2) on the ELECTRICAL panel are selected to
AUTO, the electrical/towing service panel PARK BRK switch is inhibited
and the parking brakes are set to the flight deck PARK BRAKE switch
position.
<Mod 240006> or <Post−SB BD500–240006>
External Parking Brake Control

Figure 14−04−12
G. Automatic braking
The braking system supplies automatic braking after landing or during a
rejected takeoff. Automatic braking is controlled with the AUTOBRAKE
switch on the landing gear panel (refer to Figure 14−04−13).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

LANDING GEAR
AUTOBRAKE switch
Figure 14−04−13
(1) Rejected takeoff
• Below 60 kt: If a takeoff is rejected at a ground speed less than
60 kt, manual braking is necessary to stop the aircraft,
regardless of the AUTOBRAKE switch position.
• Above 60 kt: When the AUTOBRAKE switch is selected to RTO
(Rejected Takeoff) and the throttle levers are moved to idle, the
automatic braking system activates and optimum braking is
applied to stop the aircraft using maximum possible
deceleration force. When the switch is selected to RTO, the
AUTOBRAKE RTO status message is displayed on the EICAS
page. Refer to Figure 14−04−14.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
(2) Landing
When the AUTOBRAKE switch is selected to LO, MED, or HI, the
automatic braking system activates and provides a deceleration
rate according to the selected intensity. These selections result in
the respective AUTOBRAKE LO, AUTOBRAKE MED or
AUTOBRAKE HI status message to be displayed on the EICAS
page. Refer to Figure 14−04−14.
AUTOBRAKE switch
Figure 14−04−14
On ground, the automatic braking system will only allow RTO to be
selected. In the air, only the selection of LO, MED and HI are possible.
The automatic braking system is deactivated when manual braking is
applied (greater than 20%), or when the AUTOBRAKE switch is selected
to OFF, or if the thrust levers are advanced above idle.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
WHEELS, TIRES, AND BRAKES – CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

A. AUTOBRAKE switch
The autobrake function is used to maintain constant deceleration of the
aircraft during landing and to stop the aircraft during a rejected takeoff.
The switch is located on the landing gear panel and has a selection of
different levels of deceleration from the Brake Data Concentration Units
(BDCUs) (refer to Figure 14−04−15).
NOTE
The autobrake system has been shown to significantly
reduce the number of brake applications required to
slow the aircraft. The autobrake system also increases
the life cycle of the carbon brakes.
• RTO: The status message AUTOBRAKE RTO displays on the

EICAS page and the BDCUs arm the autobrake system to provide
braking for the rejected takeoff according to the deceleration
parameters that follow:
– For a rejected takeoff below 70 kt ground speed, the
deceleration rate is 8 ft/s² (2.44 m/s²).
– For a rejected takeoff above or equal to 70 kt ground speed, the
maximal deceleration is applied.
• OFF: The autobrake function is deactivated.
• LO: The autobrake function is set for a low rate of deceleration of 6
ft/s² (1.83 m/s²) and the status message AUTOBRAKE LO displays
on the EICAS page.
• MED: The autobrake function is set for a medium rate of deceleration
of 9 ft/s² (2.74 m/s²) and the status message AUTOBRAKE MED
• HI: The autobrake function is set for the maximum deceleration and
the status message AUTOBRAKE HI displays on the EICAS page.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
AUTOBRAKE switch
Figure 14−04−15
B. PARK BRAKE switch

The parking brake switch is located on the PARK BRAKE panel (refer to
Figure 14−04−16) on the center pedestal. It is labeled PULL TURN.
When selected to ON, the status message PARK BRAKE ON displays
on the EICAS page.
• OFF: The parking brake system is deactivated.
• ON: The parking brake system is activated.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
Parking brake switch

Figure 14−04−16
C. ALTN BRAKE switch

The ALTN BRAKE guarded switch (refer to Figure 14−04−17) is
used to enable the alternate braking function during non-normal
operation. When the switch is pushed in, the BDCUs are bypassed and
the brakes are controlled directly by brake pedal actuation. The
autobrake function and all normal brake protections are not available.
• ON: When the ALTN BRAKE switch is pushed, it latches and the ON
label illuminates white to indicate that the alternate braking is
activated. The status message ALTN BRAKE ON displays on the
EICAS page.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
ALTN BRAKE switch

Figure 14−04−17
D. STATUS synoptic page

The STATUS synoptic page contains the gear and brake indications that
follow (refer to Figure 14−04−18):
• Tire pressure (psi),
• Brake temperature (BRAKE TEMP), and
• Brake wear (BRAKE WEAR).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
TAT −8 C
SAT −32 C
ENGINE
115 OIL TEMP ( C) 115
10.4 OIL QTY (QTS) 10.4
APU
TIRE PRESSURE (PSI)
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
WEAR

Figure 14−04−18
Figure 14−04−19 describes the tire and brake indications on the
STATUS synoptic page.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O
TIRE PRESSURE (TIRE PRESSURE in grey)
160 GREEN Pressure Nominal Pressure 90% nominal
150 WHITE 90% nominal Pressure 70% nominal Pressure < 90%
< nominal nominal
110 YELLOW Pressure < 90% nominal Pressure < 70% nominal
YELLOW No data No data
BRAKE TEMPERATURE (TEMP in grey)
03 GREEN Temperature in green range (00 TEMP 06)
09 WHITE Temperature in white range (07 TEMP 14)
16 RED Overheat − Temperature in red range (15 TEMP 20)
BRAKE WEAR (WEAR in grey)
BLACK Brake OK (no indication)
WHITE Brake to be replaced in less than 100 flights
YELLOW Brakes to be replaced immediately
YELLOW Brake wear indication invalid
STATUS synoptic page − Landing gear legend

Figure 14−04−19
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR
The tire pressure of each wheel is displayed on the STATUS synoptic

page using color-coded symbols and pressure numbers.
The temperature of each MLG wheel brake is displayed on the STATUS
synoptic page as a number from 00 to 20. The number represents a
range of brake temperatures where 00 is the coolest temperature and 20
is the hottest. A brake temperature from 00 to 06 is displayed in green.
When a brake temperature is between 07 and 14, it is displayed in white
and a BRAKE HI TEMP advisory message is displayed on the EICAS
page. When a brake temperature is between 15 and 20, it is displayed in
red and a BRAKE OVHT warning message is displayed on the EICAS
page.
The brake wear indications are displayed on the STATUS synoptic page
under each brake temperature number. The wear indications only appear
when there is less than 5% of brake life remaining (equivalent to less
than 100 landings).
WHEELS, TIRES AND BRAKES – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages

BRAKE OVHT Any brake temperature None TO
reaches the temperature
range of 15 or more.
CONFIG BRAKE Parking brake is applied CONFIG None
when in takeoff mode. BRAKE
B. Caution messages

AUTOBRAKE FAIL Failure of the autobrake system after TO
being armed or autobrake function
cannot be armed.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O

BRAKE FAIL Total loss of braking in the normal mode TO
(NORM BRAKE FAIL) and the alternate
mode (ALTN BRAKE FAIL).
BRAKE ON Detection of uncommanded brake force TO
greater than 200 lb or parking brake is
on in flight.
CPLT BRAKE Normal and alternate modes for the TO
PEDAL FAIL copilot pedal braking are not available on
the left and/or right copilot brake pedals.
L BRAKE FAIL Three or more EMAs on left landing gear TO
are failed, or two EMAs adjacent to each
other on left landing gear have failed, or
at least one wheel speed transducer
(both channels) on left landing gear
wheels has failed.
R BRAKE FAIL Three or more EMAs on right landing TO
gear are failed, or two EMAs adjacent to
each other on right landing gear have
failed, or at least one wheel speed trans-
ducer (both channels) on right landing
gear wheels has failed.
NORM BRAKE FAIL Total loss of braking in the normal mode TO
or communication failure from Brake
Data Concentrator Units (BDCUs).
NOSE TIRE LO Nose tire pressure below 70% of nominal TO, LDG
PRESS pressure in flight.
PARK BRAKE FAIL Failure to set parking brake or TO
insufficient parking force available after
commanding the function.
PLT BRAKE PEDAL Normal and alternate modes for the pilot TO
FAIL pedal braking are not available on the
left and/or right pilot brake pedals.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LANDING GEAR

ALTN BRAKE FAIL Failure of the alternate brake function or TO, LDG
loss of a pilot and copilot brake pedal.
BRAKE FAULT Loss of redundant or non-critical function TO, LDG
for the brake control system.
BRAKE HI TEMP Any brake temperature range reaches 7 TO, LDG
or greater.
L BRAKE Partial loss of functionality on left brake. TO, LDG
DEGRADED
R BRAKE Partial loss of functionality on right brake. TO, LDG
DEGRADED
TIRE LO PRESS On ground, any tire < 90 % of nominal TO, LDG
pressure. In flight, main tire < 70% of tire
pressure.
TIRE PRESS FAULT One or more sensors failed on tire (info TBD
collector).
D. Status messages

ALTN BRAKE ON ALTN BRAKE switch has been selected None
ON and confirmed on.
AUTOBRAKE HI AUTOBRAKE switch is in the HI position None
and arming conditions are acceptable.
AUTOBRAKE LO AUTOBRAKE switch is in the LO None
position and arming conditions are
acceptable.
AUTOBRAKE MED AUTOBRAKE switch is in the MED None
acceptable.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LANDING GEAR
O

AUTOBRAKE RTO AUTOBRAKE switch is in the RTO None
acceptable.
PARK BRAKE ON PARK BRAKE switch has been selected None
to ON and parking brake on.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

LIGHTING
O Internal lighting system
PASSENGER READING
LIGHT SWITCH
PASSENGER READING LIGHTS
PASSENGER CALLING
LIGHT
FASTEN SEATBELT SIGN
NO SMOKING SIGN
NOTE
Passenger Service Unit (PSU) <33200010C>

Figure 15−02−18
NOTE
The Cabin Management System (CMS) overrides
passenger selection.
Each PSU can have up to three reading lights with control switches. The
reading lights are fixed and not adjustable.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LIGHTING
Internal lighting system
O
When a flight attendant call switch is pushed, the light in the PSU will
come on. The CMS shows when and where the flight attendant call
switch light was selected. The flight attendant call light is cancelled when
the call switch is pushed again or from the CMS.
The FSB signs inform the passengers when seat belts must be fastened.
It is operated by the flight crew from the flight deck overhead panel (PAX
SIGNS).
When the FSB sign is illuminated, the associated EICAS status message
SEAT BELTS is shown on the EICAS page.
Figure 15−02−19 shows the FSB sign.
PAX SIGNS
EICAS STATUS MESSAGE SEAT BELTS
PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT

NOTE
Wi−Fi and FSB sign <33200010C>

Figure 15−02−19
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

LIGHTING
O Internal lighting system
EVACUATION
HORN
ENTRY BRIGHT OR DIM LIGHTS

SPOT LIGHTS
READING SPOT LIGHTS
Aft Flight attendant panel

Figure 15−02−21
The aft flight attendant panel is located next to the aft flight attendant
jump seat. It controls the aft entry spotlights and jump seat reading light.
It includes three switches that control lights in the cabin. The three
switches are:
• ENTRY (controls four entry spot lights),
• READING (controls one reading spot light), and
• BRT/DIM (controls the bright and dim entry spot lights).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LIGHTING
O Cargo, service, and maintenance lighting
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

LIGHTING
O Lighting − Controls and indications
Also, lighting in some areas can be controlled locally with the flight
attendant switches.
B. Cabin signs panel <33200010C>

The ordinance lights are controlled from the PAX SIGNS panel. The PAX
SIGNS panel is located in the flight compartment, on the bottom right
side of the overhead panel. It includes the SEAT BELTS and NO PED
light switches.
Figure 15−06−8 shows the PAX SIGNS panel.
(1) SEAT BELTS light switch
The SEAT BELTS switch has three positions: OFF, AUTO and ON.
• OFF: The SEAT BELTS signs go off.
• AUTO: The SEAT BELTS signs automatically come on and the
SEAT BELTS status message shows on the EICAS page when
the conditions programmed by the operator are met.
• ON: The SEAT BELTS signs come on and the SEAT BELTS
status message shows on the EICAS page.
(2) NO PED light switch
The NO PED switch is deactivated.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
NAVIGATION SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The navigation system is divided into two subgroups: independent and
dependent positioning systems (refer to Figure 16−01−1).
The independent positioning system refers to navigation aids that do not
need any exterior reference to support aircraft navigation. It consists of:
• Inertial Reference System (IRS),
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS),
• Traffic Surveillance System (TSS) including Traffic Alert and Collision
avoidance System (TCAS),
• Weather Radar System (WXR), and
• Radio Altitude (RA) (refer to Chapter 08 – Electronic display).
The dependent positioning system refers to navigation aids that use exterior
references (ground stations and satellites) to support aircraft navigation. It
consists of:
• Dual Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS), and
• Radio navigation,
• VHF NAV (VOR, ILS, LOC)
• Distance Measuring equipment (DME), and
• Marker Beacon (MB).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
INERTIAL REFERENCE
SYSTEM (IRS)
TERRAIN AWARENESS AND

WARNING SYSTEM (TAWS)
INDEPENDENT WEATHER RADAR

POSITIONING SYSTEM (WXR)
TRAFFIC SURVEILLANCE
SYSTEM (TSS)
RADIO ALTITUDE (RA)

NAVIGATION
SYSTEM
DUAL GLOBAL NAVIGATION
SATELLITES SYSTEM (GNSS)
VOR, ILS, DME

DEPENDENT
POSITIONING
MARKER BEACON (MB)
AUTOMATIC DIRECTION
FINDER (ADF) (Option)
Navigation system
Figure 16−01−1
The Flight Management System (FMS) provides:
• Flight planning,
• Flight management,
• Lateral Navigation (LNAV) and Vertical Navigation (VNAV),
• Aircraft position calculation and monitoring, and
• Performance planning.
The Air Data System (ADS) interacts directly with the navigation system
through the FMS and TAWS.
Navigation controls are located on the:
• Communication, Navigation and Surveillance (CNS) – TUNE page,
• Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP),
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
• Cursor Control Panel (CCP),

• Audio Control Panel (ACP), and
• MAP page.
System status and faults are reported on the:
• EICAS page,
• Primary Flight Display (PFD),
• MAP page, and
• Integrated Standby Instrument (ISI).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
NOTE
1 This view shows options that may not be installed
on your aircraft.
Navigation system controls

Figure 16−01−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
Navigation system indications (part 1)

Figure 16−01−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
1
NOTE
on your aircraft.
Navigation system indications (part 2)

Figure 16−01−4
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
The aircraft is equipped with:
• VHF navigation receivers,
• DME transceivers, and
• Marker Beacon (MB).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
The antennas of the radio navigation equipment are located on the top and
bottom of the fuselage. Refer to Figure 16−01−5
VOR
ANTENNA
TSS/TCAS TRANSPONDER
(DIRECTIONAL) GPS
VHF
LOC/GS
DME 1 DME 2 MARKER
ANTENNA
DUAL BEACON
RAD ALT
TRANSPONDER 2 ADF
TSS/TCAS
(OMNIDIRECTIONAL)
1 or (DIRECTIONAL)
1 Option 34430001C
2 Option 34520003C
Navigation antennas
Figure 16−01−5
(1) Navigation display
VHF-NAV radio indications display on the PFD (refer to
Figure 16−01−6) and include:
• NAV data: NAV frequency and identification, course, and Time To
Go (TTG),
• Course pointer and course deviation bar,
• TO/FROM indicator,
• Lateral deviation scale and pointer,
• Vertical deviation scales and glideslope deviation pointer,
• MB,
• Bearing pointers and source.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
PFD − VHF navigation radio indications

Figure 16−01−6
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
VHF-NAV radio navigation indications also display on the MAP page

(refer to Figure 16−01−7) and include:
• Bearing pointers,
• NAVAID symbols and identifications, and
• Bearing pointers sources and distance (if available).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
VHF − NAV radio indications on MAP

Figure 16−01−7
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
A. NAV-to-NAV preview
The NAV-to-NAV preview function displays localizer data and indications
on the HSI when a localizer-based approach (for the destination airport)
is selected in the FMS, and the aircraft is within 31 nm of destination
airport.
Localizer preview indications display as a cyan dashed-lines, double-bar
course pointer and deviation bar. Localizer preview data also displays
the localizer frequency and the course readout in cyan. Refer to
Figure 16−01−8.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
LOC
PREVIEW
DATA
LOC
PREVIEW
NAV−to−NAV preview indications

Figure 16−01−8
B. Failure indications
VOR, LOC, and GS failure flags display on the PFD in the event of a
failure (refer to Figure 16−01−9). Course pointers and deviation
bar are removed from the PFDs.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
Failure indications
Figure 16−01−9
C. Navigation source selection

Navigation source is selected by pressing the NAV SRC switch on the
CTP (refer to Figure 16−01−10) or by selecting the navigation
source on the CTP tab on the AVIONIC synoptic page (CTP tab) (refer to
Figure 16−01−11).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
VHF navigation source selection − CTP

Figure 16−01−10
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
VHF navigation source selection − AVIONIC synoptic page

Figure 16−01−11
NOTE
Onside FMS is the default navigation source at
power-up.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
(1) CTP – Navigation source selection

Pressing the NAV SRC switch on the left CTP cycles through
FMS1, NAV1, FMS2, NAV2. Pressing the NAV SRC switch on the
right CTP cycles through FMS2, NAV2, FMS1, NAV1.
(2) AVIONIC synoptic page – Navigation source selection
The NAV SRC drop-down list on the left side selects the navigation
sources that follow on the pilot side:
• FMS1, NAV1, and
• FMS2, NAV2.
The NAV SRC drop-down list on the right side selects the
navigation sources that follow on the co-pilot side:
• FMS2, NAV2, and
• FMS1, NAV1.
(3) Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) system
The Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) system calculates the
distance between the aircraft and a selected ground station. It has two
antennas and two transceivers.
The DME antennas are located on the wing-to-body fairing and on the aft
fuselage near the aft cargo compartment door. The transceivers are
located in the forward and mid equipment bays.
The DME transceivers are three-channel units. The first channel is paired
with the VOR, except when DME hold function (refer to
Figure 16−01−12) is selected, and it is tuned when the flight crew
selects a VOR/LOC station. The second and third channels are
automatically selected by the Flight Management System (FMS) when
auto tuning is selected.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
NAV2... MK HI
113.30 / ITWI AUTO
PRESET DME HOLD
112.300 114.100
CNS − DME hold function

Figure 16−01−12
The DME hold function allows the flight crew to select a new VOR
frequency separately from the first DME channel. The hold function is
selected on the Control Tuning Panel (CTP) or on the Communication,
Navigation and Surveillance (CNS) – TUNE page.
D. Course (CRS) selection

Course (CRS) selection is set on the CTP MENU page. The TUNE/DATA
switch is used to select the desired course (refer to
Figure 16−01−13). The selected course displays in a cyan box left
of the TUNE/DATA switch and on the PFD course readout. The left CTP
sets the course on the pilot side while the right CTP sets the course on
the copilot side.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
CTP course selection

Figure 16−01−13
Course selection can also be set on the AVIONIC synoptic page (CTP
tab) (refer to Figure 16−01−14). The CRS field is selected with the
cursor and the DSK switch selects the desired course. The left CRS sets
course for the pilot side while the right CRS sets course for the copilot
side.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
Multifunction window course selection

Figure 16−01−14
E. Bearing (BRG) pointers

Two bearing pointers display bearing information on the HSIs and MAP
page (refer to Figure 16−01−15). Bearing pointer 1 displays as a
single white arrow, bearing pointer 2 displays as double-bar white course
pointer arrow.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
BEARING BEARING
POINTER NO.2 POINTER NO.1
Bearing pointers
Figure 16−01−15
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
The bearing source is selected from the CTP or the AVIONIC synoptic
page (CTP tab).
(1) CTP – Bearing selection
When using the CTP (refer to Figure 16−01−16), the bearing
source is set by selecting the PFD/NAV page then the BRG 1/2
page. The BRG 1/2 page is used to select bearing 1 (BRG 1) and
bearing (BRG 2) sources including:
• FMS, and
• VOR.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
CTP − Bearing (BRG) pointer selection

Figure 16−01−16
(2) AVIONIC synoptic page – Bearing selection
When using the AVIONIC synoptic page, the bearing source is set
from the CTP tab. Four drop-down lists display (refer to
Figure 16−01−17) to select the source for bearing pointer 1
and 2 of the left and right HSI.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
AVIONIC synoptic page

Figure 16−01−17
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
F. STBY NAV format

The CTP has a STBY NAV (Standby Navigation) format to cover failure
scenarios in cases where all displays are failed. STBY NAV is accessed
through the MENU page of the CTP. When selected, the STBY NAV
display remains in view until another selection is made on the CTP.
The onside FMS is the default navigation source. The cross-side FMS is
used if the onside FMS is not available. Manual selection of the
navigation source is not possible. The onside Inertial Reference System
(IRS) provides compass data. IRS 3 or cross-side provides reference
data if onside IRS is not available.
The STBY NAV format displays (refer to Figure 16−01−18) the
information that follows:
• GNSS position (360-degree compass),
• Ground Speed (GS),
• FMS source (onside or cross-side FMS),
• Desired track (DTK),
• Distance to waypoint (NM),
• Heading pointer,
• Drift bug,
• Course pointer,
• Course deviation bar,
• Lateral deviation scale,
• Aircraft symbol, and
• To/From indicator.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
Standby navigation display

Figure 16−01−18
NAVIGATION RADIO TUNING

Tuning and control of the navigation radios is performed using either the:
• CTPs,
• Communications, Navigation, and Surveillance (CNS) page, and
• Graphical tuning function.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
A. CTP tuning
Tuning of navigation radios is very similar to the communication radios.
The standby frequency is tuned by pressing the adjacent line select key
(LSK) to position the focus indicator over the frequency, and using the
TUNE/DATA switch to set the frequency (refer to ). The standby and
active frequencies may then be swapped by pressing on the LSK a
second time.
The active frequency can be directly tuned by pressing the LSK adjacent
to the active frequency (to position the focus indicator on the frequency),
and using the TUNE/DATA switch to set the new frequency.
(1) VHF-NAV control
The VHF-NAV radios are controlled from the NAV CONTROL
pages (refer to Figure 16−01−19) that are accessed by a
double press of the LSK, adjacent to the active navigation
frequency.
Pages are changed by pressing the LSK adjacent to PAGE, and
using the TUNE/DATA switch.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
CTP − NAV CONTROL pages

Figure 16−01−19
The NAV CONTROL pages include the VHF-NAV TUNING (refer to

Figure 16−01−20) for the control of the tuning selection.
For standby or direct tuning of the VHF-NAV radios.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
CTP − VHF − NAV tuning

Figure 16−01−20
(2) NAV TUNING MODE
When NAV TUNING is set to MAN, the FMS automatically uses
DME channel 2 and channel 3 to calculate the aircraft position.
When the NAV TUNING is set to AUTO, the FMS still uses DME
channel 2 and channel 3, but adds DME channel 1 and the VOR
radial to calculate the aircraft position. The AUTO selection is only
available when the FMS is the navigation source. It is removed
when the VHF navigation radio is the navigation source. When
AUTO is selected, AUTO displays in cyan, below the active
frequency on the CTP top level page (refer to
Figure 16−01−21).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
FMS AUTO
TUNE SELECTION
AUTO TUNE
INDICATION
CTP − NAV CONTROL page − AUTO tuning

Figure 16−01−21
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
(3) DME HOLD

When DME HOLD is selected to ON, the DME frequency, followed
by a cyan H display in a sub-window on the NAV CONTROL page
and on the top level tuning page (refer to Figure 16−01−22).
The DME hold frequency can be changed directly by pressing the
adjacent LSK to move the focus indicator on the DME HOLD
frequency, and set the new frequency using the TUNE/DATA
switch.
DME HOLD
FREQUENCY
DME HOLD NAV CONTROL PAGE

FREQUENCY
TOP LEVEL TUNING PAGE
CTP − NAV CONTROL page − DME HOLD

Figure 16−01−22
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
(4) PRESET PAGE

The PRESET PAGE selection accesses the NAV PRESET pages
which allow storage or editing of VHF-NAV frequencies (refer to
Figure 16−01−23).
CTP − NAV CONTROL page − PRESET PAGE selection

Figure 16−01−23
(5) MRK SENS
The MKR SENS selection displays on NAV CONTROL page 2
(refer to Figure 16−01−24). It is used to select the marker
beacon sensitivity to low (LO) or high (HI).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
CTP − NAV CONTROL page − MKR SENS selection

Figure 16−01−24
(6) TEST
The TEST selection allows to test the VHF-NAV radios. When the
adjacent LSK is pressed (refer to Figure 16−01−25), the test
mode is activated for approximately 10 seconds (on ground only),
during which TEST displays in cyan. A single beep sounds to
indicate a pass, and a double beep sounds to indicate a fail.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
CTP − NAV CONTROL page − TEST

Figure 16−01−25
B. Display tuning
Display tuning provides radio tuning and control using the TUNE page on
the multifunction window (MFW). The TUNE page can be displayed by
pressing either the CNS switch on the CTP or the CNS QAK on the MKP,
then selecting the TUNE soft tile (refer to
Figure 16−01−26 <34521003C>).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
CONTROL TUNING PANEL (2X)
MULTIFUNCTION KEYBOARD
PANEL (2X)
1 CNS PAGE
NOTE
on your aircraft.
TUNE page via CTP or MKP <34521003C>

Figure 16−01−26
The TUNE page can also be accessed by pressing the MENU switch on
the CCP (refer to Figure 16−01−27 <34521003C>), selecting CNS on
the drop-down menu, then selecting the TUNE soft tile.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
CCP MAP
NOTE
1 CNS PAGE
on your aircraft.
TUNE page via CCP <34521003C>

Figure 16−01−27
(1) TUNE window
Each navigation radio (VHF, ADF) displays in its own section of the
TUNE page with its active and standby frequencies, control soft
switch, and swap soft switch (refer to
Figure 16−01−28). <34521003C>
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
The active frequencies display in green, the standby frequencies

display in white. They display amber when there is a system tuning
fault. The cursors are used to select soft switches and highlight
data to be changed or modified.
NOTE
on your aircraft.
CNS − NAV/ADF − TUNE page <34521003C>

Figure 16−01−28
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
(2) NAV radio tuning

NAV radios are tuned using the MKP or the CCP to position the
focus indicator on the standby frequency (either VHF or ADF) and
enter a new frequency. Selecting the frequency swap soft switch
swaps the active and standby frequencies. Refer to
Figure 16−01−29. <34521003C>
When the DME HOLD box is checked, HOLD displays in cyan and
the DME hold frequency window displays to set the DME
frequency.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
NAV
CONTROL
SOFT SWITCH
AUTO
TUNE
NAV INDICATION
ACTIVE
FREQUENCY
NAV
STANDBY DME HOLD
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
SWAP
SOFT SWITCH
DME HOLD
ADF CONTROL FREQUENCY
SOFT SWITCH
ADF ACTIVE
FREQUENCY
ADF STANDBY
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
SWAP SOFT SWITCH
NOTE
on your aircraft.
CNS − NAV window − Tuning and Control <34521003C>

Figure 16−01−29
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
(3) VHF-NAV control

Selection of the NAV1(2) soft switch displays the NAV1(2)
CONTROL window (refer to Figure 16−01−30), which includes
the following:
• Standby frequency tuning and frequency swap,
• DME HOLD check box,
• MKR SENS selection,
• NAV TUNING when FMS is the navigation source,
• TEST, and
• EDIT.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
CNS − TUNE page − VHF−NAV Control

Figure 16−01−30
The EDIT soft switch opens the EDIT NAV PRESET
FREQUENCIES window where preset frequencies may be changed
or added. Refer to Figure 16−01−31.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
CNS − TUNE page − VHF − EDIT NAV PRESET FREQUENCIES window

Figure 16−01−31
(4) ADF control <34521003C>
Selection of the ADF1(2) soft switch displays the ADF1(2)
CONTROL page. The cursor is used for tuning and control
functions similar to the CTP. This includes:
• Active and preset frequency tuning,
• ADF/ANT MODE selection,
• BFO ON/OFF selection,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
• ADF TEST, and

• Editing of stored preset frequencies
The EDIT soft switch provides access to the ADF PRESET
FREQUENCIES window containing a list of 20 user defined ADF
preset frequencies. Refer to Figure 16−01−32.
CNS − TUNE page − ADF CONTROL window <34521003C>

Figure 16−01−32
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
General
O
C. Graphical navigation tuning

Navigation radio tuning can be done using the cursor and the graphic
map displayed on the MFW (refer to Figure 16−01−33).
Each navigation radio (VOR, VOR/DME, TACAN, NDB) displayed on the
map can be selected. <34521003C>
When selected, a drop-down list containing tuning options for the
VHF-NAV radios or ADF receiver is displayed. When TUNE NAV or
TUNE ADF is selected from the list, the corresponding VHF or ADF
frequency is automatically tuned, and displays as the active frequency on
the associated CTP. <34521003C>
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O General
TA ONLY
ALTABOVE
100
Graphical navigation tuning

Figure 16−01−33
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
Traffic Surveillance System (TSS)
O
ALTITUDE
VERTICAL
SPEED
ALTITUDE
Traffic altitude display

Figure 16−04−11
When the ABS is selected, the traffic altitude above sea level displays
and ALT ABS displays under TFC in the TCAS section of the HSI.
When the REL is selected, the traffic height above the aircraft displays
with a plus sign (+), and traffic height below the aircraft displays with the
minus sign (−).
When the traffic altitude cannot be determined, ALT INOP displays under
TFC in the TCAS section.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
Terrain Awareness and Warning System O
(TAWS)
TAWS – OVERVIEW
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) contains a worldwide
database of terrain and obstacle heights and airport elevations to avoid
situation that may lead to Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT). TAWS
provides the functions that follow:
• Terrain threat detection,
• Aural and visual alerts (cautions and warnings),
• Aircraft misconfiguration when close to the ground,
• Bank angle alerts,
• Altitude callouts, and
• Advance windshear detection.
The TAWS computer function includes the Enhanced Ground Proximity
Warning System (EGPWS) and alerting and awareness operating modes
that follow (refer to Figure 16−05−1):
• Mode 1: Excessive descent rate,
• Mode 2: Excessive terrain closure rate,
• Mode 3: Altitude loss after takeoff,
• Mode 4: Unsafe terrain clearance,
• Mode 5: Excessive deviation below Glideslope (GS),
• Mode 6: Advisory callouts, bank angle, and attitude,
• Mode 7: Windshear detection and alerting.
• Terrain Clearance Floor (TCF),
• Forward looking ahead/obstacle,
• Terrain and obstacle awareness.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O Terrain Awareness and Warning System
(TAWS)
PREDICTIVE TAWS ALERTING PREDICTIVE TAWS ALERTING PREDICTIVE TAWS ALERTING PREDICTIVE TAWS ALERTING
MODE 1 MODE 1 MODE 1 MODE 1
MODE 2 MODE 2 MODE 2 MODE 2
MODE3
MODE 4C MODE 4A & B MODE 4A & B MODE 4A & B
MODE 5
BANK ANGLE CALLOUTS BANK ANGLE CALLOUTS BANK ANGLE CALLOUTS BANK ANGLE CALLOUTS
ALTITUDE CALLOUTS
REACTIVE WINDSHEAR REACTIVE WINDSHEAR
Flight phases with active modes

Figure 16−05−1
The TAWS indications consist of:
• Alert annunciations displayed on the Attitude Direction Indicator (ADI)
portion of the PFD (refer to Figure 16−05−2) ,
• Status and fault annunciations displayed on the MAP page,
• Terrain pop-up alerts (cautions and warnings) displayed on the MAP
page,
• Terrain display on the Vertical Situation Display (VSD) in the lower
portion of the MAP page, and
• EICAS messages.
TAWS operation is automatic and requires no selections or actions.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
ADI − TAWS caution alert

Figure 16−05−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
A. Terrain/Obstacle display
The internal terrain database has the ability to scan ahead of the aircraft
and detect terrain or obstacle conflicts with greater alerting time.
Terrain topographic relief is presented on the MAP page by selecting
TERRAIN from the overlay (OVLY) drop-down menu. Refer to
Figure 16−05−3.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
PEAK ELEVATION
TAWS controls and indications

Figure 16−05−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
The graphical display depicts a top down view of terrain with respect to
either aircraft position or a map reference point, using a color pattern to
indicate relative terrain height above sea level. The highest terrain
elevation (peak) within the half-range ring, also displays on the MAP or
PLAN page as a gray dot with the elevation in feet. The peak displays if it
is higher than 1000 ft ASL.
Figure 16−05−4 shows the terrain elevation colors code.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
Terrain elevation colors

Figure 16−05−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
B. Terrain alert
When the terrain elevation surrounding the aircraft is between 500 ft
below and 2000 ft above the aircraft, it displays in yellow (refer to
Figure 16−05−5). When the terrain elevation exceeds 2000 ft
above the aircraft, it displays in red.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
TERRAIN 2000 FT ABOVE

AIRCRAFT (RED)
TERRAIN 500 FT BELOW

TO 2000 FT ABOVE
AIRCRAFT (YELLOW)
Terrain alert
Figure 16−05−5
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
When the aircraft enters the terrain caution range, a TAWS caution alert
(refer to Figure 16−05−6) is initiated as follows:
• The map does the following:
• The PLAN display automatically switches to MAP display with a
TERRAIN overlay,
• The map range is automatically set to 10 NM,
• The Weather Radar (WXR) display is automatically cancelled on
the map format,
• The displayed area is shown in flashing high intensity amber on
the MAP page,
• The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) has a terrain display
(unavailable in normal operation), and
• The MAP page displays on the Multifunction Window (MFW) on
Display Unit 2 (DU2) and DU3, if not already displayed.
• An amber GND PROX visual alert displays on the PFD, and
• A “CAUTION TERRAIN, CAUTION TERRAIN” or “CAUTION
OBSTACLE, CAUTION OBSTACLE” alert sounds 60 seconds
before the terrain/obstacle conflict can occur and is repeated every
seven seconds while the aircraft remains within the conflict caution
area.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
h Angle
Flight Pat
Caution
Altitude
Floor
Terrain caution alert

Figure 16−05−6
When the aircraft enters the terrain warning range, a TAWS warning alert
(refer to Figure 16−05−7) is initiated as follows:
• The map does the following:
• The PLAN display automatically switches to MAP display with a
TERRAIN overlay,
• The map range is automatically set to 10 NM,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
• The Weather Radar (WXR) display is automatically cancelled on

the map format,
• The displayed area is shown in flashing high intensity red on the
MAP page,
• The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) has a terrain display
(unavailable in normal operation), and
• The MAP page displays on the Multifunction Window (MFW) on
Display Unit 2 (DU2) and DU3, if not already displayed.
• A red PULL UP visual alert displays on the PFD, and
• A “TERRAIN, TERRAIN, PULL UP, PULL UP” or “OBSTACLE,
OBSTACLE, PULL UP, PULL UP” alert sounds 30 seconds before
the terrain/obstacle conflict can occur.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
h Angle
Flight Pat
Caution
Altitude
Floor
Terrain warning alert

Figure 16−05−7
TAWS – OPERATION (MODES)

A. Mode 1: Excessive descent rate
Mode 1 (refer to Figure 16−05−8) applies to excessive descent
rate with respect to terrain clearance. This mode is independent of
landing gear and flap position. It will generate aural and visual alerts
when the rate of descent is excessive for the current altitude.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
Mode 1 alert envelopes

Figure 16−05−8
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
The Mode 1 alert envelope is divided into two zones: the initial zone,
which corresponds to the SINK RATE zone, and the inner warning zone,
which corresponds to the PULL UP zone. When the aircraft enters the
SINK RATE zone, the TAWS generates the aural alert “SINK RATE”
and an amber GND PROX visual alert on the Attitude Direction Indication
(ADI). The entry into the PULL UP zone generates the aural alert “PULL
UP” and a red PULL UP visual alert on the ADI. The aural is
annunciated continuously until the condition no longer exists
The alert envelope limits are defined by the aircraft vertical speed and
radio altitude.
B. Mode 2: Excessive terrain closure rate

Mode 2 is available during all flight phases. Calculations are carried out
using radio altitude and vertical speed.
Mode 2 is comprised of two submodes (2A, 2B) that provide aural and
visual alerts when an excessive closure rate to terrain is detected. Mode
2A is enabled when the conditions for mode 2B are not satisfied.
(1) Mode 2A
The Mode 2A envelope (refer to Figure 16−05−9) is divided
into two zones: the penetration zone and the warning zone. The
entry into the penetration zone generates a “TERRAIN, TERRAIN”
aural alert and a GND PROX visual alert is displayed on the ADI.
Entry into the warning zone generates a “PULL UP” aural alert and
a PULL UP message on the ADI.
The upper boundary of the mode 2A envelope varies as a function
of the aircraft airspeed and the availability of the terrain awareness
function.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
Mode 2A alert envelopes

Figure 16−05−9
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
When the aircraft leaves the warning zone, due to either terrain
drop-off or a pull-up maneuver, the altitude gain function is
activated. The warnings continue until the aircraft achieved one of
the condition that follow:
• Gained 300 ft of barometric altitude, or
• 45 seconds has elapsed, or
• The radio altimeter loses track.
If the aircraft penetrates the envelope with both gear and flaps in
the landing gear configuration, the “PULL UP” aural alert is
inhibited and is replaced by the aural alert “TERRAIN, TERRAIN”
which is repeated until the aircraft exists the envelope.
(2) Mode 2B
Mode 2B (refer to Figure 16−05−10) has similar alerts to Mode
2A but the envelope is adapted to prevent nuisance alerts during a
normal approach. This mode is active during:
• Whenever flaps are selected to the landing position, or
• The aircraft is performing an ILS approach and is within two
dots of both localizer and glideslope centerlines, or
• The aircraft is within 10 NM and 3500 ft of the destination
runway, or
• For the first 60 seconds after takeoff.
In this mode, when the terrain closure rate and the radio altitude are
in the caution envelope and the gear or flaps are not in the landing
configuration, a “TERRAIN, TERRAIN” aural alert sounds.
If in the warning envelope, a continuous “PULL UP” aural alert
sounds. If in the caution envelope with the gear and flaps in the
landing configuration, only the “TERRAIN, TERRAIN” aural alert
sounds.
If the aircraft penetrates the mode 2B envelope with both gear and
flaps in landing configuration, the voice aural “TERRAIN,
TERRAIN” is repeated until the envelope is exited.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
Mode 2B alert envelopes

Figure 16−05−10
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
C. Mode 3: Altitude loss after takeoff

Mode 3 (refer to Figure 16−05−11) is active when the aircraft loses
a significant amount of altitude immediately after takeoff or go-around.
This mode compares the radio altitude and barometric altitude with the
rate of altitude loss to generate the aural alert “DON’T SINK, DON’T
SINK” and a GND PROX visual alert on the ADI. The GND PROX visual
alert remains active until a positive rate of climb is restablished.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
Mode 3 − Alert envelope

Figure 16−05−11
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
To monitor altitude loss, Mode 3 records the aircraft altitude when a

descent occurs after a takeoff, and compares it with the successive
altitude data to generate the alert.
The alert is triggered once, then silenced, but triggered again if altitude
degrades an additional 20%. The alert remains active until the aircraft
has gained sufficient altitude, indicating that it is no longer in the takeoff
phase.
D. Mode 4: Unsafe terrain clearance

Mode 4 has three sub-modes: Mode 4A, 4B and 4C, based on detection
of unsafe terrain clearance relative to flight phase and airspeed.
(1) Mode 4A – Gear up
The Mode 4A (refer to Figure 16−05−12) warning area is
dependent on altitude and airspeed. Penetration of the warning
area with gear not down triggers an aural alert “TOO LOW,
TERRAIN” and a GND PROX visual alert is displayed on the ADI.
The terrain clearance limit of the warning area increases with
airspeed when high accuracy FMS data is not available. Below 500
ft AGL and 190 kt, the aural alert “TOO LOW, GEAR” is enabled.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
Mode 4A − Unsafe terrain clearance − Approach (gear not down)

Figure 16−05−12
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
(2) Mode 4B – Flap up

Mode 4B (refer to Figure 16−05−13) is active while the aircraft
is in cruise or approach phase with the landing gear down and flaps
not in landing configuration. Penetration of the warning area terrain
clearance limit with the flaps not in landing configuration triggers an
aural alert “TOO LOW, TERRAIN” and a GND PROX visual alert is
displayed on the ADI. The terrain clearance limit of the warning
area increases with airspeed when high accuracy FMS data is not
available. Penetration of the caution area with the flaps not in
landing configuration and landing gear down triggers a “TOO LOW,
FLAPS” aural alert. This alert may be muted by selecting the
FLAPS switch/light on the TAWS panel. Selection is accompanied
by a TAWS FLAPS OFF EICAS status message on the EICAS
page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
Mode 4B − Unsafe terrain clearance − Approach (gear down)

Figure 16−05−13
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
(3) Mode 4C – At takeoff

Mode 4C (refer to Figure 16−05−14) is intended for takeoff or
go-around, should the terrain rise faster than the aircraft climb rate.
Operation is based on the minimum terrain clearance floor, radio
altitude, and airspeed. Any decrease in altitude below the floor
triggers an amber GND PROX visual alert is displayed on the ADI,
and TOO LOW, TERRAIN sounds.
PFD − ADI
3000
MIN TERRAIN CLEARANCE (FEET)
"TOO LOW, TERRAIN"
2000
1000
SPEED EXPANSION
(>250 KTS)
"TOO LOW, TERRAIN" WARNING AREA
(<190 KTS)
0
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800
RADIO ALTITUDE (FEET)
Mode 4C − Unsafe terrain clearance − Takeoff and go−around

Figure 16−05−14
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
E. Mode 5: Descent below Glideslope (GS)

Mode 5 provides two levels of alerting when the aircraft is between 1000
and 300 ft RA and the aircraft flight path descends below the glideslope
beam on front-course ILS approaches or for excessive downward
deviation during Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance (LPV)
approaches
1000
MODE 5 BELOW GLIDESLOPE ALERT

GEAR DOWN
SOFT ALERT AREA

500
300
GLIDESLOPE HARD ALERT AREA

BEAM
CENTER 100
0 1 2 3 4
SOFT
"GLIDESLOPE"
HARD
"GLIDESLOPE"
"GLIDESLOPE"
(Soft) Area
"GLIDESLOPE"
(Hard) Area
RUNWAY
Mode 5 − Excessive deviation below Glideslope (GS)

Figure 16−05−15
When the glideslope exceeds 1.3 dots (0.46 degrees), the GLIDESLOPE
visual alert is displays on the ADI and the aural alert “GLIDESLOPE” is
given once.
The second alert level occurs when the aircraft is below 300 ft RA with
greater than two dots of deviation below the glideslope (0.7). In this case,
a hard (louder) “GLIDESLOPE” aural message sounds. In both alert
cases, an amber GND PROX visual alert is displayed on the ADI.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
To inhibit the “GLIDESLOPE” aural alert, the flight crew must press the
GS switch on the TAWS panel. The CNCL label on the switch illuminates
white and a TAWS GS CNCL EICAS status message displays on the
EICAS page. Refer to Figure 16−05−16.
EICAS STATUS MESSAGE
TAWS panel − Glideslope (GS) cancel switch

Figure 16−05−16
F. Mode 6: Advisory callouts and bank angle

Mode 6 provides aural alerts (such as “DECISION HEIGHT”,
“MINIMUMS”, “APPROACHING MINIMUMS”, etc.) for descent below
predefined altitudes (if a minimum is entered in the DH window).
(1) Mode 6: Altitude callouts
Mode 6 provides aural alerts and altitude callouts for descent below
predefined altitudes, approaching minimums (optional), and
minimums (refer to Figure 16−05−17). Mode 6 produces aural
alerts only (no messages on the ADI). AGL altitude callouts sound
at 1000 ft and 500 ft.
The 500 ft callout will only sound when a non-precision approach is
performed, or a glideslope or localizer deviation exceeds two dots.
The “MINIMUM” aural message sounds when the aircraft
descends below the minimums setting, either radio-altitude DH or
barometric MDA depending on the BARO/RAD selection on the
CTP.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
Mode 6 call−outs
Figure 16−05−17
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
(2) Mode 6: Bank angle

Mode 6 also includes alerts for excessive bank angle, with respect
to radio altitude. Bank angles exceeding the envelope generate the
aural alert “BANK ANGLE, BANK ANGLE”. Refer to
Figure 16−05−18.
The bank angle aural alerts are issued twice and then suppressed
unless the roll angle increases by an additional 20%.
2450’
150’
30’
5’
55 40 10 10 40 55
Excessive bank angle alerts

Figure 16−05−18
G. Mode 7: Windshear warning

Mode 7 provides reactive windshear detection during initial takeoff and
final approach phases of flight.
The windshear warning annunciation is displayed on the PFD when
windshear conditions are encountered (reactive).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
The reactive windshear function uses flight data inputs. The reactive
windshear detection is active between 10 and 1500 ft AGL, during the
initial takeoff and final approach.
Reactive windshear warning alerts are given for decreasing head wind
(or increasing tail wind) and severe vertical down drafts (refer to
Figure 16−05−19).
3000
1000
6 4 2 0 0 2 4 6
1000
"WINDSHEAR 2000
WINDSHEAR"
3000
Windshear alert envelopes

Figure 16−05−19
When an decreasing performance windshear is detected, it provides a
visual message and the aural message (refer to Figure 16−05−20)
that follows:
• A “ WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR” sounds, and
• a red WINDSHEAR message displays on the ADI.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
"WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR, WINDSHEAR."
PFD − ADI
Mode 7 − Windshear warning alert

Figure 16−05−20
NOTE
Windshear aural alerts have priority over all other
ground proximity aural alerts.
The reactive windshear caution from the TAWS mode 7 is deactivated on

the aircraft. Windshear cautions are provided exclusively by the
predictive windshear function of the radar.
TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE AWARNESS

A. Terrain and obstacle awareness
Terrain and obstacle awareness detects potential conflicts between the
aircraft flight path and the terrain. Alerts for conflicting flight path and
terrain obstacles are shown on the Vertical Situation Display (VSD) at the
bottom of the MAP page. This mode includes:
• Aircraft geographic position,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
• Aircraft altitude, and

• Terrain and obstacle database.
The terrain and obstacle awareness mode computes two levels of alerts:
• The terrain/caution alert level, and
• The terrain/warning alert level.
If the aircraft penetrates the terrain/caution alert zone:
• An aural alert “CAUTION TERRAIN, CAUTION TERRAIN” sounds
(refer to Figure 16−05−21), and
• The terrain areas corresponding to the caution alert are shown in
solid amber on the VSD (refer to Figure 16−05−22).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
"CAUTION TERRAIN,
CAUTION TERRAIN"
PFD − Ground proximity (GND PROX) indication

Figure 16−05−21
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
PFD − ADI MFW − MAP PAGE − OVERLY
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD)
VSD − Terrain caution alert

Figure 16−05−22
If the aircraft penetrates the terrain/warning alert zone:
• An aural alert “TERRAIN, TERRAIN, PULL UP” sounds (refer to
Figure 16−05−23), and
• The terrain areas corresponding to the warning alert are shown in
solid red on the VSD (refer to Figure 16−05−24).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
"TERRAIN,
TERRAIN, PULL UP"
PFD − PULL UP indications

Figure 16−05−23
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
PFD − ADI MFW − MAP PAGE − OVERLY
VERTICAL SITUATION DISPLAY (VSD)
VSD − Terrain warning alert

Figure 16−05−24
B. Terrain Clearance Floor (TCF)

The Terrain Clearance Floor (TCF) creates an increasing terrain
clearance envelope around the intended airport runway, related to the
distance from the runway (refer to Figure 16−05−25). The TCF
database, which is included in the TAWS database, contains information
for all hard-surfaced runways of 3500 ft or greater.
This alert mode complements existing Mode 4 protection by providing an
alert based on insufficient clearance even when in landing configuration.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
ALERT
ENVELOPE
RUNWAY
400 AGL 700 AGL
4 NM 12 NM 15 NM
Terrain Floor Clearance (TFC) − Alert envelope

Figure 16−05−25
When the aircraft penetrates the TCF alert envelope, there is an aural
alert of “TOO LOW, TERRAIN” and an amber GND PROX message
displays on the PFD. The aural alert is issued once when the initial
envelope penetration occurs, and one time for each 20% of degradation
in Radio Altitude (RA).
TAWS – CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

Although the TAWS is automatic, the TAWS panel on the overhead panel
includes the three guarded switch/lights that follow (refer to
Figure 16−05−26):
• GEAR, to inhibit TAWS aural alerts associated with landing gear,
• TERR, to inhibit TAWS aural alerts associated with terrain, and
• FLAP, to inhibit TAWS aural alerts associated with flap.
The TAWS includes also one switch/light to inhibit aural alert associated with
Glideslope (GS).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
GLIDE SLOPE (GS)

CANCEL SWITCH
GEAR INHIB TERRAIN INHIB FLAP INHIB

SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
TAWS panel
Figure 16−05−26
When the GEAR INHIB guarded switch is pressed in:
• The INHIB label on the switch is illuminated white.
• The “TOO LOW GEAR” aural alert is inhibited.
• The TAWS GEAR INHIB status message displays on the EICAS
page.
• When pressed in again, it restores the “TOO LOW GEAR”alert
function.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
When the TERR INHIB guarded switch is pressed in:

• The “TOO LOW TERRAIN” alert is inhibited.
• The TAWS TERRAIN OFF alert displays on the MAP page.
• When pressed in again, it restores the “TOO LOW TERRAIN” alert
function.
When the FLAP INHIB guarded switch is pressed in:
• “TOO LOW FLAPS” alert is inhibited.
• The TAWS FLAP INHIB status message displays on the EICAS
page.
• When pressed in again, it restores the “TOO LOW FLAPS” alert
function.
When a switch/light is pressed, the associated aural alert are inhibited and a
white INHiB or CNCL legend illuminates. An associated EICAS status
message displays when each switch/light is pressed.
The terrain display on the MAP page is selected using the TERR switch on
the CTP or the terrain OVLY (overlay) menu on the MAP page (refer to
Figure 16−05−27). The OVLY menu selection will display absolute and
relative TAWS alerting.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
PEAK ELEVATION
TAWS controls and indications

Figure 16−05−27
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
The terrain display has three presentations:

• Absolute terrain: Topographic terrain (always displayed when TERRAIN
is selected on the OVLY menu).
• Relative terrain: TERRAIN display selection shaded red and amber
relative to aircraft position.
• Alerting terrain: Red and amber terrain alerts.
The absolute terrain is displayed in browns and greens, and water is
displayed in blue (refer to Figure 16−05−28). Absolute terrain can be
displayed with WXR. Weather or terrain are removed during alerts (TAWS
modes or windshear) and are automatically restored once the alert condition
has cleared.
1. Absolute terrain displayed in greens and browns.
Absolute terrain display

Figure 16−05−28
The relative terrain is displayed using the same color and elevation rules as
defined for the displays of relative terrain on the MAP page (refer to
Figure 16−05−29).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
Relative terrain display

Figure 16−05−29
The terrain alerts are displayed using the same color rules as defined for the
display of relative terrain on the lateral MAP page (refer to
Figure 16−05−29). When a terrain alert is active, the terrain display on
the VSD associated with the alerts appears solid and filled with the terrain
alert color. This is so the alert is clearly visible.
A. TAWS test
The TAWS pilot-initiated test function is done through the AVIONIC
synoptic page (AVIO tab) (refer to Figure 16−05−30). During the
test, a test pattern displays on the MFW and HSI, and all the aural alerts
sound. The test takes 2.5 minutes to complete.
The TAWS test function is a self-running test and it is inhibited in flight.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
TAWS test function

Figure 16−05−30
The table that follows describes the different test statuses for the TAWS:
Status Description
PASS (Green) Test completed successfully.
FAIL (Amber) Test failure.
FAULT (Cyan) Test uncompleted due to a failure.
IN PROG (Cyan) Test in progress.
DONE (White) Test sequence completed.
PRESS TO STOP White, test to be stopped by the user.
(White)
−−−−−− (Amber Test invalid.
dash)
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(TAWS)
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
Weather radar (WXR) system
O
WXR SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The Weather Radar (WXR) system has an integrated
receiver/transmitter/antenna unit mounted on the forward bulkhead in the
nose radome. Refer to Figure 16−06−1.
WEATHER RADAR
ANTENNA
MultiScan weather radar antenna

Figure 16−06−1
The weather radar system (WXR) provides weather information for a range
of 320 nm. The system has the characteristics that follow:
• 18-inch antenna,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O Weather radar (WXR) system
• 320 nm range,
• 120-degree scan,
• 40 degrees/second scan rate, and
• A tilt angle of ±15 degrees.
When the WXR is turned on, the antenna makes an initial sweep to detect
weather in front of the aircraft. The second sweep will be at a relatively low
tilt angle from which significant ground clutter may be visible. When the
initialization process is completed, the flight crew receives an optimized
weather picture with minimal ground clutter for any range selected.
The presented image is the result of multiple radar scans at different tilt
angles. The system stores the scanned images in memory in order to
construct and display a complete weather image. Other features include:
• Independent (pilot/copilot) inputs and outputs,
• Enhanced Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS),
• Variable temperature-based gain control,
• Thunderstorm cell top protection,
• Path Attenuation Correction (PAC) alert,
• Geographic (oceanic/continental) weather correlation,
• Optimized weather depiction during turns,
• Predictive windshear function,
• Ground mapping for major geographical features, and
• Turbulence detection to a range of 40 nm.
The WXR system is designed to work in automatic mode (AUTO) at all times.
The manual mode (MAN) is used as a backup. The WXR has a geographic
weather correlation and auto-temperature gain database. This provides a
more accurate picture of the displayed weather.
The WXR settings can be adjusted with the controls located on the Control
Tuning Panel (CTP) and in the MAP page (refer to Figure 16−06−2).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
Indications are displayed on the Multifunction Windows (MFWs) and on the

Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) (refer to Figure 16−06−3).
VSD
TERRAIN
TRAFFIC
WX
DONE
WEATHER
(WX) SWITCH
WXR system controls

Figure 16−06−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
EMP
TRUE
ICT
IAB
ANY
PER
SWO
WXR system indications

Figure 16−06−3
WXR RADAR OPERATING MODES

The WXR can be operated in automatic or manual mode as follows:
• The automatic operating mode is used for normal operation, and
• The manual operating mode is available as an alternate or backup mode.
Pressing the LSK, adjacent to AUTO/MAN, selects automatic (AUTO) or
manual (MAN) operation of the WXR. The selection displays in cyan. Refer
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
CTP − Weather radar page

Figure 16−06−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
A. Automatic operation
The AUTO mode is the default mode of operation. During the AUTO
mode, the system continuously scans and adjusts the tilt angle and gain
to provide an optimum weather picture to the flight crew. Gain adjustment
by the flight crew is available during AUTO mode while the tilt adjustment
is disabled. If the AUTO mode is selected on either side, then both sides
are selected for automatic operation.
Operation in AUTO mode includes the functions that follow:
• The MultiScanTM,
• The Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS),
• The overflight protection,
• The Path Attenuation Correction (PAC), and
• The temperature-based/geographic-based gain.
(1) MultiScan
The MultiScan™ function combines multiple radar scans at various
antenna tilt angles to detect short, medium, and long-range
weather. Radar scan data is stored in memory and retrieved when
a range selection is made, to display an accurate eather image
regardless of aircraft altitude. Refer to Figure 16−06−5.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
MultiScan function
Figure 16−06−5
(2) Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS)
The Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) system function removes
approximately 98% of the ground returns when the tilt angle of the
radar antenna is below a predetermined threshold level. Refer to
Figure 16−06−6.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
Ground clutter suppression

Figure 16−06−6
NOTE
The GCS function is only available when in automatic
operating mode.
The GCS can be turned on by pressing the LSK switch related GCS
on the Control Tuning Panel (CTP) (refer to Figure 16−06−7).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
CTP − Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) control LSK

Figure 16−06−7
The default GCS setting is ON in AUTO mode.
(3) Weather display in turns
During turns with the SmartScan™, the steps that follow occur
(refer to Figure 16−06−8):
• The scan rate is decreased in the direction of the turn to
provide smooth and rapid weather updates,
• Updates rates in the turn are faster, allowing for better depiction
of the weather ahead of the aircraft and in the direction of the
turn, and
• The opposite direction of the turn is not actively scan but a
stored image of the weather are displayed prior to starting the
turn.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
WXR display in turns

Figure 16−06−8
(4) Overflight protection
Above 22,000 ft, the overflight protection function activates to
prevent detected storm cells from disappearing from the display as
they approach the aircraft during high altitude cruise.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
As the cells begin to move below the upper radar beam, the system
uses the data collected down to 6000 ft below the aircraft to keep
the reflective part of the cells in view (refer to
Figure 16−06−9). As the aircraft is within approximately 15
nm of the cells, the radar compares the stored digital image with the
latest scan data and displays the more intense returns so the cells
remain in view until they move behind the aircraft.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
Overflight protection
Figure 16−06−9
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
(5) Path Attenuation Correction (PAC)

The Path Attenuation Correction (PAC) alert displays when high
intensity weather is detected (up to 80 nm ahead of the aircraft) and
requires an attenuation correction.
The PAC alert shows an amber arc that appears at the edge of the
outer heading range (refer to Figure 16−06−10) when is at
limits. It displayed the area where the radar may not display
precipitation correctly or not at all. The PAC is available in
automatic operating mode only.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
PAC alert
Figure 16−06−10
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
The PAC alert informs the flight crew that the radar beam in the
direction of the alert is severely attenuated and the area behind it is
dangerous and may contain significant precipitation. The PAC alert
arc identifies potentially dangerous precipitation conditions and is
available in automatic operating mode only.
(6) Temperature-based/geographic-based gain
During automatic operating mode, to optimize gain settings and
weather returns in all phases of flight, the WXR system
compensates the data that follow:
• The variations in temperature,
• The geographic location,
• The time of day, and
• The altitude.
Oceanic weather cells tend to have less mass and reflectivity than
continental thunderstorms of equivalent height (refer to
Figure 16−06−11). The WXR automatically adjusts gain and tilt
in oceanic regions to more accurately depict weather cells.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
Continental/Oceanic weather
Figure 16−06−11
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
B. Manual operation
The manual operating mode is the alternate or backup mode of the WXR
system, in case of failure or fault. In manual operating mode, the WXR
scans as a set gain and antenna tilt angle. It does not include any signal
conditioning functions available in automatic mode.
To activate the manual operating mode, the LSK adjacent to the
AUTO/MAN selection on the both CTPs must be pressed to select MAN
mode.
C. Weather radar selection

During automatic or manual WXR operation, the weather radar
selections that follow are available on the CTP (refer to
Figure 16−06−12):
• STBY (standby)/on mode,
• WX (Weather) mode,
• WX/TURB (Weather and Turbulence) mode,
• TURB (Turbulence) mode, and
• MAP mode.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
CTP − Mode selection

Figure 16−06−12
The modes that follow can be selected individually for each side (pilot
and copilot):
• WX mode,
• WX/TURB mode,
• TURB mode, and
• MAP mode.
The selected mode and any failures of the system are indicated beside
the HSI portion of the PFD, and at the bottom of the MFW.
(1) STBY mode
The STBY mode is the default mode at system power-up. After
landing, the weather radar switches automatically to STBY mode to
prevent injury to ground personnel. When STBY mode is selected
on either side, both sides are selected to STBY operation.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
If STBY mode is selected when the aircraft is below 2300 ft RA or

during takeoff, the windshear detection function is automatically
turned on.
(2) ON mode
The WRX can be manually selected ON at any time. When the
WXR is selected ON while on the ground, WRX ON message
displays in amber on the HSI.
NOTE
The WRX is automatically on when the aircraft is
WOFFW.
(3) WX mode
The WX mode is the normal mode. This mode cannot detect
windshear, clouds, or lightning, but it can detect returns related to
precipitation intensity and type as follows:
• Rain,
• Wet hail,
• Snow, and
• Possible icing conditions.
(4) TURB mode
The TURB mode shows only the turbulence associated with
precipitation. Only detected turbulence within a 40 nm range
displays, regardless of the selected WXR range. This mode is
useful to isolate zones that have been identified with the WX/TURB
mode. The system remains in TURB mode for 30 seconds, then
reverts to WX/TURB mode.
The WX/TURB mode shows the same weather picture as the WX
mode, plus the turbulence associated with precipitation. The
turbulence zone display is limited to 40 nm on the MAP page,
regardless of the range selected.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
(5) WX/TURB mode

The WX/TURB mode shows the same weather picture as the WX
mode, plus the turbulence associated with precipitation. The
turbulence zone display is limited to 40 nm on the MAP page,
regardless of the range selected.
NOTE
This mode cannot detect Clear-Air Turbulence (CAT).
(6) MAP mode

The MAP mode enables display of both terrain and weather returns.
The Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) is disabled in MAP mode.
The MAP mode displays the ground returns when there is no
significant weather in the area. Receiver sensitivity is decreased to
accommodate terrain characteristics. The mode enables
identification of terrain features such as:
• The mountains,
• The coastlines, and
• The bodies of water.
(7) GAIN control
The GAIN control function allows the flight crew to set the intensity
of the weather display. This function is available in AUTO mode and
in MAN mode. The GAIN control is done through the GAIN switch
on the CTP (refer to Figure 16−06−13).
The setting are: −1, −2, −3, 0, +1, +2, and +3 (refer to
Figure 16−06−14). When in the automatic mode, the gain
should be set to 0.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
CTP − Gain control LSK

Figure 16−06−13
−3
Makes the receiver more sensitive.
−2
To identify lower level of precipitation
−1
0 Should be the operational setting
+1
+2 Makes the receiver less sensitive.

To identify higher level of precipitation
+3
Radar gain control setting

Figure 16−06−14
(8) Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS)
The GCS system function removes approximately 98% of the
ground returns when the tilt angle of the radar antenna is below a
threshold angle. The GCS can be turned on by pressing the GCS
switch on the Control Tuning Panel (CTP) (refer
Figure 16−06−15). The default setting is ON and can be ON in
automatic mode only, but can be selected OFF.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
CTP − Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) control LSK

Figure 16−06−15
(9) TILT control
The tilt control allows the flight crew to have a better picture of the
size, height, and relative direction of the storm cell. This function is
not selectable in AUTO mode but is controlled automatically. The tilt
angle is controllable by the flight crew in MAN mode through the
TILT switch on the CTP (refer to Figure 16−06−16). The tilt
angle range varies from −15 to +15 degrees.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
CTP − TILT control LSK

Figure 16−06−16
WEATHER RADAR OPERATION

When operated in automatic mode, the WXR settings are optimized to
provide the best weather imagery adapted for the phases of flight that follow:
• Takeoff,
• Climb,
• Cruise, and
• Descent and landing.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
A. Takeoff
During takeoff, the WXR antenna is set to approximately 4 degree to 7
degree up and uses multiple beams at different tilt settings, along with
ground clutter suppression and PAC to produce a clutter-free display
prior to takeoff.
Weather radar operation on the ground is optimized to display hazardous
weather within approximately 50 nm. If a longer range view is required,
manual operating mode can be set to increase the tilt control to view
farther range weather. The operating mode is changed back to automatic
prior to takeoff.
B. Climb
During climb, the antenna tilt angle is automatically decreased. A radar
beam detects high-altitude thunderstorms. A second beam is set at a
lower tilt angle to detect weather at extended ranges and prevent
over-scanning of weather with turbulence threat in the vicinity of the
aircraft. When the aircraft is above 22,000 ft MSL, overflight protection
becomes active.
C. Cruise
During cruise, the WXR displays significant weather at the current aircraft
altitude. The functions that follow are active:
• Variable temperature-based gain,
• Overflight protection, and
• PAC.
D. Descent and landing

During descent, the antenna tilt angle is automatically increased. A radar
beam detects high-altitude thunderstorms, and a second beam is set at a
lower tilt angle to detect weather at extended ranges and prevent
over-scanning of weather with turbulence threat in the vicinity of the
aircraft. Once the aircraft is below 22,000 ft MSL, the overflight protection
deactivates. The WXR continues to increase the tilt angle to maintain
weather within view until landing.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
WXR SYSTEM – CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

A. Weather radar display
The weather radar display selection is done through the WX switch on
the CTP or through the OVLY (overlay) menu selection on the MAP
display and the PLAN display. Refer to Figure 16−06−17.
Radar display
Figure 16−06−17
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
A maximum of four independent radar images can be displayed

simultaneously, two on each side. The weather display feature allows
uploaded weather imagery from satellite and/or data link to be displayed
on the MFW.
The weather radar picture is displayed on the Multifunction Window
(MFW), or on the Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) section of the PFD
if an on-side display failure occurs (refer to Figure 16−06−18).
WXR system display

Figure 16−06−18
During a TAWS or a TCAS alert, the WXR image is removed.
After a TAWS alert, the weather image is automatically restored.
However, after a TCAS alert the crew must select WX on the CTP or
from the OVLY tab to display the weather image again.
The WXR section on the HSI and MAP displays system status and mode
selections. The top line indicates the WXR mode status including:
• STBY, the system is in standby mode and not transmitting,
• WX, the system is in normal weather mode,
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
• WX + T, the system is in weather mode with turbulence detection (40

nm limit),
• TURB, the system is in turbulence mode detection only, and
• MAP, the system is in ground mapping mode.
The second line indicates Tilt (T) setting followed by Gain (G) setting.
Gain displays only in manual operation. If a system fault occurs, the third
line displays the system fault. Refer to Figure 16−06−19.
WXR section
Figure 16−06−19
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
The Data Link Graphical Weather (DLK GWX) may be displayed on a

MFW. This imagery is enabled by selecting WXR on the CTP MENU
page or from the OVLY drop-down list on the MAP page.
B. WXR control
The WXR system range is coupled to the MAP range and is limited to
320 nm. For MAP range greater than the radar range, the weather
display will be limited to the maximum radar range. The range is
controlled by the RANGE switch on the CTP (refer to
Figure 16−06−20) and it is scaled as follows: 5, 10, 25, 50, 100,
200, and 300 nm.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
CTP − RANGE switch

Figure 16−06−20
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
The WXR is controlled from either CTP, as each side has independent
WXR control.
On the CTP, the WXR page is accessed by selecting the LSK adjacent to
WXR on the MENU page and includes the following selections (refer to
Figure 16−06−21):
• STBY/ON, Standby or ON,
• AUTO/MAN, Automatic or Manual mode,
• WX/TURB/MAP, Weather, Turbulence, or Map mode,
• GAIN, Gain control setting,
• GCS, Ground Clutter Suppression, and
• TILT, Tilt control.
CTP − Weather radar (WX) switch

Figure 16−06−21
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
NOTE
AUTO mode is set when selected on either CTP.
C. WXR test
The WXR test is initiated on the AVIONIC synoptic page (AVIO tab)
(refer to Figure 16−06−22). The test can be done at any time. When
the test in progress, the radar antenna stops transmitting.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
WXR system test function

Figure 16−06−22
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
The selected mode and any failures in the system display beside the HSI
portion of the PFD and at the bottom of the MFW. Refer to
Figure 16−06−23.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
Weather mode display on HSI and MFW

Figure 16−06−23
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
D. Predictive windshear function

The predictive windshear function uses weather radar information to
predict windshear conditions during takeoff and approach. Windshear
detection is active when the weather radar is operating, in STBY, or in
TEST mode.
The predictive windshear annunciation on the HUD is inhibited when the
TAWS FAIL caution message displays on the EICAS page.
Alerts are given when the level of windshear exceeds predetermined
threshold values (refer to Figure 16−06−24).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
Predictive windshear alerts

Figure 16−06−24
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
On takeoff, if the weather radar detects windshear conditions (wind shift

variance around cells), a “MONITOR RADAR DISPLAY” caution aural
alert sounds. An amber WSHR AHEAD message is displayed on the ADI
(refer to Figure 16−06−25). If the detection continues when the
aircraft is in the warning area, a “WINDSHEAR AHEAD, WINDSHEAR
AHEAD” aural warning alert sounds. A red WSHR AHEAD message is
displayed on the ADI (refer to Figure 16−06−26).
"MONITOR RADAR DISPLAY"
Predictive windshear caution alert − Takeoff

Figure 16−06−25
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
"WINDSHEAR AHEAD, WINDSHEAR AHEAD"
Predictive windshear warning alert − Takeoff

Figure 16−06−26
On approach, when windshear is detected and the aircraft is in the
caution area, a “MONITOR RADAR DISPLAY” caution aural alert
sounds. An amber WSHR AHEAD message is displayed on the ADI
(refer to Figure 16−06−27). If the detection occurs or continues
when the aircraft is in the warning area, a “GO AROUND, WINDSHEAR
AHEAD” warning aural alert sounds. A red WSHR AHEAD message is
displayed on the ADI (refer to Figure 16−06−28).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
O
"MONITOR RADAR DISPLAY"
Predictive windshear caution alert − Approach

Figure 16−06−27
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
"GO AROUND, WINDSHEAR AHEAD"
Predictive windshear warning alert − Approach

Figure 16−06−28
NOTE
When predictive windshear is detected and the radar is
in ground mapping or test mode, the weather mode is
activated.
The windshear aural alert has priority over all other
ground proximity aural messages.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
Navigation − Controls and indications
O
NAVIGATION – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages
None
B. Caution messages

GNSS NOT AVAIL Shows when the FMS is not using GNSS TO, LDG
position data as part of its calculations to
determine position. Shows if either of the
conditions that follow is true:
• All GNSS sensors are not available
and at least one sensor is enabled,
or
• At least one sensor is disabled and
one sensor is enabled and no
enabled sensor is available.
IRS SAME SOURCE Two of the three IRS failed. TO, LDG
IRS SET HEADING Alignment In Motion (AIM) occurs but not TO, LDG
in AIM attitude mode or excessive
motion in reversion attitude mode.
TAWS FAIL Terrain Awareness and Warning System TO, LDG
(TAWS) failed.
TCAS FAIL Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance TO, LDG
System (TCAS) failed.
TCAS OFF TCAS in the standby mode. One or more None
display is reporting TCAS in standby and
aircraft is in-air and TCAS is not failed.
WXR ON Weather radar is transmitting while air- TO, LDG
craft is on ground and no engine is
running.
XPDR 1 FAIL Transponder 1 is active and has failed. TO, LDG
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NAVIGATION
O Navigation − Controls and indications

XPDR 2 FAIL Transponder 2 is active and has failed. TO, LDG

IRS 1 FAIL IRS 1 failure reported. TO, LDG
IRS 1 PWR FAULT The IRS is operating on auxiliary TO, LDG
power or if auxiliary power is not
available to the IRS.
TAWS GPWS FAIL TAWS mode 1–6 not available and the TO, LDG
other TAWS functions are working.
TAWS MAP FAIL Absolute terrain map function of TAWS TO, LDG
not available and the other TAWS
functions are working.
TAWS TERR FAIL Terrain awareness function inoperative TO, LDG
or not available and the other TAWS
functions are working.
TAWS WINDSHEAR TAWS mode 7 not available and the TO, LDG
FAIL other TAWS functions are working.
WXR AUTO FAULT WXR is reporting an autotilt mode fault TO, LDG
and other WXR functions are working.
WXR CTRL FAULT Both WXR controls have faults. TO, LDG
WXR FAIL WXR transceiver inoperative. TO, LDG
WXR FAULT WXR minor failure. TO, LDG
WXR PWS FAIL WXR is reporting a PWS failure and TO, LDG
other WXR functions are working.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

NAVIGATION
Navigation − Controls and indications
O

WXR TURB FAULT WXR is reporting a turbulence mode TO, LDG
fault and other WXR functions are
working.
D. Status messages

CTP OVERRIDE Left or right Control Tuning Panel (CTP) None
override through AVIONIC synoptic page
(CTP tab).
CURSOR INHIB Left or right (CCP) cursor inhibited. None
TAWS FLAP INHIB TAWS flap alerts inhibited by the flight None
crew.
TAWS GEAR INHIB TAWS gear alerts inhibited by the flight None
crew.
TAWS GS CNCL TAWS Glideslope (GS) alerts cancelled None
by the flight crew.
TAWS TERR INHIB TAWS terrain alerts inhibited by the flight None
crew.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

OXYGEN AND EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
O SYSTEM
Controls and indications
OXYGEN AND EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages
None
B. Caution messages

CREW OXY LO Flight crew oxygen low pressure. TO, LDG
PRESS
ELT ON ELT is transmitting TO, LDG
None
D. Status messages

PAX OXY DPLY Cabin oxygen masks deployed automati- None
cally or manually.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
General
O
POWER PLANT SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The PW1500G engines are a series of axial flow, geared fan, concentric
twin-spool, FADEC controlled, and ultra-high bypass ratio turbofan engines.
The engine models installed on the aircraft have the thrust ratings that follow:
Engine Engine models Uninstalled thrust Installed thrust

options rating (lbf) rating (lbf)
<72211001D> PW1521G-3 21970 20760
The uninstalled thrust rating represents the maximum takeoff thrust available
for the uninstalled engines as inscribed on the engine identification plate and
indicated on the Type Certification Data Sheet (TCDS).The installed thrust
rating represents the maximum takeoff thrust available after the engine is
installed on the aircraft.
All models of the PW1500 series engine incorporate a cascade-type thrust
reverser system.
The main feature of the PW1500G series is a relatively large diameter fan
rotor that is rotated at a reduced speed by a Fan Drive Gear System (FDGS).
The geared fan rotor configuration allows the fan to turn more slowly than the
N1 shaft, thus increasing efficiency by allowing both sections to rotate at their
optimum speeds. The relatively higher N1 shaft speed also reduces the
number of stages required to generate power, thereby reducing parts and
thus total engine weight.
The low pressure spool, or N1 shaft, drives the FDGS (which drives the fan)
and consists of a three-stage Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) powered by a
three-stage Low Pressure Turbine (LPT). The high pressure spool, or N2
shaft, powered by a two-stage High Pressure Turbine (HPT), drives an
eight-stage High Pressure Compressor (HPC) and the engine Main Gearbox
(MGB), which in turn drives the auxiliary systems. The N1 shaft rotates
concentrically inside the N2 shaft but they are mechanically independent.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

POWER PLANT
O General
Other engine improvements include variable geometry compressor inlet

guide vanes, an advanced compressor bleed air system, improved
combustion chamber design, turbine blades that are cooled internally, and
active turbine-to-case clearance control. The Full Authority Digital Engine
Control (FADEC) manages all aspects of engine control, monitoring, and
performance.
Figure 18−01−1 shows the main sections of the engine.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
General
O
EIGHT−STAGE HIGH PRESSURE THREE−STAGE LOW PRESSURE

COMPRESSOR (HPC) TURBINE (LPT)
HIGH BYPASS FAN
COMBUSTOR
TWO−STAGE HIGH PRESSURE

TURBINE (HPT)
FAN DRIVE GEAR SYSTEM

(FDGS)
THREE−STAGE LOW PRESSURE

COMPRESSOR (LPC)
Power plant overview

Figure 18−01−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O General
The flight crew controls are located in the center pedestal and consist of a
Throttle Quadrant Assembly (TQA) and an ENGINE panel. The engine
parameters, status, and EICAS messages are reported on the EICAS page
and STATUS synoptic page (refer to Figure 18−01−2 and
Figure 18−01−3).
THROTTLE QUADRANT ASSEMBLY (TQA) AND

ENGINE PANEL
Power plant system controls

Figure 18−01−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
General
O
TAT −15 C
SAT −15 C
ENGINE
120 OIL TEMP ( C) 115
10.4 OIL QTY (QTS) 10.4
APU
RPM 100 OIL TEMP 32 C
DOOR OPEN OIL QTY FULL
TIRE PRESSURE (PSI)
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
WEAR
Power plant system indications

Figure 18−01−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O General
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Nacelle system
O
NACELLE SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The nacelle system provides an aerodynamic and protective enclosure for
the engine. It also transfers some loads to the pylon.
The main components of the nacelle system are:
• The inlet cowl,
• The fan cowls,
• The thrust reverser cowls,
• The engine mounts, and
• The drain system.
The inlet cowl directs the airflow that enters the engine. The fan cowls give
access to the Electronic Engine Control (EEC), Prognostics and Health
Management Unit (PHMU), and the fan case. The thrust reverser cowls give
access to the thrust reverser system components. The engine mounts and
thrust links transfer the engine loads to the pylon. The drain system
evacuates the potential leaks (from the hydraulic, oil and fuel system, as well
as the pylon wet bay) through the engine drain masts.
Figure 18−02−1 shows the nacelle system components.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Nacelle system
PYLON
ENGINE
MOUNTS
THRUST
REVERSER
COWL (RH)
FAN COWL (RH)
THRUST
REVERSER
INLET COWL COWL (LH)
FAN COWL (LH)
Nacelle system
Figure 18−02−1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Nacelle system
O
A. Power plant accessible components

(1) Left side view
FUEL AND HYDRAULIC LINES AIR/OIL COOLER (AOC)
STARTER AIR VALVE (SAV)
AIR TURBINE STARTER (ATS)
PERMANENT MAGNET
ALTERNATOR GENERATOR (PMAG)
VARIABLE FREQUENCY GENERATOR (VFG)
ANTI−ICE VALVE
ELECTRONIC
ENGINE CONTROL PROGNOSTICS AND HEALTH
(EEC) MANAGEMENT UNIT (PHMU)
EXCITER BOX
Engine accessible components (left side)

Figure 18−02−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Nacelle system
(2) Right side view
ENVIRONMENTAL TURBINE ACTIVE

CONTROL SYSTEM (ECS) CLEARANCE CONTROL (ACC)
PRECOOLER VALVE
EXHAUST GAS
TEMPERATURE (EGT)
PROBES
BREATHER OVERBOARD
DISCHARGE
OIL TANK
DRAIN LINES COWL ANTI−ICE DUCT
Engine accessible components (right side)

Figure 18−02−3
THRUST REVERSER SYSTEM

A. Thrust reverser system – Overview
The thrust reversers are translating sleeve/fixed cascade type and
consist of:
• Translating sleeves,
• Synchronized hydraulic actuators,
• Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU),
• Blocker doors,
• Thrust reverser cascades, and
• Manual drive.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Nacelle system
O
The thrust reverser levers (refer to Figure 18−02−5) control their

respective thrust reversers.
Figure 18−02−4 shows the thrust reverser system components.
BLOCKER
DOOR
THRUST REVERSER
TRANSLATING SLEEVE
THRUST REVERSER
CASCADE
HYDRAULIC THRUST REVERSER

ACTUATOR COWL BLOCKER
DOOR
Thrust reversers
Figure 18−02−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Nacelle system
THRUST REVERSER LEVER
Thrust reverser levers

Figure 18−02−5
B. Thrust reverser system – Operation

When deployed, the synchronized hydraulic actuators move the
translating sleeves aft, which causes the blocker doors to rotate. This
redirects the fan airflow through the cascades and provides reverse
thrust. The actuators have a locking mechanism, position feedback
sensors, and proximity switches for lock engagement status.
C. Thrust reverser system – Baulk function

The baulk mechanism will provide the flight crew with a tactile feedback
to indicate thrust reverser state during deployment or stowage cycles.
The mechanism can be overridden when a significant amount of force is
applied to the thrust reverser levers.
During deployment, the baulk mechanism blocks the thrust levers in the
idle position until thrust reverser deployment is confirmed. After
deployment, the mechanism allows the thrust levers to enter in the
reverse thrust range.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Nacelle system
O
During stowage, the baulk mechanism blocks the thrust levers in the
forward idle position until thrust reverser stowage is confirmed and
securely closed and locked.
Figure 18−02−6 shows different thrust reverser indications.
Thrust reversers deployment malfunctions

Figure 18−02−6
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Nacelle system
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine
O
ENGINE – OVERVIEW
The engine is divided into the sections (refer to Figure 18−03−1) that
follow:
• Compressor inlet cone and fan blades,
• Fan Drive Gear System (FDGS),
• Low Pressure Compressor (LPC),
• High Pressure Compressor (HPC),
• Combustor,
• High Pressure Turbine (HPT),
• Low Pressure Turbine (LPT), and
• Angle Gearbox (AGB) and Main Gearbox (MGB).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine
COMPRESSOR
LOW PRESSURE INTERMEDIATE
COMPRESSOR CASE
FAN ANGLE
INTERMEDIATE GEARBOX
CASE
FAN CASE
FAN DRIVE
GEAR SYSTEM
FAN
ROTOR
HIGH PRESSURE
COMPRESSOR TURBINE
INLET CONE
DIFFUSER/
COMBUSTOR
HIGH PRESSURE
COMPRESSOR
MAIN
GEARBOX
TURBINE
EXHAUST
CASE
LOW PRESSURE
TURBINE
TURBINE
INTERMEDIATE
CASE
Engine module description

Figure 18−03−1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine
O
ENGINE – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Compressor inlet cone and fan blades
The compressor inlet cone smooths the airflow that enters the fan blades
(refer to Figure 18−03−2). The cone is made of composite material
and it is automatically and constantly de-iced by the engine bleed air.
The fan blades draw air into the Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) for the
gas-path flow and for the bypass flow that provides 80% of the engine
thrust. The fan is rotated by the FDGS.
FAN BLADES
COMPRESSOR
INLET CONE
Compressor inlet cone and fan blades

Figure 18−03−2
B. Fan Drive Gear System (FDGS)

The Fan Drive Gear System (FDGS) allows the fan to spin three times
slower than the Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) shaft. The FDGS is a
sun gear type reduction gearbox with five star gears and an outer ring
gear that rotates the fan. The reduction ratio is fixed.
Figure 18−03−3 shows the FDGS components.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine
LPC/SUN GEAR
STAR
GEAR
RING GEAR
GEARBOX
SHAFT
STAR
GEAR
FAN DRIVE GEARBOX MODULE
STAR
GEAR
Fan Drive Gear System (FDGS) module

Figure 18−03−3
By using the FDGS, geared fan speed and N1 are optimized for cruise.
The reduced fan load allows the Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) shaft
to spin faster than conventional engines, thereby increasing the pressure
change per stage. This results in fewer compressor and turbine stages
being needed, reducing the engine weight, fuel consumption, and noise.
C. Low Pressure Compressor (LPC)

The Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) (refer to Figure 18−03−4) is
a three-stage compressor, driven by the Low Pressure Turbine (LPT),
that increases the air pressure being fed into the High Pressure
Compressor (HPC). The LPC has a Variable Inlet Guide Vane (VIGV)
mechanism that optimizes the engine airflow, and a bleed valve (bleed
ring), that ensures compressor airflow stability.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine
O
LOW PRESSURE
COMPRESSOR (LPC)
BLEED VALVE (RING)
LOW PRESSURE
COMPRESSOR (LPC) LOW PRESSURE
ROTOR COMPRESSOR (LPC)
CASE
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC)

Figure 18−03−4
D. High Pressure Compressor (HPC)

The High Pressure Compressor (HPC) (refer to Figure 18−03−5) is
an eight-stage compressor driven by the High Pressure Turbine (HPT).
The HPC increases the pressure and the speed of the airflow before it
goes into the diffuser and the combustor. The HPC has a Variable Inlet
Guide Vane (VIGV) mechanism that optimizes the engine airflow and an
HPC bleed valve that bleeds air from the HPC during start.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine
VARIABLE INLET GUIDE VANE (VIGV)

MECHANISM
HIGH PRESSURE
COMPRESSOR (HPC)
SHAFT
HIGH PRESSURE
COMPRESSOR (HPC)
ROTOR
HIGH PRESSURE
COMPRESSOR
High Pressure Compressor (HPC)

Figure 18−03−5
E. Combustor
The combustor is a single-annular type chamber where the air/fuel
mixture is ignited and burned. It has 16 fuel nozzles and 2 igniters. The
combustor receives air from the diffuser at a reduced velocity.
Figure 18−03−6 shows the combustor with the fuel nozzles and
the diffuser.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine
O
FUEL NOZZLE
MANIFOLDS
COMBUSTOR
DIFFUSER CASE
FUEL NOZZLES
Diffuser and combustor

Figure 18−03−6
F. High Pressure Turbine (HPT)

The passage of the high temperature and high velocity gas exhaust
through the High Pressure Turbine (HPT) (refer to
Figure 18−03−7) provides the rotational forces to directly drive the
HPT and indirectly drive the HPC. Each turbine blade of the HPT has a
thermal coating and internal cavities, which combined with the turbine
cooling system, help the blades to resist high temperatures and to
increase their durability.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine
TURBINE COOLING
SYSTEM INLET
TURBINE CASE
High Pressure Turbine (HPT)

Figure 18−03−7
G. Low Pressure Turbine (LPT)

The Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) (refer to Figure 18−03−8) is a
three-stage rotor that drives the LPC.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine
O
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE (LPT)

SHAFT
LOW PRESSURE TURBINE (LPT)

ROTOR
Low Pressure Turbine (LPT)

Figure 18−03−8
H. Main Gearbox (MGB)

Main Gearbox (MGB) (refer to Figure 18−03−9) uses the torque
produced by the HPC, through an Angle Gearbox (AGB), to drive the
accessories that follow:
• Hydraulic Engine Driven Pump (EDP),
• Oil lubrication and scavenge pump,
• Variable Frequency Generator (VFG),
• Permanent Magnet Alternator Generator (PMAG), and
• Integrated Fuel Pump and Control (IFPC).
The MGB is also used to transfer the torque from the Air Turbine Starter
(ATS) (refer to Figure 18−03−10) to crank the engine during start.
Figure 18−03−9 and Figure 18−03−10 show the accessories
connected to the MGB.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine
INTEGRATED FUEL
PUMP AND CONTROL
(IFPC)
ANGLE
GEARBOX
FUEL FILTER
(AGB)
HOUSING
PERMANENT MAGNET
ALTERNATOR (PMA)
LUBRICATION AND MAIN
SCAVENGE GEARBOX
OIL PUMP CLEVIS
HYDRAULIC ENGINE
(MGB)
DRIVEN PUMP
(EDP)
Angle Gearbox (AGB) and Main Gearbox (MGB)

Figure 18−03−9
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine
O
AIR TURBINE
STARTER (ATS)
INTEGRATED
FUEL PUMP
AND CONTROL
FUEL FILTER
HOUSING
PERMANENT MAGNET
ALTERNATOR (PMA)
VARIABLE FREQUENCY
GENERATOR (VFG)
LUBRICATION AND
SCAVENGE OIL PUMP
Main Gearbox (MGB)

Figure 18−03−10
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine
I. Full Authority Digital Engine Control (FADEC) / Electronic Engine

Control (EEC)
The FADEC controls and monitors all the engine systems. The EEC
(refer to Figure 18−03−11) is the core of the FADEC. It is a
dual-channel unit installed on the left side of the fan case. One channel
of the EEC is capable of complete system control and the other one is a
backup if there is a failure. The EEC is mainly powered by the
Permanent Magnet Alternator Generator (PMAG), which is driven by the
Main Gearbox (MGB). N2 has to be greater than 10% to ensure
adequate electrical power for the EEC. If PMAG power is unavailable,
the DC essential bus powers the EEC.
The EEC protects the engine by maintaining the parameters (N1, N2, oil
pressure and temperature, fuel temperature, and Exhaust Gas
Temperature (EGT)) within the operational limits during all phases of
flight. It receives inputs from the engine systems that follow:
• Fuel system,
• Ignition system,
• Bleed air system,
• Oil system,
• Thrust reverser system,
• Starting system,
• Start and shutdown sequence,
• Thrust management system, and
• Aircraft systems.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine
O
START AND SHUTDOWN FUEL SYSTEM THRUST MANAGEMENT

SEQUENCE AND ENGINE STABILITY
BLEED AIR
OIL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
THRUST STARTING
REVERSER SYSTEM
(TR) SYSTEM
IGNITION AIRCRAFT
SYSTEM SYSTEMS
Electronic engine control (EEC) interaction

Figure 18−03−11
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine
The inputs received by the EEC are monitored and processed for
operation and maintenance reporting through the Engine Indication and
Crew Alerting System (EICAS) and the Onboard Maintenance System
(OMS).
The Prognostics and Health Monitoring Unit (PHMU) monitors and
processes engine parameters such as vibration, oil debris, and
performance for engine health monitoring and maintenance reporting.
The unit is installed on the fan case adjacent to the EEC.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine subsystem
O
ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The engine starting system uses pneumatic pressure supplied by the
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU), opposite engine bleed air, or a ground cart. The
system is controlled by the EEC. The main components of the system are the
Starter Air Valve (SAV) and the Air Turbine Starter (ATS) (refer to
Figure 18−04−1).
MANUAL OVERRIDE STARTER AIR

DRIVE SOCKET VALVE (SAV)
AIR TURBINE
STARTER (ATS)
STARTER
AIR DUCT
Engine starting system

Figure 18−04−1
ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Starter Air Valve (SAV)
The SAV is a pneumatically-actuated valve controlled by the EEC. It
sends compressed air from the aircraft pneumatic system to the Air
Turbine Starter (ATS) to crank N2 for start. The valve has an external
manual override drive socket that can be accessed without opening any
engine nacelle doors.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine subsystem
B. Air Turbine Starter (ATS)

The ATS converts pneumatic energy into torque to crank the engine
through the Main Gearbox (MGB) and the Angle Gearbox (AGB). The
starter has a speed sensor that sends the ATS speed signal to the EEC
to control the ignition and start operation. It has a self-contained oil
system that prevents cross contamination with the engine oil system.
C. Operation
During start, the EEC commands the SAV to supply pneumatic pressure
to the ATS, which cranks the engine. ATS speed is monitored by the
EEC, which disengages the ATS at approximately 51% N2.
Figure 18−04−2 shows an overview of the engine starting system
operation.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine subsystem
O
HIGH PRESSURE
GROUND
CONNECTION
(HPGC)
PNEUMATIC
PRESSURE
AUXILIARY POWER ENGINE
UNIT (APU) CRANKING
XBLEED VALVE
OPPOSITE ENGINE
COMMAND ATS SPEED
SIGNAL (CUT−OFF SPEED)
Engine starting system operation

Figure 18−04−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine subsystem
D. Automatic start
The automatic start gives the Electronic Engine Control (EEC) full control
of the start sequence, depending on whether the aircraft is on the ground
or in flight. For in flight starts, the starter assist is automatically
commanded by the EEC at 250 KIAS and below, where windmilling
airflow into the engine is insufficient for engine starting. The EEC
automatically controls the Starter Air Valve (SAV), the ignition, and the
fuel flow. The automatic start is initiated by ensuring that the thrust lever
is at or greater than forward idle, that the CONT IGNITION switch is in
the normal (dark) position, and by setting the START switch on the
ENGINE panel to AUTO and moving the L/R ENG run switches to ON.
During on-ground automatic start, the EEC will:
• Open the SAV,
• Turn on the igniters, and
• Turn on the fuel supply.
The igniters and SAV are automatically turned off by the EEC at
approximately 51% N2.
The start will not initiate automatically unless:
• The thrust lever is at or greater than forward idle,
• The CONT IGNITION switch is in the normal (dark) position, and
• The N2 is less than starter cutout speed.
NOTE
If the thrust lever is not at the appropriate position for
starting operation, the FADEC will generate a
“THRUST LEVER” aural message.
E. Automatic start abort

An automatic start on ground is aborted by the EEC when one of the
conditions that follow occurs:
• N1 locked rotor,
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine subsystem
O
• Hot or hung start,

• Loss of Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) data,
• Igniter failure, or
• Fuel control failure.
Depending on the start malfunction, the EEC aborts the engine start by
stopping the fuel supply, turning off the igniters and closing the SAV. The
ability of the EEC to abort the start is inhibited above approximately 50%
N2, on-ground and for all the in-flight conditions. Above this value, the
flight crew must set the L ENG or R ENG run switch on the ENGINE
panel to OFF to abort the automatic start.
Before a restart on the ground, the automatic start allows an engine
motoring period of 30 seconds to clear fuel vapor and cool the engine
components. The EEC then performs a single restart attempt when N2 is
below 20%.
F. Manual start
During a manual start, the flight crew controls the start sequence and the
EEC has limited control. The EEC continues to provide start and fault
indications on the EICAS page but the automatic abort feature is
disabled and pilot monitoring of the start parameters is required.
A manual start is commanded when the CONT IGNITION switch on the
ENGINE panel is pressed to the ON position. This action sends a manual
start request to the EEC, activates both igniters and displays IGN and the
ENG CONT IGNITION ON status message on the EICAS page. The
spring−loaded START switch on the ENGINE panel is then held in the L
ENG CRANK or R ENG CRANK position to crank the corresponding
engine by opening the appropriate SAV. The L ENG or R ENG run switch
on the ENGINE panel are then set to ON between 18% and 20% N2 to
allow the EEC to start the fuel flow.
The igniters and the ATS are turned off automatically by the EEC at
approximately 51% N2 when the ATS reaches the cutout speed.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine subsystem
CAUTION
Before engine start, confirm that the thrust lever is set
to idle. The engine will start regardless of the position
of the thrust lever and thrust level will quickly increase
to the thrust lever setting, which can cause a
hazardous situation.
NOTE
The EEC will not automatically abort an abnormal
manual start.
G. Manual start abort

The manual start is aborted by releasing the spring-loaded START
switch to the AUTO position before the L or R ENG run switch is set to
ON. This will disengage the starter. After the L or R ENG run switch is
set to ON, it must be selected to OFF to abort the start (stops the fuel
flow).
WARNING
Always put the ENG run switch back to the OFF
position after an abort of the start sequence. If you do
not reset the ENG run switch to OFF, the FADEC
system will not complete the ABORT. If you do not
obey this instruction, the engine can start and this can
cause injuries to persons.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine subsystem
O
NOTE
FADEC V2.9.5: To prevent the risk of a bowed rotor,
upon initiation of an on-ground automatic or manual
start command, the FADEC motors the engine before
allowing the start to proceed and the ENG START
DELAY EICAS advisory message displays on the
EICAS page.
H. FADEC software V2.9.6.3

After FADEC software V2.9.6.3 is loaded, the advisory message ENG
START DELAY will no longer be displayed on the EICAS page during all
engine starts. The message will only be displayed after the engine RUN
switch is selected to ON and the Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is
outside the shaded area of the figure below (refer to
Figure 18−04−3 or Figure 18−04−4).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine subsystem
FADEC V2.9.6.3 − ENG START DELAY

Figure 18−04−3
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine subsystem
O
FADEC V2.9.6.3 − ENG START DELAY

Figure 18−04−4
For ambient conditions that require extended motoring, the motoring time
will increase as a function of altitude and OAT.
The longest delay will be 62 seconds at 14000 feet with an OAT of
−54°C (−65°F).
When ENG START DELAY is displayed on the EICAS page, the engine
will motor at 12% N2 for an extra 15 to 30 seconds (depending upon
ambient conditions) as compared to a normal start (shaded area).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine subsystem
NOTE
The flight crews who used to operate engines equipped
with FADEC V2.9.5 will observe a nominal ground start
motoring time increase from 15 seconds to 30 seconds
after the implementation of FADEC V2.9.6.3.
During the first engine start after the implementation of
the FADEC software V2.9.6.3, the motoring time will be
set by default to 69 seconds. Normal system behavior
will resume after next engine start.
During the first engine start after the implementation of
FADEC V2.9.6.3, the advisory message ENG START
DELAY may be posted on the EICAS page throughout
the entire motoring time.
During subsequent engine starts, the advisory
message ENG START DELAY will be posted at start
initiation only if the motoring time exceed 30 seconds.
Motoring time is counted from when the N2 reaches
12%.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine fuel system
O
ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The engine fuel system supplies metered and pressurized fuel to the fuel
nozzles and to the engine fuel-actuated valves and actuators. The fuel
system can be divided into three subsystems:
• The fuel control system,
• The fuel distribution system, and
• The fuel indication system.
FUEL SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Fuel control system
The fuel control system is managed by the Electronic Engine Control
(EEC) to control the engine fuel flow and temperature, and to keep the
engine within its operating limits. The EEC uses various sensors to
manage the engine fuel system. Refer to Figure 18−05−1.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

POWER PLANT
O Engine fuel system
T3 SENSOR
P2.5 / T2.5
PROBE
ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROL (EEC)
P2 / T2 PROBE
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR (IN THE IFPC)
Engine fuel control system

Figure 18−05−1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine fuel system
O
The burner pressure sensor is used by the EEC for fuel scheduling,
surge recovery, stall detection, and fuel topping. The fuel temperature
sensor is used to monitor fuel temperature and is located in the
Integrated Fuel Pump and Control (IFPC).
B. Fuel distribution system

The fuel distribution system supplies metered fuel to the nozzles and
engine actuators at the necessary pressure (refer to
Figure 18−05−2). It is controlled by the EEC and has the
• Integrated Fuel Pump Control (IFPC),
• Fuel/Oil Heat Exchanger (FOHE),
• Fuel filter,
• Fuel manifolds and fuel nozzles,
• Compressor variable stator vane system, and
• Bleed valves and Active Clearance Control (ACC) valve.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

POWER PLANT
MOTIVE FLOW
COLLECTOR TANK
FUEL ACTIVATED
ACTUATORS AND
VALVES
Fuel distribution system (simplified)

Figure 18−05−2
C. Integrated Fuel Pump Control (IFPC)

The Integrated Fuel Pump and Control (IFPC) (refer to
Figure 18−05−3) is driven by the engine Main Gearbox (MGB).
The IFPC includes a two-stage pump and a fuel control unit. The first
stage supplies fuel to the engine fuel distribution system components
that follow:
• Fuel nozzles,
• FOHE,
• Fuel filter, and
• Fuel activated actuators and valves.
The second stage supplies motive fuel flow to the ejector pump.
The IFPC is also designed to:
• Shut off the fuel flow if there is an engine malfunction or fire,
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine fuel system
O
• Help with engine oil cooling through the FOHE, and

• Supply fuel pressure to operate the HPC and LPC variable stator
vanes and LPC bleed actuators.
The IFPC temperature sensor and the flow meter send their data to the
EEC for control and monitoring, and for display on the EICAS page.
INTEGRATED FUEL PUMP

AND CONTROL (IFPC)
Integrated Fuel Pump and Control (IFPC)

Figure 18−05−3
D. Fuel/Oil Heat Exchanger (FOHE)

The Fuel/Oil Heat Exchanger (FOHE) heats the fuel to prevent ice
formation (refer to Figure 18−05−4). The quantity of oil that flows
through the FOHE to heat the fuel is controlled by the EEC and depends
on the fuel temperature.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

POWER PLANT
ENGINE FUEL/OIL
BYPASS VALVE HEAT EXCHANGER
Fuel/Oil Heat Exchanger (FOHE)

Figure 18−05−4
E. Fuel filter
The fuel filter removes solid contaminants from the pressurized fuel that
flows out of the IFPC (refer to Figure 18−05−5). The filter has a
pressure differential switch to detect filter clogging. When the fuel filter is
clogged, the fuel flows through the bypass valve and the caution
message L/R ENG FUEL FILTER is displayed on the EICAS page.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine fuel system
O
FUEL FILTER
Fuel filter
Figure 18−05−5
F. Fuel manifold and fuel nozzles

The fuel manifold goes from the collector tank to the IFPC and then to
the fuel nozzles (refer to Figure 18−05−6). The fuel nozzles inject
the atomized fuel inside the combustor and consist of duplex and simplex
nozzles. The simplex nozzles supply the secondary fuel flow (for idle)
and the duplex nozzles supply the primary and secondary fuel flow.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

POWER PLANT
FUEL NOZZLE
MANIFOLDS
FUEL NOZZLES
PRIMARY SECONDARY SECONDARY
FLOW FLOW FLOW
COMBUSTOR DUPLEX NOZZLE SIMPLEX NOZZLE
Fuel manifold and nozzles

Figure 18−05−6
G. Compressor variable stator vane system

The compressor variable stator vane system uses actuators to move the
Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) and the High Pressure Compressor
(HPC) stator vanes. The vanes adjust the direction of airflow for optimal
engine operation.
The actuators are moved by fuel pressure and commanded by the
Electronic Engine Control (EEC), using schedules based on their
respective engine N1 and N2 speeds.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine fuel system
O
HPC VARIABLE STATOR VANE SYSTEM
LPC VARIABLE STATOR VANE SYSTEM
Compressor variable stator vane system

Figure 18−05−7
H. Bleed valves and Active Clearance Control (ACC) valve

The LPC bleed valves and ACC valves are actuated by fuel pressure and
are controlled by the EEC (refer to Figure 18−05−8).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

POWER PLANT
ACC VALVE
LPC BLEED VALVE
Bleed valves and Active Clearance Control (ACC) valve

Figure 18−05−8
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine ignition system
O
ENGINE IGNITION SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The ignition system is for start, relight, and flameout protection. It is
controlled by the Electronic Engine Control (EEC) and consists of:
• One exciter box,
• Two ignition cables, and
• Two igniters.
Figure 18−06−1 shows the ignition system on the engine.
IGNITERS
EXCITER BOX
IGNITION CABLES
Ignition system
Figure 18−06−1
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine ignition system
ENGINE IGNITION SYSTEM – OPERATION

Each engine has two electrically-independent ignition systems (refer to
Figure 18−06−2). The exciter box converts low voltage into high
voltage to ignite the fuel/air mixture in the combustor.
The ignition system receives power from the DC ESS BUSES, and is
available during engine start, engine relight, or when environmental
conditions require continuous ignition.
Each EEC channel controls one igniter. During the first automatic start
attempt on-ground, the FADEC activates one igniter per engine. In
subsequent automatic start attempts, the FADEC will alternate the igniter
used in order to prolong ignitor life. During manual start attempts on-ground,
the CONT IGNITION switch is selected to ON. During manual or automatic
start attempts or in-flight, the EEC activates both igniters.
HIGH TENSION
IGNITER LEADS
CHANNEL A
IGNITER A
IGNITER B
CHANNEL B
Ignition system operation

Figure 18−06−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
A. Continuous ignition
The continuous ignition system is activated automatically by the FADEC
or manually by the flight crew.
The conditions that activate the continuous ignition system automatically
are as follows:
• A second start attempt is required by the automatic start,
• During takeoff and landing phase, based on the Flight Management
System (FMS) information,
• Cowl Anti-Ice System (CAIS) is turned on by automatic mode or
manual mode,
• With the L ENG or R ENG run switch at ON and airspeed greater
than 60 kt, engine flameout is detected within 2 seconds by the
FADEC engine flameout protection logic, or
• Surge is detected in−flight or during takeoff.
The selection of the CONT IGNITION switch on the ENGINE panel (refer
to Figure 18−06−3) manually activates the continuous ignition
system. When the switch is pressed:
• A signal is sent to the EEC to activate the continuous ignition,
• The ON label on the switch illuminates white,
• The ENG CONT IGNITION ON status message is displayed on the
EICAS page, and
• A green IGN flag is displayed under each Exhaust Gas Temperature
(EGT) indication on the EICAS page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
Engine panel − CONT IGNITION (Continuous Ignition) switch ON

Figure 18−06−3
B. Dual ignition
Normally, the EEC alternates control channels after each subsequent
start. The EEC automatically commands both igniter plugs to fire for the
conditions that follow:
• Cowl anti-ice is selected,
• An engine flameout is detected,
• An in-flight start is attempted, or
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
• During takeoff, or if an in-flight surge is detected.

The FADEC automatic relight system energizes both igniters within 2
seconds of an engine flameout detection when the respective L ENG or
R ENG switch is in the ON position and airspeed is greater than 60 kt.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine oil system
O
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The engine oil system cools, cleans, and lubricates the:
• Engine bearing compartments,
• Fan Drive Gear System (FDGS),
• Main Gearbox (MGB), and
• Angle Gearbox (AGB).
The oil system consists of:
• An oil tank,
• A lubrication and scavenge pump,
• An Oil Control Module (OCM),
• An Air/Oil Heat Exchanger (AOHE),
• A Fuel/Oil Heat Exchanger (FOHE), and
• An Oil/Oil Heat Exchanger (OOHE).
NOTE
The fan has a dedicated fan oil pump that isolates itself
in certain conditions.
ENGINE OIL SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Operation
Oil flows from the oil tank to the lubrication pump, where it is pressurized.
Then it passes through the Oil Control Module (OCM) where it is filtered
before being directed to the heat exchangers, and then through oil
strainers, engine bearings, and gearboxes. The scavenge oil is returned
to the tank by the scavenge side of the pump. Oil temperature, oil
pressure, oil filtering, and debris monitoring functions are accomplished
by the OCM.
A breather system releases the air/oil vapors from the system.
Figure 18−07−1 shows the oil distribution system.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine oil system
LUBE PUMP
BY−PASS
VALVE SCAVENGE
PUMPS
Oil suction.
Lubrication oil.
Scavenge oil.
Oil distribution system

Figure 18−07−1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine oil system
O
B. Oil tank
The oil tank is mounted on the right side of the engine and is accessible
through an access panel. It has an oil level sensor, located in the tank,
that transmits oil quantity to the STATUS synoptic page, and an oil level
sight gauge, that allows a visual inspection.
The tank has a fill-to-spill quantity of 24.4 liters of oil and is
pressurized. <Metric>
When low oil level is detected, a L/R ENG OIL LO QTY advisory
Figure 18−07−2).
Figure 18−07−3 shows the engine oil indications legend.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine oil system
OIL LEVEL
SIGHT GAGE
OIL TANK
ENGINE
115 OIL TEMP ( C) 115
10.4 OIL QTY (QTS) 10.4
APU
TIRE PRESSURE (PSI)
160 160
160 160 160 160
BRAKE
03 09 TEMP 16
WEAR
Oil tank
Figure 18−07−2
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine oil system
O
OIL TEMPERATURE (OIL TEMP in grey)
WHITE Oil temperature normal range
YELLOW Oil temperature above high oil temperature yellow line

threshold.
RED Oil temperature above high oil temperature red line threshold
YELLOW Oil temperature below oil temperature threshold

DASHED
OIL PRESSURE (OIL PRESS in grey)
WHITE Oil press normal range
YELLOW Oil press above high oil press threshold
RED Oil press below low oil press threshold
YELLOW
Oil press invalid
DASHED
OIL QUANTITY (OIL QTY in grey)
WHITE Normal
YELLOW Below threshold
YELLOW Invalid
DASHED
EICAS page and STATUS synoptic page − Engine oil indication legend
Figure 18−07−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine oil system
C. Lubrication and scavenge pump

The oil system of each engine has one lubrication and scavenge oil
pump with seven stages. Six stages remove scavenge oil and the
seventh pressurizes. Oil from the tank is sent to the Oil Control Module
(OCM) and to the components that follow (refer to
Figure 18−07−4):
• The main engine bearings,
• The Fan Drive Gear System (FDGS),
• The Main Gearbox (MGB), and
• The Angle Gearbox (AGB).
The oil pump scavenge stages send the scavenged oil to the oil tank
(refer to Figure 18−07−5). The return lines have magnetic chip
detectors that provide indication of metallic particles in the oil.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine oil system
O
MGB DEOILER Overboard

LEGEND Breather
Check valve OIL TANK
Last chance strainer GEARBOX

BREATHER
MOT
Main oil filter
OCM
ODM
Chip detector
Control valve
VORV Variable Oil
Reduction Valve LUBE AND SCAVENGE PUMP
JOSV Journal Oil
Shutoff Valve
MGB AGB
MAIN ENGINE
Fan OCM
Air BEARINGS
To Oil Tank
VORV 1,1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
FDGS/
JOURNAL VORV/
JOSV OCM
BEARINGS
AIR/OIL FUEL/OIL
HEAT BYPASS VALVE
EXCHANGER
AUX FAN OIL
To From TANK PUMP
Main FUEL/OIL Boost
Pump HEAT EXCHANGER Pump
Fan Air
Overboard
OIL/OIL
To VFG HEAT EXCHANGER From VFG Sump
Normal and auxiliary oil supply

Figure 18−07−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine oil system
LUBRICATION AND
SCAVENGE
OIL PUMP
Main gearbox − Lubrication and scavenge oil pump

Figure 18−07−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine oil system
O
D. Oil Control Module (OCM) and oil debris monitoring function

The Oil Control Module (OCM) (refer to Figure 18−07−6) filters the
oil, senses the oil pressure and temperature, monitors debris, and sends
the oil to the engine bearings, Fan Drive Gear System (FDGS), Main
Gearbox (MGB), Angle Gearbox (AGB), and to the heat exchangers. It
contains:
• An oil filter,
• A pressure sensor,
• A temperature sensor, and
• An oil debris sensor.
When the debris count exceeds a certain threshold, an advisory
message L/R ENGINE FAULT displays on the EICAS page.
OIL DEBRIS EXCEEDANCE
Oil Control Module (OCM)

Figure 18−07−6
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine oil system
(1) Oil filter

The oil filter removes contamination from the pressurized oil. It
consists of a primary element, a secondary element, and a
differential pressure sensor. When the differential pressure of the
primary filter reaches a ΔP of 35 psi, an indication of an impending
bypass is given by a L/R ENGINE FAULT advisory message on the
EICAS page. When the differential pressure of the primary filter
element exceeds a ΔP of 55 psi, the oil goes to the secondary filter
element through the bypass valve and a L/R ENG OIL FILTER
caution message displays on the EICAS page.
Figure 18−07−7 shows an overview of the oil filtering system.
PRIMARY ELEMENT IN IMPENDING BYPASS
OIL DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE SENSOR
PRIMARY ELEMENT
OIL INLET
PRIMARY ELEMENT IN BYPASS

OIL OUTLET
BYPASS
VALVE
SECONDARY ELEMENT
Oil filter
Figure 18−07−7
(2) Oil pressure and temperature sensors
The pressure and temperature sensors measure and send data to
the EEC for monitoring and EICAS display.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine oil system
O
(3) Oil debris sensor

The oil debris sensor detects and sends debris count information to
the Prognostics and Health Monitoring Unit (PHMU) for processing.
When the debris count exceeds a specified threshold, the PHMU
reports the data to the EEC to generate a L/R ENGINE FAULT
advisory message.
E. Oil system heat exchangers

The engine oil system has three heat exchangers:
• A Fuel/Oil Heat Exchanger (FOHE),
• An Air/Oil Heat Exchanger (AOHE), and
• A Variable Frequency Generator (VFG) Oil/Oil Heat Exchanger
(OOHE).
(1) Fuel/Oil Heat Exchanger (FOHE)
The FOHE heats the engine fuel with the engine oil. A part of the oil
that flows from the OCM is routed to the FOHE, depending on the
fuel temperature. The amount of oil flowing into the FOHE is
controlled by the EEC through a bypass valve (refer to
Figure 18−07−8).
(2) Air/Oil Heat Exchanger (AOHE)
The AOHE cools the engine oil with the fan air. When the engine
fuel temperature is higher than a specified value, heat transfer to
the fuel is unnecessary. The EEC will then increase the oil flow
through the AOHE and decrease the oil flow to the FOHE. The unit
has a bypass valve that opens when the AOHE is clogged (refer to
Figure 18−07−9).
(3) Variable Frequency Generator (VFG) Oil/Oil Heat Exchanger
(OOHE)
The oil from the AOHE goes to the VFG oil/oil heat exchanger to
cool the VFG oil (refer to Figure 18−07−10).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine oil system
BYPASS ENGINE FUEL/OIL

VALVE HEAT EXCHANGER
Fuel/Oil Heat Exchange (FOHE)

Figure 18−07−8
AIR/OIL HEAT
EXCHANGER
Air/Oil Heat Exchanger (AOHE)

Figure 18−07−9
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine oil system
O
VFG OIL/OIL HEAT

EXCHANGER
VFG Oil/Oil Heat Exchanger (OOHE)

Figure 18−07−10
F. Breather system
The pressurized oil vapors from the bearing compartments, Angle
Gearbox (AGB), Main Gearbox (MGB), and the oil tank are released by
the breather system. It consists of external tubes connected to a deoiler
located in the MGB. The deoiler separates oil droplets from air and
discharges the air overboard.
Figure 18−07−11 shows an overview of the breather system.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine oil system
BEARING
OIL TANK
COMPARTMENTS
ANGLE GEARBOX (AGB)
MGB AIR/OIL
VAPORS DEOILER
AIR DISCHARGED
OVERBOARD
Breather system
Figure 18−07−11
G. Auxiliary distribution system

The auxiliary distribution system lubricates the Fan Drive Gear System
(FDGS) bearings and protects it from events that could cause oil supply
loss. It consists of:
• One auxiliary oil tank,
• One fan-driven oil pump, and
• One gravity valve.
The system has two FDGS journal bearing oil supply modes. During
normal conditions, oil flows back to the oil tank before returning to the
FDGS. During low power, windmilling, or low G events, oil is directed
straight back to the FDGS.
Figure 18−07−12 shows the location of the gravity valve and an
overview of the auxiliary distribution system.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine oil system
O
OIL TANK
OIL CONTROL MODULE

FDGS/JOURNAL (OCM)/JOURNAL OIL
BEARINGS SHUTTLE VALVE (JOSV)
AUXILIARY FAN−DRIVEN
TANK PUMP
GRAVITY
VALVE
FRONT BEARING COMPARTMENT OIL SUMP
Auxiliary distribution system

Figure 18−07−12
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine oil system
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Engine bleed air system
O
ENGINE BLEED AIR SYSTEM – OVERVIEW

The engine bleed air system functions are:
• Engine airflow control,
• Engine parts cooling,
• Ingested debris removal, and
• Environmental control (refer to Chapter 02: Air-conditioning, bleed air,
pressurization.
Engine airflow control removes the excess air and optimizes the airflow to
improve engine stability during start, transient, and reverse thrust operation.
Engine compartments are cooled to increase durability and performance.
Ingested debris is removed from the Low Pressure Compressor (LPC) to
prevent it from reaching the High Pressure Compressor (HPC). The engine
bleed air system components consist of:
• Compressor bleed air system,
• Compressor variable stator vane system,
• Turbine cooling air system,
• Buffer air system (bearing cooling and seal pressurization system), and
• Turbine case Active Clearance Control (ACC) system.
Figure 18−08−1 shows an overview of the engine bleed air system.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Engine bleed air system
COMPRESSOR BLEED AIR SYSTEM

ENGINE AIRFLOW
LPC AND HPC VARIABLE STATOR VANES
CONTROL SYSTEM
PROTECTION AGAINST INGESTED DEBRIS
ENGINE BLEED
AIR SYSTEM
TURBINE ACTIVE CLEARANCE SYSTEM
TURBINE COOLING AIR SYSTEM

ENGINE INTERNAL PARTS
COOLING SYSTEM BEARING COOLING
BEARING COMPARTMENT SEAL

PRESSURIZATION
Engine bleed air system overview

Figure 18−08−1
ENGINE BLEED AIR SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. Compressor bleed air system
The compressor bleed air system removes excess air from the Low
Pressure Compressor (LPC) and High Pressure Compressor (HPC) to
prevent compressor stalls. This improves engine durability and stability.
The system is controlled and monitored by the Electronic Engine Control
(EEC). The main components are:
• The LPC bleed valve,
• The HPC bleed valve, and
• The Cowl Anti-Ice Valve (CAIV).
The LPC bleed valve (ring) removes excess air from the LPC for
compressor stability. The valve is moved by a fuel-actuated actuator,
which is controlled by the EEC based on several engine parameters.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
Figure 18−08−2 shows the location of the components of the

compressor bleed air system.
LPC BLEED VALVE (RING)
HPC BLEED SYSTEM

2.5 BLEED ACTUATOR
ANTI−ICE VALVES
LPC Compressor bleed air system

Figure 18−08−2
The HPC bleed valve is a passive valve that operates in conjunction with
the CAIV during start to expel air from the HPC. It is monitored, but not
controlled, by the EEC. When the engine is started, the EEC commands
the CAIV to open and the HPC (6th stage) air is vented overboard
through the HPC bleed valve and the CAIV. The HPC bleed valve is
spring-loaded to the open position and closes when the air pressure is
high enough to overcome the spring force of the valve.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

POWER PLANT
Figure 18−08−3 shows the HPC bleed valve and the CAIV during
start.
ELECTRONIC ENGINE
CONTROL (EEC)
HPC BLEED VALVE

PRESSURE SENSOR
HPC BLEED
VALVE
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
6th STAGE BLEED AIR
COMMAND SIGNAL COWL ANTI−ICE

VALVE (CAIV)
TO INLET
COWL
HPC bleed valve and CAIV operation during start

Figure 18−08−3
To prevent icing of the nacelle inlet cowl, the EEC controls two CAIV that
regulate 6th stage bleed airflow. The valves are commanded open when
the aircraft anti-ice system senses icing conditions when the L/R COWL
switches on the ANTI-ICE panel are selected to AUTO, or when
manually selected from the flight deck. Two temperature sensors in the
fan cowl area monitor for CAI duct leaks.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
Bleed air is also used to extract rain and ice from the gas path during
flight operation, and to extract ingested debris during ground operations.
B. Compressor variable stator vane system

The compressor variable stator vane system controls the position of the
LPC and the HPC stator vanes to optimize airflow and to increase engine
performance during all phases of flight. The stator vanes are moved by
fuel-actuated actuators controlled by the EEC. The EEC control is based
on several engine parameters.
The table that follows describes the position of the LPC and HPC
variable stator vanes during start, idle, and takeoff.
Start Idle Takeoff

LPC variable stator vanes Open Closed Open
HPC variable stator vanes Closed Closed Open
C. Turbine air cooling system

The turbine air cooling system supplies continuous cooling air to the High
Pressure Turbine (HPT) 2nd stage stator vanes, the Turbine
Intermediate Case (TIC), the Low Pressure Turbine (LPT) case, and the
LPT rotor. The air for the HPT comes from the High Pressure
Compressor (HPC) 6th stage bleed air, while the rest comes from the
HPC 4th stage bleed air.
D. Buffer air system

The buffer air system cools the main bearing compartments, and
supplies sealing air to prevent oil leakage by taking air from the 4th or 6th
stage of the HPC. The main components of the system are:
• Buffer Air Valve (BAV),
• Buffer air heat exchanger, and
• Buffer air temperature sensor.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

POWER PLANT
E. Turbine Active Clearance Control (ACC) system

The turbine Active Clearance Control (ACC) system limits the thermal
expansion of the turbine case by using fan air to maintain the blade tip
clearance at a minimum, thus increasing turbine efficiency and reducing
fuel consumption. The main component of the system is the ACC valve.
The unit is a fuel-actuated valve controlled by the EEC based on the
engine parameters and altitude.
F. Precooler exit door opening system

The precooler exit door supplies pressure relief for the precooler exhaust
during high bleed demand. It is closed by the EEC based on aircraft
bleed demand. If the door fails open, or is commanded open, a L/R ENG
PCE DOOR OPEN advisory message is displayed on the EICAS page
and high temperature bleed air is dumped into the engine nacelle.
G. Bleed air engine start

When the ENGINE START switch is set to AUTO, and the L (R) ENG
switch is selected ON, the EEC senses that the HPC bleed valve is open.
The inlet CAIV is commanded open to evacuate HPC bleed air and
reduce load on the N2 for start.
After engine start, high-pressure air overcomes the HPC bleed valve
spring force, and the valve closes.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
Power plant − Controls and indications
O
ENGINE CONTROLS
A. Throttle Quadrant Assembly (TQA) and ENGINE panel
The Throttle Quadrant Assembly (TQA) (refer to Figure 18−09−1)
is located on the center pedestal and includes:
• Thrust levers,
• Thrust reverser levers,
• L ENG and R ENG run switches,
• A/T DISC switches, and
• TO/GA switches.
The thrust levers have stops at maximum (MAX) thrust, IDLE, and
maximum reverse (MAX REV) thrust.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
O Power plant − Controls and indications
THRUST THRUST
LEVER LEVER
AUTOTHROTTLE (A/T)
SWITCH
L ENG SWITCH R ENG SWITCH
CONT IGNITION ENGINE, START

SWITCH SWITCH
TOGA TOGA
SWITCH SWITCH
Throttle Quadrant Assembly (TQA) and ENGINE panel

Figure 18−09−1
(1) Thrust reverser levers
The thrust reverser system is actuated by raising the finger lifts on
the front of the thrust levers and drawing the thrust levers aft into
the reverse range. The landing maximum reverse and aborted
takeoff are available when the thrust levers are at the MAX REV
position. The maximum landing reverse thrust supports the landing
maneuver from thrust reverser deployment down to a speed of 60
kt.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
(2) L ENG and R ENG run switches

The switches have two positions:
• ON: With the START switch at AUTO, the ON position
commands the Electronic Engine Control (EEC) to initiate the
start sequence:
• The Starter Air Valve (SAV) opens,
• The igniters are energized, and
• Fuel is automatically injected at 18% to 20% N2.
When the N2 reaches approximately 51%, the EEC closes the SAV
and the igniters are de-energized.
• OFF: The engine cannot be started. But it can be cranked (no
fuel and no ignition) when the START switch is selected to L
ENG CRANK or R ENG CRANK.
(3) A/T DISC switches
When either of the switches are pressed, the Autothrottle (AT)
system disconnects and a flashing AT (in amber) displays on the
Flight Mode Annunciator (FMA) with an aural “AUTOTHROTTLE”
alert. Pushing the switch again cancels the alert.
(4) TOGA switches
When either of the switches is pressed, the Take Off or Go-Around
(TOGA) around mode is engaged. A TO (in green) or GA (in green)
annunciation displays on the FMA depending on the phase of flight.
B. ENGINE panel
The ENGINE panel (refer to Figure 18−09−2) is on the center
pedestal. It has three switches and two indicators:
• CONT IGNITION switch,
• L/R FIRE indicators,
• START switch, and
• PILOT EVENT switch.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
L/R FIRE INDICATORS
CONT IGNITION
SWITCH
START SWITCH PILOT EVENT SWITCH
Engine panel
Figure 18−09−2
(1) CONT IGNITION switch
When pressed in, the ON label on the switch illuminates white and
provides continuous ignition if the engines are running. If the
engines are not running, it provides a manual start request to the
EEC.
(2) L/R FIRE indicators
The indicators are illuminated red if fire is detected in the
corresponding engine.
(3) START switch
The switch has three positions:
• AUTO: When the switch is set to AUTO and the L/R ENG run
switches are selected ON, the EEC initiates the start sequence.
• L or R ENG CRANK: Allows dry cranking of the engine with L/R
ENG run switches set to OFF or begins engine cranking for a
manual start.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
(4) PILOT EVENT switch

When pressed in, the aircraft parameters recorded by the Flight
Data Recorder (FDR) are marked for maintenance investigation.
THRUST REVERSERS SYSTEM

The thrust reversers are translating-sleeve fixed-cascade type and have the
• Translating sleeves,
• Synchronized hydraulic actuators,
• Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU),
• Blocker doors,
• Thrust reverser cascades, and
• Manual drive.
The thrust reverser levers (refer to Figure 18−09−3) control their
respective thrust reversers.
Figure 18−09−4 shows the thrust reverser system components.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
THRUST REVERSER LEVER
Thrust reverser levers

Figure 18−09−3
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
BLOCKER
DOOR
THRUST REVERSER
TRANSLATING SLEEVE
THRUST REVERSER
CASCADE
HYDRAULIC THRUST REVERSER

ACTUATOR COWL BLOCKER
DOOR
Thrust reversers
Figure 18−09−4
A. Thrust reverser system – Operation

When deployed, the synchronized hydraulic actuators move the
translating sleeves aft, which causes the blocker doors to rotate. This
redirects the fan airflow through the cascades and provides reverse
thrust. The actuators have a locking mechanism, position feedback
sensors, and proximity switches for lock engagement status.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
B. Thrust reverser system – Baulk function

The baulk mechanism will provide the flight crew with a tactile feedback
to indicate thrust reverser state during deployment or stowage cycles.
The mechanism can be overridden when a significant amount of force is
applied to the thrust reverser levers.
During deployment, the baulk mechanism blocks the thrust levers in the
idle position until thrust reverser deployment is confirmed. After
deployment, the mechanism allows the thrust levers to enter in the
reverse thrust range.
During stowage, the baulk mechanism blocks the thrust levers in the
forward idle position until thrust reverser stowage is confirmed and
securely closed and locked.
C. Thrust reverser indications

The REV icon is displayed inside the analogue engine N1 indicator on
the EICAS page (refer to Figure 18−09−5). The color of the icon
denotes the conditions that follow:
• Green: The reverser is fully deployed,
• White: The reverser is translating between the stowed and deployed
position, or
• Amber: The reverser did not complete deployment or retraction
command.
The thrust reverser system displays the EICAS messages that follow:
• The caution messages:
• L REVERSER UNLOCK and R REVERSER UNLOCK: The
thrust reverser has not been commanded but is unlocked and/or
not stowed.
• L REVERSER FAIL and R REVERSER FAIL: The thrust
reverser has been commanded but failed or is unavailable.
• THROTTLE IN REVERSE: The left or right throttle lever has
been moved into the reverse thrust position on the Throttle
Quadrant Assembly (TQA) in flight.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
• The status messages:

• L REVERSER INHIBIT and R REVERSER INHIBIT: The thrust
reverser has been manually locked out through maintenance
action.
.
Thrust reversers deployment malfunctions

Figure 18−09−5
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
THRUST MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Thrust management system – Overview
The thrust management is monitored and controlled by the Electronic
Engine Control (EEC) and the Flight Management System (FMS). It is
available for all phases of flight and it consists of:
• Maximum Takeoff (MTO),
• Maximum Continuous Thrust (MCT),
• Derated takeoff thrust management,
• Reduced (FLEX) takeoff thrust management,
• Climb thrust management,
• Cruise thrust management,
• Idle thrust management, and
• Automatic Power Reserve (APR).
The EEC sets the maximum thrust available at the maximum thrust lever
position inside the takeoff envelope and outside the takeoff envelope.
The Maximum Takeoff (MTO) thrust is the maximum thrust available
inside the takeoff (and go-around) envelope. It is always available at
takeoff when the thrust levers are pushed to the MAX position. The
Maximum Continuous Thrust (MCT) is the maximum thrust available
outside the takeoff envelope and it is lower or equal to the MTO and
higher or equal to the climb thrust (CLB).
When the Autothrottle (AT) system is engaged, the thrust lever is
adjusted automatically to the position corresponding to the selected climb
rating.
The thrust mode changes, from Takeoff (TO) to MCT or CLB to MCT, are
commanded by the EEC in accordance with the active flight plan.
The EEC resets engine redline limits from TO to MCT after 5 minutes at
TO for All Engines Operating (AEO) or after 10 minutes at TO for an One
Engine Inoperative (OEI), or Opposite Engine Low−Thrust (OELT) event.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
Once MCT redline limites are set by the EEC, and if go−around mode is
activated, the redline limit increases from MCT to MTO for 5 minutes in
AEO, or for 10 minutes for an OEI or OELT event.
B. Thrust Limitation at Low Speed (TLLS)

Thrust Limitation at Low Speed (TLLS) ensures that the nose landing
gear is sufficiently loaded during the takeoff phase. The FADEC limits the
thrust of the engines to about 60% of the takeoff power. As the aircraft
accelerates in the takeoff run, thrust increases with airspeed and reaches
full power at 80 kt.
The limits is indicated by a light gray sector on the N1 indications on the
EICAS page. TLLS is disabled when the parking brake is set to allow full
power run−ups. Refer to Figure 18−09−6.
TLLS SECTOR
EICAS synoptic page − Engine section − TLLS indication

Figure 18−09−6
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
C. Derated takeoff thrust management

The derated takeoff thrust (refer to Figure 18−09−7) increases
engine life and fuel economy. Derated takeoff thrust is selected through
different ratings (TO, TO-1, TO-2, or TO-3) in the Flight Management
System (FMS) PERF (Performance) page on the DEP (Departure) tab
(refer to Figure 18−09−8). The selected mode is displayed at the
top of the engine indications on the EICAS page.
The derated takeoff can be used in conjunction with reduced takeoff
thrust (FLEX) and Automatic Power Reserve (APR). Derated takeoff can
be conducted on contaminated runways.
Figure 18−09−9 shows the derated takeoff thrust entry on the FMS
and on the EICAS page.
Takeoff thrust management − Derated takeoff

Figure 18−09−7
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
FMS managed thrust reference value.

Manually entered thrust reference value.
First line displays the thrust mode.
Second line displays the assumed
temperature for FLEX XXºC and the
digital thrust. Both symbols are always
displayed together.
The modes are displayed in:

Magenta in AUTO (FMS managed) or
Cyan in Manual (pilot entered).
Thrust management display

Figure 18−09−8
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
Derated takeoff entry

Figure 18−09−9
D. Reduced takeoff thrust (FLEX)

The FMS uses the assumed temperature method to calculate the
reduced takeoff thrust (FLEX). The flight crew enters an assumed
temperature in the FLEX box of the DEP (Departure) tab in the PERF
(Performance) page of the FMS (refer to Figure 18−09−10). The
assumed temperature has to be higher than the actual ambient
temperature. If it is lower than the actual ambient temperature, the FLEX
mode will be deactivated. The FLEX can be used with any takeoff thrust
level (TO, TO-1, TO-2, or TO-3). The total thrust reduction between
derate and FLEX is limited to 40% of Maximum Takeoff (MTO) thrust.
FLEX takeoff is allowed on wet runways if performance data is available,
but prohibited on contaminated runways, in the presence of windshear or
thunderstorm activity.
The table that follows shows the thrust limitations for takeoff based on
the engine type and the selected takeoff mode.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
PW1521G-3 <72211001D>
TO mode TO thrust (lbf) Max FLEX (% of TO) Max FLEX (lbf)

MTO 21000 33 13980
TO-1 18900 26 13980
TO-2 17000 18 13980
TO-3 N/A N/A N/A
Takeoff thrust management − Flex takeoff

Figure 18−09−10
E. Climb thrust management

The climb thrust management is used to increase engine life. There are
four options for the derated takeoff and for each of these the flight crew
can select one of three climb derates:
• CLB (maximum climb thrust),
• CLB−1 (first level derated climb thrust), and
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

POWER PLANT
• CLB−2 (second level derated climb thrust).

The climb thrust rating is selected on the DEP (Departure) tab in the
PERF (Performance) page of the FMS.
The FMS calculates the N1 speed reference based on the aircraft
configuration, takeoff thrust mode (TO, derate, or FLEX), and Outside Air
Temperature (OAT). This speed displays on the top of the engine
indications of the EICAS page.
If derated climb thrust is selected, a washout function (change over
altitude) is implemented in order to recover maximum climb ceiling
capability and optimal initial cruise altitude.
The washout function automatically and gradually increases the selected
derated climb thrust (CLB-1 or CLB-2) to full CLB thrust by an altitude
determined by the EEC.
Figure 18−09−11 shows the climb thrust management selection and
indication.
Climb thrust management

Figure 18−09−11
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
F. Cruise thrust management

When in cruise, the N1 reference (CLB) is still displayed above the N1
indications on the EICAS page. The white line gives the engine N1 limits
(usually hidden by the N1 needle). The Thrust Reference Value (TRV)
magenta arrows are suppressed, as the autothrottle is active in SPD
mode. Refer to Figure 18−09−12.
CRZ FL 300
Cruise (Climb) engine Limit

Figure 18−09−12
G. Idle thrust management

The idle thrust management is governed by the EEC. Idle RPM is
dependent upon five different idle settings based on engine stability,
bleed demand, and phase of flight:
• Minimum idle (ground and flight idle),
• Approach idle,
• Steep approach idle, and
• Reverse idle.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
(1) Minimum idle (ground and flight idle)

The minimum idle on ground provides an engine speed that
reduces the landing distance, brake wear, and landing gear wear
during taxi.
The minimum idle in flight minimizes the fuel consumption when the
flaps and landing gear are retracted. The flight idle N1 speed
increases with altitude.
(2) Approach idle
The approach idle is intended to reduce spool-up time from idle to
go-around thrust. It is selected in-flight with the selection of Flap 1
or when the landing gear is down.
Approach idle thrust is higher than minimum idle, and enables more
rapid engine acceleration from idle to Go−Around (GA) thrust.
(3) Steep approach idle
The steep approach idle has to be lower than the normal approach
idle while the air extraction from the engines is activated. It is lower
than the normal approach idle, but will still allow the engines to
achieve at least 80% of go-around thrust within 8 seconds of
go-around thrust request. The steep approach mode is activated
when:
• Steep approach mode selected in the FMS,
• Approach mode is engaged in the flight guidance system, and
• No windshear has been detected.
If these conditions are not met, the steep approach is disabled.
(4) Reverse idle
The reverse idle supports ground operation with the thrust
reversers deployed. It is available with the thrust levers in the REV
IDLE position.
When REV IDLE is automatically commanded, the landing
maximum reverse thrust setting supports the landing maneuver
from Thrust Reversers deployment down to a speed at 60 kt.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
H. Automatic Power Reserve (APR)

The APR function provides automatic, additional thrust when an
Opposite Engine Low Thrust (OELT) condition exists during takeoff.
When an OELT condition occurs, the FADEC will increase the N1 speed
to the next level TO thrust. This function is automatically armed only
during a derated takeoff or when FLEX takeoff power is selected. The
APR can also be armed, or disarmed, manually by the flight crew before
departure. This is done on the FMS PERF (Performance) page by
selecting or deselecting the APR ARM checkbox on the DEP (Departure)
tab.
When activated due to an OELT condition, the APR flag displays in
green on the EICAS page below the N1 indication and a green cursor
displays in the analog N1.
When disarmed in the FMS, the status message APR DISARM displays
on the EICAS page.
Figure 18−09−13 shows the APR function selected on the FMS and
the indication on the EICAS page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 012, Jul 26/2019

POWER PLANT
GREEN
CURSOR
Automatic Power Reserve (APR)

Figure 18−09−13
(1) APR activation
When the APR is armed, the activation occurs under the conditions
that follow:
• When an engine N1 is 15% lower than the opposite engine,
• A derate or derate/FLEX thrust combination is selected, and
• Thrust lever angle is higher than 20 degrees.
If both engines are operating at a lower thrust due to failures, and
within 15% of each other, the APR function deactivates. This is
because the EEC is already commanding the maximum fuel flow to
recover engine thrust level.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
(2) APR deactivation

The EEC deactivates the APR function when the aircraft is higher
than 400 feet radio altitude and when any of the conditions that
follow are met:
• APR status is set to DISARMED in the FMS.
• A successful in-flight engine relight, or
• When thrust is selected to another thrust mode.
After deactivation, the EEC returns to the nominal thrust.
ENGINE INDICATIONS
A. EICAS page – Primary and secondary parameter indications
The engine parameters, (refer to Figure 18−09−14) are displayed in
the engine indications section of the EICAS page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
Engine Parameter Indications

Figure 18−09−14
The engine indications are divided into primary and secondary parameter
indications.
(1) Primary parameter indications
• Thrust mode,
• FLEX mode with the assumed temperature (°C),
• N1 (%) reference speed (digital in magenta or cyan),
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
• Thrust reference value bug (magenta set via FMS, cyan set
manually),
• N1 (%) actual speed (digital and analog), and
• Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT °C) (digital and analog).
(2) Secondary parameter indications
• N2 actual (%) speed and analog dial display,
• Fuel Flow (FF) (Pounds Per Hour (PPH) or Kilograms Per Hour
(KPH)),
• Oil temperature (OIL TEMP °C),
• Oil pressure (OIL PRESS) (psi),
• N1 and N2 vibration, and
• Fan vibration (FAN VIB).
(3) N1 indication
The N1 speed is provided by a dual-channel probe that sends data
to the Electronic Engine Control (EEC), which converts it for EICAS
display to analog and digital format. The N1 overspeed limit is
shown by a red line. When the red line is exceeded:
• The analog and digital displays change to red,
• The master WARNING/CAUTION light illuminates, and
• Single chime sounds.
Figure 18−09−15 describes the N1 display on the EICAS
page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
RED LINE LIMIT

2 N1 REFERENCE
SPEED (FMS)
1 N1 REFERENCE SPEED
N1 SPEED THRUST COMMAND

PROBE CURSOR 3 N1 ACTUAL SPEED
XX.X White N1 speed in the normal range.
XX.X or XXX Red N1 above red line limit. The decimal

is removed once the N1 is over 99.9.
___ Amber, dashed Invalid signal.
1. Without flex or max climb when in climb phase.

2. Calculated by the FMS (magenta).
3. When the red line is reached, the digital value and analog value change to red.
N1 analog and digital display

Figure 18−09−15
(4) N1 synchronization
The N1 synchronization is an automatic function controlled by the
EEC. It synchronizes the speed of the engines to minimize
harmonic noise in the aircraft. The function uses the left engine
speed as the master (reference) and the right engine speed as the
slave. The synchronization is accomplished by fuel trimming on the
slave engine.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
The N1 synchronization operates in cruise and is indicated by a

green SYNC indication below the N1 indication on the EICAS page.
(5) Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) indication
The Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) is measured by
thermocouple probes installed around the exhaust case. The data
is sent to the EEC, which processes it and sends it for display on
the EICAS page in analog and digital format (in °C). The
established EGT threshold values are shown by an amber line and
a red line. The amber line is the EGT limit during start and it is
shown during the start sequence. The red line is a variable limit that
indicates either the Max Takeoff (MTO) thrust EGT limit or the Max
Continuous Thrust (MCT) EGT limit and is modified by the EEC,
depending on the current flight thrust mode (e.g. TO−1, CLB, CRZ).
Figure 18−09−16 describes the EGT display and the start limit.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
EGT RED EGT DIGITAL VALUE

LINE LIMIT
EGT YELLOW
888
LINE LIMIT xxxx xxxx xxxx
XXXX White EGT in the normal range.
XXXX Red EGT above red line limit.
XXXX Amber EGT above yellow line limit.
−−−− Amber, dashed Invalid signal.
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) digital and analog display

Figure 18−09−16
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
(6) N2 indication
The N2 speed indications are provided by a dual-channel probe
powered by the Permanent Magnet Alternator Generator (PMAG).
The sensor signal is sent to the EEC, which processes it and
displays it on the EICAS page in digital format (%). The EEC also
uses the N2 data for starting, overspeed monitoring, shaft shear
detection, and for other functions.
Figure 18−09−17 describes the N2 indications.
XX.X White N1 speed in the normal range.

XX.X or XXX Red N2 speed above threshold.
___ Yellow, dashed Invalid.
N2 indication
Figure 18−09−17
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
(7) Fuel Flow (FF) indication

The fuel flow is sensed by the flow meter. The signal from the flow
meter is sent to the EEC for processing and is displayed on the
EICAS page in Pounds Per Hour (PPH) or in Kilograms Per Hour
(KPH).
Figure 18−09−18 describes the fuel flow indications.
FUEL FLOW
TRANSMITTER
INTEGRATED
FUEL PUMP
CONTROL
(IFPC)
XXXX White Fuel Flow (FF) in the normal range.
XXXX Amber Fuel Flow (FF) below threshold or

above threshold.
Fuel Flow (FF) indication

Figure 18−09−18
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
(8) Oil temperature (OIL TEMP) indication

The scavenge oil temperature is measured by a sensor located in
the Oil Control Module (OCM). The temperature signal is sent to the
EEC for processing and oil monitoring, and then to the EICAS page
for display in degrees Celsius (°C).
Figure 18−09−19 describes the oil temperature indications.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
OIL TEMPERATURE
PROBE
XXXX White Oil temperature in the normal range.
XXXX Amber Oil temperature above high amber limit.
XXXX Red Oil temperature above high red limit.
XXXX Amber Oil temperature below low amber limit.
Oil temperature indication

Figure 18−09−19
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
(9) Oil pressure (OIL PRESS) indication

The oil pressure is measured by a sensor in the OCM. The
pressure signal is sent to the EEC for processing and then to the
EICAS page for display in Pounds per Square Inch (PSI).
Figure 18−09−20 describes the oil pressure indications.
OIL PRESSURE
SENSOR
XXX White Oil pressure in the normal range.
XXXX Amber Oil pressure above high limit.
XXXX Red Oil pressure below low limit.
Oil pressure indication

Figure 18−09−20
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
(10) N1, N2 and fan vibration (FAN VIB) indications

The vibrations of N1, N2, and the fan are measured by sensors
(accelerometers). They provide vibration data to the Prognostics
and Health Management Unit (PHMU) and to the EEC for display
on the EICAS page.
When the N1 or N2 vibration exceeds the limit, the caution
message ENG VIBRATION shows on the EICAS page with an
amber VIB flag on the affected engine N1 or N2 indication. Refer to
Figure 18−09−21
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
FORWARD
VIBRATION
SENSOR
N1, N2 and vibration indications (VIB)

Figure 18−09−21
The fan vibration (FAN VIB) appears below the OIL PRESS
indication on the EICAS page (refer to Figure 18−09−22). The
vibration value is always displayed. When it exceeds the limit, the
value changes to amber and the caution message ENG
VIBRATION shows on the EICAS page. If both vibration monitors
fail on one side, the FAN VIB digital is replaced by a dashed line,
and an L ENGINE FAULT or R ENGINE FAULT EICAS advisory
messages are displayed.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
EICAS ADVISORY MESSAGES
Engine vibration indications

Figure 18−09−22
B. Status and flag indications

Figure 18−09−23 shows the location of the status and flag
indications on the EICAS page.
Figure 18−09−24 shows the status indications with a description.
Figure 18−09−25 shows the flag indications with a description.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
Status and flag indications

Figure 18−09−23
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
Red and white Left or right engine fire indication.
Green Left or right engine in start sequence.
Green Left or right engine automatic relight.
Left or right engine below idle and

Cyan aircraft within the air turbine start
envelope.
Cyan Engine below idle and aircraft within

windmill envelope.
Green Engine synchronization is active.
Status descriptions
Figure 18−09−24
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O
Green On ground: Thrust reverser in transition.
White On ground: Thrust reverser is deployed.
On ground: Thrust reverser is not

Amber
performing the commanded action.
Automatic Power Reserve (APR)
Green
is active.
Green Cowl Anti−Ice System (CAIS) is on.
White CAIS armed.
Amber CAIS is failed.
Green Wing Anti−Ice System (WAIS) is on.
White WAIS is armed.
Amber WAIS is failed with caution type or

overheat.
Red WAIS is failed with warning condition.
Green Ignition is active.
Ignition selected but inhibited due to

White
design constraints.
Flight Management System (FMS)
Magenta
managed thrust reference value.
Manually entered thrust reference
Cyan
value.
Amber N1 vibration above high vibration

threshold.
N2 vibration above high vibration
Amber threshold.
Flag descriptions
Figure 18−09−25
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT
POWER PLANT – EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages

DUAL ENG FAIL Dual engine failure. None None
L ENG OIL PRESS Left engine oil press below or None TO, LDG
above normal range.
R ENG OIL PRESS Right engine oil pressure None TO, LDG
below or above normal
range.
B. Caution messages

L COWL A/ICE FAIL Left cowl anti−ice system failed (valves TO, LDG
closed). This message is inhibited when
the EICAS caution message L ENG
OPER DEGRADED is displayed.
R COWL A/ICE FAIL Right cowl anti−ice system failed (valves TO, LDG
closed). This message is inhibited when
the EICAS caution message R ENG
OPER DEGRADED is displayed.
L COWL A/ICE FAIL Left cowl anti−ice system failed (valves TO, LDG
ON open). This message is inhibited when
the EICAS caution message L ENG
NACELLE OVHT is displayed.
R COWL A/ICE FAIL Right cowl anti−ice system failed (valves TO, LDG
ON open). This message is inhibited when
the EICAS message R ENG NACELLE
OVHT is displayed.
COWL A/ICE ON Left or right cowl A/ICE manually TO, LDG
selected ON while the OAT is above
approximately 15 °C.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O

ENG OIL LO TEMP Either engine oil too cold to allow a high TO, LDG
thrust being set.
ENG SETTING Thrust management data received/fed TO, LDG
MISMATCH back by FADEC not matching (APR
setting, N1 target, etc.).
ENG VIBRATION Left or right engine vibration (either fan, TO, LDG
N1 or N2).
L ENG EXCEED- Left N1 or left N2 or left ITT or left oil TO
ANCE temperature above threshold.
R ENG EXCEED- Right N1 or right N2 or right ITT or right TO
ANCE Oil temperature above threshold.
L ENG FAIL Left engine sub-idle. None
R ENG FAIL Right engine sub-idle. None
L ENG NACELLE Left burst cowl anti-ice duct or left HPC TO, LDG
OVHT valve failed open or buffer air shutoff
valve failed open.
R ENG NACELLE Right burst cowl anti-ice duct or right TO, LDG
OVHT HPC valve failed open or buffer air shut-
off valve failed open.
L-R ENG FUEL Both engine fuel filters are bypassed TO, LDG
FILTER (clogged filters). Likely fuel
contamination.
L ENG OIL FILTER Left engine oil filter is bypassed (clogged TO, LDG
filter).
R ENG OIL FILTER Right engine oil filter is bypassed TO, LDG
(clogged filter).
L ENG OPER Uncertainty on T2/Total Air Temperature TO
DEGRADED (TAT) (degraded or default value), or
HPC stator vane actuator not tracking as
it should.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT

R ENG OPER Uncertainty on T2/Total Air Temperature TO
DEGRADED (TAT) (degraded or default value), or
HPC stator vane actuator not tracking as
it should.
L ENG START Left engine starting procedure has None
ABORT aborted.
R ENG START Right engine starting procedure has None
ABORT aborted.
L ENG STARTER Air Turbine Starter (ATS) is not TO, LDG
FAIL ON disengaging or the left Starter Air Valve
(SAV) failed open.
R ENG STARTER Air Turbine Starter (ATS) is not TO, LDG
FAIL ON disengaging or the right Starter Air Valve
(SAV) failed open.
L REVERSER FAIL Left thrust reverser failed or not TO
available. Icon only shown if thrust
reversers have been commanded.
R REVERSER FAIL Right thrust reverser failed or not TO
available. Icon only shown if thrust
reversers have been commanded.
L REVERSER Multiple left reverser locks unlocked. TO
UNLOCK
R REVERSER Multiple right reverser locks unlocked. TO
UNLOCK
L THROTTLE FAIL Left thrust lever position not recognized. TO
R THROTTLE FAIL Right thrust lever position not TO
recognized.
THROTTLE IN Left or right thrust reverser selected in TO
REVERSE flight.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O

L ENGINE FAULT Loss of redundant or non-critical function TO, LDG
for the left engine.
R ENGINE FAULT Loss of redundant or non-critical function TO, LDG
for the right engine.
L ENG FUEL Left engine fuel filter is in impending TO, LDG
FILTER bypass or is bypassed.
R ENG FUEL Right engine fuel filter is in impending TO, LDG
FILTER bypass or is bypassed.
ENG START DELAY FADEC detects a risk of bowed rotor. TO, LDG
FADEC V2.9.5 Upon initiation of an on-ground start
command motors the engine before
allowing the start to proceed.
ENG START DELAY FADEC detects a risk of bowed rotor. TO, LDG
FADEC V2.9.6.3 The message will only be displayed for
ambient conditions that require extended
motoring. For more details, refer to
Chapter 18 – ENGINE SUBSYSTEM –
FADEC software V2.9.6.3).
L FUEL FLOW FADEC provides synthesized fuel flow TO, LDG
DEGRADED instead of measured fuel flow. Displayed
left fuel flow accuracy is degraded
R FUEL FLOW FADEC provides synthesized fuel flow TO, LDG
DEGRADED instead of measured fuel flow. Displayed
right fuel flow accuracy is degraded.
L ENG OIL LO QTY Left engine oil low quantity detected. TO, LDG
R ENG OIL LO QTY Right engine oil low quantity detected. TO, LDG
L ENG PCE DOOR Left Precooler Exhaust (PCE) door TO, LDG
OPEN commanded open (due to precooler
overtemperature condition).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

POWER PLANT

R ENG PCE DOOR Right Precooler Exhaust (PCE) door TO, LDG
OPEN commanded open (due to precooler
overtemperature condition).
L ENG STARTER Left starter usage does not fulfill the duty TO, LDG
OVHT cycle criteria: 30 minutes cool down time
for 4 minutes (low N2) or 30 seconds
(high N2).
R ENG STARTER Right starter usage does not fulfill the TO, LDG
OVHT duty cycle criteria: 30 minutes cool down
time for 4 minutes (low N2) or 30
seconds (high N2).
D. Status messages

APR DISARM Automatic Power Reserve (APR) is None
disarmed in the Flight Management
System (FMS) and derated takeoff is
being used.
ENG CONT At least one FADEC receives request None
IGNITION ON from flight deck switch to have
continuous ignition.
L COWL A/ICE ON Left cowl anti−ice manually selected ON. None
R COWL A/ICE ON Right cowl anti−ice manually selected None
ON.
L−R COWL A/ICE Left and right cowl anti−ice manually None
ON selected ON.
L COWL A/ICE OFF Left cowl anti−ice manually selected None
OFF.
R COWL A/ICE OFF Right cowl anti−ice manually selected None
OFF.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

POWER PLANT
O

L−R COWL A/ICE Left and right cowl anti−ice manually None
OFF selected OFF.
L ENG SHUTDOWN In-flight pilot commanded engine shut- None
down (left engine run switch to OFF).
R ENG SHUTDOWN In-flight pilot commanded engine shut- None
down (right engine run switch to OFF).
L REVERSER Left thrust reverser manually inhibited, None
INHIBIT as per maintenance procedure.
R REVERSER Right thrust reverser manually inhibited, None
INHIBIT as per maintenance procedure.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ELECTRONIC CHECKLIST
Electronic checklist (ECL)
O
ELECTRONIC CHECKLIST (ECL)

A. Overview
The Electronic Checklist (ECL) is displayed on the Multifunction Windows
(MFWs) and is designed to reduce the flight crew workload. It gives
access to the normal and non−normal procedures and checklists that are
also available in the Electronic Flight Bag (EFB), iPad, or paper formats.
The ECL, AFM, FCOM and QRH share the same content, with different
formats.
The ECL is an interactive display with automatically sensed or manually
selected items. The design of the ECL is efficient and helps the flight
crews in regular and awareness situations.
The ECL controls (refer to Figure 21−01−1) include the panels that
follow:
• Control Cursor Panel (CCP),
• Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP), and
• Control Tuning panel (CTP).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

O Electronic checklist (ECL)
ECL − Controls
Figure 21−01−1
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
This document uses the action select or press to describe the

manipulation of controls.
Select is used when it is necessary to move, turn, or choose the controls
that follow:
• Hard switches,
• Levers,
• Control cursor line items, and
• Soft tile switches (as shown in the ECL).
Press is used when it is necessary to put pressure on hard switches.
The ECL does not open automatically. To select the ECL, the flight crew
has to do one of the three procedures that follow:
• Pressing the CHKL switch on the left CTP displays the ECL on DU 2,
and pressing the CHKL switch on the right CTP displays it on DU 3.
The left (L) and right (R) INBD DSPL switches on the CTP are used
to select in which DU partition the format will be displayed.
• Pressing the CHKL switch on the left MKP displays the ECL page on
the left DU 5 partition. Pressing the CHKL switch on the right MKP
displays it on the right DU 5 partition.
• The MENU switch on the CCP can be used as a backup to select the
ECL page.
Two ECL pages can be displayed on the MFWs, and they are
synchronized.
When the aircraft is on battery power, the ECL is available on DU 2 only.
When the aircraft is fully powered, the ECL is available on DU 2, DU 3,
and DU 5.
To navigate within the ECL, the cursor is used to position the focus
indicator (cyan box). The selection is done with one of the switches that
• The left and right SELECT switches on the CCP,
• The ENTER switch on the MKP, and
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

• The inside of the DSK switch (PUSH ENTER).

The ENTER switch allows the flight crew to acknowledge the checklist
items, with the exception of the sensed items.
ECL − Navigation controls

Figure 21−01−2
The ECL has a menu bar (refer to Figure 21−01−3), which
includes the soft tile switches that follow:
• SUMMARY,
• NORMAL,
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
• NON−NORMAL,
• PROC (procedure), and
• FCTN (function).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ECL − Menu bar

Figure 21−01−3
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
The part number of the ECL database is shown on the bottom of the
SUMMARY page, until it is replaced with a COMPLETE, STARTED,
LIMITATIONS, or COMPLETE W/DFRD status.
NOTE
When an ECL database error is detected, it prevents
the user from accessing the ECL content by
annunciating the CHECKLIST NOT AVAILABLE
message.
B. SUMMARY page
The SUMMARY page is the ECL default page. It will be displayed when
any of the CHKL switches are pressed. The summary page is refreshed
automatically, and updates automatically depending on the status of
procedures and checklists.
The SUMMARY page is divided into 2 sections, an upper and a lower
sections.
The upper section includes the normal checklist (refer to
Figure 21−01−4). It displays the STARTED and COMPLETED
checklists based on the current phase of flight (on ground prior to takeoff,
in flight, and on ground after landing) determined by the
Weight-Off-Wheels (WOFFW). On ground, the ECL only displays all
ground related normal checklists. When a checklist is STARTED or
COMPLETED, it is separated by a white dotted line in between the white
title and the checklist status. When the checklist is not started, the dotted
line will be hidden.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

SUMMARY Page − ECL Upper Section

Figure 21−01−4
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
The lower section includes the active and the history subsections. Refer
The active subsection displays:
• The non-normal warning (red) and caution (amber) checklists and
procedures based on triggered EICAS messages,
• The procedures selected by the flight crew (not EICAS related), and
• The follow-on checklists.
The history section displays:

• The non-normal COMPLETE, COMPLETE W/DFRD (with deferred)
and/or the OVERRIDDEN checklists/procedures, and
• The associated carried limitations (if any) at the bottom of the page.
When the soft switch SUMMARY tile is selected, the cursor is positioned
on the top started or non-started checklist.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

SUMMARY Page − ECL Lower Section

Figure 21−01−5
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
A priority pointer is displayed on the left side of the checklist that has the
highest priority. When this checklist is completed, the priority pointer
moves to the next priority checklist. The priory pointer is advisory only
and doesn’t show a priority for the normal checklists and the non-EICAS
procedures.
C. NORMAL tile
The NORMAL page displays the normal procedure index (refer to
Figure 21−01−6). The normal procedures are associated with one
of the phases of flight that follow:
• Before flight (pre-flight),
• In flight (in-flight), and
• After flight (post flight).
The status of the procedure displays next to each started and/or
completed procedure.
The user-defined procedures, if any, are grouped below the
SUPPLEMENTARY title. They are displayed after the normal procedure
index. It also contains the limitations, if any, at the bottom of the page.
The NORMAL page also contains the limitations, if any, at the bottom of
the page.
Any checklist on the NORMAL page can be selected, regardless of the
phase of flight.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

ECL − NORMAL page

Figure 21−01−6
D. NON-NORMAL tile
The NON−NORMAL page displays the list of systems that contain
checklists with associated EICAS messages and the non EICAS related
procedures. The system list is organized in alphabetical order. Clicking
on a system title displays the corresponding subsystem titles (refer to
Figure 21−01−7).
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
ECL − NON−NORMAL page

Figure 21−01−7
Clicking on a subsystem title displays the list of associated non-normal
procedures. If the system does not contain any subsystems, it will display
the system-associated non-normal checklist.
The non-normal checklists are grouped by EICAS message priority:
• WARNING associated EICAS messages (refer to
Figure 21−01−8), and
• CAUTION associated EICAS messages (refer to
Figure 21−01−9).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

NON−NORMAL page − Warning checklist

Figure 21−01−8
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
SYSTEM
SUB−SYSTEM
CHECKLIST
NON−NORMAL page − Caution checklist

Figure 21−01−9
The categories are separated by a gray line.
The NON-NORMAL page can also display the limitations, if any, at the
bottom of the page.
The non-normal procedures are displayed when the corresponding
EICAS message is triggered on the EICAS page. The flight crew can
also display a specific procedure by clicking on it.
Any checklist can be selected and used, regardless of the phase of the
flight.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

E. PROC tile
The PROC page displays the list of procedures not associated with an
EICAS message and their related status (refer to Figure 21−01−10).
It contains two lists separated by a gray line. The first list includes the
titles of the priority procedures. The second list includes the other
non-normal procedures.
Clicking on a procedure title displays the associated procedure. When
selected, the procedure checklist displays, regardless of the phase of
flight.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
ECL − PROC page

Figure 21−01−10
F. FCTN tile
The FCTN (function) tile displays a drop-down menu (refer to
Figure 21−01−11) to reset or override a checklist with the selections
that follow:
• RESET CHKL: Resets the checked items and displays the first page
of the checklist.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

• RESET NORMALS (in flight only): Resets all normal checklists when
the SUMMARY page is selected. This function cannot be applied on
non-normal checklist or procedure.
• RESET ALL (on ground only): Removes the checklists or procedures
from the summary page if the EICAS message is not triggered.
• OVERRIDE ITEM: Allows the pilot to override a checklist item (when
item cannot be performed or sensing is not working).
• OVERRIDE CHKL: Allows the pilot to override a started or
non-started checklist.
NOTE
All checklists are auto-reset on power up.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

O
ECL − FCTN drop−down menu

Figure 21−01−11
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

Electronic checklist − Description and O
operation
ECL ITEMS
Each checklist includes items that must be actioned for the checklist to be
completed. The checklist items are:
• Open item,
• Sensed item,
• Conditional item,
• Limitation item,
• Notification item,
• Deferred item,
• Follow-on item,
• Timed item,
• Free text item, and
• Override item.
A. Open item
An action item includes a challenge text and a response text.
The open items include an open white checkbox that is manually
selected. When selected a green check displays in the checkbox. The
items are displayed in green and the cursor and the focus indicator
(white box) are automatically positioned on the next checklist item. Refer
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

O Electronic checklist − Description and
operation
CHECKED
OPEN ITEM
OPEN ITEM
Open items
Figure 21−02−1
If a previously checked item is un-checked, the checkbox and the item
are changed from green to white.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
B. Sensed item
A sensed item is an item associated with a system status, a switch
position, or a control position sensed by the ECL.
The sensed item checkboxes are filled-in gray. When the item control is
at the position requested by the sensed checklist item, a green check
displays in the checkbox. The checklist item displays in green and the
cursor and the focus indicator automatically move to the next checklist
item. Refer to Figure 21−02−2.
CHECKED
SENSED ITEM
SENSED ITEM
Sensed items
Figure 21−02−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
C. Conditional item
A conditional item has a question text, and two possible answers (YES or
NO) (refer to Figure 21−02−3). The question is about operational
conditions. When a selection is made, the cursor and focus indicator
automatically move to the appropriate checklist item for the selection.
The checklist items not required display in gray and are not considered.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
Conditional item
Figure 21−02−3
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
It is possible to change the answer of the condition item. The checklist

items related to this new selection will display.
D. Limitation item
A limitation item contains the associated limitations. These are open
checklist items used to define a limitation. When the limitation item is
selected, it displays in green on the checklist. It is displayed in white at
the lower section of the SUMMARY page (LIMITATIONS) only if the
limitation items are checked and the checklist status is COMPLETE or
COMPLETE W/DFRD (complete with deferred). Refer to
Figure 21−02−4.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
Limitation Item
Figure 21−02−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
E. Notification item
The ECL displays three types of checklist notifications:
• WARNING (surrounded by a red box),
• CAUTION (surrounded by an amber box), and
• NOTE (white text only).
A note contains additional text to provide detailed information to the pilot.
It must be acknowledged by the pilot.
An example of WARNING and CAUTION notification items are shown in
Figure 21−02−5.
An example of NOTE notification item is shown in Figure 21−02−6.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
Warning and Caution Notification Items − Not Selected

Figure 21−02−5
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
Note Notification Item − Not Selected

Figure 21−02−6
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
When the checkbox is selected, the checkmark and that notification

display in green (refer to Figure 21−02−7).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
Notification Item − Selected

Figure 21−02−7
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
F. Deferred item
A deferred item is an action item that can be accomplished in a later
phase of flight.
When non-normal checklists include items to be added to a later
checklist, DEFERRED TO (checklist name) displays in white, followed by
the items to be deferred in gray.
When the checklist is complete, the deferred items are automatically
included in the appropriate checklist, and the COMPLETE W/DFRD soft
switch displays at the bottom of the page (refer to
Figure 21−02−8).
At the appropriate place in the checklist, DEFERRED FROM (non-normal
checklist name) displays followed by the deferred items.
NOTE
When the source procedure or checklist is reset, the
deferred items are removed from the checklist.
The DEFERRED ITEMS must be selected to complete the checklist.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
Checklist deferred
Figure 21−02−8
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
G. Follow-on item
A follow-on item is an action item used to activate a procedure that the
pilot will have to do later.
When another checklist or procedure is required at the completion of a
non-normal checklist or procedure, the follow-on checklist or procedure is
displayed on the SUMMARY page, when the non-normal checklist is
completed. Refer to Figure 21−02−9 for an example of follow-on
Emergency descent procedure after a CABIN ALT non-normal checklist.
When the Emergency descent shown in the CABIN ALT checklist will be
selected (and displayed in green), the status of the CABIN ALT checklist
will changed from STARTED to COMPLETE status. Then, when the
COMPLETE soft tile switch is selected, the history subsection of the
SUMMARY page will display the completed CABIN ALT checklist below
the follow-on Emergency descent non-normal procedure.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
Follow−on item
Figure 21−02−9
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
Also, when the follow-on checklist is COMPLETE, the procedure title is

shown in green in the NON-NORMAL page (refer to
Figure 21−02−10).
NON−NORMAL page − Follow−on item

Figure 21−02−10
H. Timed item
A timed item is an action item that has a defined time limit for completion.
The ECL timer visual indication is displayed in reverse video with a white
background and numbers in black. It is aligned with the right edge of the
format (below the FCTN tile) and displays the time in minutes and
seconds with two digits for each (00:00). The minutes portion of the
visual indication is removed when the remaining time is less than one
minute. Refer to Figure 21−02−11.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
Timed item
Figure 21−02−11
I. Free text item

A free text gives quick information to the pilot. It does not have to be
acknowledged.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
J. Override item
If a checklist item cannot be actioned, or if the sensing has failed, the
item can be overridden so that the checklist can be completed.
When the item is in the focus indicator, selecting OVERRIDE ITEM in the
FCTN tile drop-down menu overrides the item, and positions the focus
indicator and the cursor to the next item. The overridden item is
displayed in gray with a checkmark. Refer to Figure 21−02−12.
Override item
Figure 21−02−12
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
ECL – OPERATION
The normal procedures displayed are dependent on the status of the aircraft
(WOW/WOFFW). The non-normal procedure associated with an EICAS
message will be displayed when that EICAS message is triggered. The
procedures not associated with an EICAS message must be selected by the
flight crew. Once completed or overridden, the procedures are displayed in
the history section.
The flight crew uses the cursor from the CCP and the keys on the MKP to
interact with the ECL.
During an ECL procedure, the pilots interact with many items. An active item
is displayed in white. When the checkbox is selected, the checkmark appears
in the checkbox, and the item becomes green (text and checkmark). A
sensed item becomes green and the checkmark appears when the
corresponding input is sensed (switch is selected). A disabled item is
displayed in gray.
Notes, warnings, cautions and advisory items must be acknowledged by the
flight crew.
Figure 21−02−13 shows a non-normal checklist.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
ECL − NON−NORMAL checklist

Figure 21−02−13
When the checklist is opened, the position of the cursor and the focus
indicator are displayed on the first unchecked item and moved to the next
one when the first one is selected.
The cursor and the focus indicator can be manually moved to skip an open
item, but will have to be done to complete the checklist. Refer to
Figure 21−02−14.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
Skipped Item
Figure 21−02−14
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
When the first open item (non-sensed) is selected, the status STARTED is
displayed at the bottom of the page.
When all the items from the checklist are selected, the status STARTED
change for COMPLETED and the cursor moves on it. Then the COMPLETE
soft switch is selected and the SUMMARY page is displayed with the status
of the checklist. The position of the cursor and the focus indicator is
displayed on the next checklist that is not COMPLETED. Refer to
Figure 21−02−15.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
Before start Before start
Takeoff briefing..................................Complete
APU and/or external power...........................As
required
PAX SIGNS............................................... ..ON
Doors....................................Closed and locked
BEACON......................................................ON
PARK BRAKE...................................As required
Power−on
Preflight
Before start..................................COMPLETED
Before take off
Checklist Operation
Figure 21−02−15
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
If the SUMMARY soft tile switch is selected before the checklist is completed,
the checklist status displays STARTED. Selecting the checklist again opens
the checklist with the cursor and focus indicator positioned over the first open
item. Refer to Figure 21−02−16.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
STARTED Checklist
Figure 21−02−16
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
A. Checklist override
If needed, any started (not completed) displayed checklist can be
overridden by selecting OVERRIDE CHKL in the FCTN drop-down
menu.
When the checklist is overridden, all the checklist items display in gray.
OVERRIDDEN displays at the end of the checklist in the SUMMARY
page (refer to Figure 21−02−17) and in the NORMAL,
NON-NORMAL, or PROC page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
Checklist override
Figure 21−02−17
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
B. Checklist follow-on
A checklist follow-on is displayed when another checklist or procedure is
required at the completion of a non-normal checklist or procedure. The
follow-on checklist or procedure will be displayed on the SUMMARY
page, when the non-normal checklist is completed. Refer to
Figure 21−02−18
Checklist Follow−on
Figure 21−02−18
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
C. Checklist timer
When a checklist item that has a time restriction is selected, a timer with
the restriction time is automatically displayed below the FCTN tile. The
timer countdown starts when the checklist item is the next item. The
timer is removed when another checklist item is selected.
The ECL can only run one checklist timer at a time. If a second timed
action item is started in the same checklist, it overrides the first timer
NOTE
The timer is advisory only. It does not prevent the flight
crew from executing any part of the checklist.
Checklist timer
Figure 21−02−19
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
D. Page scrolling
A scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the page when all the items
or procedures cannot be displayed on one page. The scroll down is
automatic when all the items or procedures of the page are selected.
When all the items or procedures of one page are selected, the NEXT
PAGE soft tile switch is displayed and can be selected to have access to
the next page. Refer to Figure 21−02−20.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
Manual Page Scrolling

Figure 21−02−20
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

operation
E. ECL failure
The ECL is able to detect the database-related errors that follow:
• Mismatch between Data Module Cabinets (DMCs),
• Corrupted ECL database, or
• ECL format not compliant.
When the database-related errors are detected, the ECL is not available
and all the ECL page content is removed. Additionally, the CHECKLIST
NOT AVAILABLE message is displayed on the selected Multifunction
Window (MFW). Refer to Figure 21−02−21.
NOTE
When a database error has been detected, the ECL will
send a message to the Onboard Maintenance System
(OMS).
The AFM and the QRH can be used to complete the applicable checklist.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

operation
ECL failure
Figure 21−02−21
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

Electronic checklist − EICAS messages
O
EICAS MESSAGES
There are no EICAS messages associated to the ECL.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
O Table of contents
Figure 22−03−24 SBAS coverage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−38

Figure 22−03−25 Potential WAAS outages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−40
Figure 22−03−26 LPV lateral scale transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−41
Figure 22−03−27 LPV vertical scale transitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−42
Figure 22−03−28 Effect of temperature on LPV
approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−43
Figure 22−03−29 LPV indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−45
Figure 22−03−30 LPV approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−47
Figure 22−03−31 LPV approach identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−49
Figure 22−03−32 LPV approach identification −
ARRIVAL DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−51
Figure 22−03−33 LPV data confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−53
Figure 22−03−34 LPV failure indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−54
Figure 22−03−35 Single GNSS failure in LPV ARM
mode (Part 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−56
Figure 22−03−36 Single GNSS failure in LPV ARM
mode (Part 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−58
Figure 22−03−37 Failure indications after LPV APPR
active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−60
Figure 22−03−38 Single SBAS failure indications
during LPV approach (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−62
Figure 22−03−39 Single SBAS failure indications
during LPV approach (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−64
Figure 22−03−40 LNAV approach identification
Example (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−66
Figure 22−03−41 LNAV approach identification
Example (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22−03−68
Figure 22−03−42 LNAV/VNAV alternative approach . . . . . . . . . 22−03−69
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

General
O
FMS - OVERVIEW
There are two Flight Management Systems (FMS) installed in the aircraft.
The primary FMS functions are to:
• Compute aircraft position and velocity,
• Store flight plans (manually entered or loaded through datalink),
• Calculate takeoff and landing data, performance, and V-speeds,
• Make weight and balance calculations,
• Monitor Required Navigation Performance (RNP),
• Execute LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches,
• Integrate autothrottle operation into the vertical profile,
• Automatically tune navigation radios,
• Apply altitude temperature correction for departures, arrivals, and
approaches,
• Plan step climbs and descents, and
• Calculate Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) approaches
outside Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) coverage.
The FMS sends steering guidance to the flight director for:
• Multisensor RNAV operations,
• RNP 0.3 for approach,
• Automatic FMS to LOC capture,
• Holding patterns,
• Lateral and vertical direct to navigation,
• Parallel offset,
• Navigation to nearest airports,
• Pilot-defined waypoints and routes, and
• Alternate airport and alternate direct routing.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

O General
Each FMS individually computes and monitors position solutions and issues
a warning if there is a conflict.
The FMS controls are the quick access keys on the panels that follow (refer
to Figure 22−01−1):
• Multifunction keyboard Panel (MKP), and
The FMS information is displayed on the Multifunction Windows (MFWs).
FMS controls
Figure 22−01−1
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
FMS – INSTALLATION AND COMPONENTS

The FMS that supplies information to the side coupled to the flight director is
the master FMS. All flight plan entries are routed to the master FMS for
processing. The flight plan is updated in the master FMS, then routed to the
other FMS (slave). Refer to Figure 22−02−1.
The three FMS operating modes are:
• Single mode – Active when only one FMS is operational (e.g. MEL
dispatch).
• Synchronized mode – Active when the master and slave FMS computers
communicate with each other (cross talk).
• Split mode – Active when a fault prevents communication between the
master and slave FMS computers.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

O FMS − Description
FMS Master/Slave operation

Figure 22−02−1
FMS QUICK ACCESS KEYS

The FMS has five quick access keys on the Multifunction Keyboard Panel
(MKP) (refer to Figure 22−02−2):
MSG – Shows the MESSAGES - FMS dialog box,
ROUTE – Shows the ROUTE soft switch,
Direct To (symbol) – Shows the direct to dialog box,
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
DEP/ARR – Shows the DEPARTURES or ARRIVALS dialog box, and

FMS – Shows an FMS page.
FMS QUICK
ACCESS KEYS
(QAKs)
FMS − MKP − Quick access keys

Figure 22−02−2
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

A. MSG quick access key

The MSG quick access key on the MKP shows the MESSAGES - FMS
dialog box on the onside MFW of DU 5. Refer to Figure 22−02−3.
New messages are displayed below NEW MESSAGES. Caution
messages are displayed in amber and advisory messages are displayed
in white. After the messages have been viewed, they are displayed
below OLD MESSAGES when the dialog box is re-opened.
The dialog box closes when the DONE switch is selected.
FMS − MKP − MSG quick access key

Figure 22−02−3
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
B. ROUTE quick access key

The ROUTE quick access key on the MKP shows the FMS page with the
ROUTE soft switch and the LEGS tab selected. Refer to
Figure 22−02−4.
FMS − MKP − ROUTE quick access key

Figure 22−02−4
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

C. Direct to (symbol) quick access key

The Direct to (symbol) quick access key on the MKP shows the direct to
dialog box (refer to Figure 22−02−5). If the FMS or MAP page is
not already displayed, the LEG tab under the ROUTE soft switch is
displayed. The direct to dialog box closes when the direct to quick
access key is pushed again.
FMS − MKP − Direct to (symbol) quick access key

Figure 22−02−5
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
D. DEP/ARR quick access key

The DEP/ARR quick access key on the MKP shows the INIT tab under
the FPLN soft switch, and opens the DEPARTURES or ARRIVALS
dialog box. Refer to Figure 22−02−6.
MULTIFUNCTION KEYBOARD PANEL (MKP)
FMS − MKP − DEP/ARR quick access key

Figure 22−02−6
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

The origin airport DEPARTURES dialog box opens when the aircraft is
on the ground, or when airborne within 50 nm of the origin airport. The
ARRIVALS dialog box of the flight plan destination airport opens when
the aircraft is airborne and the distance from the origin airport is greater
than 50 nm.
E. FMS Quick Access Key (QAK) – Display

The FMS pages are displayed on the Multifunction Windows (MFWs)
when the Flight Management System (FMS) QAK is selected on the
Control Tuning Panels (CTPs) (refer to Figure 22−02−7) or
Multifunction Keyboard Panels (MKPs) (refer to Figure 22−02−8).
• When the FMS QAK on the left CTP is pushed, the FMS 1 page is
displayed on DU 2,
• When the FMS QAK on the right CTP is pushed, the FMS 2 page is
displayed on DU 3,
• When the FMS QAK on the left MKP is pushed, the FMS 1 page is
displayed on DU 5 on the left MFW, and
• When the FMS QAK on the right MKP is pushed, the FMS 2 page is
displayed on DU 5 on the right MFW.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
FMS page display − CTP − FMS Quick Access Key (QAK)

Figure 22−02−7
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

FMS page display − MKP − FMS Quick Access Key (QAK)

Figure 22−02−8
On power-up, the FMS default display is the DBASE soft switch. The
FMS quick access key selections display the default, or the last opened
page if the FMS has been previously accessed.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
F. Flight Plan Status CNCL and EXEC switches

The soft switch bar contains a drop-down menu to display the Active
(ACT) or Secondary (SEC) flight plan information.
When an active flight plan is modified, the ACT indication is replaced by
MOD. When the modification is completed, it must be executed or
canceled. Soft switches are used to either Cancel (CNCL) or Execute
(EXEC) the modified flight plan. Alternatively, the CNCL or EXEC quick
access keys on the MKP can be used. Refer to Figure 22−02−9.
ACT/SEC flight plans

Figure 22−02−9
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

The COPY TO SEC soft switch copies the active flight plan to the
secondary flight plan. When the secondary flight plan displays, the
ACTIVATE SEC copies the secondary flight plan into a Modified (MOD)
flight plan (refer to Figure 22−02−10). Selecting the EXEC soft
switch executes the Modified flight plan (MOD), making it the Active
(ACT) flight plan. The former Active flight plan is transferred into the
Secondary flight plan (ACT and SEC flight plans swap).
Modification to flight plan

Figure 22−02−10
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
FMS PAGE – DESCRIPTION

A. Overview
FMS data is divided into five groups. Each group of data is displayed
when the applicable soft switch is selected at the top of the FMS page
(refer to Figure 22−02−11). The groups are:
• DBASE (Database),
• POS (Position),
• FPLN (Flight Plan),
• PERF (Performance), and
• ROUTE (Route).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

FPLN page − INIT tab

Figure 22−02−11
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
The FMS pages, tabs, and related dialogue boxes are structured as
follows:
FMS page Related tabs Related dialogue box

STATUS PRINT
DBASE • DEF PILOT WPT

SEARCH
(Database) • PILOT WPTS
DEFAULTS None
FMS SAT DESELECT
POS IRS None

(Position) GNSS GNSS INFORMATION
VOR/DME NAVAID INHIBIT
• FPLN UPLINK
INIT • DEPARTURES
• ARRIVALS
FPLN (Flight
WIND/TEMP None
plan)
FUEL None
• CALC ETP
ETP
• NEAREST ARPTS
DEP (Departure) • NADP
CLB (Climb) None
PERF • CSC
CRZ (Cruise)
(Perform- • FUEL CALCULATOR
ance)
DES (Descent) None
• ARRIVALS
ARR
• ARRIVAL DATA
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

FMS page Related tabs Related dialogue box

• TEMP COMP
• D
• HOLD
LEGS
• FIX
• COPY TO SEC
ACT (Active)
ROUTE VIA/TO COPY TO SEC
POS REPORT None
(Position report)
FLT LOG (Flight None
log)
• D
• HOLD
SEC LEGS
• FIX
SEC • ACTIVATE SEC
(Second)
SEC VIA/TO COPY TO SEC
ROUTE
POS REPORT None
(Position report)
FLT LOG (Flight None
log)
The FMS source (FMS 1 or FMS 2) is displayed in magenta at the top

left of the page. To the right of the FMS source is a drop-down menu that
is used to select either the ACT (Active) or SEC (Secondary) flight plan.
The soft switches are ordered in a logical sequence for entering flight
plan data.
The bottom of the FMS page includes soft switches used to:
• Open dialog boxes for engine thrust settings or to access FMS
messages, and
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
• Cancel or execute modifications made to the flight plan data in the

FMS.
B. Flight plan tile drop-down menu

The flight plan drop-down menu is used to select either the active or
secondary flight plan. It displays one of three conditions.
ACT indicates that the FMS is displaying the Active flight plan. Refer to
Figure 22−02−12.
MOD indicates that the flight plan has been Modified, and the changes
must be executed or canceled using the MKP EXEC or CNCL switches.
The EXEC or CNCL soft switches may also be used. These soft switches
display:
• On the bottom menu bar of the FMS page, and
• Below the aircraft symbol if the MAP is displayed in a multifunction
window,
Canceled modifications leave the active flight plan unchanged.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

Modification to flight plan

Figure 22−02−12
SEC indicates that the FMS is displaying data for the secondary flight
plan. Refer to Figure 22−02−13.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
A Secondary (SEC) flight plan may be created at any time by selecting

SEC from the drop-down list. It is also possible to copy the Active (ACT)
flight plan to the SEC flight plan by selecting the copy to secondary
(COPY TO SEC) soft switch. Tabs related to the secondary flight plan
display with a cyan title preceded by SEC (i.e. SEC LEGS, SEC VIA/TO).
The ACTIVATE SEC soft switch replaces the COPY TO SEC soft switch
when the secondary flight plan displays. Activating the secondary flight
plan makes it the new ACT plan.
Secondary flight plan display

Figure 22−02−13
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

C. FMS – (Data base) page

The DBASE (database) page displays database information on
navigation, performance, V-speeds, weight and balance, and aircraft
information.
Databases can only be configured on the ground. Current database
information displays in green. When the database is out of date or there
is a wrong configuration, the database information displays in amber.
There are three tabs that display under the DBASE page (refer to
Figure 22−02−14):
• STATUS
• SEARCH
• DEFAULTS
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
DBASE page − STATUS tab

Figure 22−02−14
(1) STATUS Tab
The STATUS tab displays the data that follow (refer to
Figure 22−02−15):
• The aircraft variant,
• The engine variant,
• The current and alternate navigation databases with their
associated region,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

• The current databases for performance, V-speeds, and the

weight and balance displayed at the bottom of the page.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
DBASE page − STATUS tab − FIX FMS report

Figure 22−02−15
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

The ACTIVE PERIOD navigation database can only be selected

when the aircraft is on the ground. The current database displays in
green. An out of date database displays in amber.
Database selection is inhibited in flight (selection is grayed out).
(2) SEARCH Tab
The upper half of the SEARCH tab includes two data entry boxes.
The left data entry box is for airport, navaid, and waypoint searches
(refer to Figure 22−02−16). The right data entry box is for
airway data searches.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
DBASE page − ARPT (airport) entry

Figure 22−02−16
AIRPORT/NAVAID/WAYPOINT SEARCH
Entering an airport identifier in the ARPT/NAVAID/WPT data entry
box displays the data that follow:
• The name of the airport,
• The Airport Reference Point (ARP),
• The longest runway length,
• The magnetic variation,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

• The airport elevation, and

• The soft tile switches specific to that airport.
Soft tile switches relating to specific airports are:
• RUNWAYS: Available runways and associated information
• LOC: Available localizers and associated information
• TERM WPTS: Available terminal waypoints and associated
information
• TERM NDBS: Available terminal NDBs and associated
information
• GATES: Available gates and associated information
Entering a navaid into the APRT/NAVAID/WPT data entry box
displays the data that follow (refer to Figure 22−02−17):
• The name of the navaid,
• The location,
• The frequency,
• The declination,
• The elevation,
• The type of navaid,
• The Morse code identifier, and
• The DME location.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
DBASE page − SEARCH tab − NAVAID entry

Figure 22−02−17
The AIRWAY WPTS soft switch permits access to airways
associated with the entered navaid.
Entering a waypoint into the ARPT/NAVAID/WPT data entry box
displays the data that follow (refer to Figure 22−02−18):
• The location,
• The type of waypoint,
• The variation, and
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

• A soft tile switch to access airways associated with the

waypoint.
DBASE page − SEARCH tab − Waypoint entry

Figure 22−02−18
Entering an airway designator into the AIRWAY data entry box
displays the number of waypoints on that airway, the airway end
waypoints, and a list of all waypoints on that airway. Refer to
Figure 22−02−19.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
DBASE page SEARCH tab − AIRWAY

Figure 22−02−19
Two soft tile switches at the bottom of the SEARCH tab access the
pilot defined waypoints dialog boxes.
The DEF PILOT WPTS soft tile switch opens a dialog box to create
waypoints (refer to Figure 22−02−20). The PILOT WPTS soft
tile switch opens a dialog box to review or delete created
waypoints.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

DBASE page SEARCH tab − Pilot−defined waypoints

Figure 22−02−20
(3) DEFAULTS Tab
The DEFAULTS tab displays FMS default data. Data is accessed
from the SELECT drop-down list. The selections are:
• FPLN/PERF as shown in Figure 22−02−21,
• RTA SPD as shown in Figure 22−02−22, and
• FUEL MGMT as shown in Figure 22−02−23.
Modifications to the default data requires the entry of a password.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
DBASE page − DEFAULTS Tab − FPLN PERF

Figure 22−02−21
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

DBASE page − DEFAULTS Tab − RTA SPD

Figure 22−02−22
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
DBASE page − DEFAULTS Tab − FUEL MGMT

Figure 22−02−23
D. FMS – POS (Position) page

The POS (position) tile has four tabs:
• FMS
• IRS
• GNSS
• VOR/DME
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

(1) FMS Tab

The FMS tab displays aircraft position data. Certain FMS abnormal
parameters display on this page. RAIM capability and sensor status
display in the center of the page. Refer to Figure 22−02−24.
POS page − FMS tab

Figure 22−02−24
The LOAD soft tile switch is used to initialize the IRS position
(airport, gate, reference point). Once the reference position is
entered, selecting LOAD starts the IRS alignment process.
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
A satellite deselect soft tile switch opens a dialog box to inhibit the
use of specific satellites. Refer to Figure 22−02−25.
POS page − FMS Tab − SAT DESELECT

Figure 22−02−25
(2) IRS Tab
The IRS tab displays IRS position data and functional MODE (refer
to Figure 22−02−26). TIME TO NAV displays when in ALIGN
mode. If an IRS is being used for position and attitude computation,
YES displays under the USED column at the bottom of the page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

− − −
POS page − IRS tab

Figure 22−02−26
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
(3) GNSS Tab

The GNSS tab displays (refer to Figure 22−02−27):
• The GNSS positions,
• The GNSS/FMS comparisons, and
• The various satellite information.
The GNSS INFORMATION soft tile switch displays satellite
services being used.
POS page − GNSS tab − GNSS INFORMATION dialog box

Figure 22−02−27
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

(4) VOR/DME Tab

The VOR/DME tab displays the VORs and DMEs in use by the
FMS. Columns display the data that follow (refer to
Figure 22−02−28):
• The identifications,
• The frequencies, and
• The relative bearings and distances.
POS page − VOR/DME tab

Figure 22−02−28
Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
Navaids are inhibited by selecting the NAVAID INHIBIT soft tile

switch. The DME/DME or VOR/DME availability can be modified,
but the default is set to use both.
E. FMS – FLPN (Flight Plan) page

The FPLN (Flight Plan) page has four tabs:
• INIT (Initialization)
• WIND/TEMP
• FUEL
• ETP (Equal Time Points)
(1) INIT Tab
The INIT tab is used to initialize flight plans in the FMS. Three soft
tile switches are used for data entry (refer to
Figure 22−02−29):
• FPLN UPLINK,
• DEPARTURES, and
• ARRIVALS.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

FPLN page − INIT tab

Figure 22−02−29
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
FMS flight plan data can be uploaded using the FPLN UPLINK soft
tile switch (refer to Figure 22−02−30). Route information is
entered in the data entry boxes of the dialog box.
FPLN page − INIT tab − FPLN UPLINK dialog box

Figure 22−02−30
Selecting SEND in the dialog box uploads the requested flight plan.
A status message displays below the FPLN UPLINK soft tile switch.
Flight plans may be manually entered on the INIT tab if the uplink
feature is not active.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

The DEST (Destination) data entry box on the FPLN−INIT page

shows the defined destination airport in the flight plan, which is
required to define the arrival and approach procedures in support of
the Lateral and Vertical Navigation functions and also to enable the
time and fuel performance predictions for the arrival phase. Refer to
Figure 22−02−31.
If the DEST airport is changed during an active flight, then any
arrival and approach procedure loaded in the flight plan will be
deleted and the ARRIVAL performance data will be cleared.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
FPLN page − DEST

Figure 22−02−31
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

DEPARTURE and ARRIVAL dialog boxes display when the

corresponding soft tile switch is selected. Refer to
Figure 22−02−32.
FPLN page − INIT tab − DEPARTURES and ARRIVALS dialog boxes

Figure 22−02−32
Transitions displayed are based on the flight plan route. The VIEW
ALL soft tile switch in each dialog box displays all arrival or
departure transitions for the selected airport in a separate dialog
box.
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
(2) WIND/TEMP Tab

The WIND/TEMP tab is used to enter wind and temperature
information (refer to Figure 22−02−33). The entered data
improves FMS performance prediction accuracy. Selecting the
FPLN WIND REQ automates data entry if the function is active.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

FPLN page − WIND/TEMP tab

Figure 22−02−33
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
All flight plan waypoints are listed. ALT displays in feet AGL, unless
preceded by F or FL, which denote flight levels.
(3) FUEL Tab
The FUEL tab is used to enter fuel data. The FMS calculates
enroute and arrival fuel parameters.
Selecting the FUEL LOAD REQ soft tile switch activates an uplink
request for fuel load. Refer to Figure 22−02−34.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

FPLN page − FUEL tab

Figure 22−02−34
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
The FMS FOB MODE drop-down list has two selections:

• CALC determines the remaining fuel quantity, based on the
initial fuel quantity and calculated fuel used, as measured by
the engine fuel flow sensors.
• SENSED determines the remaining fuel quantity based on fuel
tank quantity sensors.
CALC is the default selection. Failure of a fuel flow sensor requires
the selection of SENSED.
The RESERVE/CONTINGENCY fuel can be entered as a quantity
or a percentage. The FINAL fuel reflects the time for holding that is
entered on the DBASE DEFAULTS tab FUEL MGMT drop-down
list.
BLOCK fuel is entered in the BLOCK data entry box. The FMS
calculates and displays enroute and destination fuel quantities in
the data fields below. During preflight planning, pilots can
manipulate the BLOCK data to determine minimum flight plan fuel
requirements. At the bottom of the page, data displays for the
destination and alternate airports. Distance and time to go, as well
as fuel required for both is constantly updated during the flight.
An amber FUEL REQD message displays in the TRIP, DEST TO
ALTN, FINAL, or EXTRA data fields when flight plan fuel
requirements are not met. An amber MSG soft tile switch also
displays in the menu bar at the bottom of the page. The FMS MSG
will be either CHECK FUEL AT DEST or CHECK FUEL AT ALTN.
At a high level, the FMS is constantly running an algorithm that
blends current (measured) data with predicted data pulled from the
PERF database of the FMS. Over the next 400 nm, the FMS begins
with 100% measured data at present position (current altitude,
groundspeed, fuel flow, etc.) and transitions to 100% predicted data
at 400 nm in front of the aircraft (same parameters). Beyond 400
nm, the data will be 100% predicted data, and as with any predicted
data, can be modified by wind input to the FMS. The measured
data at present position already takes into account the current
winds as that factors in the groundspeed.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

Fuel insufficient for final is shown in Figure 22−02−35.

Fuel insufficient for final and alternate below reserve value is shown
in Figure 22−02−36.
Fuel insufficient for final and alternate is shown on
Figure 22−02−37.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
FUEL INSUFFICIENT
FOR FINAL
FPLN page − FUEL tab − Fuel sufficient for destination and ALTN but fuel
required for FINAL
Figure 22−02−35
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

FUEL INSUFFICIENT FOR

FINAL AND ALTERNATE
BELOW RESERVE VALUE
FPLN page − FUEL tab − Fuel sufficient for destination and ALTN but fuel
required for FINAL and CHECK FUEL AT messages displayed (ALTN below
reserve limit)
Figure 22−02−36
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
FUEL INSUFFICIENT FOR

FINAL AND ALTERNATE
FPLN page − FUEL tab − Fuel sufficient for destination but fuel required for
FINAL and ALTN
Figure 22−02−37
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

(4) ETP Tab

The Equal Time Point (ETP) tab allows selection of the Nearest
Airports function. Selecting the NEAREST ARPTS... soft tile switch
opens a dialog box to display the closest suitable airports that meet
or exceed the MIN RWY LENGTH with their associated information.
For each airport, the dialog box shows the bearing and distance to
the airport (BRG/DIST), the Time To Go (TTG), the fuel remaining
at the destination and information on the longest runway at the
airport.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
FPLN page − ETP tab

Figure 22−02−38
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

F. FMS – PERF (performance) page

The PERF (Performance) page has five tabs:
• DEP: Departure performance settings,
• CLB: Climb performance settings,
• CRZ: Cruise performance settings and fuel calculator,
• DES: Descent performance settings, and
• ARR: Arrival performance settings.
(1) DEP Tab
The Departure (DEP) tab page (refer to Figure 22−02−39) is
divided into three sections:
• The top section displays the origin, runway, SID, and transition
for the SID. A TO THRUST drop down list opens a takeoff
performance dialog box.
• The middle section is a performance data entry section for
departure. The data entry boxes have obvious entry
requirements. Selecting SET VSPEEDS displays the V−speeds
on the PFD. If the FMS is inoperative, the speeds may be
entered using the AVIO tab on the AVIONIC synoptic page.
Selecting VSPEEDS REQ uploads V−speeds and is an
operator option. The BLEED source drop−down lists display
APU, ENG, and OFF options to be selected by the flight crew.
The WING ANTI−ICE and COWL ANTI−ICE drop−down lists
display ON, and OFF options to be selected by the flight crew.
The APR ARM check box defaults to checked whenever a
derated takeoff is selected (TO−1, TO−2, or TO−3). The check
box is grayed if TO (no derate) is selected.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
• The bottom section of the DEP tab is the departure profile,

which can be used for noise abatement departure procedures
(NADP). It displays the NADP soft switch and the procedure
being used, as well as the associated altitudes for thrust and
speed adjustments. The DEP PROFILE function has three
possible selections:
• STANDARD − In this departure profile, the acceleration
defaults to 1500 ft AAE. The thrust reduction occurs when
the slats/flaps are retracted. This is the default selection at
aircraft power-up or when a new flight plan is entered.
• NADP CLOSE-IN − In this departure profile, the thrust
reduction altitude (THR RED) is lower than the acceleration
altitude (ACCEL). The difference between the ACCEL and
THR RED altitudes must be 300 ft or more, otherwise an
amber INVALID ENTRY message will be displayed.
• NADP — DISTANT − In this departure profile, the
acceleration altitude (ACCEL) is lower than the thrust
reduction altitude (THR RED). The difference between the
ACCEL and THR RED altitudes must be 300 ft or more,
otherwise an amber INVALID ENTRY message will be
displayed.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

PERF page − DEP tab

Figure 22−02−39
NOTE
When TO THRUST is selected or a FLEX value in
entered, an amber THRUST MODE REQ FAIL
message will be displayed if the active thrust mode
reported by the FADEC does not change to match the
selected mode.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
(2) CLB Tab

The Climb (CLB) tab page (refer to Figure 22−02−40) displays:
• A drop-down list for SPD STRATEGY that includes ECON or
SEL (Selected),
• The data input boxes for Speed and Altitude Limit (SPD/ALT
LIMIT) and transition altitude (TRANS ALT),
• The cruise, optimum, and maximum altitudes are displayed
along with current speed strategy, maximum angle, and
maximum rate speeds with the current thrust selection, and
• The active flight phase and the next targets are displayed on
the bottom half of the page.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

PERF page − CLB tab

Figure 22−02−40
(3) CRZ Tab
The Cruise (CRZ) tab page (refer to Figure 22−02−41)
displays the cruise, optimum, maximum, and alternate altitude with
the speed strategy (SELECTED). FMS assigned ACTIVE TGT SPD
and ACTIVE TGT ALT display in magenta. NEXT TGT SPD defines
the top of climb and the subsequent flight phases, including, the
next target, top of descent, and the descent profile information.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
PERF page − CRZ tab

Figure 22−02−41
Two soft switches display the Constant Speed Cruise segment
(CSC), and a FUEL CALCULATOR.... The CSC... soft switch opens
a dialog box that allows data entry for entry and exit points and the
speed to be flown in between these points. This data can also be
entered on the LEGS tab of the ROUTE page. Refer to
Figure 22−02−42.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

PERF page − CRZ tab − CSC dialog box

Figure 22−02−42
Selecting the FUEL CALCULATOR... soft switch at the bottom of
the CRZ page displays a dialog box that is used to calculate and
view fuel requirements, from present or entered position to a
specified destination. Calculations are based on current fuel flow by
default, but the value may be overridden. Current ground speed
displays by default, but also may be overridden. FUEL REQ
indicates the required fuel between the entered FROM and TO
waypoints. Refer to Figure 22−02−43.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
PERF page − CRZ tab − FUEL CALCULATOR dialog box

Figure 22−02−43
(4) DES Tab
The Descent (DES) tab page (refer to Figure 22−02−44)
displays active phase of flight information and speed strategy. The
data entry boxes are for speed/altitude limit and the transition
altitude.
The DES TYPE drop-down list allows selection for VPA (Vertical
Path Angle) descent. If VPA is selected, a data entry box displays
for desired angle.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

PERF page − DES tab

Figure 22−02−44
(5) ARR Tab
The arrival (ARR) tab page (refer to Figure 22−02−45)
displays three sections:
• The top portion of the ARR tab has soft switches that display
dialog boxes for the Arrivals for the airport (ARRIVALS...),
Arrival Data for the approach selected (ARRIVAL DATA...), and
for Temperature Compensation (TEMP COMP...).
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
• The middle section of the ARR tab displays airport performance

data for the airport in the drop-down list and data entry boxes
for landing parameters and conditions.
• The bottom section displays the go-around flap schedule, the
go-around target speed (VGA), and the single engine
go-around speed (VAC). The landing performance soft tile
switch displays a dialog box for computing landing airfield
performance requirements.
PERF page − ARR tab

Figure 22−02−45
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

The ARRIVALS... soft switch presents the scrolling

display/selections that follow (refer to Figure 22−02−46):
• The arrival transition,
• The arrival,
• The approach transition, and
• The approach.
PERF page − ARR tab − ARRIVALS dialog box

Figure 22−02−46
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
Additional soft switches permit direct access to other dialog boxes.

Any selection opens the associated arrival information dialog box
where changes can be made, if required.
The OTHER AIRPORT field is available to view airport-related
information that is not part of the flight plan.
The Runway Extension (RWY EXT) field is available only when a
Visual (VIS) approach is selected in the APPR field. Once the RWY
EXT field is active, the crew may enter a distance from the
threshold to which the runway centerline may extend.
The ARRIVAL DATA... soft tile switch opens approach information
for the selected approach. Refer to Figure 22−02−47.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

PERF page − ARR tab − ARRIVAL DATA dialog boxes

Figure 22−02−47
The Temperature Compensation (TEMP COMP...) soft tile switch
opens the TEMP COMP dialog box (refer to Figure 22−02−48)
that is used to correct procedure altitudes for cold weather. Only
database altitudes below the transition level are corrected.
Selecting TEMP COMP ON displays a copyright symbol beside the
temperature corrected altitudes on the LEGS page.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
The pre-selector can only be set to the nearest 100 feet. The flight
crew may have to adjust the altitude pre-selector for the missed
approach altitude to the nearest higher altitude when
temperature-compensated altitude values are used.
PERF page − ARR tab − TEMP COMP dialog box

Figure 22−02−48
The middle section of the ARR tab page displays the data that
follows (refer to Figure 22−02−49):
• The approach type,
• The landing data,
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

• The performance information, and

• The data entry boxes.
The AIRPORT (PERF) drop-down list defaults to the arrival airport.
The alternate airport may be selected from the drop-down list.
VREF, GO AROUND, and flap speeds are automatically calculated
for the selected airport.
Runway temperature, wind, and altimeter setting have data entry
boxes. Entering the wind speed and direction in the RWY WIND
box automatically displays the headwind (H) and crosswind (L or R)
components in the area directly to the right of the box.
If gusty wind conditions exist at the arrival airport, ½ of the gust
wind speed, up to a maximum of 10 knots, can be entered in the
box located next to VREF. Selecting the SET VSPEEDS soft switch
displays the corrected VREF, GO AROUND, and flap speeds on
the PFD.
Landing flap setting is selected from the SLAT/FLAP drop-down list.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
PERF page − ARR tab − Middle section

Figure 22−02−49
G. FMS – ROUTE page

The ROUTE tile has four tabs:
• LEGS
• VIA/TO
• POS REPORT
• FLT LOG
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

(1) LEGS Tab

The LEGS tab displays the active flight plan broken down into
sequenced waypoints, with two drop-down lists for route display
options along the top of the legs and four soft tile switches for flight
plan changes along the bottom of the display. Refer to
Figure 22−02−50.
At the bottom of the LEGS tab there is a flight plan summary for the
destination and alternate.
Display options in the first drop-down list are FUEL and UTC. Fuel
displays the estimated FOB and deviation from the original planned
fuel. UTC displays the estimated time over each waypoint in
Coordinated Universal Time.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
ROUTE page − LEGS tab

Figure 22−02−50
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

The second drop-down list has three selections (refer to

Figure 22−02−51):
• SPD/ALT VPA + RNP
• SPD/ALT VP
• AOAT WIND TAS/GS
The SPD/ALT VPA+RNP selection displays the projected speed
and altitude over a waypoint, and the required navigation
performance and vertical path angle.
The SPD/ALT VPA selection only displays during the descent and
arrival portions of the flight.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
ROUTE Page − Legs Tab − SPD/ALT VPA+RNP selection

Figure 22−02−51
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

The OAT WIND TAS/GS selection displays the estimated outside

air temperature, wind data, projected true airspeed and ground
speed over each "to" waypoint as calculated by the FMS with IRS
and ADS inputs. Refer to Figure 22−02−52.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
ROUTE page − LEGS tab − OAT WIND TAS/GS Selection

Figure 22−02−52
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

There are four soft tile switches along the bottom of the ROUTE
page LEGS tab
• COPY TO SEC
• FIX...
• HOLD...
• Direct to symbol (D with an arrow through it)
The COPY TO SEC soft key copies the active flight plan into the
secondary flight plan.
The FIX soft key opens a dialog box for the creation of the following
types of fixes:
• Abeam
• Radial crossing
• Distance crossing
• Time offset
• Along track ETA
• Latitude or longitude crossing
Selecting the HOLD soft tile switch opens a dialog box for inserting,
or modifying a holding pattern.
Selecting the Direct to soft tile switch opens a dialog box for
entering (refer to Figure 22−02−53):
• A direct route to a waypoint
• An OFFSET parallel track
• A VERTICAL flight path constraints
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
Direct to selecting offest route modification

Figure 22−02−53
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

In the direct to dialog box, any flight plan waypoint may be selected
by scrolling through the list (refer to Figure 22−02−54).
Alternatively, a waypoint identifier may be entered in the Direct to
data entry box above the TO waypoint. The course (CRS) data
entry box displays the direct course to the selected waypoint. It may
be overridden to establish an intercept course.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
Direct to selecting offest route modification

Figure 22−02−54
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

Selecting OFFSET allows the creation of a parallel track that is

offset laterally (L or R) by a defined distance from the flight plan
route. Clearing the data field cancels the offset.
Entering an altitude in the data entry box beside the VERT D
symbol displays vertical speed, flight path angle and flight phase,
such as climb or cruise.
After pressing the Direct to symbol, a modified (MOD) flight plan is
created (refer to Figure 22−02−55). The dialog box is closed
by selecting DONE. Selecting the CNCL button at the bottom of the
FMS page, or on the map, or on the MKP cancels pending flight
plan modifications. Pending modifications to the flight plan are
made using the EXEC soft tile switch either at the bottom of the
FMS page, or on the map, or on the MKP. This changes the MOD
flight plan to the Active (ACT) flight plan.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
N
3
33
30
ROUTE Page − Legs Tab − Direct to offset route modifies flight plan
Figure 22−02−55
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

Selecting the HOLD... soft tile switch displays the HOLD dialog box
(refer to Figure 22−02−56). A hold can be inserted at the
Present Position by using the PPOS soft tile switch or entering the
identifier in the FLPN WPT data box. Modifications to the hold are
made by changing the displayed data. An EXIT HOLD soft tile
switch displays at the top of the LEGS tab when flying a holding
pattern. When EXIT ARMED displays in the dialog box, the FMS
navigates to the hold fix and then exits the hold.
ROUTE Page − Legs Tab − HOLD dialog box

Figure 22−02−56
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
The FIX soft tile switch displays a box that allows the creation of up
to 10 fixes (refer to Figure 22−02−57). The INSERT AS WPT
soft tile switch allows the fix to be inserted into the flight plan.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

. .
ROUTE Page − Legs Tab − FIX dialog box

Figure 22−02−57
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
(2) VIA/TO Tab

Selecting the VIA/TO tab of the ROUTE page displays the RTE,
ORIGIN, and RWY, with two columns (refer to
Figure 22−02−58). The first column displays the route legs and
the second column displays the waypoint, SID, STAR, and
approach. DEST and ALTN data boxes display at the bottom.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

ROUTE page − VIA/TO tab

Figure 22−02−58
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
(3) POS REPORT Tab

The POS REPORT tab displays the last overflown waypoint, and
the next three waypoints in the flight plan (refer to
Figure 22−02−59). Each waypoint displays ETA, time and
distance to go, and forecast fuel overhead. Temperature and wind
display for the overflown waypoint, and the midpoint of the previous
leg.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

ROUTE page − POS REPORT tab

Figure 22−02−59
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
(4) FLT LOG Tab

The FLT LOG tab displays summary information for each waypoint
(refer to Figure 22−02−60). The takeoff and landing times
display at the bottom of the page along with average speeds and
remaining distances.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

ROUTE page − FLT LOG tab

Figure 22−02−60
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
H. FMS – THRUST soft switch

Selecting the THRUST soft switch on the menu bar at the bottom of the
page opens a dialog box with three available selections from a
drop-down list (refer to Figure 22−02−61):
• AUTO: Thrust transitions automatically when required.
• MAN: Thrust mode has to be manually selected from the drop-down
list.
• AUTO ENGINE OUT: This box displays if there is an engine failure.
In case of engine failure, the associated PERF data is automatically
selected with a flag to indicate ENG OUT. Text displays in magenta for
automatic mode and cyan for manual mode.
NEXT displays beside the next thrust mode to be used. Reference N1
value is beside each thrust mode.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

THRUST − MANUAL
THRUST − ENGINE OUT
PERF page − DEP tab − Thrust dialog box

Figure 22−02−61
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
I. FMS – MSG soft switch

The MSG soft tile switch on the menu bar at the bottom of the page is
identical in function to the MSG QAK, which displays FMS messages in a
dialog box. New white messages are alerts and new amber messages
are cautions (refer to Figure 22−02−62). Previously read messages
are listed under OLD MESSAGES. Selecting the MSG soft tile switch
opens the message dialog box. When an active message has been
viewed, DONE soft tile switch is selected, the dialog box closes, and the
MSG tile turns black.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

DBASE page − STATUS tab − Messagedialog box

Figure 22−02−62
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
J. FMS – Vertical situation display

The Vertical Situation Display (VSD) gives a graphical picture of the
vertical flight path and the vertical situation relative to terrain and runway,
which enhance situational awareness. It also gives a side view of the
vertical profile and is framed by altitude and distance references. Refer to
Figure 22−02−63.
When selected, the VSD displays the vertical path along the aircraft route
or track, from left to right, regardless of changes in direction on the flight
plan.
The VSD is displayed in the lower third of any MFW when MAP is
selected and occupies one half of a DU (single partition). When a DU is
displayed on the MAP view on both DU partitions, the VSD is displayed
on the left side partition only.
NOTE
The VSD must not be used as a terrain avoidance or
navigation tool. It is intended to be used to enhance
vertical situational awareness only.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

Vertical Situation Display (VSD)

Figure 22−02−63
(1) VSD formats
The VSD can display either the flight plan vertical path or the
Aircraft Track (A/C TRK). The vertical profile usually displays the
flight plan format but will revert automatically to A/C TRK when the
aircraft deviates from the lateral flight plan by more than the RNP
value, or the FMS is not providing vertical guidance. The VSD
window can be overlaid with lateral and vertical waypoints, altitude
targets, altitude constraints, and TAWS data.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
Terrain on the VSD can be displayed in one of two formats: flight

plan vertical path format or Aircraft Track (A/C TRK) format (refer to
Figure 22−02−64).
VIEW IN VERTICAL PATH FORMAT
VIEW IN AIRCRAFT TRACK FORMAT
VSD formats
Figure 22−02−64
(2) Amber altitude constraints
If the aircraft is unable to meet the required altitude constraints
specified in the flight plan legs, the VSD will display the constraint
altitude in amber. An UNABLE FPLN ALT message will also be
displayed on the PFD.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

If the amber constraint is displayed in the climb phase of flight, an

amber triangle will also be displayed.
(3) Vertical path format
The vertical path format is automatically displayed when the aircraft
flies along the flight plan route and the navigation source is FMS or
LOC. In this case, the flight plan vertical profile is displayed in
magenta (from aircraft position to the first waypoint in the flight
plan) and in white (subsequent waypoints). The waypoint and
altitude constraints on the VSD coincide with those of the ROUTE −
LEGS page in value and color. Refer to Figure 22−02−65.
The displayed terrain shows the terrain ahead of the aircraft along
the flight plan route when the aircraft position is within the required
Required Navigation Performance (RNP) value.
VSD − Flight plan vertical profile (green)

Figure 22−02−65
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
(4) A/C TRK path format

The aircraft track format is automatically displayed when the aircraft
is not tracking the flight plan route (refer to Figure 22−02−66).
In this case, the flight plan vertical profile is displayed in grey
(de-emphasized). The waypoint and altitude constraints coincide
with the ROUTE − LEGS page, but the color is removed.
The displayed terrain relates to the aircraft current track, ahead of
the aircraft. The profile is referenced to the aircraft track when any
one of the conditions that follow occurs:
• Active FD mode is not FMS or LOC,
• GNSS fail,
• RNP is exceeded,
• Difference between current and desired track is more than 90
degrees,
• Flight plan discontinuity is active,
• Flight plan sequence inhibit is active,
• Flight plan offset is selected, or
• There is no valid flight plan.
When in the A/C TRK path format, the A/C TRK label is displayed in
green below the distance scale.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

VSD − Flight plan vertical profile (not following profile)

Figure 22−02−66
(5) VSD symbology
The VSD includes the graphic symbology that follows (refer to
Figure 22−02−67):
• Aircraft symbol (white when normal and magenta when invalid),
• Flight plan waypoint is displayed as a vertical drop line,
• Holding patterns,
• Approach,
• Runway,
• Preselected altitude (cyan bug), and
• TAWS.
• Vertical trend predictors:
– Displayed as a green dashed line that extends from the
nose of the aircraft symbol to the 1/4 range line.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
– It is based on current vertical speed and does not show if

the vertical speed is less than 150 ft/min.
• Altitude constraint triangle displays (refer to
Figure 22−02−68):
– Upright for at or above altitude constraints.
– Inverted for at or below altitude constraints.
– Both upright and inverted for at altitude constraint.
– Green triangle for able to meet altitude constraint.
– Amber triangle for unable to meet altitude constraint (for
climb paths only) (refer to Figure 22−02−69).
– Grey triangle for de-emphasized A/C TRK.
When a hold is programed and the aircraft is at the fix entering the
hold, the VSD reverts to A/C TRK format and stays in A/C TRK until
the aircraft fully exits the hold (departing the fix).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

FLIGHT PLAN
WAYPOINT
PRE−SELECTED HOLDING
ALTITUDE PATTERNS
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL VERTICAL TREND

PREDICATORS
VSD − Symbology (part 1)

Figure 22−02−67
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
APPROACH
TRIANGLE ALTITUDE CONSTRAINT
VSD − Symbology (part 2)

Figure 22−02−68
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

PFD
MFW
UNABLE FLIGHT
PLAN ALTITUDE
VSD
VSD symbology − Amber altitude constraint

Figure 22−02−69
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
(6) VSD range

The altitude tape displays baro-corrected altitude in a fixed format
(0 to 40000 ft) when the selected range is 80 nm or greater.
At less than 80 nm, the VSD range varies with the selected map
range (refer to Figure 22−02−70) and is referenced to the flight
plan route or to the aircraft track.
A difference may exist between map range and VSD range. The
MAP range may be selected as low as 1000 feet. The minimum
range of the VSD is 10 nm.
VSD MAP RANGE (NM) VSD ALTITUDE (FT) ALTITUDE INCREMENT (FT)
10 5000 1250
20 10000 2500
40 20000 5000
80 and greater 40000 10000
VSD full range

Figure 22−02−70
(7) Altitude selection
Preselected altitude is displayed as a digital readout with a
corresponding bug and dashed altitude line adjacent to the altitude
scale (refer to Figure 22−02−71). The bug stays visible at the
upper or lower limit of the altitude tape if the preselected value is
off-scale.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

VSD − Preselected altitude

Figure 22−02−71
(8) VSD terrain overlay
The Terrain Awareness Warning System (TAWS) supplies a terrain
overlay on the VSD (refer to Figure 22−02−72). This terrain
overlay uses the same colors and elevation rules as the lateral
maps on the MFW. The NO TERRAIN message is displayed on the
VSD if the FMS and TAWS lateral references disagree (refer to
Figure 22−02−73).
NOTE
The VSD must not be used as a terrain avoidance or
navigation tool. It is intended to be used to enhance
vertical situational awareness only.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
VSD terrain overlay − With terrain

Figure 22−02−72
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

VSD terrain overlay − NO TERRAIN

Figure 22−02−73
(9) VSD corridor width
The width of the terrain corridor shown on the VSD is two times the
RNP value (1 x RNP on either side of the centerline). The terrain
profile displays the highest elevations within the width of the
corridor. Refer to Figure 22−02−74.
When the RNP value is not available from the FMS, the corridor
width is derived from the TAWS internal RNP logic. TAWS
computes RNP logic based on phase of flight.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
TERRAIN OUTSIDE
CORRIDOR WIDTH DEFINED PATH
NOT SHOWN
RNP
1 x RNP
1 x RNP
TERRAIN OUTSIDE
CORRIDOR WIDTH TERRAIN WITHIN
NOT SHOWN CORRIDOR WIDTH
DISPLAYED
VSD − Corridor width

Figure 22−02−74
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

(10) Alerted terrain on VSD

On the VSD, alerted terrain is displayed with the same color
convention used on lateral maps. However, unlike lateral maps,
alerted terrain on the VSD does not flash.
Alerted terrain is associated with a TAWS caution (refer to
Figure 22−02−75) or warning (refer to Figure 22−02−76).
When a TAWS alert is active, the area of terrain on the VSD
associated with the alert is solid and shaded with the TAWS alert
color. Water is treated like terrain for purposes of relative terrain
color and intensity. The vertical path format changes automatically
to A/C TRK format until the TAWS alert is resolved.
VSD − Terrain alert caution

Figure 22−02−75
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
VSD − Terrain alert warning

Figure 22−02−76
(11) VSD destination runway
A side view of the runway is displayed when defined in the flight
plan. When flying an ILS or an approach with vertical guidance
(RNAV/LPV), the VSD displays a white feather symbol that
represents the glideslope or glidepath. During an ILS approach, the
feather is displayed as a solid white line, while during an LPV
approach, it is displayed as a white dashed line.
During non-precision approaches, a flight path line is displayed
along the descent path to the runway.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

ILS FEATHER
LPV FEATHER
NON−PRECISION APPROACH
VSD destination runway

Figure 22−02−77
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
(12) VSD proportional runway length

The length of the runway on the VSD is proportional to the selected
range (refer to Figure 22−02−78). As the range changes the
runway increases or reduces in size, in conformity with the range.
At higher ranges, a minimum runway size is displayed.
Runways are scaled to the selected range.
RUNWAY LENGTH
VSD − Proportional runway lengths

Figure 22−02−78
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

(13) VSD phase of flight

The VSD supplies advisory vertical and lateral information for all
phases of flight:
• Takeoff − Displays vertical flight path to climb waypoint (refer to
Figure 22−02−79).
• Climb − Displays altitude constraints and top of climb (refer to
Figure 22−02−80).
• Cruise − Displays en route waypoints preselected altitude and
holds (refer to Figure 22−02−80).
• Descent − Displays top of descent, deceleration point, and
altitude constraints (refer to Figure 22−02−81).
• Approach − Displays approach path, selected runway identifier,
and missed approach path (refer to Figure 22−02−82).
TAKEOFF
VSD Phase of Flight − Takeoff

Figure 22−02−79
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
CLIMB AND CRUISE
VSD Phase of Flight − Climb and cruise

Figure 22−02−80
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

DESCENT
VSD Phase of Flight − Descent

Figure 22−02−81
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
APPROACH
VSD Phase of Flight − Approach

Figure 22−02−82
(14) VSD Controls
VSD controls are accessed when the MAP Quick Access Key
(QAK) is selected on either Control Tuning Panel (CTP) or the MAP
QAK on either Multifunction Keyboard Panel (MKP) is pushed.
The MAP QAK is also accessed when the MENU switch on the
Cursor Control Panel (CCP) is pushed.
When VSD is selected on the OVLY drop-down menu of the MAP
page, the VSD is displayed (refer to Figure 22−02−83).
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

VSD controls
Figure 22−02−83
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
(15) VSD invalid

The VSD overlay is only available in MAP mode. When PLAN is
selected, the VSD information is removed and a magenta aircraft
symbol is displayed (refer to Figure 22−02−84).
When the map range is selected below 1 NM, the selection is not
valid.
VSD INVALID
VSD invalid
Figure 22−02−84
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

FMS – GRAPHICAL FLIGHT PLANNING

FMS flight plans can be modified graphically on the MAP display. Selecting a
smart object or symbol on the MAP causes a pop-up menu to display,
allowing interactive modifications directly on the MAP display.
The Present Position (PPOS) menu can only be accessed by selecting the
aircraft symbol. The navaid/waypoint menu is accessible by selecting a
navaid/waypoint MAP symbol. Navigation information displays in the MAP
menu in three categories, separated by a gray line within the menus that
• Flight plan modifications (e.g. direct to, OFFSET, REROUTE, ....).
• Entry/modification of route parameters (e.g. AIRWAYS, FIX, HOLD, ....),
and
• Support functions (e.g. CENTER MAP, INFO, NAV AID TUNING...).
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
Graphical planning menu selections

Figure 22−02−85
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

Graphical Flight Planning (GFP) treats displayed map symbols as smart

(navigation) objects, enabling them to be selected and made part of the
current route. The three soft switches are used to terminate (END), Cancel
(CNCL) or confirm (EXEC) route changes. Refer to Figure 22−02−86.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
Graphical reroute function

Figure 22−02−86
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

Modifying a route to fly direct to a different waypoint from present position

with the GFP tool is a simple process. Selecting the waypoint displays a
menu, selecting the Direct/OFFSET menu item converts waypoints and
symbols into smart objects.
Moving the cursor over the desired smart object and selecting it with the CCP
select switch creates a new route. A white dotted track line displays the new
route (refer to Figure 22−02−87). Selecting the EXEC soft switch
modifies the routing. The dotted white track line turns magenta and the MOD
tile changes to ACT, confirming the route modification.
The GFP can use any symbol that is linked to the FMS database for route
changes.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Description
O
Graphical flight plan modification

Figure 22−02−87
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

FMS – MESSAGE
FMS operational and status messages display on one or more locations on
the HSI portion of the PFD and on the MFW MAP display. FMS message
displays provide flight deck situational awareness on changes to FMS
navigation performance, upcoming changes to FMS/AP mode, and flight plan
annunciations.
For a complete listing of FMS messages, refer to the most recent version of
the Rockwell-Collins operators guide for the Bombardier CSeries flight
management system.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
REQUIRED NAVIGATION PERFORMANCE (RNP) IN AN AREA

NAVIGATION (RNAV)
A. Conventional Navigation to Performance-Based Navigation (PBN)
For decades, to fly from departure to arrival, the aviation industry used
conventional navigation systems such as VOR/DME and NDB for
continental flights, and Inertial Navigation Systems (INS) for oceanic
flights and flights over remote areas.
Due to the constant traffic growth, and the requirements for an increase
in airspace capacity and flight efficiency, these conventional navigation
systems have reached their limits. This is because, due to their limited
range, a large quantity of NAVAIDs is necessary to cover a large area.
The maintenance of these NAVAIDs generates high costs and the limited
flexibility of the NAVAIDs offers limited flight efficiency (e.g. non-direct
routes, non-curved approaches). Refer to Figure 22−03−1.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
Conventional navigation to Performance−Based Navigation (PBN)

Figure 22−03−1
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
The new method of navigation, also referred to as Area Navigation

(RNAV), started with the introduction of the Flight Management System
(FMS) and the Inertial Reference System (IRS).
More recently, introduction of Required Navigation Performance (RNP)
has revolutionized the instrument approach, allowing the aircraft to be
flown along a precise flight path with great accuracy. Refer to
Figure 22−03−2.
Conventional ILS
RNP APCH
RNP 1
or RNAV 1 A−RNP
RNP AR
ILS vs RNAV/RNP/RNP APCH/RNP AR approaches

Figure 22−03−2
The main difference between RNAV and RNP is the requirement to
monitor the navigation performance, and to alert the flight crew of any
non-conformance to the navigation performance criteria during the
approach.
The requirement that includes On-Board Performance Monitoring and
Alerting (OBPMA) is referred to as an RNP specification. When an
aircraft does not have an OBPMA that monitors the navigation, the
navigation system is then referred to as a RNAV system.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
The aircraft is equipped with OBPMA (alert message and XTK check)
navigation performance. The FMS sets the RNP value according to
phase of flight and uses a lower RNP value, if required, according to the
procedure flown. The flight crew operates both RNAV and RNP
procedures in the same way.
B. Required Navigation Performance (RNP)

Required Navigation Performance (RNP) is RNAV capability plus the
accuracy requirement of the navigation system to meet a specified value.
RNP-capable aircraft require that a specific level of accuracy be
achieved 95% of the time, and twice this value 99.999% of the time.
Twice the RNP is called the containment limit. Refer to
Figure 22−03−3.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
Required navigation performance

Figure 22−03−3
The aircraft is RNP-capable and incorporates associated onboard
performance-monitoring, and alerting features, to notify the pilot when
the RNP for a particular phase, or segment of a flight, is not being met.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
C. RNP and RNAV terms
RNP and RNAV terms

Term Definition
RNAV Area navigation
RNAV airspace Airspace where the aircraft navigation system must
provide the accuracy specified in the governing docu-
ment.
ex: RNAV 1 and RNAV 2 / FAA AC 90-100A
RNP Required Navigation Performance
RNP is a lateral limit, or boundary, expressed in nautical
miles, in which the on-board navigation system must be
capable of staying within, and which is displayed to the
pilot in the primary field of view.
RNP airspace Airspace where the navigation system must meet the
continuity, integrity, monitoring and accuracy criteria of
the governing document. The system must also provide
crew alerting when the specified accuracy to clearances
is not met.
RNP AR Required Navigation Performance − Authorization
Required
Airspace where specific authorization is required in
addition to the technical performance capabilities of the
navigation system.
D. RNP and RNAV accuracy levels

The table shows RNP levels required for each airspace segment.
Operation in RNP designated airspace permits reduced aircraft
separation allowing increased air traffic. Refer to Figure 22−03−4.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
RNP and RNAV accuracy levels

Figure 22−03−4
E. RNP performance values

The FMS automatically sets the RNP to the following values:
• 1.00 nm at power-up
• 0.30 nm during an FMS non-precision approach
• 1.00 nm during a SID or STAR
• 1.00 nm upon entry into the terminal area
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
• 2.00 nm for enroute, or upon exit from the terminal area

(1) RNP
Figure 22−03−5 shows the RNP performance values.
RNP performance values

Figure 22−03−5
The RNP ARM message appears within 31 nm of the airport
reference point or STAR. The RNP value changes to 1.00.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
The RNP APPR message replaces RNP ARM when between the
Final Approach Course Fix (FACF) and the Final Approach Fix
(FAF). The RNP value changes to 0.30.
NOTE
The FACF is defined as a fix, on the final approach
course, located before the glidepath intercept point, or
FAF.
The RNP value flashes when the aircraft enters airspace where
RNP is decreased.
During RNP operations, the pilot must verify that the RNP scale
annunciation is appropriate for the RNP leg.
(2) RNP AR
Figure 22−03−6 shows the RNP AR performance values.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
RNP AR ARM RNP VALUE
RNP AR APPR RNP VALUE
RNP AR performance values

Figure 22−03−6
The RNP AR ARM message appears within 31 nm of the initial
approach fix. The RNP value is 1.00.
The RNP AR APPR message replaces RNP AR ARM at the start of
the initial approach segment, when RNP AR approach mode is
active. The RNP value is set to 0.3 by default unless a different
value is set in the navigation database.
The RNP value flashes when the aircraft enters airspace where
RNP is decreased.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
During RNP AR operations, the pilot must verify that the RNP scale
annunciation is appropriate for the RNP leg.
F. RNP and total system error

Navigation accuracy required for RNP is affected by several errors,
grouped together as Total System Error (TSE).
TSE includes:
• Estimated Position of Uncertainty (EPU)
• Flight Technical Error (FTE)
• Path Definition Error (PDE)
Figure 22−03−7 shows the RNP and total system accuracy.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
RNP and total system accuracy

Figure 22−03−7
EPU refers to the error attributable to the navigation system and is only
monitored by the flight crew.
FTE is directly affected by the flight technique as it is the measure of pilot
ability to maintain the aircraft on the desired track.
PDE refers to any FMS database error. The error is not under pilot
control and is generally regarded as minimal.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
G. Estimate Position of Uncertainty (EPU)

The Estimated Position of Uncertainty (EPU) is an error calculation done
by the FMS, based on sensors available for position updates. This is
shown in the LEGS tab on the ROUTE tile. Refer to
Figure 22−03−8.
Estimated Position of Uncertainty (EPU)

Figure 22−03−8
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
The potential error is represented by the circle, while the EPU is the
radius of the circle, in nautical miles. The true position of the aircraft is
somewhere within the circle. The more accurate the sensor, the smaller
the circle.
If the EPU value exceeds the value shown in the RNP field of the LEGS
tab, an NO RNP message is displayed on the PFD, and UNABLE RNP is
shown on the FMS message line. An EICAS message is also posted.
EPU messages
Figure 22−03−9
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
H. Missed approach considerations

Depending on the type of failure or signal degradation, associated
Selection of a non-SBAS or a non-GNSS approach may be necessary if
any of the amber messages that follow, which indicate excessive EPU,
are annunciated. Refer to Figure 22−03−10.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
Missed approach considerations

Figure 22−03−10
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
I. RNP AR missed approach considerations

During RNP AR operation, certain types of failure or signal degradation
will cause associated messages to appear (refer to
Figure 22−03−11). If a NO APPR message is displayed on the PFD,
a missed approach must be done.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
PFD Annunciation Line A1 FMS Message Line
ANNUNCIATIONS ASSOCIATED WITH RNP APPROACHES IN THE TERMINAL AREA
PFD Annunciation Line A1
No approach available inside 31 NM limit.
FMS Message Line
Single GNSS failed.
Any of these messages can be displayed with the NO APPR

annunciation on the PFD depending upon the type of failure.
Consult the RC FMS operators guide for further details.
RNP AR missed approach considerations

Figure 22−03−11
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
The RNP AR MA message appears when the RNP AR missed approach

waypoint is crossed during a go-around (when the MAP is sequenced)
RNP AR MA RNP VALUE
RNP AR missed approach

Figure 22−03−12
J. Flight technical errors

Flight Technical Errors (FTEs) occur when the FMS or pilot deviates from
the centerline of the FMS route segment.
Some FTEs are unavoidable due to the waypoint-to-waypoint route
design including (refer to Figure 22−03−13):
• Fly-by waypoints
• Fly-over waypoints
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
Flight technical errors

Figure 22−03−13
K. EPU considerations
EPU has a direct effect on the amount of FTE allowed. RNP minus EPU
is the allowable FTE.
The greater the EPU, the less margin available for FTE. EPU displays as
a dotted red circle as shown in Figure 22−03−14.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
RNP SCALE ON PFD
FMS MESSAGES
EPU considerations
Figure 22−03−14
The EPU value should be monitored for a deteriorating EPU in all critical
phases of flight.
Related messages are displayed in the MESSAGES – FMS box.
L. RNP deviations
The RNP deviation scale is displayed on the PFD and indicates the Flight
Technical Error (FTE). The scale includes a center mark with two dots on
either side. Refer to Figure 22−03−15.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
RNP 1.0
PFD
RNP deviations
Figure 22−03−15
The lateral deviation indicator on the HSI displays lateral deviation.
Deflection of the lateral deviation indicator represents the FTE. Full scale
deflection of the lateral deviation indicator on either side of the center
mark represents the FTE equivalent to the maximum RNP value for that
segment of flight.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
M. RNP 4.0 operation

Manual RNP entry is only permitted in remote or oceanic, RNP 4.0
airspace. Normally this setting should be RNP AUTO.
RNP 4.0 may be selected in oceanic or remote airspace on the LEGS tab
in the ROUTE tile (refer to Figure 22−03−16).
The RNP 4.0 option is not available when in terminal area or on
approach.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
RNP 4.0 operations

Figure 22−03−16
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
N. Radius-to-Fix (RF) legs

Radius-to-Fix (RF) legs are a constant radius path around a defined turn
that terminates at a fix. Encoded into the navigation database, RF legs
allow the aircraft to avoid critical areas of terrain or conflicting airspace.
RF legs improve the use of airspace and procedures to/from runways
that are otherwise limited to traditional linear flight paths, or not
previously served by an IFR procedure.
This improves accuracy by maintaining precise, positive course guidance
along the curved track, resulting in little or no RNP deviation. Refer to
Figure 22−03−17.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
Radius−Fix Turn
Radius−Fix Turn
Radius−to−fix legs
Figure 22−03−17
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
RF legs can only be performed when half−bank is not selected.

Half−bank is automatically de-selected during the approach when FMS is
the active navigation source.
O. Types of RNP approaches

(1) GNSS approaches
Types of approaches on Instrument Approach Procedures (IAPs)
identify the system requirements and required flight crew training.
Approaches that contain (GPS) or (GNSS) in their title can be made
using installed equipment without a Letter Of Authorization (LOA)
from the regulatory authorities (refer to Figure 22−03−18).
Example chart: KSEA RNAV (GPS) Rwy 34C
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
GPS / GNSS APPROACHES
GNSS instrument approach procedure identification

Figure 22−03−18
(2) RNP AR approaches
RNP AR approaches contain (RNP) in the title of the Instrument
Approach Procedures (IAPs) and clearly identify that authorization
is required (refer to Figure 22−03−19).
Operators must receive a Letter Of Authorization (LOA) from their
local authority, as well as implementation of approved crew training.
Example chart: KDCA RNAV (RNP) Rwy 19
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
RNP APPROACHES
AUTHORIZATION REQUIRED FOR RNP APPROACHES
RNP AR instrument approach procedure identification

Figure 22−03−19
APPROACH PROCEDURE WITH VERTICAL GUIDANCE (APV)

Approach Procedure with Vertical Guidance (APV) is a new approach
category. There are now three categories (refer to Figure 22−03−20):
• Precision Approach (PA),
• Non-Precision Approach (NPA), and
• APV.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
Approach procedure with vertical guidance

Figure 22−03−20
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
APV includes the two types of approach that follow:

• Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance (LPV)
The LPV requires a GNSS receiver with a Satellite Based Augmentation
System (SBAS) and offers the lowest minimums. The lateral
performance is equivalent to a localizer, having angular guidance with
increasing sensitivity as the aircraft gets closer to the runway. Vertical
guidance is derived from the SBAS GNSS receiver before the Final
Approach Fix (FAF) to the runway.
• LNAV approach with BARO-VNAV
LNAV approach with BARO-VNAV requires a GNSS receiver but not
SBAS coverage. This is an approved approach with vertical guidance
using barometric altitude inputs from the air data computer before and
after the FAF to the runway. Lateral guidance remains linear down to the
runway. Minimums are generally higher than with LPV.
LPV and LNAV approach with BARO-VNAV require a navigation system
capable of operations using RNP.
LOCALIZER PERFORMANCE WITH VERTICAL GUIDANCE (LPV)

The Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance (LPV) approach is similar
to an ILS approach, and allow a descent to 200 to 250 ft Decision Altitude
(DA).
The FMS constructs a final approach segment using inputs from GNSS with
Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS). Refer to
Figure 22−03−21.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
Localizer performance with vertical guidance

Figure 22−03−21
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
A. SBAS service providers

The required SBAS service provider must be enabled to support the LPV
approach.
If the SBAS service provider is not selected, or is not available to support
terminal or approach operations, an amber CHK SBAS SRVC PVDR
message displays on the MESSAGE FMS window, and the FMS reverts
to basic GNSS for lateral navigation. Refer to Figure 22−03−22.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
SBAS service providers − MSG

Figure 22−03−22
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
SBAS service providers can be enabled or disabled by selecting the

GNSS INFORMATION soft key from the GNSS tab of the FMS POS
page, and then selecting SERVICES. Refer to Figure 22−03−23.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
SBAS service providers − GNSS INFORMATION

Figure 22−03−23
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
On the SERVICES-GNSS 1 or 2 window, the selected SBAS service

providers display cyan with a check and the deselected ones display
white with no check. The selections can be modified using the cursor and
are retained during shutdown.
Each service provider covers a specific region.
B. SBAS coverage areas

The FMS is designed to operate with all available SBAS systems.
If the flight is planned across more than one SBAS coverage area, both
SBAS systems should be enabled.
When both SBAS systems are enabled, during transition from one SBAS
coverage area to another, the FMS automatically sequences to the next
enabled system.
The SBAS coverage areas are shown on Figure 22−03−24.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
SBAS coverage areas

Figure 22−03−24
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
C. Potential Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) outage

If Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) coverage has been
determined to be uncertain at the destination, it will be indicated on the
approach chart. A NOTAM will not be provided. Refer to
Figure 22−03−25.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
Potential WAAS outages

Figure 22−03−25
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
FAA charts present a white W on a black background shown on the

briefing strip.
Jeppesen charts will state if a potential WAAS outage exists in the
NOTES section.
During approach whenever WAAS coverage is noted to be unreliable,
aircrew should be prepared to select an alternate approach.
D. LPV lateral scale transitions

The angular lateral scaling for an LPV approach maintains a 2° horizontal
course from the FAF, to the geometric approach reference point, located
at the far end of the runway, similar to the localizer antenna position.
The geometric approach reference point is the point where the 2° angle
starts for the approach.
The lateral scale changes back from angular 2° to linear 1 nm at the
runway threshold.
Figure 22−03−26 shows the LPV lateral scale transitions.
LPV lateral scale transitions

Figure 22−03−26
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
E. LPV vertical scale transitions

In a LPV approach, the vertical path is angular, like a glideslope on an
ILS.
Prior to the FAF, the vertical scaling is linear, and maintains ±500 ft for a
full scale deflection of the vertical scale.
Shortly before reaching the FAF, the vertical scaling transitions to an
angular scaling on a 3° glideslope down to the threshold crossing height.
Figure 22−03−27 shows the LPV vertical scale transitions.
LPV vertical scale transitions

Figure 22−03−27
F. LPV approach and temperature compensation

LPV approaches use a barometrically-corrected altitude input from the air
data computer for the initial portion of the approach.
From the FAF to the MAP, vertical guidance is based on vertical position
information obtained from the GNSS. Unlike the baro-VNAV portion, the
GNSS-based portion is not affected by temperature.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
Without temperature compensation, if OAT is significantly colder than

ISA, the aircraft will need to reduce vertical rate to reach the FAF (refer
to Figure 22−03−28). But, if temperature is significantly warmer than
ISA, the aircraft will need to increase vertical rate to reach the FAF.
Temperature compensation can be used to ensure a smooth glidepath
transition. The aircraft is capable of cold temperature compensation.
NOTE
Minimums are affected by temperature.
Effect of temperature on LPV approaches

Figure 22−03−28
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
G. LPV indications
When the aircraft enters the terminal area, LPV ARM displays in the top
left corner of the HSI. The lateral and vertical deviation pointers display
on their respective deviation scale.
After the Final Approach Course Fix (FACF) and prior to FAF, the FMS
activates the approach and LPV APPR displays (refer to
Figure 22−03−29). The lateral and vertical deviation scaling
changes to angular, increasing the sensitivity as the aircraft approaches
the runway.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
VERTICAL
DEVIATION
POINTER
HORIZONTAL
DEVIATION
POINTER
LPV indications
Figure 22−03−29
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
When the vertical deviation pointer starts to move down approaching the
FAF, the FMS target altitude changes from the FAF crossing altitude to
RWY.
H. LPV approach
Upon entering the terminal area during an LPV approach, the FMS
monitors LPV approach accuracy, and sets the LPV horizontal and
vertical alert levels. LPV ARM displays on the top left corner of the HSI.
Prior to the FAF, the FMS activates the approach. LPV ARM changes to
LPV APPR.
On the FMA, VGP is captured as the aircraft approaches the FAF,
providing a vertical guidance to the runway, based on the GNSS position
with SBAS correction.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
LPV approach
Figure 22−03−30
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
I. LPV approach identification

LPV approaches are identified on the ARRIVALS window as RNV with
the runway number and may include a suffix letter, such as Y, or Z (refer
to Figure 22−03−31). The LPV approach chart is identified as RNAV
(GPS) in the United States and RNAV (GNSS) elsewhere.
The default GNSS approach is the highest charted service. In this
example, it is LPV. A green WAAS LPV message displays on the
ARRIVAL window once the approach is selected.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
LPV approach identification

Figure 22−03−31
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
On the ARRIVAL DATA window, LPV displays in white under

APPROACH MODE, and WAAS displays in white under GP MODE.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
LPV approach identification − ARRIVAL DATA

Figure 22−03−32
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
J. LPV data confirmation

The LPV approach data can be confirmed on the ARRIVAL DATA
window by comparing the following with the LPV approach chart (refer to
Figure 22−03−33):
• The approach and VNAV guidance selected
• The approach mode
• The glide path angle
• The SBAS channel
• The airport WGS-84 status
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
LPV data confirmation

Figure 22−03−33
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
K. LPV failure indications

FMS position monitoring is automatically set for each phase of flight. Any
exceedance of navigation performance sets appropriate flags and
messages on the PFD and MESSAGES FMS window (refer to
Figure 22−03−34). There is an EICAS message for LPV failure.
A LPV approach can continue after a single failure of a GNSS receiver or
loss of SBAS, if this occurs inside the Initial Approach Fix (IAF).
LPV failure indications

Figure 22−03−34
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
(1) Single GNSS failure in LPV ARM mode

If a single GNSS receiver fails when the approach is armed but not
active, the messages that follow are displayed on the failed side
only (refer to Figure 22−03−35):
• On the lower PFD:
• MSG in amber
• LPV NOT AVAILABLE in amber on the HSI
• On the MAP page:
• LPV NOT AVAILABLE amber message
• LPV NOT AVAIL caution message on EICAS
• On the MESSAGES − FMS window:
• LPV NOT AVAILABLE in amber
• LNAV AVAILABLE in white
• GNSS REVERTED in white
The opposite side remains functional with normal indications using
the remaining GNSS.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
6.2
Single GNSS failure in LPV ARM mode (Part 1)

Figure 22−03−35
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
If a single GNSS receiver is still failed when the approach becomes

active, these additional messages are displayed on the failed side PFD
• An amber LPV APPR
• A red VNAV flag above the vertical scale
The failed side no longer has vertical guidance but the opposite side
remains functional with vertical guidance indication.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
Single GNSS failure in LPV ARM mode (Part 2)

Figure 22−03−36
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
(3) Single GNSS failure with LPV APPR active

If the approach is already active when the GNSS receiver fails, a
white MSG and a GNSS REVERTED message display on the failed
side PFD (refer to Figure 22−03−37). The GNSS REVERTED
message also displays on the MESSAGES-FMS window.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
Failure indications after LPV APPR active

Figure 22−03−37
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
There are no messages, failures, or flags displayed on the

functioning side. Vertical guidance is available on both sides.
NOTE
For a complete list of FMS messages, refer to the
CS100-300 ProLine Fusion Flight Management System
(FMS) Operators Guide.
(4) Single SBAS failure during LPV approach

If a single SBAS receiver fails when the LPV approach is armed,
the messages that follow are displayed (refer to
Figure 22−03−38):
• LPV NOT AVAIL caution message on the EICAS
• Amber MSG on the failed side PFD
• Amber LPV NOT AVAILABLE on the HSI and MAP page of the
failed side
• Amber LPV NOT AVAIL on the MESSAGES - FMS window
The vertical guidance is available on both PFDs.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
PFD FAILED SIDE
MFW FAILED SIDE
Single SBAS failure indications during LPV approach (Part 1)

Figure 22−03−38
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
If a single SBAS receiver fails or is still failed when the LPV

approach is active, on the failed side only (refer to
Figure 22−03−39):
• An amber LPV APPR displays on PFD
• The vertical guidance is lost and a VNAV flag displays
• Amber LPV NOT AVAIL on the HSI and MAP page of the failed
side
On the functioning side, a white LPV APPR displays and no flags or
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
PFD FAILED SIDE
MFW FAILED SIDE
Single SBAS failure indications during LPV approach (Part 2)

Figure 22−03−39
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
LATERAL NAVIGATION (LNAV) AND VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV)

A. LNAV approach identification
In this example, the highest charted service on this Montreal (YUL)
instrument approach chart is LNAV and is identified as RNAV (GNSS)
(refer to Figure 22−03−40). BARO RNP 0.3 displays on the
ARRIVAL window.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
LNAV approach identification Example (continued)

Figure 22−03−40
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
On the ARRIVAL DATA window, RNP displays in white under

APPROACH MODE, and BARO displays in white under GP MODE (refer
to Figure 22−03−41). Vertical guidance based on barometric altitude
is shown on the glidepath indicator and is available down to the runway.
MDA minimums must be respected.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
LNAV approach identification Example (continued)

Figure 22−03−41
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
B. LNAV/VNAV alternative approach

If the SBAS correction signal is lost, a LPV approach is not possible as
indicated by an amber LPV NOT AVAILABLE message on the HSI (refer
to Figure 22−03−42). A GNSS approach mode with higher
minimums, or a go-around must be selected.
LNAV/VNAV alternative approach

Figure 22−03−42
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
If time permits, the approach mode may be changed to a LNAV/VNAV

approach with barometric guidance by selecting RNP as the approach
mode on the ARRIVAL DATA window (refer to Figure 22−03−43).
The decision altitude needs to be adjusted to the LNAV/VNAV
minimums.
/ /
LNAV/VNAV alternative approach − Continued

Figure 22−03−43
An RNP readout of 0.30 replaces ANG and RNP APPR is displayed on
the PFD. Horizontal and vertical guidance are now linear.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
C. LNAV – Lateral only alternative approach

If LNAV AVAILABLE is displayed on the MESSAGES window and time
or conditions do not permit any approach changes, the approach may be
continued as a LNAV approach.
A vertical mode (VS or FPA) has to be set, and the approach minimum
needs to be adjusted to the LNAV approach minimum.
Alternatively, a go-around may be performed.
During an approach, the indications that follow are displayed on the PFD
• An amber LPV APPR message
• A VNAV flag and vertical deviation scale without deviation pointer
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
LNAV − Lateral only alternative approach

Figure 22−03−44
D. Definition of L/V approach

L/V approach is an LNAV/VNAV approach that uses SBAS with the Wide
Area Augmentation System (WAAS) information for vertical guidance
instead of using barometric VNAV references.
Both lateral and vertical deflection scales are angular like ILS and can be
flown to the published LNAV/VNAV minima.
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Operation
O
MISSED APPROACH PROCEDURES (MAP) INN RADIUS−TO−FIX (RF)

LEGS
Performing a missed approach while in a RF leg requires special
consideration due to proximity to terrain or traffic.
Upon initiating a go-around, the AFCS lateral mode changes from APPR
FMS(x) to FMS(x), and the vertical mode from VGP to VNAV Go-Around
(VGA).
The AFCS remains in VGA mode until another vertical mode is selected, or
the first altitude constraint is captured.
Maintain the published lateral path to the MAP. Use TAWS display to assist
with terrain avoidance. Verify FMS remains as navigation source, verify
FMS(x) is active mode on FMA. Monitor vertical mode to capture the altitude
constraint. Engage the autopilot if not already engaged.
If above missed approach altitude, maintain current altitude by selecting ALT
on FCP. Continue the lateral path as shown on the approach chart (refer to
Figure 22−03−45). Contact ATC for clearance altitude.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

O FMS − Operation
Missed approach procedures in RF legs

Figure 22−03−45
Issue 013, Sep 23/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FMS − Controls and indications
O
FMS - EICAS MESSAGES

A. Warning messages
None
B. Caution messages

APPROACH NOT Shows when a Global Navigation TO
AVAIL Satellite System (GNSS) approach is
selected, the aircraft is in the arrival
terminal area, the FMS navigation mode
is not GNSS base or the SBAS service
provider is not available (for an LPV only
approach), or the GNSS accuracy is less
than required for the approach.
FMS 1 FAIL Flight Management System (FMS) 1 has TO, LDG
detected a failure.
FMS 2 FAIL FMS 2 has detected a failure. TO, LDG
FMS FUEL Shows when FMS messages CHECK TO, LDG
FUEL AT ALTN or CHECK FUEL AT
DEST or CHECK FUEL PLAN or
CHECK BLOCK FUEL is posted.
FMS OEI PERF One Engine Inoperative (OEI) perform- TO, LDG
ACTIVE ance data active and can be canceled on
the THRUST window.
FMS PERF DEP Mismatch between sensed aircraft TO, LDG
CONFIG configuration state (bleeds, ANTI-ICE
switches, SLAT/FLAP lever position) and
FMS entered configuration.
FMS PERF DEP FMS Gross Speed check has found TO, LDG
VSPEEDS Vspeeds values not entered between
minimum/maximum operational allowed
values.
BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

O FMS − Controls and indications

FMS POSITION Shows when one of the FMS messages TO, LDG
that follow is shown: INITIALIZE
POSITION or RE-ENTER SET POS or
RESET INITIAL POS.
GNSS NOT AVAIL Shows when the FMS is not using GNSS TO, LDG
position data as part of its calculations to
determine position. Shows if either of the
conditions that follow is true:
• All GNSS sensors are not available
and at least one sensor is enabled,
or
• At least one sensor is disabled and
one sensor is enabled and no
enabled sensor is available.
LPV NOT AVAIL Shows when a GNSS LPV approach is TO
selected, the aircraft is in the arrival
terminal area, and the FMS navigation
mode is not GNSS based, or the SBAS
service provider is not available, or the
GNSS accuracy is less than required for
the approach.
UNABLE RNP Shows when loss of integrity condition TO
exists. The aircraft may not be able to
maintain the required RNP accuracy
when this message shows.
None
D. Status messages
None
Issue 011, May 16/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)


Ilovepdf Merged

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ilovepdf Merged

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ilovepdf Merged

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

COCKPIT PREPARATION

➢ Master Switch…………… ON;

BEFORE START ➢ Flaps ………………….... SET;

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

➢ Landing Lights ……..………… ON; SHUTDOWN

• This aircraft is powered by two engines Pratt &

• The single-aisle A220 family is designed to look

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

➢ Single engine taxi whenever ➢ The first percentage is your

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

Max TO Wgt 70.900 kg

Max LD Wgt 60.600 kg

Seat Capacity 160 pax

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

Takeoffs over 75% may result in takeoff

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

Distance to travel on the runway before taking off:

Load Headwind 0 ft 2500 ft 5000 ft

0 853.44 m 914.4 m 1036.32m

Takeoff run calculated with static takeoff. This is the

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

Load Headwind 0 ft 2500 ft 5000 ft

0 1493.52m 1676.4 m 1767.84m

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

75% Full 138 kts Depending on the

➢ Landing flare pitch should be about 4-9˚ nose up.

➢ Personal recommendation… 5˚ is perfect

➢ Descent rate should not exceed -1000ft/min on final approach. (-

➢ Add 5kts to Vref/Landing speed in gusty conditions or in

Load Headwind 0 ft 2500 ft 5000 ft

0 1310.64m 1341.12m 1432.56m

➢ This is the distance from touchdown to wheels

➢ Landing distance calculated by touching down at

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

• Climb Profile: Above 10,000ft, pitch for 280kts/or

• For 25-100% loads, Flaps 2 was used for data.

• Takeoff Power – The first percentage is your throttle

• 10% trim was used to conduct these tests.

❖ Note: Fuel flow, thrust and other aircraft

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

• MDA (Minimum Descent Altitude_ sea);

FOR FLIGHT SIMULATION USE ONLY 11.2021

Figure 01−02−33 Outboard armrest. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01−02−44

FCOM Vol. 1 Page 01−00−5

BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 011, May 16/2019

FCOM Vol. 1 Page 01−02−1

BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 013, Sep 23/2019

Aircraft external dimensions <Metric>

Page 01−02−2 FCOM Vol. 1

Issue 010, Dec 13/2018 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

Aircraft external dimensions

FCOM Vol. 1 Page 01−02−3

BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 010, Dec 13/2018

Fuselage dimensions <Metric>

Page 01−02−4 FCOM Vol. 1

Issue 012, Jul 26/2019 BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309)

FCOM Vol. 1 Page 01−02−5

BD500−3AB48−32600−01 (309) Issue 012, Jul 26/2019

Turning angle (in degrees) with 80 degrees